—

R E L I O N ® 670 SERIES

Busbar protection REB670

Version 2.2 ANSI
Application manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 505 370-UUS
Issued: October 2017
Revision: A
Product version: 2.2.1

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic
software written/developed by: Eric Young ([email protected]) and Tim Hudson
([email protected]).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would
create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal
injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the
equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures
are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN
60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in
accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI C37.90.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction..........................................................................19
This manual............................................................................................ 19
Intended audience.................................................................................. 19
Product documentation...........................................................................20
Product documentation set................................................................20
Document revision history................................................................. 21
Related documents............................................................................22
Document symbols and conventions...................................................... 22
Symbols.............................................................................................22
Document conventions...................................................................... 23
IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping.................................................24

Section 2 Application...........................................................................35
General IED application..........................................................................35
Main protection functions........................................................................39
Back-up protection functions.................................................................. 40
Control and monitoring functions............................................................ 42
Communication.......................................................................................47
Basic IED functions.................................................................................49

Section 3 Configuration....................................................................... 51
Description of configuration REB670......................................................51
Available ACT configurations for pre-configured REB670.................51
Configuration X01..............................................................................51
Configuration X02..............................................................................52
Configuration X03..............................................................................52
Description of 3 ph package A20A.................................................... 52
Description of 3 ph package A31A.................................................... 54
Description of 1 ph package B20A.................................................... 58
Description of 1 ph package B31A.................................................... 62

Section 4 Analog inputs.......................................................................67

Introduction............................................................................................. 67
Setting guidelines................................................................................... 67
Setting of the phase reference channel.............................................67
Example........................................................................................68
Setting of current channels................................................................68

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 1

Application manual
Table of contents

Example 1.....................................................................................69
Example 2.....................................................................................69
Example 3.....................................................................................70
Examples on how to connect, configure and set CT inputs
for most commonly used CT connections.................................... 73
Example on how to connect a wye connected three-phase
CT set to the IED.......................................................................... 74
Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT
set to the IED................................................................................79
Example how to connect single-phase CT to the IED.................. 82
Relationships between setting parameter Base Current, CT
rated primary current and minimum pickup of a protection IED........ 84
Setting of voltage channels............................................................... 84
Example........................................................................................85
Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for
most commonly used VT connections..........................................85
Examples on how to connect a three phase-to-ground
connected VT to the IED.............................................................. 86
Example on how to connect a phase-to-phase connected
VT to the IED................................................................................ 88
Example on how to connect an open delta VT to the IED for
high impedance grounded or ungrounded networks.................... 90
Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for
low impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems..... 93

Section 5 Local HMI............................................................................ 97

Display.................................................................................................... 98
LEDs..................................................................................................... 101
Keypad..................................................................................................102
Local HMI functionality..........................................................................104
Protection and alarm indication....................................................... 104
Parameter management .................................................................105
Front communication....................................................................... 106

Section 6 Differential protection........................................................ 107

Busbar differential protection ............................................................... 107
Identification.................................................................................... 107
Basic applications............................................................................109
General.......................................................................................109
Meshed corner application and T-connection application.......... 109
Busbar protection applications........................................................ 109
General.......................................................................................110

2 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Differential protection..................................................................111
Check zone protection................................................................114
Switch status monitoring.............................................................116
CT connection control.................................................................120
CT disconnection for bus interconnector CT cores.................... 122
End fault protection.....................................................................127
Zone interconnection (Load transfer)......................................... 130
Tripping arrangements............................................................... 132
Mechanical lock-out function...................................................... 135
Contact reinforcement with heavy duty relays............................135
Trip circuit supervision................................................................135
Two-zone busbar arrangements......................................................136
General.......................................................................................136
Single busbar arrangements...................................................... 136
Single busbar arrangements with sectionalizer.......................... 137
Single busbar arrangements with bus-section breaker.............. 138
H-type busbar arrangements......................................................139
Double circuit breaker busbar arrangement............................... 141
Breaker-and-a-half busbar arrangements.................................. 143
Double busbar single breaker arrangement............................... 145
Double busbar arrangements with two bus-section breakers
and two bus-coupler breakers.................................................... 151
Combined busbar arrangements................................................ 152
Six-zone busbar arrangements....................................................... 155
General.......................................................................................155
Typical arrangement which can be covered............................... 155
Example engineering procedure.................................................157
Summation principle........................................................................ 163
Introduction.................................................................................163
Auxiliary summation CTs............................................................166
Possible ASCT connections for REB670....................................168
Main CT ratio mismatch correction.............................................169
Primary pick-up levels for summation type differential
protection ...................................................................................169
SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for end-connection......................172
SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for series-connection.................. 173

Section 7 Current protection..............................................................175

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps
OC4PTOC(51_67)................................................................................ 175
Identification.................................................................................... 175

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 3

Application manual
Table of contents

Application....................................................................................... 175
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 177
Settings for each step.................................................................178
Setting example..........................................................................182
Four step single phase overcurrent protection PH4SPTOC (51)..........187
Identification.................................................................................... 187
Application....................................................................................... 187
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 188
Settings for each step (x = 1-4).................................................. 189
Second harmonic restrain...........................................................191
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC
(51N/67N)............................................................................................. 197
Identification.................................................................................... 197
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 197
Common settings for all steps.................................................... 198
2nd harmonic restrain.................................................................199
Parallel transformer inrush current logic.....................................200
Switch onto fault logic.................................................................201
Settings for each step (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4)................................... 202
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC (46I2)..................................................................204
Identification.................................................................................... 204
Application....................................................................................... 204
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 206
Settings for each step ................................................................207
Common settings for all steps.................................................... 210
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR (49)...........211
Identification.................................................................................... 211
Application....................................................................................... 211
Setting guideline.............................................................................. 212
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF(50BF)...........................................215
Identification.................................................................................... 215
Application....................................................................................... 215
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 215
Breaker failure protection, single phase version CCSRBRF (50BF).... 219
Identification.................................................................................... 219
Application....................................................................................... 219
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 219
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)..............................222
Identification.................................................................................... 222

4 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Application....................................................................................... 222
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 224
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)................................228
Identification.................................................................................... 228
Application....................................................................................... 228
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 230
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC.................................................. 234
Identification.................................................................................... 234
Application....................................................................................... 235
SCB protection........................................................................... 237
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 239
Restrike detection.......................................................................241

Section 8 Voltage protection............................................................. 243

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)................................243
Identification.................................................................................... 243
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 243
Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators.........243
Disconnected equipment detection............................................ 244
Power supply quality ..................................................................244
Voltage instability mitigation....................................................... 244
Backup protection for power system faults.................................244
Settings for two step undervoltage protection............................ 244
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)................................. 246
Identification.................................................................................... 246
Application....................................................................................... 246
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 247
Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators,
reactors and transformers.......................................................... 248
Equipment protection, capacitors............................................... 248
Power supply quality...................................................................248
High impedance grounded systems........................................... 248
The following settings can be done for the two step
overvoltage protection................................................................ 248
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)...............250
Identification.................................................................................... 250
Application....................................................................................... 251
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 251
Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators,
reactors and transformersEquipment protection
for transformers.......................................................................... 251

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 5

Application manual
Table of contents

Equipment protection, capacitors............................................... 252

Power supply quality...................................................................252
High impedance grounded systems........................................... 252
Direct grounded system..............................................................253
Settings for two step residual overvoltage protection................. 254
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60)..................................... 256
Identification.................................................................................... 256
Application....................................................................................... 256
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 257
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27).................................................. 259
Identification.................................................................................... 259
Application....................................................................................... 259
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 259
Advanced users settings............................................................ 259

Section 9 Frequency protection.........................................................261

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81).............................................261
Identification.................................................................................... 261
Application....................................................................................... 261
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 262
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)...............................................262
Identification.................................................................................... 263
Application....................................................................................... 263
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 263
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC (81)........................ 264
Identification.................................................................................... 264
Application....................................................................................... 264
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 265

Section 10 Multipurpose protection..................................................... 267

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC................................ 267
Identification.................................................................................... 267
Application....................................................................................... 267
Current and voltage selection for CVGAPC function..................268
Base quantities for CVGAPC function........................................ 271
Application possibilities...............................................................271
Inadvertent generator energization.............................................272
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 273
Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection............... 273
Negative sequence overcurrent protection.................................275

6 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC

or ANSI standards...................................................................... 278
Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators
and circuit breaker head flashover protection for generators..... 280
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and
step-up transformer.................................................................... 281
Loss of excitation protection for a generator.............................. 281

Section 11 Secondary system supervision..........................................285

Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC...................................................... 285
Identification.................................................................................... 285
Application....................................................................................... 285
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 286
General.......................................................................................286
Setting of common parameters.................................................. 286
Negative sequence based.......................................................... 287
Zero sequence based.................................................................288
Delta V and delta I ..................................................................... 289
Dead line detection.....................................................................289
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60).................................................289
Identification.................................................................................... 290
Application....................................................................................... 290
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 291

Section 12 Control...............................................................................293
Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN (25)..................................................................................... 293
Identification.................................................................................... 293
Application....................................................................................... 293
Synchronizing............................................................................. 293
Synchronism check.................................................................... 295
Energizing check........................................................................ 297
Voltage selection........................................................................ 298
External fuse failure....................................................................299
Application examples.......................................................................300
Single circuit breaker with single busbar.................................... 301
Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage
selection..................................................................................... 302
Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage
selection..................................................................................... 303
Double circuit breaker.................................................................304

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 7

Application manual
Table of contents

Breaker-and-a-half......................................................................305
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 308
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation
SMBRREC (79).................................................................................... 313
Identification.................................................................................... 313
Application....................................................................................... 314
Auto reclosing operation Off and On.......................................... 318
Initiate auto reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing
cycle........................................................................................... 318
Initiate auto reclosing from circuit breaker open information...... 319
Blocking of the auto recloser...................................................... 319
Control of the auto reclosing dead time for shot 1......................319
Long trip signal........................................................................... 320
Maximum number of reclosing shots..........................................320
ARMode = 3ph, (normal setting for a three-phase shot)............ 320
ARMode = 1/2/3ph..................................................................... 321
ARMode = 1/2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the
first shot...................................................................................... 321
ARMode = 1ph+1*2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the
first shot...................................................................................... 321
ARMode = 1/2ph + 1*3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase
reclosing in the first shot.............................................................322
ARMode = 1ph + 1*2/3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase
reclosing in the first shot.............................................................322
External selection of auto reclosing mode..................................323
Auto reclosing reset timer...........................................................323
Pulsing of the circuit breaker closing command and counter..... 323
Transient fault.............................................................................324
Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal....................324
Lock-out initiation........................................................................324
Evolving fault.............................................................................. 326
Automatic continuation of the auto reclosing sequence............. 326
Thermal overload protection holding the auto recloser back......327
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 327
Configuration.............................................................................. 327
Auto recloser settings................................................................. 336
Apparatus control APC......................................................................... 341
Application....................................................................................... 341
Bay control QCBAY.................................................................... 347
Switch controller SCSWI............................................................ 348
Switches SXCBR/SXSWI........................................................... 348

8 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE

XLNPROXY................................................................................ 349
Reservation function (QCRSV and RESIN)................................352
Interaction between modules...........................................................354
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 358
Bay control (QCBAY)..................................................................358
Switch controller (SCSWI).......................................................... 358
Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI).............................................................359
Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE
XLNPROXY................................................................................ 360
Bay Reserve (QCRSV)...............................................................361
Reservation input (RESIN)......................................................... 361
Interlocking (3)...................................................................................... 361
Configuration guidelines.................................................................. 362
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)............................................ 363
Application.................................................................................. 363
Signals from bypass busbar....................................................... 363
Signals from bus-coupler............................................................364
Configuration setting...................................................................368
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3).................................. 369
Application.................................................................................. 369
Configuration.............................................................................. 369
Signals from all feeders.............................................................. 369
Signals from bus-coupler............................................................372
Configuration setting...................................................................373
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)..............................374
Application.................................................................................. 374
Signals from bus-coupler............................................................375
Configuration setting...................................................................376
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)...........................377
Application.................................................................................. 377
Signals from all feeders.............................................................. 377
Configuration setting...................................................................380
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3).................. 381
Application.................................................................................. 381
Signals in single breaker arrangement....................................... 381
Signals in double-breaker arrangement..................................... 384
Signals in breaker and a half arrangement.................................387
Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)....................... 388
Application.................................................................................. 388

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 9

Application manual
Table of contents

Signals in single breaker arrangement....................................... 389

Signals in double-breaker arrangement..................................... 393
Signals in breaker and a half arrangement.................................394
Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)............................................. 395
Application.................................................................................. 395
Configuration setting...................................................................395
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)........................ 396
Application.................................................................................. 396
Configuration setting...................................................................397
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation
SLGAPC............................................................................................... 398
Identification.................................................................................... 398
Application....................................................................................... 398
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 399
Selector mini switch VSGAPC.............................................................. 399
Identification.................................................................................... 399
Application....................................................................................... 399
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 400
Generic communication function for Double Point indication
DPGAPC...............................................................................................400
Identification.................................................................................... 401
Application....................................................................................... 401
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 402
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC...............................402
Identification.................................................................................... 402
Application....................................................................................... 402
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 402
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS................ 403
Identification.................................................................................... 403
Application....................................................................................... 403
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 403
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD.......................................... 403
Identification.................................................................................... 404
Application....................................................................................... 404
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 405

Section 13 Logic..................................................................................407
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC..................................................................407
Identification.................................................................................... 407
Application....................................................................................... 407

10 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Setting guidelines............................................................................ 407

Logic for group alarm ALMCALH..........................................................408
Identification.................................................................................... 408
Application....................................................................................... 408
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 408
Logic for group alarm WRNCALH.........................................................408
Identification.................................................................................... 408
Application.................................................................................. 408
Setting guidelines....................................................................... 409
Logic for group indication INDCALH.....................................................409
Identification.................................................................................... 409
Application.................................................................................. 409
Setting guidelines....................................................................... 409
Configurable logic blocks......................................................................409
Application....................................................................................... 410
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 410
Configuration.............................................................................. 410
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN...................................................412
Identification.................................................................................... 412
Application....................................................................................... 412
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.................................................413
Identification.................................................................................... 413
Application....................................................................................... 413
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16
bit BTIGAPC......................................................................................... 414
Identification.................................................................................... 415
Application....................................................................................... 415
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16.................................................416
Identification.................................................................................... 416
Application....................................................................................... 416
Integer to Boolean conversion for six-zone busbar BCTZCONN......... 417
Identification.................................................................................... 417
Application....................................................................................... 418
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
ITBGAPC.............................................................................................. 419
Identification.................................................................................... 419
Application....................................................................................... 419
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC...........................................................................420
Identification.................................................................................... 420

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 11

Application manual
Table of contents

Application....................................................................................... 421
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 421
Comparator for integer inputs - INTCOMP........................................... 421
Identification.................................................................................... 421
Application....................................................................................... 422
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 422
Setting example...............................................................................422
Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP.............................................423
Identification.................................................................................... 423
Application....................................................................................... 423
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 423
Setting example...............................................................................424

Section 14 Monitoring..........................................................................427
Measurement........................................................................................427
Identification.................................................................................... 427
Application....................................................................................... 428
Zero clamping..................................................................................429
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 430
Setting examples........................................................................ 433
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63).................................................. 440
Identification.................................................................................... 440
Application....................................................................................... 440
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 441
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71)................................................ 442
Identification.................................................................................... 442
Application....................................................................................... 442
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 442
Breaker monitoring SSCBR.................................................................. 443
Identification.................................................................................... 443
Application....................................................................................... 443
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 447
Setting procedure on the IED..................................................... 447
Event function EVENT.......................................................................... 448
Identification.................................................................................... 448
Application....................................................................................... 448
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 449
Disturbance report DRPRDRE............................................................. 449
Identification.................................................................................... 450
Application....................................................................................... 450

12 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Setting guidelines............................................................................ 451

Recording times..........................................................................454
Binary input signals.................................................................... 454
Analog input signals................................................................... 455
Sub-function parameters............................................................ 456
Consideration............................................................................. 456
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP........................................... 457
Identification.................................................................................... 457
Application....................................................................................... 458
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 458
Limit counter L4UFCNT........................................................................ 458
Identification.................................................................................... 458
Application....................................................................................... 459
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 459
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC........................................................... 459
Identification.................................................................................... 459
Application....................................................................................... 459
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 460

Section 15 Metering............................................................................ 461

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT................................................................461
Identification.................................................................................... 461
Application....................................................................................... 461
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 461
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR...... 462
Identification.................................................................................... 462
Application....................................................................................... 462
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 463

Section 16 Ethernet-based communication.........................................465

Access point......................................................................................... 465
Application....................................................................................... 465
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 465
Redundant communication................................................................... 467
Identification.................................................................................... 467
Application....................................................................................... 467
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 469
Merging unit.......................................................................................... 470
Application....................................................................................... 470
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 471
Routes.................................................................................................. 471

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 13

Application manual
Table of contents

Application....................................................................................... 471
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 471

Section 17 Station communication...................................................... 473

Communication protocols..................................................................... 473
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol............................................... 473
Application IEC 61850-8-1...............................................................473
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 475
Horizontal communication via GOOSE........................................... 475
Sending data.............................................................................. 475
Receiving data............................................................................476
LON communication protocol............................................................... 478
Application....................................................................................... 478
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND............................................480
Identification............................................................................... 480
Application.................................................................................. 480
Setting guidelines....................................................................... 480
SPA communication protocol................................................................480
Application....................................................................................... 480
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 482
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol........................................... 483
Application....................................................................................... 483
Functionality............................................................................... 483
Design........................................................................................ 484
Settings............................................................................................486
Settings for RS485 and optical serial communication................ 486
Settings from PCM600............................................................... 487
Function and information types....................................................... 489
DNP3 Communication protocol............................................................ 490
Application....................................................................................... 490

Section 18 Remote communication.....................................................491

Binary signal transfer............................................................................ 491
Identification.................................................................................... 491
Application....................................................................................... 491
Communication hardware solutions........................................... 492
Application possibility with one-phase REB670..........................493
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 495

Section 19 Security............................................................................. 499

Authority status ATHSTAT....................................................................499

14 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Application....................................................................................... 499
Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG............................ 499
Application....................................................................................... 499
Change lock CHNGLCK....................................................................... 500
Application....................................................................................... 500
Denial of service SCHLCCH/RCHLCCH ............................................. 501
Application....................................................................................... 501
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 502

Section 20 Basic IED functions........................................................... 503

IED identifiers TERMINALID.................................................................503
Application....................................................................................... 503
Product information PRODINF............................................................. 503
Application....................................................................................... 503
Factory defined settings.................................................................. 504
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP...................................... 504
Identification.................................................................................... 505
Application....................................................................................... 505
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 505
Parameter setting groups..................................................................... 505
Application....................................................................................... 505
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 506
Rated system frequency PRIMVAL...................................................... 506
Identification.................................................................................... 506
Application....................................................................................... 506
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 506
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM.................................................... 507
Application....................................................................................... 507
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 507
Global base values GBASVAL............................................................. 507
Identification.................................................................................... 507
Application....................................................................................... 508
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 508
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI.....................................................508
Application....................................................................................... 508
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 508
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ................................................509
Application....................................................................................... 509
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 509
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI........................................................ 509

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 15

Application manual
Table of contents

Application....................................................................................... 509
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 509
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI....................................................509
Application....................................................................................... 510
Frequency values............................................................................ 510
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 511
Test mode functionality TESTMODE....................................................516
Application....................................................................................... 516
IEC 61850 protocol test mode.................................................... 516
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 517
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN..............................................518
Application....................................................................................... 518
Setting guidelines............................................................................ 519
System time................................................................................519
Synchronization.......................................................................... 519

Section 21 Requirements.................................................................... 523

Current transformer requirements........................................................ 523
Current transformer basic classification and requirements............. 523
Conditions........................................................................................525
Fault current.....................................................................................526
Secondary wire resistance and additional load............................... 526
General current transformer requirements...................................... 527
Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements............................ 527
Busbar protection....................................................................... 528
Breaker failure protection........................................................... 529
Non-directional instantaneous and definitive time, phase
and residual overcurrent protection............................................ 529
Non-directional inverse time delayed phase and residual
overcurrent protection.................................................................530
Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other
standards.........................................................................................531
Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class P, PR.... 531
Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class PX,
PXR (and old IEC 60044-6, class TPS
and old British Standard, class X).............................................. 532
Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE........................... 532
Voltage transformer requirements........................................................ 533
SNTP server requirements................................................................... 533
PTP requirements.................................................................................534

16 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
 Table of contents

Sample specification of communication requirements for the

protection and control terminals in digital telecommunication
networks............................................................................................... 534

Section 22 Glossary............................................................................ 537

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 17

Application manual
18
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v18

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted
per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating
settings.

1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v11

This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for planning,
pre-engineering and engineering.

The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical power

engineering and have knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemes and
communication principles.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 19

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v15

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd

IEC07000220 V4 EN-US

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions
on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The
manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control
functions, LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 61850, DNP3, LON and SPA.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are
organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

20 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance
during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external
circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as
verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing
an IED in a substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant
procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and
setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted
per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating
settings.

The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function
blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data,
sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the
engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported

by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to
the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding
communication protocol manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber
security when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role
based access control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are
described and sorted by function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.

1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-C8027F8A-D3CB-41C1-B078-F9E59BB73A6C v4

Document revision/date History

–/May 2017 First release

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 21

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Introduction

1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v5

Documents related to REB670 Document numbers

Application manual 1MRK 505 370-UUS
Commissioning manual 1MRK 505 372-UUS
Product guide 1MRK 505 373-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 505 371-UUS
Type test certificate 1MRK 505 373-TUS

670 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 127-UUS
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 398-UUS
Installation manual 1MRK 514 026-UUS
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 393-UEN
Edition 2
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 397-UUS
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BUS
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v12

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which

could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result
in personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or

warning about the temperature of product surfaces.

22 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and
do not view directly with optical instruments.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to

the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a
hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to
equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand

that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important
that the user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v6

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push
button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 23

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Introduction

• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the

signal name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to
achieve a valid application configuration.
• Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are
bordered by dashed lines.
• Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent
setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST, ECT or LHMI.
• If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -
int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and
continues.
• Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another
diagram have the suffix ”-cont.”
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and millimeters. If it is not specifically
mentioned then the dimension is in millimeters.

Illustrations are used as an example and might show other products

than the one the manual describes. The example that is illustrated is still
valid.

1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v4

Function block names are used in ACT and PST to identify functions. Respective
function block names of Edition 1 logical nodes and Edition 2 logical nodes are shown
in the table below.
Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping
Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
BCZPDIF BCZPDIF BCZPDIF
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
Table continues on next page

24 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BDZSGAPC BBS6LLN0 LLN0
BDZSGAPC BDZSGAPC
BFPTRC_F01 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F02 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F03 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F04 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F05 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F06 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F07 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F08 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F09 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F10 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F11 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F12 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F13 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F14 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F15 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F16 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F17 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F18 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F19 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F20 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F21 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F22 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F23 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F24 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BICPTRC_01 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_02 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_03 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_04 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_05 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 25

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BUSPTRC_B1 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
BUSPTRC_B2 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B4 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BZISGGIO BZISGGIO BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO BZITGGIO BZITGAPC
BZNPDIF_Z1 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
Table continues on next page

26 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BZNPDIF_Z2 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z3 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z4 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z5 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z6 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV
COUVPTOV COUVPTUV
COUVPTUV
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 27

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC
D2PTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF2PTOC EF2LLN0 EF2PTRC
EF2PTRC EF2RDIR
EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR
GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
Table continues on next page

28 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

L4CPDIF L4CLLN0 LLN0
L4CPDIF L4CGAPC
L4CPTRC L4CPDIF
L4CPSCH
L4CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF L6CPDIF L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LAPPPDUP
LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF
LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0 -
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOLSPTR LOLSPTR LOLSPTR
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD
LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 29

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 NS2PTOC
NS2PTOC NS2PTRC
NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
O2RWPTOV GEN2LLN0 O2RWPTOV
O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC
PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY QCBAY BAY/LLN0
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
Table continues on next page

30 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCHLCCH
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TPPIOC TPPIOC TPPIOC
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 31

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
U2RWPTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC U2RWPTUV
U2RWPTUV
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC PH1PTUV
PH1PTUV VRPVOC
VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS
ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC
ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU
ZMMMXU
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
Table continues on next page

32 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 33

Application manual
34
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 2
Application

Section 2 Application

2.1 General IED application

SEMOD121007-5 v8

The Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) is designed for the selective, reliable and fast
differential protection of busbars, T-connections and meshed corners in up to 6 zones.
It can be used for protection of single, double and triple busbar with or without transfer
bus, double circuit breaker or breaker-and-a-half stations. The IED is applicable for the
protection of medium voltage (MV), high voltage (HV) and extra high voltage (EHV)
installations at a power system frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz. It can detect all types of
internal phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground faults in solidly grounded or low
impedance grounded power systems, as well as all internal multi-phase faults in
isolated or high-impedance grounded power systems.

Ordering of PT inputs inside of the busbar protection IED will allow integration of
voltage related functionality like under-voltage release, residual over-voltage, power
functions, metering and voltage recording during the faults. However attention shall be
given to the fact that inclusion of PT inputs will reduce number of available CT inputs
(in total 24 analogue inputs are the product limit). Consequently when PT inputs are
ordered the busbar protection IED will be applicable for buses with a fewer number of
bays. Practically the number of available CT inputs will limit the size of the station
which can be protected.

The IED has very low requirements on the main current transformers (that is, CTs) and
no interposing current transformers are necessary. For all applications, it is possible to
include and mix main CTs with 1A and 5A rated secondary current within the same
protection zone. Typically, CTs with up to 10:1 ratio difference can be used within the
same differential protection zone. Adjustment for different main CT ratios is achieved
numerically by a parameter setting.

The numerical, low-impedance differential protection function is designed for fast and
selective protection for faults within protected zone. All connected CT inputs are
provided with a restraint feature. The minimum pick-up value for the differential
current is set to give a suitable sensitivity for all internal faults. The pick-up setting for
the fault current must be less than 80% of the lowest fault current that can occur on the
protected bus bars. If the minimum fault current is high enough, the set value should be
set higher than the maximum load current. This setting is made directly in primary
amperes. The operating slope for the differential operating characteristic is fixed to
53% in the algorithm.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 35

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Application

The fast tripping time (minimum trip time is 5ms when SOM output module is used) of
the low-impedance differential protection function is especially advantageous for
power system networks with high fault levels or where fast fault clearance is required
for power system stability.

All CT inputs are provided with a restraint feature. The operation is based on the well-
proven RADSS percentage restraint stabilization principle, with an extra stabilization
feature to stabilize for very heavy CT saturation. Stability for external faults is
guaranteed if a CT is not saturated for at least two milliseconds during each power
system cycle.

The advanced open CT detection algorithm detects instantly the open CT secondary
circuits and prevents differential protection operation without any need for additional
check zone.

Differential protection zones in the IED include a sensitive operational pickup. This
sensitive operational pickup is designed to be able to detect internal busbar ground
faults in low impedance grounded power systems (that is, power systems where the
ground-fault current is limited to a certain level, typically between 300A and 2000A
primary by a neutral point reactor or resistor). Alternatively this sensitive pickup can
be used when high sensitivity is required from busbar differential protection (that is,
energizing of the bus via long line).

Overall operating characteristic of the differential function in the IED is shown in

figure 2.

36 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 2
Application

Sensitive
differential
protection

Id [Primary Amps]
Operate
region

Differential protection
operation characteristic
DiffOperLevel
SensOperLevel SensIinBlock
s=0.53

Iin [Primary Amps]

IEC06000142-2-en.vsdx
IEC06000142 V2 EN-US

Figure 2: IED operating characteristic

Integrated overall check zone feature, independent from any disconnector position, is
available. It can be used in double or triple busbar stations to secure stability of the
busbar differential protection in case of entirely wrong status indication of busbar
disconnector in any of the feeder bays.

Flexible, software based dynamic Zone Selection enables easy and fast adaptation to
the most common substation arrangements such as single busbar with or without
transfer bus, double busbar with or without transfer bus, triple busbar with or without
transfer bus, breaker-and-a-half stations, double busbar-double breaker stations, ring
busbars, and so on. The software based dynamic Zone Selections ensures:

• Dynamic linking of measured CT currents to the appropriate differential protection

zone as required by substation topology
• Efficient merging of the two or more differential zones when required by
substation topology (that is load-transfer)
• Easy zone merging initiated by closing of bus-sectionalizing disconnectors
• Selective operation of busbar differential protection ensures tripping only of
circuit breakers connected to the faulty zone
• Correct marshaling of backup-trip commands from internally integrated or
external circuit breaker failure protections to all surrounding circuit breakers
• Easy incorporation of bus-section and/or bus-coupler bays (that is, tie-breakers)
with one or two sets of CTs into the protection scheme
• Disconnector and/or circuit breaker status supervision

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 37

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Application

Advanced Zone Selection logic accompanied by optionally available end-fault and/or

circuit breaker failure protections ensure minimum possible tripping time and
selectivity for faults within the blind spot or the end zone between bay CT and bay
circuit breaker. Therefore the IED offers best possible coverage for such faults in
feeder and bus-section/bus-coupler bays.

Optionally available circuit breaker failure protection, one for every CT input into the
IED, offers secure local back-up protection for the circuit breakers in the station.

Optionally available four-stage, non-directional overcurrent protections, one for every

CT input into the IED, provide remote backup functionality for connected feeders and
remote-end stations.

Optionally available voltage and frequency protection functions enable to include

voltage release criterion for busbar protection or to integrate independent over-, under-
voltage protection for the bus in the busbar protection IED.

Optionally available over-current, thermal overload and capacitor bank protection

functions open possibilities to integrate protection of shunt reactors and shunt capacitor
banks into the busbar protection IED.

It is normal practice to have just one busbar protection IED per busbar. Nevertheless
some utilities do apply two independent busbar protection IEDs per zone of protection.
This IED fits both solutions.

A simplified bus differential protection for multi-phase faults and ground faults can be
obtained by using a single, one-phase IED with external auxiliary summation current
transformers.

The IED can be used in applications with IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus with up
to eight merging units (MU) depending on the other functionality included in the IED.
Each MU has eight analog channels, four currents and four voltages. Conventional and
Merging Unit channels can be mixed freely in the application.

Forcing of binary inputs and outputs is a convenient way to test wiring in substations
as well as testing configuration logic in the IEDs. Basically it means that all binary
inputs and outputs on the IED I/O modules (BOM, BIM, IOM & SOM) can be forced
to arbitrary values.

Central Account Management is an authentication infrastructure that offers a secure

solution for enforcing access control to IEDs and other systems within a substation.
This incorporates management of user accounts, roles and certificates and the
distribution of such, a procedure completely transparent to the user.

The Flexible Product Naming allows the customer to use an IED-vendor independent
IEC 61850 model of the IED. This customer model will be exposed in all IEC 61850
communication, but all other aspects of the IED will remain unchanged (e.g., names on

38 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 2
Application

the local HMI and names in the tools). This offers significant flexibility to adapt the
IED to the customers' system and standard solution.
M11788-3 v10

Optional apparatus control for up to 30 objects can provide a facility to draw simplified
single line diagram (SLD) of the station on the local HMI.

Note that customized REB670 is delivered without any configuration.

Thus the complete IED engineering shall be done by the customer or its
system integrator. In order to secure proper operation of the busbar
protection it is strictly recommended to always start engineering work
from the PCM600 project for the pre-configured REB670 which is the
closest to the actual application. Then, necessary modifications shall be
applied in order to adopt the customized IED configuration to suite the
actual station layout. The PCM600 project for the pre-configured
REB670 IEDs is available in the Connectivity Package DVD.
GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1

The following tables list all the functions available in the IED. Those
functions that are not exposed to the user or do not need to be
configured are not described in this manual.

2.2 Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v13

Table 2: Example of quantities

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 39

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Busbar

function name
REB670 (Customized)
Differential protection
BUTPTRC, 87B Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, three phase/4 bays
BCZTPDIF,
BZNTPDIF,
BZITGGIO,
BUTSM4
BUTPTRC, 87B Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, three phase/8 bays 1
BCZTPDIF,
BZNTPDIF,
BZITGGIO,
BUTSM8
BUSPTRC, 87B Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, single phase/12 bays
BCZSPDIF,
BZNSPDIF,
BZISGGIO,
BUSSM12
BUSPTRC, 87B Busbar differential protection, 2 zones, single phase/24 bays 1
BCZSPDIF,
BZNSPDIF,
BZISGGIO,
BUSSM24
BDZSGAPC, 87B Busbar differential protection, 6 zones, single phase/24 bays 1
BFPTRC,
BICPTRC,
BZNPDIF,
BCZPDIF,
BSMGAPC
BDCGAPC 87B Status of primary switching object for busbar protection zone 128
selection

2.3 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v13

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Busbar

function name
REB670 (Customized)
Current protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps 0-8

PH4SPTOC 51 Four step single phase overcurrent protection 0-24

Table continues on next page

40 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Busbar

function name
REB670 (Customized)
EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps 0-8
67N2)
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent 0-8
protection
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload protection, two time constants 0-2
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-8
CCSRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection, single phase version 0-24
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-4
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-4
CBPGAPC Capacitor bank protection 0-2

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-2
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-2
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 0-2
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 0-2

Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change of frequency protection 0-6

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 41

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Application

2.4 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v15

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Busbar

function name
REB670
(Customized)
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing 0-3
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-2
APC30 3 Control functionality for up to 6 bays, max 30 objects 0-1
(6CBs), including interlocking (see Table 4)
QCBAY Bay control 1+5/APC30
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 1+5/APC30
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1
SXCBR Circuit breaker 24
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI 15
presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30
DPGAPC Generic communication function for Double Point 16
indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control function 8 signals 5
AUTOBITS Automation bits, command function for DNP3.0 3
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 50
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and select for IEC 50
60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands with position for IEC 60870-5-103 50
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103 4
Secondary system
supervision
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-2
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference 0-2
Logic
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5
Table continues on next page

42 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Busbar

function name
REB670
(Customized)
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic blocks (see Table 3) 40-496
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T (see Table 5) 0-1
INDCOMBSPQT,
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package (see Table 6) 0-1
LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1
B16I Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit 18
BTIGAPC Boolean to integer conversion with logical node 16
representation, 16 bit
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18
BCTZCONN Integer to Boolean conversion for six-zone busbar 34
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node 16
representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and 12
overflow supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer inputs 30
REALCOMP Comparator for real inputs 30

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 43

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Application

Table 3: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 328
GATE 64
INV 492
LLD 40
OR 496
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 108
XOR 40

Table 4: Number of function instances in APC30

Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 30
BB_ES 6
A1A2_BS 4
A1A2_DC 6
ABC_BC 2
BH_CONN 2
BH_LINE_A 2
BH_LINE_B 2
DB_BUS_A 3
DB_BUS_B 3
DB_LINE 3
ABC_LINE 6
AB_TRAFO 4
SCSWI Switch controller 30
SXSWI Circuit switch 24
QCRSV Apparatus control 6
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 30
QCBAY Bay control 5
Table continues on next page

44 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 2
Application

Function name Function description Total number of instances

LOCREM Handling of LR-switch positions 5
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching 42
device via GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive 42
a switching device

Table 5: Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T

Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances
ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40

Table 6: Total number of instances for extended logic package

Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 180
GATE 49
INV 180
LLD 49
OR 180
PULSETIMER 89
RSMEMORY 40
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 130
TIMERSET 109
VSGAPC 120
XOR 89

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 45

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Busbar

function name
REB670
(Customized)
Monitoring
CVMMXN Power system measurement 6
CMMXU Current measurement 10
VMMXU Voltage measurement phase-phase 6
CMSQI Current sequence measurement 6
VMSQI Voltage sequence measurement 6
VNMMXU Voltage measurement phase-ground 6
AISVBAS General service value presentation of analog inputs 1
EVENT Event function 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1
A4RADR,
B1RBDR-
B22RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication function for Single Point indication 64
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for Single Point indication 16
16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication function for measured values 24
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 28
SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for gas medium 21
SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for liquid medium 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition monitoring 0-24
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 3
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103IED IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 1
I103USRDEF Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 20
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30
TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and demand handling 6

46 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 2
Application

2.5 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v15

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Busbar

name
REB670
(Customized)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1
ADE LON communication protocol 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1
RS485GEN RS485 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1
CHSERRS485 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication protocol 1
CH1TCP, CH2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
CH3TCP, CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol 1
MSTSER DNP3.0 serial master 1
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1
MST2TCP,
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication 1
protocol
IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking 59
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double point value 64
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer value 32
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value 60
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single point value 64
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10
MULTICMDSND
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication 1
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485 1
AGSAL Generic security application component 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1
LPHD Physical device information 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 47

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Application

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Busbar

name
REB670
(Customized)
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as 1
DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus communication, 8 merging units 0-1
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1
ALTRK Service tracking 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 0-1
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy 0-1
PTP Precision time protocol 1
FRONTSTATUS Access point diagnostic for front Ethernet port 1
SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non-redundant Ethernet port 6
RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant Ethernet ports 3
DHCP DHCP configuration for front access point 1
QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 96
Remote communication
BinSignRec1_1 Binary signal transfer receive 3/3/6
BinSignRec1_2
BinSignReceive2
BinSignTrans1_1 Binary signal transfer transmit 3/3/6
BinSignTrans1_2
BinSignTransm2
BinSigRec1_12M Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit receive/transmit 3
BinSigRec1_22M
BinSigTran1_12M
BinSigTran1_22M
LDCMTRN Transmission of analog data from LDCM 1
LDCMTRN_2M Transmission of analog data from LDCM, 2Mbit 6
LDCMRecBinStat1 Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6/3/3
LDCMRecBinStat2
LDCMRecBinStat3
LDCMRecBinS2_2M Receive binary status from LDCM, 2Mbit 3
LDCMRecBinS3_2M Receive binary status from remote LDCM, 2Mbit 3

48 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 2
Application

2.6 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v12

Table 7: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
PTP Precision time protocol
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 49

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Application

Table 8: Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description
name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

50 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

Section 3 Configuration

3.1 Description of configuration REB670 SEMOD129261-1 v2

3.1.1 Available ACT configurations for pre-configured REB670 SEMOD129275-87 v6

Three configurations have been made available for pre-configured REB670 IED with
two zones. Product variant with six zone is available as customized product only. It
shall be noted that all three configurations include the following features:

• fully configured for the total available number of bays in each REB670 variant
• facility to take any bay out of service via the local HMI or externally via binary
input
• facility to block any of the two zones via the local HMI or externally via binary
input
• facility to block all bay trips via the local HMI or externally via binary input, but
leaving all other function in service (that is BBP Zones, BFP and OCP where
applicable)
• facility to externally initiate built-in disturbance recorder
• facility to connect external breaker failure backup trip signal from every bay
• facility to connect external bay trip signal

3.1.2 Configuration X01 SEMOD129275-116 v6

This configuration includes only busbar protection for simple stations layouts (in other
words, breaker-and-a-half, double breaker or single breaker stations). Additionally it
can be used for double busbar-single breaker stations where disconnector replica is
done by using only b auxiliary contact from every disconnector and/or circuit breakers.
As a consequence no disconnector/breaker supervision will be available. It is as well
possible to adapt this configuration by the signal matrix tool to be used as direct
replacement of RED521 terminals. This configuration is available for all five REB670
variants (that is A20, A31, B20, B21 & B31). It shall be noted that optional functions
breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF), end fault protection and overcurrent
protection PH4SPTOC (51) can be ordered together with this configuration, but they
will not be pre-configured. Thus these optional functions shall be configured by the
end user.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 51

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Configuration

3.1.3 Configuration X02 SEMOD129275-120 v5

This configuration includes only busbar protection for double busbar-single breaker
stations, where Zone Selection is done by using a and b auxiliary contacts from every
disconnector and/or circuit breaker. Thus full disconnector/breaker supervision is
available. This configuration is available for only three REB670 variants (that is A31,
B21 and B31). It shall be noted that optional functions breaker failure protection
CCRBRF (50BF), end fault protection and overcurrent protection PH4SPTOC (51) can
be ordered together with this configuration, but they will not be pre-configured. Thus
these optional functions shall be configured by the end user.

3.1.4 Configuration X03 SEMOD129275-124 v5

This configuration includes BBP with breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF), end
fault protection and overcurrent protection PH4SPTOC (51) for double busbar-single
breaker stations, where Zone Selection is done by using a and b auxiliary contacts from
every disconnectors and/or circuit breakers. Thus full disconnector/breaker supervision
is available. This configuration is available for only three REB670 variants (that is
A31, B21 and B31).

In order to use X03 configuration, optional breaker failure and overcurrent functions
must be ordered.

3.1.5 Description of 3 ph package A20A SEMOD129275-4 v8

Three-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection zones
and four three-phase CT inputs A20A. The version is intended for simpler applications
such as T-connections, meshed corners, and so on.

52 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

ZA QB1 ZB
REB670(A20-X01) / REB670(A31-X01)

DFR/SER DR
QB1 QB1 QB1 QB1
DRP RDRE

87B 3Id/I 87B 3Id/I

QA1 QA1 QA1 QA1 BZIT GGIO BCZT PDIF

MET I 87B 3Id/I 87B 3Id/I

C MMXU BZNT PDIF BUT PTRC

MET I 87B 3Id/I 87B 3Id/I

C MMXU BZNT PDIF BUT PTRC

Other Functions in Library

87B MET Isqi MET P/Q MET W/Varh
BDC GAPC C MSQI CV MMXN ETP MMTR

Control Control 63 71
Q CBAY S SCBR S SIMG S SIML

3 Control MET U MET Usqi MET UN

S XCBR V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU
Optional Functions
51_67 4(3I>) 50BF 3I>BF 79 5(0→1)
OC4 PTOC CC RBRF SMB RREC

NUMBER OF FEEDERS IN BOTH

VERSION OF REB670
BUSBAR SECTIONS

REB670(A20 – X01) 3-Phase, 4 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple Station

4
Layout 12 AI

REB670(A31 – X01) 3-Phase, 8 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple Station

8
Layout 24 AI
IEC16000254-1-en.vsd

IEC16000254 V1 EN-US

Figure 3: Configuration diagram for A20, configuration X01

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 53

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Configuration

3.1.6 Description of 3 ph package A31A SEMOD129275-22 v8

Three-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection zones
and eight three-phase CT inputs A31A. The version is intended for applications on
smaller busbars, with up to two zones and eight CT inputs.

ZA ZB

189 189
BKR
152

REB670 ANSI(A20A-X00) / REB670 ANSI(A31A-X00)

189 189 189 189
HW LOGIC DFR/SER DR MET I
DRP RDRE C MMXU
AC LOGIC
87B 3Id/I 87B 3Id/I
BZIT GGIO BCZT PDIF
BKR BKR BKR BKR
152 152 152 152
87B 3Id/I
BUT PTRC

87B 3Id/I
87B 3Id/I
BZNT PDIF
BUT PTRC

REB670 ANSI(A20A-X00) / REB670 ANSI(A31A-X00)

DFR/SER DR MET I
DRP RDRE C MMXU
AC LOGIC
87B 3Id/I 87B 3Id/I
BZIT GGIO BCZT PDIF

87B 3Id/I
BUT PTRC

87B 3Id/I
87B 3Id/I
BZNT PDIF
BUT PTRC

Other Functions in Library

87B
BDC GAPC

Optional Functions
51_67 4(3I>) 50BF 3I>BF 79 5(0→1)
OC4 PTOC CC RBRF SMB RREC

NUMBER OF FEDERS IN NUMBER OF REB670

VERSION OF REB670
BOTH BUSBAR SECTIONS REQUIRED BY THE SCHEME

REB670 ANSI(A20A – X00) 3-Phase, 4 Bays, 2 Zones for

6* 2
Simple Station Layout 12 AI

REB670 ANSI(A31A – X00) 3-Phase, 8 Bays, 2 Zones for

14* 2
Simple Station Layout 24 AI

* With Just one CT in the Bus Section Bay

GUID-5084E3E1-F0EE-457E-96AC-AB8AA3994ADA V1 EN-US

Figure 4: Configuration diagram for A31A, configuration X00

54 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

ZA ZB
REB670(A31-X01)
QB1 QB2
DFR/SER DR
QA1 DRP RDRE

QB1 QB1 QB1 QB1 87B 3Id/I 87B 3Id/I

HW LOGIC
BZIT GGIO BCZT PDIF

AC LOGIC

QA1 QA1 QA1 QA1

MET I 87B 3Id/I

C MMXU BUT PTRC

87B 3Id/I
MET I 87B 3Id/I
BZNT PDIF
C MMXU BUT PTRC

87B 3Id/I
MET I MET Isqi 87B 3Id/I
BZNT PDIF
C MMXU C MSQI BUT PTRC

Other Functions in Library

87B MET Isqi MET P/Q MET W/Varh Control
BDC GAPC C MSQI CV MMXN ETP MMTR Q CBAY

Control 63 71 3 Control MET U

S SCBR S SIMG S SIML S XCBR V MMXU

MET Usqi MET UN

V MSQI VN MMXU

Optional Functions
51_67 4(3I>) 50BF 3I>BF 79 5(0→1)
OC4 PTOC CC RBRF SMB RREC

NUMBER OF FEEDERS IN BOTH

VERSION OF REB670
BUSBAR SECTIONS

REB670(A31 – X01) 3-Phase, 8 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple Station 7*

Layout 24 AI

* With Just one CT in the Bus Section Bay

IEC16000255-1-en.vsd

IEC16000255 V1 EN-US

Figure 5: Configuration diagram for A31, configuration X01

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 55

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Configuration

GUID-1264BCF9-F245-423C-B620-3D66F3292F41 V2 EN-US

Figure 6: Configuration diagram for A31, configuration X01_1

56 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

ZA
REB670(A31-X02)
ZB

87B DFR/SER DR
QB1 BDC GAPC DRP RDRE

87B
1
QB2 BDC GAPC

87B
QA1 BDC GAPC

87B
QB1 BDC GAPC
2
87B
QB2 BDC GAPC

QB1

QA1 87B
QB2
QB1 BDC GAPC
8
87B
QB2 BDC GAPC 2
QA1 87B 3Id/I
BZIT GGIO
8

QA1 1
MET I 87B 3Id/I
C MMXU BUT PTRC
87B 3Id/I
2
BZNT PDIF
MET I 87B 3Id/I
C MMXU BUT PTRC
87B 3Id/I 87B 3Id/I
BCZT PDIF 8 BZNT PDIF
MET I 87B 3Id/I
C MMXU BUT PTRC

Other Functions in Library

87B MET Isqi MET P/Q MET W/Varh Control
BDC GAPC C MSQI CV MMXN ETP MMTR Q CBAY

Control 63 71 3 Control MET U

S SCBR S SIMG S SIML S XCBR V MMXU

MET Usqi MET UN

V MSQI VN MMXU

Optional Functions
51_67 4(3I>) 50BF 3I>BF 79 5(0→1)
OC4 PTOC CC RBRF SMB RREC

NUMBER OF FEEDERS IN THE STATION

VERSION OF REB670
( EXCLUDING BUS COUPLER BAY)

REB670(A31 – X02) 3-Phase, 8 Bays, 2 Zones for Double Busbar 7*

Stations with 24 AI

* With Just one CT in the Bus Section Bay

IEC16000256-1-en.vsd

IEC16000256 V1 EN-US

Figure 7: Configuration diagram for A31, configuration X02

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 57

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Configuration

ZA

ZB
REB670(A31-X03)
87B
QB1 BDC GAPC

87B DFR/SER DR
1
QB2 BDC GAPC DRP RDRE

87B
QA1 BDC GAPC

87B
QB1 BDC GAPC
2
87B
QB2 BDC GAPC

QB1

QA1 87B
QB2
QB1 BDC GAPC
8
87B
QB2 BDC GAPC 2 87B 3Id/I
QA1
BZIT GGIO
8
MET I
C MMXU
QA1 1
51_67 4(3I>) 50BF 3I>BF 87B 3Id/I
OC4 PTOC CC RBRF BUT PTRC

MET I 87B 3Id/I

C MMXU BZNT PDIF

2
51_67 4(3I>) 50BF 3I>BF 87B 3Id/I
OC4 PTOC CC RBRF BUT PTRC
87B 3Id/I 87B 3Id/I
BCZT PDIF
8 BZNT PDIF
51_67 4(3I>) 50BF 3I>BF 87B 3Id/I
OC4 PTOC CC RBRF BUT PTRC

MET I
C MMXU

Other Functions in Library

87B MET Isqi MET P/Q MET W/Varh Control Control
BDC GAPC C MSQI CV MMXN ETP MMTR Q CBAY S SCBR

63 71 3 Control MET U MET Usqi MET UN

S SIMG S SIML S XCBR V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU

Optional Functions
79 5(0→1)
SMB RREC

NUMBER OF FEEDERS IN THE STATION

VERSION OF REB670
( EXCLUDING BUS COUPLER BAY)

REB670(A31 – X03) 3-Phase, 8 Bays, 2 Zones for Double Busbar 7*

Stations with Breaker Failure Protection and End Fault Protection 24AI

* With Just one CT in the Bus Section Bay

IEC16000257-1-en.vsd

IEC16000257 V1 EN-US

Figure 8: Configuration diagram for A31, configuration X03

3.1.7 Description of 1 ph package B20A SEMOD129275-40 v8

One-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection zones
and twelve CT inputs B20.

58 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

• Due to three available binary input modules, the B20A is intended for applications
without need for dynamic Zone Selection such as substations with single busbar
with or without bus-section breaker, breaker-and-a-half or double breaker
arrangements. Three such IEDs offer cost effective solutions for such simple
substation arrangements with up to twelve CT inputs.

• This version can be used with external auxiliary 3-phase to 1-phase summation
current transformers with different turns ratio for each phase.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 59

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Configuration

REB670(B20-X01) / REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)

PHASE L3
ZA ZB REB670(B20-X01) / REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)
QB1
PHASE L2
REB670(B20-X01) / REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)
PHASE L1
DFR/SER DR
QB1 QB1 QB1 QB1 DRP RDRE

87B Id/I 87B Id/I

BZIS GGIO BCZS PDIF

QA1 QA1 QA1 QA1

MET I 87B Id/I 87B Id/I

C MMXU BUS PTRC BZNS PDIF

MET I 87B Id/I 87B Id/I

C MMXU BUS PTRC BZNS PDIF

Other Functions in Library

87B MET Isqi MET P/Q MET W/Varh

BDC GAPC C MSQI CV MMXN ETP MMTR

Control Control 63 71
Q CBAY S SCBR S SIMG S SIML

3 Control MET U MET Usqi MET UN

S XCBR V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU

Optional Functions
51 I> 50BF I>BF 79 5(0->1)
PH4S PTOC CCS RBRF SMB RREC

NUMBER NUMBER OF REB670

NUMBEROF
OFFEEDERS IN
FEDERS IN
VERSION OF REB670 BOTH BUSBAR SECTIONS REQUIRED BY THE
SCHEME
REB670(B20 – X01) 1-Phase, 12 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple
12 3
Station Layout 12 AI

REB670(B21 – X01) 1-Phase, 12 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple

12 3
Station Layout 12 AI

REB670(B31 – X01) 1-Phase, 24 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple

24 3
Station Layout 24 AI
IEC13000223-2-en.vsd

IEC13000223 V2 EN-US

Figure 9: Configuration diagram for B20, configuration X01

60 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

REB670(B20-X01) /REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)

PHASE L3
ZA ZB REB670(B20-X01) /REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)
PHASE L2
REB670(B20-X01) /REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)
QB1 QB2 PHASE L1
QA1
DFR/SER DR
QB1 QB1 QB1 QB1 DRP RDRE
HW LOGIC
87B Id/I 87B Id/I
AC LOGIC
BZIS GGIO BCZS PDIF

QA1 QA1 QA1 QA1

MET I 87B Id/I

C MMXU BUS PTRC

87B Id/I
MET I 87B Id/I
BZNS PDIF
C MMXU BUS PTRC

87B Id/I
MET I 87B Id/I
BZNS PDIF
C MMXU BUS PTRC

Other Functions in Library

87B MET Isqi MET P/Q MET W/Varh
BDC GAPC C MSQI CV MMXN ETP MMTR

Control Control 63 71
Q CBAY S SCBR S SIMG S SIML

3 Control MET U MET Usqi MET UN

S XCBR V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU

Optional Functions
51 I> 50BF I>BF 79 5(0->1)
PH4S PTOC CCS RBRF SMB RREC

NUMBER
NUMBEROF
OFFEEDERS
FEDERS IN
IN NUMBER OF REB670
VERSION OF REB670
BOTH BUSBAR SECTIONS REQUIRED BY THE SCHEME

REB670(B20 – X01) 1-Phase, 12 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple

11* 3
Station Layout 12 AI

REB670(B21 – X01) 1-Phase, 12 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple

11* 3
Station Layout 12 AI

REB670(B31 – X01) 1-Phase, 24 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple

23* 3
Station Layout 24 AI

* With Just one CT in the Bus Section Bay

IEC13000224-2-en.vsd

IEC13000224 V2 EN-US

Figure 10: Configuration diagram for B21, configuration X01

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 61

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Configuration

3.1.8 Description of 1 ph package B31A SEMOD129275-58 v8

One-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection zones
and twenty-four CT inputs B31A.

• The IED is intended for busbar protection applications in big substations where
dynamic Zone Selection, quite large number of binary inputs and outputs and
many CT inputs are needed. The IED includes two differential zones and twenty-
four CT inputs. Note that binary inputs can be shared between phases by including
the LDCM communication module. This simplifies panel wiring and saves IO
boards.

• This version can be used with external auxiliary 3-phase to 1-phase summation
current transformers with different turns ratio for each phase.

62 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

ZA ZB
REB670(B20-X01) / REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)
PHASE L3
QB1 QB2
REB670(B20-X01) / REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)
QA1 PHASE L2
REB670(B20-X01) / REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)
QB1 QB1 QB1 QB1
PHASE L1
DFR/SER DR
HW LOGIC
DRP RDRE
AC LOGIC
87B Id/I 87B Id/I
BZIS GGIO BCZS PDIF
QA1 QA1 QA1 QA1
MET I 87B Id/I
C MMXU BUS PTRC

MET I 87B Id/I 87B Id/I

C MMXU BUS PTRC BZNS PDIF

REB670(B20-X01) / REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)

PHASE L3
REB670(B20-X01) / REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)
PHASE L2
REB670(B20-X01) / REB670(B21-X01) / REB670(B31-X01)
PHASE L1
DFR/SER DR
DRP RDRE
AC LOGIC
87B Id/I 87B Id/I
BZIS GGIO BCZS PDIF
MET I 87B Id/I
C MMXU BUS PTRC

MET I 87B Id/I 87B Id/I

C MMXU BUS PTRC BZNS PDIF

Other Functions in Library

87B MET Isqi MET P/Q MET W/Varh Control Control 63 71 3 Control
SWS GGIO
BDC GAPC C MSQI CV MMXN ETP MMTR Q CBAY S SCBR S SIMG S SIML S XCBR
Optional Functions
MET U MET Usqi MET UN
51 I> 50BF I>BF 79 0→1
V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU
PH4S PTOC CCS RBRF SMB RREC
Optional Functions
51 I> 50BF I>BF 79 5(0->1)
PH4S PTOC CCS RBRF SMB RREC

NUMBEROF
NUMBER OFFEEDERS
FEDERS IN
IN NUMBER OF REB670
VERSION OF REB670
BOTH BUSBAR SECTIONS REQUIRED BY THE SCHEME

REB670(B20 – X01) 1-Phase, 12 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple

22* 6
Station Layout 12 AI

REB670(B21 – X01) 1-Phase, 12 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple

22* 6
Station Layout 12 AI

REB670(B31 – X01) 1-Phase, 24 Bays, 2 Zones for Simple

46* 6
Station Layout 24 AI

* With Just one CT in the Bus Section Bay

IEC13000225-2-en.vsd

IEC13000225 V2 EN-US

Figure 11: Configuration diagram for B31, configuration X01

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 63

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Configuration

ZA
REB670(B21-X02)/REB670(B31-X02)- PHASE L3
REB670(B21-X02)/REB670(B31-X02)- PHASE L2
ZB
REB670(B21-X02)/REB670(B31-X02)- PHASE L1
87B
QB1 BDC GAPC

87B DFR/SER DR
1 DRP RDRE
QB2 BDC GAPC

87B
QA1 BDC GAPC

87B
QB1 BDC GAPC
2
87B
QB2 BDC GAPC

QB1

QA1 87B
QB2
QB1 BDC GAPC
N
87B
QB2 BDC GAPC 2 87B Id/I
QA1
BZIS GGIO
N

QA1 1
MET I 87B Id/I
C MMXU BUS PTRC
87B Id/I
2
BZNS PDIF
MET I 87B Id/I
C MMXU BUS PTRC
87B Id/I 87B Id/I
BCZS PDIF N BZNS PDIF
MET I 87B Id/I
C MMXU BUS PTRC

Other Functions in Library

87B MET Isqi MET P/Q MET W/Varh Control Control
BDC GAPC C MSQI CV MMXN ETP MMTR Q CBAY S SCBR

63 71 3 Control MET U MET Usqi MET UN

S SIMG S SIML S XCBR V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU
Optional Functions
51 I> 50BF I>BF 79 5(0->1)
PH4S PTOC CCS RBRF SMB RREC

NUMBER
NUMBEROFOFFEDERS
FEEDERS
IN THE
IN
NUMBER OF REB670
VERSION OF REB670 THE
STATION
STATION
(EXCLUDING
(EXCLUDING
BUS
REQUIRED BY THE SCHEME
BUS
COUPLER
COUPLERBAY)
BAY)
REB670(B21 – X02) 1-Phase, 12 Bays, 2 Zones for Double
11* 3
Busbar Station 12AI

REB670(B31 – X02) 1-Phase, 24 Bays, 2 Zones for Double

23* 3
Busbar Station 24AI

* With Just one CT in the Bus Section Bay

IEC13000226-2-en.vsd

IEC13000226 V2 EN-US

Figure 12: Configuration diagram for B31, configuration X02

64 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 3
Configuration

ZA REB670(B21-X03)/REB670(B31-X03)- PHASE L3
REB670(B21-X03)/REB670(B31-X03)- PHASE L2
ZB
REB670(B21-X03)/REB670(B31-X03)- PHASE L1

87B
QB1 BDC GAPC

87B DFR/SER DR
QB2
1
BDC GAPC DRP RDRE

87B
QA1 BDC GAPC

87B
QB1 BDC GAPC
2
87B
QB2 BDC GAPC

QB1

QA1
87B
QB2
QB1 BDC GAPC
N
87B 2 87B Id/I
QB2 BDC GAPC BZIS GGIO
QA1 N

MET I
C MMXU 1
QA1
51 I> 50BF I>BF 87B Id/I
PH4S PTOC CCS RBRF BUS PTRC

MET I
87B Id/I
C MMXU
2 BZNS PDIF

51 I> 50BF I>BF 87B Id/I

PH4S PTOC CCS RBRF BUS PTRC
87B Id/I 87B Id/I
BCZS PDIF N BZNS PDIF
51 I> 50BF I>BF 87B Id/I
PH4S PTOC CCS RBRF BUS PTRC

MET I
C MMXU

Other Functions in Library

87B MET Isqi MET P/Q MET W/Varh Control Control 63 71 3 Control
BDC GAPC C MSQI CV MMXN ETP MMTR Q CBAY S SCBR S SIMG S SIML S XCBR
MET U MET Usqi MET UN
V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU
Optional Functions
79 5(0->1)
SMB RREC

NUMBEROF
NUMBER OFFEEDERS
FEDERS IN
IN NUMBER OF REB670
VERSION OF REB670 THE STATION (EXCLUDING REQUIRED BY THE
BUS COUPLER BAY) SCHEME
REB670(B21 – X03) 1-Phase, 12 Bays, 2 Zones for Double Busbar
11* 3
Station with Breaker Failure and End-Fault Protection 12AI

REB670(B31 – X03) 1-Phase, 24 Bays, 2 Zones for Double Busbar

23* 3
Station with Breaker Failure and End-Fault Protection 24AI

* With Just one CT in the Bus Section Bay

IEC13000227-2-en.vsd

IEC13000227 V2 EN-US

Figure 13: Configuration diagram for B31, configuration X03

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 65

Application manual
66
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

Section 4 Analog inputs

4.1 Introduction SEMOD55003-5 v11

Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring, all
directional and differential functions, the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in
the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms
in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as
well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and voltage
transformers properly.

An AISVBAS reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values

reading. This analog channel's phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and
remaining analog channel's phase angle information will be shown in relation to this
analog input. During testing and commissioning of the IED, the reference channel can
be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input

module (TRM) type.

4.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55068-1 v1

SEMOD130348-4 v4

The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are depending

on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.

4.2.1 Setting of the phase reference channel SEMOD55055-5 v3

All phase angles are calculated in relation to a defined reference. An appropriate

analog input channel is selected and used as phase reference. The parameter
PhaseAngleRef defines the analog channel that is used as phase angle reference.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 67

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

4.2.1.1 Example SEMOD55055-11 v5

Usually the A phase-to-ground voltage connected to the first VT channel number of the
transformer input module (TRM) is selected as the phase reference. The first VT
channel number depends on the type of transformer input module.

For a TRM with 6 current and 6 voltage inputs the first VT channel is 7. The setting
PhaseAngleRef=7 shall be used if the phase reference voltage is connected to that
channel.

4.2.2 Setting of current channels SEMOD55055-16 v6

The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Unless
indicated otherwise, the main CTs are supposed to be Wye (star) connected and can be
connected with the grounding point to the object or from the object. This information
must be set in the IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A
positive value of current, power, and so on means that the quantity has the direction
into the object and a negative value means direction out from the object. For
directional functions the direction into the object is defined as Forward and the
direction out from the object is defined as Reverse. See Figure 14

A positive value of current, power, and so on (forward) means that the quantity flows
towards the object. A negative value of current, power, and so on (reverse) means that
the quantity flows away from the object. See Figure 14.

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse

Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456-2.vsd
ANSI05000456 V2 EN-US

Figure 14: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CT_WyePoint set to FromObject or

ToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the protected object and a
direction defined as Forward always is looking towards the protected object. The
following examples show the principle.

68 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

4.2.2.1 Example 1 SEMOD55055-23 v6

Two IEDs used for protection of two objects.

Line

Ip
Transformer Ip Ip
Line
Reverse Forward

Definition of direction
for directional functions
Transformer
Is Is
protection Line protection

IED IED

Setting of current input: Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as Line as
reference object. reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject" "FromObject"

ANSI05000753.vsd
ANSI05000753 V2 EN-US

Figure 15: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

Figure 15 shows the normal case where the objects have their own CTs. The settings
for CT direction shall be done according to the figure. To protect the line, direction of
the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward. This means that
the protection is looking towards the line.

4.2.2.2 Example 2 SEMOD55055-29 v7

Two IEDs used for protection of two objects and sharing a CT.

Figure 16: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

This example is similar to example 1, but here the transformer is feeding just one line
and the line protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. The CT
direction is set with different reference objects for the two IEDs though it is the same
current from the same CT that is feeding the two IEDs. With these settings, the
directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to look towards the
line.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 69

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

4.2.2.3 Example 3 SEMOD55055-35 v7

One IED used to protect two objects.

Transformer
Line

Forward Reverse

Definition of direction for

directional
Transformer and line functions
Line protection

Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as
reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject"

en05000461_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000461 V1 EN-US

Figure 17: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

In this example, one IED includes both transformer and line protections and the line
protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. For both current input
channels, the CT direction is set with the transformer as reference object. This means
that the direction Forward for the line protection is towards the transformer. To look
towards the line, the direction of the directional functions of the line protection must be
set to Reverse. The direction Forward/Reverse is related to the reference object that is
the transformer in this case.

When a function is set to Reverse and shall protect an object in reverse direction, it
shall be noted that some directional functions are not symmetrical regarding the reach
in forward and reverse direction. It is in first hand the reach of the directional criteria
that can differ. Normally it is not any limitation but it is advisable to have it in mind
and check if it is acceptable for the application in question.

If the IED has sufficient number of analog current inputs, an alternative solution is
shown in Figure 18. The same currents are fed to two separate groups of inputs and the
line and transformer protection functions are configured to the different inputs. The CT

70 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

direction for the current channels to the line protection is set with the line as reference
object and the directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to
protect the line.

Transformer

Line

Reverse Forward

Definition of direction for

directional
Transformer and line functions
Line protection

Setting of current input

for line functions:
Set parameter
CT_WyePoint with
Line as
Setting of current input Setting of current input reference object.
for transformer functions: for transformer functions: Correct setting is
Set parameter Set parameter "FromObject"
CT_WyePoint with CT_WyePoint with
Transformer as Transformer as
reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject"
en05000462_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000462 V1 EN-US

Figure 18: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 71

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

Busbar

2
Busbar
Protection

2 1

en06000196_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000196 V1 EN-US

Figure 19: Example how to set CT_WyePoint parameters in the IED

For busbar protection, it is possible to set the CT_WyePoint parameters in two ways.

The first solution will be to use busbar as a reference object. In that case for all CT
inputs marked with 1 in Figure 19, set CT_WyePoint = ToObject, and for all CT inputs
marked with 2 in Figure 19, set CT_WyePoint = FromObject.

The second solution will be to use all connected bays as reference objects. In that case
for all CT inputs marked with 1 in Figure 19, set CT_WyePoint = FromObject, and for
all CT inputs marked with 2 in Figure 19, set CT_WyePoint = ToObject.

72 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

Regardless which one of the above two options is selected, busbar differential
protection will behave correctly.

The main CT ratios must also be set. This is done by setting the two parameters CTsec
and CTprim for each current channel. For a 1000/5 A CT, the following settings shall
be used:
• CTprim = 1000 (value in A)
• CTsec =5 (value in A).

4.2.2.4 Examples on how to connect, configure and set CT inputs for most
commonly used CT connections SEMOD55055-296 v7

Figure 20 defines the marking of current transformer terminals commonly used around
the world:

In the SMAI function block, you have to set if the SMAI block is
measuring current or voltage. This is done with the parameter:
AnalogInputType: Current/Voltage. The ConnectionType: phase -phase/
phase-ground and GlobalBaseSel.

P1 P2
IPri

ISec (H1) (H2)

S1 (X1) S2 (X2)
x S2 (X2) x S1 (X1)

P2 P1
(H2) (H1)

a) b) c)

en06000641.vsd
IEC06000641 V1 EN-US

Figure 20: Commonly used markings of CT terminals

Where:
a) is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a square
indicates the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (that is, positive)
polarity
b) and are equivalent symbols and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for CTs. Note that
c) for these two cases the CT polarity marking is correct!

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 73

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices, the rated
secondary current of a CT has typically one of the following values:

• 1A
• 5A

However, in some cases, the following rated secondary currents are used as well:

• 2A
• 10A

The IED fully supports all of these rated secondary values.

It is recommended to:
• use 1A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with
1A and 2A secondary rating
• use 5A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with
5A and 10A secondary rating

4.2.2.5 Example on how to connect a wye connected three-phase CT set to the

IED SEMOD55055-352 v11

Figure 21 gives an example about the wiring of a wye connected two-phase CT set to
the IED. It gives an overview of the actions which are needed to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED
as well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

74 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

A B C
IED
1 2 4

I_C
I_B
I_A

3
SMAI_20
I_A
CT 600/5
I_B
Wye Connected
I_C

Protected Object

ANSI13000002-3-en.vsd
ANSI13000002 V3 EN-US

Figure 21: Wye connected three-phase CT set with wye point towards the protected object

Where:
1) The drawing shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a wye connected
three-phase CT set to the three CT inputs of the IED.
2) The current inputs are located in the TRM. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the
following setting values shall be entered for the example shown in Figure 21.

• CTprim=600A
• CTsec=5A
• CTStarPoint=ToObject

Ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter
(CTStarPoint=ToObject) as set in this example causes no change on the measured currents. In
other words, currents are already measured towards the protected object.
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 75

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

3) These three connections are the links between the three current inputs and the three input
channels of the preprocessing function block 4). Depending on the type of functions, which
need this current information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in
parallel to the same three physical CT inputs.
4) The preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all three input channels

• harmonic content for all three input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block. For this application most of
the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in power plants), then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.
Section SMAI in this manual provides information on adaptive frequency tracking for the signal
matrix for analogue inputs (SMAI).
5) AI3P in the SMAI function block is a grouped signal which contains all the data about the
phases A, B, C and neutral quantity; in particular the data about fundamental frequency
phasors, harmonic content and positive sequence, negative and zero sequence quantities are
available.
AI1, AI2, AI3, AI4 are the output signals from the SMAI function block which contain the
fundamental frequency phasors and the harmonic content of the corresponding input channels
of the preprocessing function block.
AIN is the signal which contains the fundamental frequency phasors and the harmonic content
of the neutral quantity. In this example, GRP2N is not connected so this data is calculated by
the preprocessing function block on the basis of the inputs GRP_A, GRP_B and GRP_C. If
GRP2N is connected, the data reflects the measured value of GRP2N.

Another alternative is to have the wye point of the three-phase CT set as shown in
figure 22:

76 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

A B C
IED

IC
IB
IA

3 4
1

SMAI_20_2
IC BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
IB ^GRP2_A 5 AI2
^GRP2_B AI3
^GRP2_C AI4
CT 800/1 IA ^GRP2N AIN
Wye Connected

Protected Object

ANSI11000026-5-en-.vsd

ANSI11000026 V5 EN-US

Figure 22: Wye connected three-phase CT set with its wye point away from the protected object

In the example, everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example
(Figure 21). The only difference is the setting of the parameter CTStarPoint of the used
current inputs on the TRM (item 2 in Figure 22 and 21):

• CTprim=600A
• CTsec=5A
• CTWyePoint=FromObject

The ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter as
set in this example will negate the measured currents in order to ensure that the
currents are measured towards the protected object within the IED.

A third alternative is to have the residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set
connected to the IED as shown in Figure 22.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 77

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

A B C
IED
6
IA

IB

IC
3

IN 1 4 SMAI2
1 BLOCK AI3P
2 AI 01 (I) ^GRP2_A AI1

IC ^GRP2_B AI2
3
^GRP2_C AI3
4 AI 02 (I)
^GRP2N AI4
IB 5 TYPE AIN
6 AI 03 (I)
CT 800/1
IA 7
Wye Connected
8 AI 04 (I)
5
9
2 10 AI 05 (I)
11
12 AI 06 (I)

Protected Object

ANSI06000644-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000644 V2 EN-US

Figure 23: Wye connected three-phase CT set with its wye point away from the protected object and the
residual/neutral current connected to the IED

Where:
1) Shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a wye connected three-phase CT
set to the three CT inputs of the IED.
2) Shows how to connect residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set to the fourth input
in the IED. It shall be noted that if this connection is not made, the IED will still calculate this
current internally by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents.
3) Is the TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current
inputs the following setting values shall be entered.

• CTprim=800A
• CTsec=1A
• CTStarPoint=FromObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-N

The ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter as set in
this example will have no influence on measured currents (that is, currents are already
measured towards the protected object).
4) Are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) and Application configuration tool
(ACT), which connects these three current inputs to the first three input channels on the
preprocessing function block 6). Depending on the type of functions, which need this current
information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three
CT inputs.
Table continues on next page

78 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

5) Is a connection made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) and Application configuration tool (ACT),
which connects the residual/neutral current input to the fourth input channel of the
preprocessing function block 6). Note that this connection in SMT shall not be done if the
residual/neutral current is not connected to the IED.
6) Is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all input channels

• harmonic content for all input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors of the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For
this application, most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations), then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

4.2.2.6 Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED SEMOD55055-392 v7

Figure 24 gives an example how to connect a delta connected three-phase CT set to the
IED. It gives an overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions in the IED as
well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 79

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

A B C IED
2

1 4

IC
IB
IA

SMAI_20
3
IA-IB
DAB Connected

IB-IC
CT 600/5
in Delta

IC-IA

ANSI11000027-2-en.vsd

Protected Object

ANSI11000027 V2 EN-US

Figure 24: Delta DAB connected three-phase CT set

80 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a delta connected three-phase CT
set to three CT inputs of the IED.
2) is the TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current
inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
CTprim=600A
CTsec=5A

• CTWyePoint=ToObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-Ph

3) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT),
which connect these three current inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing
function block 4). Depending on the type of functions which need this current information, more
then one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs.
4) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all three input channels

• harmonic content for all three input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block. For this application most of
the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

Another alternative is to have the delta connected CT set as shown in figure 25:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 81

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

A B C IED

2
4

IC
IB
IA

3 SMAI_20

IA-IC
DCA Connected

IB-IA
CT 800/1
in Delta

IC-IB

ANSI11000028-2-en.vsd

Protected Object

ANSI11000028 V2 EN-US

Figure 25: Delta DAC connected three-phase CT set

In this case, everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example,
except that for all used current inputs on the TRM the following setting parameters
shall be entered:

CTprim=800A

CTsec=1A

• CTWyePoint=ToObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-Ph

It is important to notice the references in SMAI. As inputs at Ph-Ph are expected to be

A-B, B-Crespectively C-A we need to tilt 180º by setting ToObject.

4.2.2.7 Example how to connect single-phase CT to the IED SEMOD55055-431 v8

Figure 26 gives an example how to connect the single-phase CT to the IED. It gives an
overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED as well.

82 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

IED
Protected Object

A B C

SMAI_20_2
1 BLOCK AI3P
(+) REVROT AI1
^GRP2_A AI2
INS
CT 1000/1

^GRP2_B AI3
a) (+) ^GRP2_C AI4
(-) ^GRP2_N AIN
(+)
b) (-)
INS
3
(-)
ANSI11000029-3-en.vsd
INP

ANSI11000029 V3 EN-US

Figure 26: Connections for single-phase CT input

Where:
1) shows how to connect single-phase CT input in the IED.
2) is TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current
inputs the following setting values shall be entered.
For connection (a) shown in Fgure 26:
CTprim= 1000 A
CTsec= 1A
CTWyePoint=ToObject

For connection (b) shown in Figure 26:

CTprim= 1000 A
CTsec= 1A
CTWyePoint=FromObject
3) shows the connection made in SMT tool, which connect this CT input to the fourth input
channel of the preprocessing function block 4).
4) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate values. The calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and
control functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the power plants) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 83

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

4.2.3 Relationships between setting parameter Base Current, CT

rated primary current and minimum pickup of a protection IED GUID-8EB19363-9178-4F04-A6AC-AF0C2F99C5AB v1

Note that for all line protection applications (e.g. distance protection or line differential
protection) the parameter Base Current (i.e. IBase setting in the IED) used by the
relevant protection function, shall always be set equal to the largest rated CT primary
current among all CTs involved in the protection scheme. The rated CT primary current
value is set as parameter CTPrim under the IED TRM settings.

For all other protection applications (e.g. generator, shunt reactor, shunt capacitor and
transformer protection) it is typically desirable to set IBase parameter equal to the rated
current of the protected object. However this is only recommended to do if the rated
current of the protected object is within the range of 40% to 120% of the selected CT
rated primary current. If for any reason (e.g. high maximum short circuit current) the
rated current of the protected object is less than 40% of the rated CT primary current, it
is strongly recommended to set the parameter IBase in the IED to be equal to the
largest rated CT primary current among all CTs involved in the protection scheme and
installed on the same voltage level. This will effectively make the protection scheme
less sensitive; however, such measures are necessary in order to avoid possible
problems with loss of the measurement accuracy in the IED.

Regardless of the applied relationship between the IBase parameter and the rated CT
primary current, the corresponding minimum pickup of the function on the CT
secondary side must always be verified. It is strongly recommended that the minimum
pickup of any instantaneous protection function (e.g. differential, restricted earth fault,
distance, instantaneous overcurrent, etc.) shall under no circumstances be less than 4%
of the used IED CT input rating (i.e. 1A or 5A). This corresponds to 40mA secondary
for IED 1A rated inputs and to 200mA secondary for IED 5A rated inputs used by the
function. This shall be individually verified for all current inputs involved in the
protection scheme.

Note that exceptions from the above 4% rule may be acceptable for very special
applications (e.g. when Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC is involved in the protection
scheme).

4.2.4 Setting of voltage channels SEMOD55055-44 v4

As the IED uses primary system quantities, the main VT ratios must be known to the
IED. This is done by setting the two parameters VTsec and VTprim for each voltage
channel. The phase-to-phase value can be used even if each channel is connected to a
phase-to-ground voltage from the VT.

84 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

4.2.4.1 Example SEMOD55055-47 v3

Consider a VT with the following data:

132kV 120V
3 3
EQUATION1937 V1 EN-US (Equation 1)

The following setting should be used: VTprim=132 (value in kV) VTsec=120 (value in
V)

4.2.4.2 Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for most
commonly used VT connections SEMOD55055-60 v6

Figure 27 defines the marking of voltage transformer terminals commonly used around
the world.

+ + A a A da A a
(H1) (X1) (H1) (X1) (H1) (X1)
VPri VSec

N n N dn B b
(H2) (X2) (H2) (X2) (H2) (X2)
a) b) c) d)

ANSI11000175_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000175 V1 EN-US

Figure 27: Commonly used markings of VT terminals

Where:
a) is the symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a square
indicate the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (positive) polarity
b) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-
ground connected VTs
c) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for open delta
connected VTs
d) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-phase
connected VTs

It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices the rated
secondary voltage of a VT has typically one of the following values:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 85

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

• 100 V
• 110 V
• 115 V
• 120 V
• 230 V

The IED fully supports all of these values and most of them will be shown in the
following examples.

4.2.4.3 Examples on how to connect a three phase-to-ground connected VT to

the IED SEMOD55055-87 v9

Figure 28 gives an example on how to connect the three phase-to-ground connected

VT to the IED. It gives an overview of required actions by the user in order to make
this measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the
IED.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for
the delivered IED.

86 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

A
B IED
C 2
5
3
66 kV
1 13
3
110V 14 AI 07 (I) SMAI2

3 15 BLOCK AI3P

16 AI 08 (V) ^GRP2_A AI1

17 ^GRP2_B AI2
18 AI 09 (V) ^GRP2_C AI3
66 kV 19 #Not used ^GRP2N AI4

3 20 AI 10 (V) TYPE AIN

110V 21
3 22 AI 11 (V)
4
23
24 AI 12 (V)

66 kV
3
110V
3

ANSI06000599-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000599 V2 EN-US

Figure 28: A Three phase-to-ground connected VT

L1

L2 IED

2
3
132 kV
2 1
110V
2
SMAI2
BLOCK AI2P
^GRP2L1 AI1
^GRP2L2 5 AI2
132 kV ^GRP2L1L2 AI3
^GRP2N AI4
2 AIN
110V
2 4

IEC16000140-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000140 V1 EN-US

Figure 29: A two phase-to-earth connected VT

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 87

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect three secondary phase-to-ground voltages to three VT inputs on the
IED
2) is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. For these three voltage inputs, the
following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =132 kV
VTsec = 110 V
Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual VT.

66
66 3
=
110 110
3
EQUATION1903 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)

3) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect these three voltage
inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending on the
type of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block
might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs.
4) shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing
block is not connected in SMT tool. Thus the preprocessing block will automatically calculate
3Vo inside by vectorial sum from the three phase to ground voltages connected to the first
three input channels of the same preprocessing block. Alternatively, the fourth input channel
can be connected to open delta VT input, as shown in Figure 31.
5) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all input channels

• harmonic content for all input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for
sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
However the following settings shall be set as shown here:
VBase=66 kV (that is, rated Ph-Ph voltage)
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

4.2.4.4 Example on how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED SEMOD55055-134 v7

Figure 30 gives an example how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED.

It gives an overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.
It shall be noted that this VT connection is only used on lower voltage levels (that is,
rated primary voltage below 40 kV).

88 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

B
C
13.8kV 13.8kV IED
120V 120V

2
5
3
1 13
14 AI 07(I)
SMAI2
15 BLOCK AI3P
16 AI 08(V) ^GRP2_A (A-B) AI1

17 ^GRP2_B (B-C) AI2

AI 09(V) ^GRP2_C (C-A) AI3
18
#Not Used ^GRP2N AI4
19
TYPE AIN
20 AI 10(V)
21
22 AI 11(V) 4
23
24 AI 12(V)

ANSI06000600-3-en.vsd

ANSI06000600 V3 EN-US

Figure 30: A Two phase-to-phase connected VT

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of a phase-to-phase VT to the VT inputs on the IED
2) is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these three
voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim=13.8 kV
VTsec=120 V
Please note that inside the IED only ratio of these two parameters is used.
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 89

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

3) are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT), Application configuration tool
(ACT), which connects these three voltage inputs to first three input channels of the
preprocessing function block 5). Depending on the type of functions, which need this voltage
information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three
VT inputs
4) shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing block
is not connected in SMT. Note. If the parameters VA, VB, VC, VN should be used the open delta
must be connected here.
5) Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For
this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However
the following settings shall be set as shown here:
ConnectionType=Ph-Ph
VBase=13.8 kV
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be
set accordingly.

4.2.4.5 Example on how to connect an open delta VT to the IED for high
impedance grounded or ungrounded networks SEMOD55055-163 v9

Figure 31 gives an example about the wiring of an open delta VT to the IED for high
impedance grounded or ungrounded power systems. It shall be noted that this type of
VT connection presents a secondary voltage proportional to 3V0 to the IED.

In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Vo will be
equal to:

3Vo = 3 × VPh - Ph = 3 × VPh - Gnd

EQUATION1922-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 3)

The primary rated voltage of an open Delta VT is always equal to VPh-Gnd. Three series
connected VT secondary windings gives a secondary voltage equal to three times the
individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of open delta
VTs quite often have a secondary rated voltage equal to one third of the rated phase-to-
phase VT secondary voltage (110/3V in this particular example).

Figure 31 gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this
measurement available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED
as well.

90 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

B IED

C
2

6.6kV
13
3 AI 07 (I) 5
110V 14
3 15
16 AI 08 (V)
17 SMAI2
18 AI 09 (V) BLOCK AI3P
6.6kV 19 3 ^GRP2_A AI1
1 # Not Used
20 AI 10 (V)
3 # Not Used ^GRP2_B AI2
110V 21 # Not Used ^GRP2_C AI3
3 AI 11 (V)
+3Vo 22 ^GRP2N AI4
23 TYPE AIN
24 AI 12 (V)
4
6.6kV
3
110V
3

ANSI06000601-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000601 V2 EN-US

Figure 31: Open delta connected VT in high impedance grounded power system

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 91

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of the open delta VT to one VT input on the IED.

+3Vo shall be connected to the IED

2) is the TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input the
following setting values shall be entered:

VTprim = 3 × 6.6 = 11.43kV

EQUATION1923 V1 EN-US (Equation 4)

110
VT sec = 3 × = 110V
3
EQUATION1924 V1 EN-US (Equation 5)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio
of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.

6.6
3 × 6.6 3
=
110 110
3
EQUATION1925 V1 EN-US (Equation 6)

3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT tool or ACT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool
(ACT), which connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing
function block 5).
5) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog input and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions
within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration
tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the generating stations ) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall
be set accordingly.

92 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

4.2.4.6 Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for low
impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems SEMOD55055-199 v6

Figure 32 gives an example about the connection of an open delta VT to the IED for
low impedance grounded or solidly grounded power systems. It shall be noted that this
type of VT connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3V0 to the IED.

In case of a solid ground fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Vo will be
equal to:

VPh - Ph
3Vo = = VPh - Gnd
3
EQUATION1927-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 7)

The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to VPh-Gnd. Therefore, three
series connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal only to
one individual VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such
open delta VTs quite often has a secondary rated voltage close to rated phase-to-phase
VT secondary voltage, that is, 115V or 115/√3V as in this particular example. Figure
32 gives an overview of the actions which are needed to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 93

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Analog inputs

B IED
C
2

138kV
13 5
3 14 AI07 (I)
115V
15
3
16 AI08 (V)
17 SMAI2
18 AI09 (V) BLOCK AI3P
138kV 1 19 3
# Not Used ^GRP2_A AI1
3 20 AI10 (V) # Not Used ^GRP2_B AI2
115V 21
# Not Used ^GRP2_C AI3
3 +3Vo 22 AI11 (V)
^GRP2N AI4
23
AI12 (V) TYPE AIN
24
4
138kV
3
115V
3
ANSI06000602-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000602 V2 EN-US

Figure 32: Open delta connected VT in low impedance or solidly grounded power system

94 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in the
IED.

+3Vo shall be connected to the IED.

2) is TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input
the following setting values shall be entered:

138
VTprim = 3× = 138 kV
3
EQUATION1928 V1 EN-US (Equation 8)

115
VT sec = 3× = 115V
3
EQUATION1929 V1 EN-US (Equation 9)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that
the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open
delta VT.

138
138 3
=
115 115
3
EQUATION1930 V1 EN-US (Equation 10)

3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is
not connected in SMT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect this voltage
input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 4).
5) preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental
frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as
reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control
functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in
the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing settings can be
left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required
only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters
DFTReference shall be set accordingly.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 95

Application manual
96
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 5
Local HMI

Section 5 Local HMI AMU0600442 v14

ANSI13000239-2-en.vsd
ANSI13000239 V2 EN-US

Figure 33: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 97

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Local HMI

• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.1 Display GUID-55739D4F-1DA5-4112-B5C7-217AAF360EA5 v11

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a
resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. The character size can vary.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

98 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 5
Local HMI

IEC15000270-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000270 V1 EN-US

Figure 34: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 99

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Local HMI

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN-US

Figure 35: Function button panel

The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication
LEDs. Three indication LED pages are available.

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN-US

Figure 36: Indication LED panel

The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each
panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button.
Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic
width that depends on the label string length.

100 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 5
Local HMI

5.2 LEDs AMU0600427 v13

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Normal, Pickup
and Trip.

There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each
three-color LED are divided into three panels.

There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in
one LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be
indicated since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with
red being the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one panel there
is an indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another panel there is an
indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes priority and is lit. The
LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with
the LHMI or PCM600.

Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage
button. Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged
LED is indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down
arrow buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED. Pressing
the ESC button exits from information pop-ups as well as from the LED panel as such.

The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is
lit. If there are un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To
acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description
of this menu for details).

There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and .
These LEDs can indicate the status of two arbitrary binary signals by configuring the
OPENCLOSE_LED function block. For instance, OPENCLOSE_LED can be
connected to a circuit breaker to indicate the breaker open/close status on the LEDs.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 101

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Local HMI

IEC16000076-1-en.vsd
IEC16000076 V1 EN-US

Figure 37: OPENCLOSE_LED connected to SXCBR

5.3 Keypad AMU0600428 v17

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views
or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications,
provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.

102 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 5
Local HMI

24

1
23
2
18

3
19

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

ANSI15000157-1-en.vsdx

ANSI15000157 V1 EN-US

Figure 38: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 103

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Local HMI

19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs

5.4 Local HMI functionality

5.4.1 Protection and alarm indication GUID-09CCB9F1-9B27-4C12-B253-FBE95EA537F5 v15

Protection indicators
The protection indicator LEDs are Normal, Pickup and Trip.
Table 9: Normal LED (green)
LED state Description
Off Auxiliary supply voltage is disconnected.
On Normal operation.
Flashing Internal fault has occurred.

Table 10: PickUp LED (yellow)

LED state Description
Off Normal operation.
On A protection function has picked up and an indication message is displayed.
The pick up indication is latching and must be reset via communication,
LHMI or binary input on the LEDGEN component. To open the reset menu
on the LHMI, press .

Flashing The IED is in test mode and protection functions are blocked, or the
IEC61850 protocol is blocking one or more functions.
The indication disappears when the IED is no longer in test mode and
blocking is removed. The blocking of functions through the IEC61850
protocol can be reset in Main menu/Test/Reset IEC61850 Mod. The yellow
LED changes to either On or Off state depending on the state of operation.

104 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 5
Local HMI

Table 11: Trip LED (red)

LED state Description
Off Normal operation.
On A protection function has tripped. An indication message is displayed if the
auto-indication feature is enabled in the local HMI.
The trip indication is latching and must be reset via communication, LHMI or
binary input on the LEDGEN component. To open the reset menu on the
LHMI, press .

Flasing Configuration mode.

Alarm indicators
The 15 programmable three-color LEDs are used for alarm indication. An individual
alarm/status signal, connected to any of the LED function blocks, can be assigned to
one of the three LED colors when configuring the IED.
Table 12: Alarm indications
LED state Description
Off Normal operation. All activation signals are off.
On • Follow-S sequence: The activation signal is on.
• LatchedColl-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has
not been acknowledged.
• LatchedAck-F-S sequence: The indication has been acknowledged, but the
activation signal is still on.
• LatchedAck-S-F sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication
has not been acknowledged.
• LatchedReset-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication
has not been acknowledged.

Flashing • Follow-F sequence: The activation signal is on.

• LatchedAck-F-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication
has not been acknowledged.
• LatchedAck-S-F sequence: The indication has been acknowledged, but the
activation signal is still on.

5.4.2 Parameter management GUID-5EE466E3-932B-4311-9FE1-76ECD8D6E245 v9

The LHMI is used to access the relay parameters. Three types of parameters can be
read and written.
• Numerical values
• String values
• Enumerated values

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 105

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Local HMI

Numerical values are presented either in integer or in decimal format with minimum
and maximum values. Character strings can be edited character by character.
Enumerated values have a predefined set of selectable values.

5.4.3 Front communication GUID-FD72A445-C8C1-4BFE-90E3-0AC78AE17C45 v11

The RJ-45 port in the LHMI enables front communication.

• The green uplink LED on the left is lit when the cable is successfully connected to
the port.
• The yellow LED is not used; it is always off.

IEC13000280-1-en.vsd
GUID-94AF2358-6905-4782-B37B-ACD3DCBF7F9C V1 EN-US

Figure 39: RJ-45 communication port and green indicator LED

1 RJ-45 connector
2 Green indicator LED

The default IP address for the IED front port is 10.1.150.3 and the corresponding
subnetwork mask is 255.255.254.0. It can be set through the local HMI path Main
menu/Configuration/Communication/Ethernet configuration/FRONT port/
AP_FRONT.

Do not connect the IED front port to a LAN. Connect only a single
local PC with PCM600 to the front port. It is only intended for
temporary use, such as commissioning and testing.

106 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Section 6 Differential protection

6.1 Busbar differential protection SEMOD121185-1 v2

6.1.1 Identification
SEMOD130380-4 v4

Two-zone busbar differential protections, four-or-eight three-phase CTs

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Busbar protection 2Z-3Ph-4/8CT, BZNTPDIF_x, 87B
differential protection function (x = A, B)
3Id/I

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN-US

Busbar protection 2Z-3Ph-4/8CT, BTCZPDIF 87B

check zone protection function
3Id/I

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN-US

Busbar protection 2Z-3Ph-4/8CT, BUTPTRC_Bx 87B

bay function (1≤x≤4 or
1≤x≤8) 3Id/I

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN-US

Busbar protection 2Z-3Ph-4/8CT, BZITGGIO 87B

zone interconnection function
3Id/I

SYMBOL-JJ V1 EN-US

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 107

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

GUID-F771BD7B-53F1-437A-A41C-7266323DC02F v1

Two-zone busbar differential protections, twelve-or-twenty-four single-

phase CTs
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Busbar protection 2Z-1Ph-12/24CT, BZNSPDIF_x, 87B
differential protection function (x = A, B) Id/I
IEC16000110 V1 EN-US

Busbar protection 2Z-1Ph-12/24CT, BCZSPDIF 87B

check zone protection function Id/I
IEC16000110 V1 EN-US

Busbar protection 2Z-1Ph-12/24CT, BUSPTRC_Bx, 87B

bay function (1≤x≤12 or Id/I
1≤x≤24)
IEC16000110 V1 EN-US

Busbar protection 2Z-1Ph-12/24CT, BZISGGIO 87B

zone interconnection function Id/I
IEC16000110 V1 EN-US

GUID-23F2558B-FB4A-4912-9EF9-F93706F32213 v1

Six-zone busbar differential protection, twenty-four, single-phase CT

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Busbar protection 6Z-1Ph-24CT, BDZSGAPC 87B
main function
Id/I
IEC16000110 V1 EN-US

Busbar protection 6Z-1Ph-24CT, BZNPDIF_Zx 87B

differential protection function (1≤ x ≤6)
Id/I
IEC16000110 V1 EN-US

Busbar protection 6Z-1Ph-24CT, BCZPDIF 87B

check zone protection function
Id/I
IEC16000110 V1 EN-US

Busbar protection 6Z-1Ph-24CT, BFPTRC_Fx 87B

feeder bay function (1≤ x ≤24)
Id/I
IEC16000110 V1 EN-US

Busbar protection 6Z-1Ph-24CT, BICPTRC_x 87B

bus interconnector bay function (1≤ x ≤5)
Id/I
IEC16000110 V1 EN-US

108 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

SEMOD130390-4 v4

Status of primary switching object for busbar protection zone selection

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Status of primary switching object for BDCGAPC - -
Busbar protection zone selection (128 instances)

6.1.2 Basic applications SEMOD127448-1 v1

6.1.2.1 General M12097-3 v3

Basic types of applications for REB670 IED are shown and described in this chapter.
For these applications usually three phase version of the IED, with two differential
zones and four (or even eight) 3-phase CT inputs, is used.

6.1.2.2 Meshed corner application and T-connection application M12098-3 v4

The REB670 general differential function is suitable for application on mesh-corner

arrangements. Mesh corners might have four or even up to six CT inputs and are
basically simple single busbar arrangements. A similar application will occur when a
T-protection is required for breaker-and-a-half or ring busbar arrangements.

152

252

352

ANSI11000237-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000237 V1 EN-US

Figure 40: Example of REB670 application on T-connection

6.1.3 Busbar protection applications SEMOD127456-1 v2

A busbar protection scheme design depends very much on the substation arrangement.
Complexity of the scheme can drastically vary from station to station. Typical

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 109

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

applications problems, for the most common busbar protection schemes, are described
in this chapter.

6.1.3.1 General M12102-3 v4

A busbar protection is a device which protects busbars against short-circuits and

ground-faults. In the early development of electricity systems, no separate protection
device was used for busbar protection. Remote end line protections were used as main
protection for busbar faults. With the increased short-circuit power in the network
separate differential IEDs for busbar protection have to be installed in order to limit the
damage caused by the primary fault currents. At the same time, it is also a must to
secure the network stability, as a delayed tripping for busbar faults can also lead to
network instability, pole slip of near-by generators and even total system collapse.
M12103-3 v3

For bus zone protection applications, it is extremely important to have good security
since an unwanted operation might have severe consequences. The unwanted operation
of the bus differential IED will have the similar effect from the operational point of
view as simultaneous faults on all power system elements connected to the bus. On the
other hand, the IED has to be dependable as well. Failure to operate or even slow
operation of the differential IED, in case of an actual internal fault, can have serious
consequences. Human injuries, power system blackout, transient instability or
considerable damage to the surrounding substation equipment and the close-by
generators are some of the possible outcomes.

Therefore, Busbar differential protection must fulfill the following requirements:

1. Must be absolutely stable during all external faults. External faults are much more
common than internal faults. The magnitude of external faults can be equal to the
stations maximum short circuit capacity. Heavy CT-saturation due to high DC
components and/or remanence at external faults must not lead to maloperation of
the busbar differential protection. The security against misoperation must be
extremely high due to the heavy impact on the overall network service.
2. Must have as short tripping time as possible in order to minimize the damage,
minimize the danger and possible injury to the people who might be working in
the station at the moment of internal fault, and secure the network stability.
3. Must be able to detect and securely operate for internal faults even with heavy CT
saturation. The protection must also be sensitive enough to operate for minimum
fault currents, which sometimes can be lower than the maximum load currents.
4. Must be able to selectively detect faults and trip only the faulty part of the busbar
system.
5. Must be secure against maloperation due to auxiliary contact failure, possible
human mistakes and faults in the secondary circuits and so on.

110 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

6.1.3.2 Differential protection M12106-3 v4

The basic concept for any differential IED is that the sum of all currents, which flow to
and from the protection zone, must be equal to zero. If this is not the case, an internal
fault has occurred. This is practically a direct use of well known Kirchhoffss first law.
However, busbar differential IEDs do not measure directly the primary currents in the
high voltage conductors, but the secondary currents of magnetic core current
transformers (CTs), which are installed in all high-voltage bays connected to the
busbar.

Therefore, the busbar differential IED is unique in this respect, that usually quite a few
CTs, often with very different ratios and classes, are connected to the same differential
protection zone. Because the magnetic core current transformers are non-linear
measuring devices, under high current conditions in the primary CT circuits the
individual secondary CT currents can be drastically different from the original primary
currents. This is caused by CT saturation, a phenomenon that is well known to
protection engineers. During the time when any of the current transformer connected to
the differential IED is saturated, the sum of all CT secondary currents will not be equal
to zero and the IED will measure false differential current. This phenomenon is
especially predominant for busbar differential protection applications, since it has the
strong tendency to cause unwanted operation of the differential IED.

Remanence in the magnetic core of a current transformer is an additional factor, which

can influence the secondary CT current. It can improve or reduce the capability of the
current transformer to properly transfer the primary current to the secondary side.
However, the CT remanence is a random parameter and it is not possible in practice to
precisely predict it.

Another, and maybe less known, transient phenomenon appears in the CT secondary
circuit at the instant when a high primary current is interrupted. It is particularly
dominant if the HV circuit breaker chops the primary current before its natural zero
crossing. This phenomenon is manifested as an exponentially decaying DC current
component in the CT secondary circuit. This secondary DC current has no
corresponding primary current in the power system. The phenomenon can be simply
explained as a discharge of the magnetic energy stored in the magnetic core of the
current transformer during the high primary current condition. Depending on the type
and design of the current transformer this discharging current can have a time constant
in the order of a hundred milliseconds.

Consequently, all these phenomena have to be considered during the design stage of a
busbar differential IED in order to prevent the unwanted operation of the IED during
external fault conditions.

The analog generation of the busbar differential IEDs ( KA2, 87B, RADHA, RADSS,
REB 103) generally solves all these problems caused by the CT non-linear
characteristics by using the galvanic connection between the secondary circuits of all

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 111

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

CTs connected to the protected zone. These IEDs are designed in such a way that the
current distribution through the IED differential branch during all transient conditions
caused by non-linearity of the CTs will not cause the unwanted operation of the
differential IED. In order to obtain the required secondary CT current distribution, the
resistive burden in the individual CT secondary circuits must be kept below the pre-
calculated value in order to guaranty the stability of the IED.

In new numerical protection IEDs, all CT and VT inputs are galvanically separated
from each other. All analog input quantities are sampled with a constant sampling rate
and these discreet values are then transferred to corresponding numerical values (that
is, AD conversion). After these conversions, only the numbers are used in the
protection algorithms. Therefore, for the modern numerical differential IEDs the
secondary CT circuit resistance might not be a decisive factor any more.

The important factor for the numerical differential IED is the time available to the IED
to make the measurements before the CT saturation, which will enable the IED to take
the necessary corrective actions. This practically means that the IED has to be able to
make the measurement and the decision during the short period of time, within each
power system cycle, when the CTs are not saturated. From the practical experience,
obtained from heavy current testing, this time, even under extremely heavy CT
saturation, is for practical CTs around two milliseconds. Because of this, it was decided
to take this time as the design criterion in REB 670 IED, for the minimum acceptable
time before saturation of a practical magnetic core CT. Thus, the CT requirements for
REB 670 IED are kept to an absolute minimum. Refer to section "Rated equivalent
secondary e.m.f. requirements" for more details.

However, if the necessary preventive action has to be taken for every single CT input
connected to the differential IED, the IED algorithm would be quite complex. Thus, it
was decided to re-use the ABB excellent experience from the analog percentage
restrained differential protection IED (that is, RADSS and REB 103), and use only the
following three quantities as the inputs into the differential algorithm in the numerical
IED design:

1. incoming current (that is, sum of all currents which are entering the protection
zone)
2. outgoing current (that is, sum of all currents which are leaving the protection zone)
3. differential current (that is, sum of all currents connected to the protection zone)

These three quantities can be easily calculated numerically from the raw sample values
(that is, twenty times within each power system cycle in the IED) from all analog CT
inputs connected to the differential zone. At the same time, they have extremely
valuable physical meaning, which clearly describes the condition of the protected zone
during all operating conditions.

112 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

By using the properties of only these three quantities, a new patented differential
algorithm has been formed in the IED. This differential algorithm is completely stable
for all external faults. All problems caused by the non-linearity of the CTs are solved in
an innovative numerical way. Meanwhile, very fast tripping time, typically 11 ms, can
be commonly obtained for heavy internal faults.
SEMOD127483-4 v4

Discriminating zones in the IED includes a sensitive operational level. This sensitive
operational level is designed to be able to detect busbar ground faults in low impedance
edgrounded power systems (that is, power systems where the ground-fault current is
limited to a certain level, typically between 300 A and 2000 A by neutral point reactor
or resistor) or for some other special applications where increased sensitivity is
required. Operation and operating characteristic of the sensitive differential protection
can be set independently from the operating characteristic of the main differential
protection. The sensitive differential level is blocked as soon as the total incoming
current exceeds the pre-set level. By appropriate setting then it can be insured that this
sensitive level is blocked for external phase-to-phase or three-phase faults, which can
cause CT saturation. Comparison between these two characteristics is shown in
Figure 41.

Sensitive
differential
protection
Id [Primary Amps]

Operate
region

Differential protection
operation characteristic
DiffOperLevel
SensOperLevel SensIinBlock
s=0.53

Iin [Primary Amps]

IEC06000142-2-en.vsdx
IEC06000142 V2 EN-US

Figure 41: Differential protection operation characteristic

where

Iin RMS value of the incoming current into the differential protection zone

Id RMS value of the differential current from the differential protection zone

s = 0.53 operating slope for the differential function (fixed in the algorithm).

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 113

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

Additionally the sensitive differential protection can be time delayed and it must be
externally enabled by a binary signal (that is, from external open delta VT overvoltage
relay or power transformer neutral point overcurrent relay).

Please refer to the technical reference manual for more details about the working
principles of the differential function algorithm.

6.1.3.3 Check zone protection M12474-3 v4

An integrated overall differential zone, so-called check zone, is available for multiple
busbar stations to secure stability of the busbar differential protection, in case of
problem with disconnector auxiliary contacts (stuck contacts or wiring problems).

When CT-circuits are switched, depending on the position of the busbar disconnectors,
there is a possibility that some of the CT secondary circuits can be open circuited by a
mistake. At the same time this can cause unwanted operation of the differential
protection scheme.

Therefore, an external check zone is often required for a traditional high impedance
busbar protection scheme when switching in CT-circuit is done. The check zone is
fixed and has no switching of CTs in any of the outgoing circuits and is not connected
to busbar section and busbar coupler bays. The check zone, will detect faults anywhere
in the substation but cannot distinguish in which part of the station the fault is located.
When the check zone detects a fault it gives a release signal to the busbar protection
relays in all individual, discriminating zones. The busbar protection discriminating
zones will then trip the part of the substation that is faulty. However, this principle
creates not only a high cost as separate CT cores are required, but also a need for extra
cabling and a separate check zone differential relay.

In REB670, an internal built-in check zone in the IED is provided, therefore there is no
need for such costly external check zone. This is possible, mainly due to the following
facts:
• the CT switching is made only in software, and CT secondary current circuits do
not include any auxiliary contacts, as shown in Figure 63.
• the IED is always supplied with a special zone and phase selective “Open CT
Detection” algorithm, which can instantly block the differential function in case of
an open CT secondary circuits caused by accidents or mistakes.

Consequently a very cost effective solution can be achieved producing extra savings
during scheme engineering, installation, commissioning, service and maintenance.

Operating characteristics for the check zone can be set independently from the two
discriminating zones. However, it is to be observed that the check zone has slightly
different operating characteristic from the usual discriminating zones. For the check

114 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

zone the outgoing current is used as stabilizing current instead of total incoming
current in order to guarantee the check zone operation for all possible operating
conditions in the station. The check zone operating characteristic is shown in Figure
42. Note that the check zone minimum differential operational level OperLevel shall be
set equal to or less than the corresponding operating level of the usual discriminating
zones.

Id [Primary Amps]
Operate
region

OperLevel
Slope (settable)

Iout [Primary Amps]

IEC06000062-2-en.vsdx
IEC06000062 V2 EN-US

Figure 42: Check zone operation characteristic

The built-in check zone feature has to be enabled (that is, setting parameter Operation
shall be set to On) in order to fully enable the check zone. For substations where
traditional “CT switching” is not required (that is, single busbar station or one-and-half
breaker station), a check zone must not be used. For such applications, the check zone
shall be disabled by the setting parameter Operation to Off.

The check zone measures only the currents from the bays which leaves the station.
Exactly which CTs shall be measured by the check zone varies, depending on the
version of the IED used:
• In two-zone busbar differential protections, it is freely settable by using the setting
CheckZoneSel at each bay function block.
• In six-zone busbar differential protection, the currents of all active feeder bays are
measured unconditionally by the check zone, if the check zone is able to operate.
By an active feeder, we mean a feeder bay which is not deactivated, that is, neither
its operMode is Off nor it is out of service.

And the check zone supervises differential protection zones. Exactly which differential
protection zones shall be supervised by the operation of the check zone also varies,
depending on the version of the IED used:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 115

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

• In two-zone busbar differential protections, freely settable by using a setting

CheckZoneSup at each zone function block,
• In six-zone busbar differential protection, all active protection zones are
supervised unconditionally by the check zone, if the check zone is able to operate.
By an active protection zone, we mean a zone which both is enabled and used/
connected to at least one CT.

Moreover, there are some additional features only available for six-zone busbar
differential protection, for example, the possibilities to externally block the check zone
operation.

Please also refer to “Check zone protection” in Technical reference manual, for more
details about the check zone.

6.1.3.4 Switch status monitoring M12107-3 v4

The so-called CT switching (that is, zone selection) is required in situation when one
particular circuit (that is, bay) can be connected to different busbars by individual
disconnectors. Typical example is a station with double busbars with or without
transfer bus as shown in Figure 62, where any feeder bay can be connected to any of
the two buses. In such cases the status of all busbar disconnectors and all transfer
disconnectors shall be given to the busbar protection.

Traditionally, the CT switching has been done in CT secondary circuits. However, with
REB670 this is not the case. All necessary zone selection (that is, CT switching) is
done in software. Therefore, the CT secondary circuits are always intact and without
any auxiliary relay contacts.

To provide proper zone selection (that is, busbar replica) the position information from
all relevant primary switches (that is, disconnectors and/or circuit breakers) must be
given to the IED. This is typically done by connecting two auxiliary contacts (that is,
normaly open and normaly closed aux contacts) from each primary switch to the IED
binary inputs (that is, optocouplers). In REB670 configuration one Switch Status
function block shall be associated with each primary switching device. This block is
then used internally to derive the primary object status and then pass this information
to the busbar protection internal zone selection logic.
SEMOD127523-5 v3

Auxiliary contact requirements for disconnectors and circuit breakers

The position of the primary switching object is typically obtained via two auxiliary
contacts of the primary apparatus. The first auxiliary contact indicates that primary
device is closed. In protection literature it is called by different names as stated below:

116 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

• Normally open auxiliary contact

• “a” contact (that is, 52a)
• “closed”

The second auxiliary contact indicates that primary device is open. In protection
literature it is called by different names as stated below:

• Normally closed auxiliary contact

• “b” contact (that is, 52b)
• “open”

Typically both contacts are used to provide position indication and supervision for
busbar protection.
SEMOD127523-18 v2

Minimum contact requirements

The minimum requirement for the busbar replica is the record of the disconnector
position by using just one auxiliary contact, either "normally open" or "normally
closed" type. However recording a pair of auxiliary contacts, representing the “open”
and “close” position, offer additional features which can improve the reliability of the
bus replica including supervision possibilities.
SEMOD127523-21 v3

Auxiliary contact evaluation logic

Two logic schemes can be found.

• Scheme1_RADSS "If not OPEN then CLOSED" SEMOD127523-24 v3

As the name of the scheme suggests, only when the auxiliary contacts signal clean
open position ("normally open auxiliary (NO) contact input" = inactive and "normally
closed auxiliary (NC) contact input" = active), the disconnector is taken to be open. For
all other signal combinations the disconnector is considered to be closed. This scheme
does not pose any special requirements to the auxiliary contact timing. Only the
disconnector NC contact must open before the disconnector main contact is within
arcing distance. The time during which the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE signal inputs
disagree (that is, both binary inputs are active or both are inactive) is monitored by the
isolator supervision function. The maximum time allowed before an alarm is given can
be set according to the disconnector timing.

• Scheme2_INX "Closed or open if clear indication available otherwise

last position saved" SEMOD127523-27 v4

As the name of the scheme suggests, only when the auxiliary contacts signal clean
“open” or clean “closed” position, disconnector is considered to be open respectively
closed. However this poses the stringent requirements on the auxiliary contacts that the

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 117

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

PSCLOSED signal must become active a certain time (>150 ms) before current starts
flowing for example, through arcing. Otherwise this current will not be taken into
account in the busbar protection and this can result in a maloperation. Therefore, good
timing of two auxiliary contacts is definitely required.

The time during which the POSOPEN and POSCLOSED signals disagree (that is, both
binary inputs are active or both are inactive) is monitored by the isolator supervision
function for both of the above two schemes. The maximum time allowed before an
alarm is given can be set according to the disconnector timing.

Table 13 and the following two figures summarize the properties of these two schemes.
Table 13: Treatment of primary object auxiliary contact status within BBP in REB670
Primary equipment Status in busbar protection Alarm facility
Normally Normally when when Alarm after Information visible on
Open Closed “Scheme 1 “Scheme 2 settable time local HMI
auxiliary auxiliary RADSS” INX” delay
contact status contact status is selected is selected
(“closed” or (“open” or “b”
“a” contact) contact)
open open closed Last yes intermediate_00
position
saved
open closed open open no open

closed open closed closed no closed

closed closed closed closed yes badState_11

arcing possible

closed
open

BBP
N.O. 1
input „closed“
0

1 1) 1)
N.C. input „open“ 0

current 1
assignment 0

1) disconnector supervision running

en06000084.vsd
IEC06000084 V1 EN-US

Figure 43: Scheme1_RADSS

118 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

arcing possible
2)
closed
open

BBP
N.O. 1
input „closed“
0

1 1) 1)
N.C. input „open“ 0

current 1
assignment 0

1) disconnector supervision running

2) BI „closed“ should change before arcing distance

en06000085.vsd
IEC06000085 V1 EN-US

Figure 44: Scheme2_INX

Circuit breaker replica SEMOD127523-79 v3

The circuit breaker position from a bay shall be given to the busbar protection when
the position of this particular breaker can influence the busbar protection operation.
Typical examples are Blind Spot protection in Bus-section and Bus-coupler bays or
End Fault Protection in feeder bays. In both cases the measuring range of a busbar
protection is limited by the CT location. By additionally recording the CB position of a
feeder or a coupler the zone between the CT and the CB can be better protected while
CB is open. However in such cases it is of utmost importance to connect the CB
closing command to the busbar protection in order to include again the CT current to
the busbar protection zones in time. It is as strongly recommended to always use
Scheme1_RADSS for all CBs positions connected to the IED in order to minimize any
risk of possible problems due to late inclusion of CT current to the relevant differential
zones.

Line disconnector replica SEMOD127523-82 v4

The line disconnector position from a feeder bay might be required for busbar
protection under certain circumstances. Typical example is when the line disconnector
989 and associated grounding switch QC1 are located between CT and protected
busbar as indicated in Figure 45.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 119

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

ZA

ZB
189 289

152

989
189G

en06000086_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000086 V1 EN-US

Figure 45: Feeder bay layout when line disconnector position might be required
for busbar protection

Such feeder set-up can be often found in GIS stations where cable CTs are used for
busbar protection. If in such feeder the line disconnector 989 is open and then
immediately the grounding switch 189G is closed before the busbar disconnectors
189G & 289 are open there is a danger to get current unbalance into the zone
differential measurement under following circumstances:

• In case of parallel lines zero sequence mutual coupling can induce zero sequence
current into the grounded line especially during externalground-faults.
• In case of cable feeder the stored energy in the cable will be discharged through
the grounding switch at the moment of its closing.

In order to avoid such problems for busbar protection the status of line disconnector
can be monitored by busbar protection and CT measurement can be disconnected from
both differential zones as soon line disconnector is open. Similar functionality can be
obtained by instead monitoring the position of feeder breaker 152. In such case the
breaker closing signal shall be connected to busbar protection as well.

6.1.3.5 CT connection control M12108-3 v4

The IED offers an extremely effective solution for stations where zone selection (that
is, CT switching) is required. This is possible due to the software facility, which gives
full and easy control over all CT inputs connected to the IED.

In applications where zone selection (that is, CT switching) is required (for

exampledouble or multiple busbar stations) all CTs will be permanently connected to
the analogue input module(s), as shown in Figure 63. Therefore, all necessary
switchingof currents will be performed in internal software logic.

In general, there are dedicated binary inputs available for one CT at each bay, to
control its current connection towards differential zones, based on operational status of

120 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

related disconnectors. In addition, in two-zone busbar differential protections, a setting

parameter is also introduced to determine, together with the binary inputs, how the bay
CT current shall be connected to the differential zones.

The philosophy is to allow every CT input to be individually controlled by a setting

parameter. This parameter called ZoneSel can be individually configured for every CT
input. This parameter, for every bay, can be set to only one of the following five
alternatives:

1. FIXEDtoZA
2. FIXEDtoZB
3. FIXEDtoZA&-ZB
4. CtrlIncludes
5. CtrlExcludes

If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to FIXEDtoZA, then this
CT input will be only included to the differential zone A. This setting is typically used
for simple single zone application such as: single busbar staions, breaker-and-a-half
stations or double breaker stations.

If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to FIXEDtoZB, then this
CT input will be only included to the differential zone B. This setting is typically used
for applications such as: breaker-and-a-half stations or double breaker stations.

If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to FIXEDtoZA&-ZB, then

this CT input will be included to the differential zone A, but its inverted current value
will be as well included to the differential zone B. This setting is typically used for bus
coupler or bus section bays when only one current transformer is available see Figure
47.

If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to Ctrl_Includes, then this
CT input will be:

• included to the differential zone A when input signal CTRLZA on corresponding

bay block is given logical value one and it will be excluded from the differential
zone A when input signal CTRLZA on corresponding bay block is given logical
value zero.
• included to the differential zone B when input signal CTRLZB on corresponding
bay block is given logical value one and it will be excluded from the differential
zone B when input signal CTRLZB on corresponding bay block is given logical
value zero.

This setting is typically used for feeder bays in double busbar stations in order to form
proper busbar disconnector replica. It is especially suitable both when normally open

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 121

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

and normally closed (that is, "a" and "b" contacts) auxiliary contacts from the busbar
disconnectors are available to the IED.

If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSel is set to Ctrl_Excludes, then this
CT input will be:

• excluded from the differential zone A when input signal CTRLZA on

corresponding bay block is given logical value one and it will be included to the
differential zone A when input signal CTRLZA on corresponding bay block is
given logical value zero
• excluded from the differential zone B when input signal CTRLZB on
corresponding bay block is given logical value one and it will be included to the
differential zone B when input signal CTRLZB on corresponding bay block is
given logical value zero.

This setting is typically used for feeder bays in double busbar single breaker stations in
order to form proper busbar disconnector replica. It is especially suitable when only
normally closed (that is, “b” contact) auxiliary contact from the busbar disconnector(s)
is available to the IED. For more information please refer to Figure 64.

6.1.3.6 CT disconnection for bus interconnector CT cores M12113-3 v4

For simplicity purpose, sometimes we also refer to a bus-section or bus-coupler bay as

a bus interconnector bay. In practice there are three different solutions for bus
interconnector bay layout. First solution is with two sets of main CTs, which are
located on both sides of the circuit breaker, as shown in Figure 46.

ZA ZB
BS

1 2 8 1 2 8

en01000013_ansi.vsd
ANSI01000013 V1 EN-US

Figure 46: Example of station with two sets of main CTs in the bus-section bay

122 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Two differential zones are overlapping across the bus-section or bus-coupler circuit
breaker. All faults in the overlapping zone will be instantly tripped by both zones
irrespective of the section/coupler circuit breaker status. However with modern busbar
protection it is possible to disconnect both CTs from the relevant zones when the bus-
section or bus-coupler circuit breaker is open. This will insure that if internal fault
happen, in the overlapping zone, while breaker is open, only the faulty zone will be
tripped while other busbar section will remain in service. However, due to low
probability of such fault happening, while the breaker is open, such special
considerations are typically not included in the busbar protection scheme for this type
of stations. In such applications, the bus section or bus coupler current transformers
shall be wired just to two separate current inputs of the IED. Meanwhile these currents
should be given to both related differential zones. To ensure this, in two-zone busbar
protections, it requires to set the corresponding bays the parameter ZoneSel to
FIXEDtoZA in one bay and FIXEDtoZB in another bay in the parameter setting tool
(PST).

When live tank circuit breakers are used, often only one current transformer is
available in bus-section or bus-coupler bay. The suggested solution in such applications
is shown in Figure 47.

ZA ZB

Blind Zone

1 2 8 1 2 8

en01000014_ansi.vsd
ANSI01000014 V1 EN-US

Figure 47: Example of station with just one main CT in the bus-section bay

For this type of solution just one main CT is located on only one side of the circuit
breaker. Thus, there is no zone overlapping across the section/coupler circuit breaker as
shown in Figure 46. A blind spot exists between the current transformer and the circuit
breaker in the bus section or bus-coupler bay as shown in Figure 47.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 123

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

As the example application in Figure 47 showed, for an internal fault in the blind spot,
the differential zone ZA will unnecessarily operate and open the bus section breaker
and all other feeder breakers associated with it. Nevertheless the fault will still exists
on other busbar section, but it is outside the current transformer in the bus section bay
and hence outside the zone ZB ( that is, it is external fault for zone ZB). Similar
problem will also exist if section/coupler circuit breaker was open before the internal
fault in the blind zone. Therefore, the busbar protection scheme does not protect the
complete busbar.

In order to improve the busbar protection scheme with this type of station layout, it is
often required to disconnect the bus-section or bus-coupler CT from all affected
differential zones as soon as the bus-section or bus-coupler circuit breaker is opened.
This arrangement can be easily achieved within the IED. In such applications, the bus
section or bus coupler current transformer shall be wired just to one current input of the
IED. Meanwhile this current should be given to both related differential zones. To
ensure this, in two-zone busbar protections, it requires to set the corresponding bay the
parameter ZoneSel to FIXEDtoZA&-ZB in PST. In six-zone busbar protections, this
single CT current should be connected to both CT inputs on the bus section or bus
coupler function block, and then invert one of them in software by using the parameter
setting OperMode in PST. This shall be done taking into account the actual location of
the CT star point in this bay.

When the bus coupler/section breaker is open, to disconnect this current from both
zones, additional configuration logic is required by using the binary input, for example
ZEROCUR in two-zone differential protections . Figure 48 provides an example of
such logic. Moreover, the following two binary inputs are at least necessary in order to
guaranty proper operation of such logic:
• Normally closed contact of the bus section or bus coupler circuit breaker
• Signal from the bus section or bus coupler circuit breaker closing circuit that
somebody wants to close the breaker.

This solution does not depend on contact timing between the main contacts and
auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker. It directly follows the philosophy used for
RADSS/REB 103 schemes used for similar applications before. Principle connection
between the bus-coupler CB normally closed auxiliary contact (“b” contact), REB670
and internal configuration logic, as shown in Figure 48.

124 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Zone A
Zone B
REB 670

189

289

t=1s
b t
152 OR

AND
Bxxx
BI1 BLKTR TRIP
CB Closing BIM CTRLZA
CONNZA
Signal CTRLZB
CONNZB
External or Internal
ZEROCUR
Bus-Coupler Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command TRZONE
Bay
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip

TRM Parameter ZoneSel must

CT Input
be set to "FixedToZA&-ZB"
A/D tZeroCurrent=150ms

Other
Equipment
BBP & BFP trip command to Bus-Coupler breaker

en06000155_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000155 V1 EN-US

Figure 48: Bus coupler bay with one CT and “b” aux. contact only from CB

This scheme will disconnect the section/coupler CTs after a pre-set time length (≥80
ms recommended) defined by the parameter setting tZeroCurrent in the relevant bay
function block from the moment of opening of the section/coupler CB (that is, from the
moment when auxiliary "b" contact operates). Nevertheless this time delay is
absolutely necessary in order to prevent racing between the opening of the main
breaker contact and disconnection of the CT from the differential zones. This scheme
will as well disconnect the CT in case of the operation of any of the two internal
differential zones used in the scheme. This will secure the delayed (≥150 ms,
depending one the values of the setting tZeroCurrent) clearing and tripping of the
internal fault within the blind zone even in case of section/coupler circuit breaker
failure during such fault. This facility will improve the performance of the busbar
protection scheme when one CT is located on only one side of the bus-section / bus-
coupler circuit breaker.

With GIS or live tank circuit breakers, owing to high cost of HV CT installations,
sometimes no current transformers are available in bus-section or bus-coupler bay. This
is the third solution shown in Figure 49

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 125

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

BS ZB
ZA

1 2 10 1 2 10

en04000283_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000283 V1 EN-US

Figure 49: Example of station without main CTs in the bus-section bay

In such case two separate zones can be maintained only while bus coupler breaker is
open. As soon as bus coupler breaker is going to be closed the zone interconnection
feature must be activated and complete busbars will be automatically protected with
just one differential zone.

Since there are no current transformer in the bus coupler bay, there is no need to
allocate internal bay function block for the bus coupler bay. However some additional
configuration logic is required to obtain automatic zone interconnection activation
when bus coupler breaker shall be closed. Example of such logic, is shown in Figure
50 for a two-zone differential protection application.

126 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Zone A
Zone B REB 670

BIM BOM

closing
BC CB

switch
189 289

ZI

0-tOFF AND NOT EXTSTART ACTIVE

ALARM

52b
152

Indication that
Zone interconnection
is active

Bus coupler
en06000137_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000137 V1 EN-US

Figure 50: Configuration logic for bus coupler without main CTs

6.1.3.7 End fault protection SEMOD127750-31 v4

When Live tank CBs or GIS are involved, there is a physical separation between the
CT and the CB. End Fault Protection is related to primary faults between main CT and
CB in a feeder bay. Therefore, it is directly related to the position of the main CT in
feeder bay. Three CT positions in feeder bays are typically used in power systems
around the world, as shown in Figure 51.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 127

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

Busbar
Protection

Busbar Busbar
BI1 BI1
Protection Protection
152 152 152
Feeder Feeder 1
Protection
BI1 BI1 Protection
1
Feeder
A Protection B C

en06000138_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000138 V1 EN-US

Figure 51: Typical CT locations in a feeder bay

where:
A two CTs are available one on each side of the feeder circuit breaker
B one CT is available on the line side of the feeder circuit breaker
C one CT is available on the bus side of the feeder circuit breaker
1 End fault region

In Figure 51/A where two CTs are available in a feeder bay, the end fault protection is
not an issue. The busbar and feeder protection zones overlap across feeder circuit
breaker and all faults between these two CTs will be instantly detected and tripped by
both protection schemes. As a consequence of such fault both busbar and feeder will be
disconnected from the power system.

In Figure 51/B where one CT is available on the line side of the feeder circuit breaker,
the primary fault between CT and CB will cause certain problems. Typically such fault
will be detected and tripped by busbar protection. However to completely clear such
fault the remote feeder end CB must be tripped as well. It shall be noted that for the
feeder protection such fault will be either a reverse fault (that is, distance protection
used for feeder protection) or external fault (that is, line/transformer differential
protection used for feeder protection).

In Figure 51/C where one CT is available on the bus side of the feeder circuit breaker,
the primary fault between CT and CB will cause problem as well. Typically such fault
will be detected and tripped by feeder protection. However, to completely clear such
fault the associated busbar section must be tripped as well. It shall be noted that the
busbar differential protection will classify such fault as external and without any
additional measures the busbar protection will remain stable.

For better understanding end fault protection applications within busbar protection, the
Figure 52 is provided.

128 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

2 ZA

1
152 152 152 152

xx06000139_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000139 V1 EN-US

Figure 52: Busbar protection measuring and fault clearing boundaries

where:
1 Busbar Protection measuring boundary determined by feeder CT locations
2 Busbar Protection internal fault clearing boundary determined by feeder CB locations
3 End fault region for feeders as shown in Figure 51/B
4 End fault region for feeders as shown in Figure 51/C

Figure 52 shows a single busbar station, where two feeders on the left-hand side having
CTs located on the line side of the breaker, meanwhile two feeders on the right-hand
side of the busbar having CTs located on the busbar side of the breaker. It is assumed
that busbar protection is connected to all four set of CTs in this station.

Due to CT locations in feeder bays, busbar protection will detect all primary faults
located within measuring boundary determined by CT locations, see Figure 52.
However its operation will only completely clear faults within clearing boundary
determined by CB locations as shown in Figure 52. Obviously, the primary faults in-
between these two boundaries do pose certain practical problems.

First of all it shall be noted that there is no ideal solution for faults within end zone
region in a feeder bay, when the feeder breaker is closed. Such faults, within end fault
region, will be then cleared with additional time delay either by operation of local
backup protection (that is, feeder circuit breaker failure protection) or by operation of
remote backup protection (that is, remote ends zone 2 distance protection).

However, the overall busbar protection behavior can be improved for primary faults
within end fault regions, when feeder breaker is open. Under such circumstances the
following actions can be taken:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 129

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

• For feeders with CT on the line side of the circuit breaker (that is, the two feeders
on the left-hand side in Figure 52), the current measurement can be disconnected
from the busbar protection zone some time after feeder CB opening (for example,
400 ms for transformer and cable feeders or longest autoreclosing dead time +300
ms for overhead line feeders). At the same time, appropriately set and fast (that is,
typically 40 ms time delayed) overcurrent protection shall be enabled to detect
fault within end fault region. Any operation of this overcurrent protection shall
only issue inter-trip command to the remote feeder end CB. Such overcurrent
protection is often called end fault protection in relay literature. It shall be noted
that at the same time busbar protection will remain stable (that is, selective) for
such fault.
• For feeders with CT on the bus side of the circuit breaker (that is, the two feeders
on the right-hand side in Figure 52), the current measurement can be disconnected
from the busbar protection zone some time after feeder CB opening (that is, after
400 ms). This measure will ensure fast busbar protection tripping for faults within
end fault region in that feeder bay, while feeder CB is open.

However, it shall be noted that in order to utilize end fault protection feeder circuit
breaker status and its closing command must be connected to the binary inputs of
busbar protection scheme in order to be available for zone selection logic.

End fault protection logic can be easily done with the help of graphical configuration
tool. One stage (that is, 4th stage) from optionally available overcurrent protection can
be used as dedicated end fault protection for feeders with CT on the line side of the
CB.

End fault protection is here explained for simple single busbar station. However the
same principles are applicable to almost all other station layouts. Moreover, under
certain circumstances, for stations with a transfer bus more extensive logic for end fault
protection implementation might be required.

6.1.3.8 Zone interconnection (Load transfer) M12114-3 v4

In multiple busbar stations, with or without transfer bus, it is common requirement to

use the possibility of zone interconnection loading current in any feeder bay from one
busbar to the other(s). The sequence of operation during zone interconnection is
normally as the following:

• bus coupler or bus section bay is closed (that is, CB and both disconnectors).
• feeder bay busbar disconnector to the busbar not already in service is then closed.
The switchgear interlocking system shall allow this only when the bus coupler
breaker is already closed. Depending on the thermal capacity of the feeder busbar
disconnectors (189 and 289) the opening of the bus coupler circuit breaker is

130 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

sometimes interlocked while both busbar disconnectors within one of the feeder
bays are closed.
• opening of the feeder bay busbar disconnector originally closed. The load is now
transferred from one to other bus.
• opening of bus coupler or bus section bay CB.

The zone interconnection has to be taken into consideration for the busbar differential
protection scheme, as each two busbar zones are interconnected together via two
disconnectors. The primary current split between busbars is then not known and the
two separate measuring zones cannot be maintained.

In conventional, analog busbar protection systems the solutions have been to, by
extensive zone switching IEDs. For example, in two-zone applications, it leads to
disconnect one zone (normally zone B, and connect all feeders to other zone (normally
zone A). At the same time the current from the bus-coupler bay, which just circulates
between zones, must be disconnected from the measuring differential zone.

Similar situation regarding to busbar protection can occur between any busbar sections
interconnected via sectionalizing disconnector, see Figure 55 for an example. When
each sectionalizer is closed, two separate protection zones becomes the one and busbar
protection must be able to dynamically handle this.

Due to the numerical design the IED can manage this situation in an elegant and simple
way. Internal feature called Zone Interconnection will be used to handle both
situations. This feature can be activated either externally via binary input or derived
internally by built-in logic. Especially in two-zone busbar protections, to internally
activate such feature, the setting ZoneSel shall be also considered. Consequently, the
zone interconnection will be activated internally only when the following conditions
are met:

• bays have parameter ZoneSel set to either CtrlInclude or CtrlExcludes

• internal zone selection logic concludes that this particular bay shall be
simultaneously connected to multiple internal differential zones

This situation only means that for this particular bay its busbar disconnectors are
closed and therefore zone interconnection switching is happening in the station.

When zone switching feature is activated inside the IED, each individual bay current
will behave in the predetermined way. In six-zone busbar differential protection, it is
internally determined how a bay CT should behave during zone interconnection,
depending the bay is a feeder or a bus coupler or section bay. In two-zone busbar
differential protections, it is determined by the end user with a settable setting
ZoneSwitching. This parameter, for every bay, can be set to only one of the following
three alternatives

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 131

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

• ForceOut
• ForceIn
• Conditionally

If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSwitching is set to ForceOut, then

this CT input will be disconnected from both the differential zones, regardless of any
other set value or active binary input, while zone switching feature is active within the
IED. This setting is typically used for bus coupler bay in double busbar stations.

If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSwitching is set to ForceIn, then this
CT input will be connected to both the differential zones, regardless of any other set
value or active binary input, while zone switching feature is active within the IED. This
setting is typically used for all feeders bay in a station with two single zone
interconnected by a sectionalizing disconnector.

If for a particular CT input setting parameter ZoneSwitching is set to Conditionally,

then this CT input will be connected to both the differential zones only if it was
included to any of the two zones for 2ms before the zone switching feature was
activated. This setting is typically used for all feeders bay in double busbar stations.
With this setting all feeder bays, which were not connected to any of the two zones
before the zone interconnection activation (that is, out for scheduled maintenance), will
not either be included during zone interconnection.

This practically means that for double busbar station, when zone switching feature is
active, all feeder bays will be connected to both differential zones, while bus coupler
CT will be disconnected from both zones. In this way simple but effective solution is
formed. It is as well important to notice that all necessary changes in the individual bay
tripping arrangements will be automatically performed within the internal logic.

A dedicated binary signal will be immediately activated in the internal logic when zone
interconnection feature is activated. If this feature is active longer than the pre-set time
separate alarm binary signal is activated, in order to alarm the station personnel about
such operating conditions. ZoneInterconnection feature can be disabled by a parameter
setting for substation arrangements where it is not required that is, single busbar
stations, breaker-and-a-half stations and so on.

6.1.3.9 Tripping arrangements

M12116-3 v3

Tripping circuit arrangement

The contact outputs are of medium duty type. It is possible to use them to directly trip
the individual bay circuit breakers. This solution is suitable for all types of station
arrangements. The internal zone selection logic provides individual bay trip signals in
the internal software and no external relay for this purpose are required. This
arrangement insures correct trip signal distribution to all circuit breakers in case of

132 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

busbar protection operation or individual bay breaker failure protection operation.

Breaker failure protection can be internal or external to the IED.

By a parameter setting it is possible to provide self-rest or latched trip output contacts

from the IED. However it shall be noted that the latching is electrical (that is, if DC
supply to the IED is lost the output contacts will reset).

However, sometimes due to a large number of required trip output contacts (that is,
single pole operated circuit breakers and/or main and backup trip coils), a separate trip
repeat relay unit is applied for the tripping of the circuit breakers in the station. In that
case the tripping arrangement can be done in different ways.
SEMOD130408-6 v4

Trip arrangement with one-phase version

When one-phase version of the IED is used it is typically required to have three IEDs
(that is, one per phase). Thus, when busbar protection in one IED operates the trip
commands will be given to all bays but internal circuit breaker failure function will be
started in the same phase only. In order to secure internal breaker failure picking-up in
all three phases it is advisable to do the following. Connect a zone, say Zone A, trip
signal from one IED to the external trip input of the Zone A in the other two IEDs.
Thus all three IEDs will then issue trip in Zone A and pick-up internally circuit breaker
failure protection in all three phases.

Note that:

• similar arrangements shall be done for the other zones

• this have to be done between all three IEDs (that is, three times)

Such a scheme can be arranged in one of the following ways:

• by wiring between three IEDs

• by using GOOSE messages when IEC 61850-8-1 is used
• by using LDCM communication module.

Note that in this case the external trip signal from other two IEDs shall be arranged via
pulse timer in configuration in order to avoid locking of the trip signal between three
IED. Such arrangement via GOOSE is given in Figure 53:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 133

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

GOOSE for ZoneA

Port (OEM)
IEC 61850
ZoneA Trip

IED 670 GOOSE for ZoneB

ZoneB Trip

Same GOOSE from IED #2

towards IED #1 and IED #3
50 ms

Port (OEM)
IEC 61850
Ext ZoneA Trip
Switch
IED 670
Same GOOSE from IED #3
towards IED #1 and IED #2

50 ms
Ext ZoneB Trip

50 ms

Port (OEM)
IEC 61850
Ext ZoneA Trip

IED 670
50 ms
Ext ZoneB Trip t

en06000227.vsd
IEC06000227 V1 EN-US

Figure 53: Principal trip arrangement via GOOSE between three one-phase IEDs
M12117-4 v4

Centralized trip unit

Tripping is performed directly from the IED contacts, which then activate an auxiliary
trip unit, which multiplies the number of required trip contacts. Separate potential free
contacts are provided for each bay and are supplied by the bay auxiliary voltage and
will activate the trip coil of each bay circuit breaker at operation. This tripping setup is
suitable when no individual circuit breaker failure IEDs or lock-out of individual bay
CB closing coils is required. A suitable external trip unit consists of a combination of
RXMS1/RXMH 2 alternatively AR/MG6 when heavy duty contacts are required and
only RXMS 1/AR relays when medium duty contacts are sufficient.
M12118-4 v4

Decentralized trip arrangement

Tripping is performed directly from the IED contacts, which then activate dedicated
auxiliary trip unit per bay. This individual auxiliary trip unit can be mounted either in
the busbar protection cubicle or in the individual bay cubicles. This tripping setup is
suitable when individual circuit breaker failure relays exist in all bays. A suitable
external trip unit consists of a combination of RXMS1/RXMH 2 alternatively
AR/MG6 when heavy duty contacts are required and only RXMS 1/AR relays when
medium duty contacts are sufficient.

134 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

This solution is especially suitable for the station arrangements, which require the
dynamic zone selection logic (that is, so called CT switching).

6.1.3.10 Mechanical lock-out function M12119-3 v1

M12119-4 v3

It is sometimes required to use lock-out relays for busbar protection operation.

The IED has built-in feature to provide either self-reset or latched tripping in case of
busbar protection operation. Which type of trip signal each zone will issue is
determined by a parameter setting DiffTripOut which can be set either to SelfReset or
Latched. When Latched is selected the trip output from the IED will only reset if:

1. Manual reset command is given to the IED

2. DC power auxiliary supply to the IED is interrupted (that is, switched-off)

However, if it is required to have mechanically latched tripping and lock-out in the

circuit breaker closing circuit, then it is recommended to use one dedicated lockout
IED for each bay. Such mechanical lock-out trip IEDs are available in the
COMBIFLEX range (for example RXMVB2 or RXMVB4 bistable IEDs alternatively
MG6 (hand reset contact) IEDs).

From the application point of view lock-out trip IEDs might have the following
drawbacks:

• The trip contacts will remain closed. If the breaker would fail to open the tripping
coil will be burnt and the DC supply short-circuited.
• The trip circuit supervision (TCS) IEDs will reset and give alarm for a failure in
the trip circuit if the alarm is not opened by the lock-out IED or a double trip
circuit supervision is recommended where the trip circuit is supervised with two
alternatively, TCS IEDs.

6.1.3.11 Contact reinforcement with heavy duty relays M12120-3 v1

M12120-4 v3

There is sometimes a request for heavy duty trip relays. Normally the circuit breaker
trip coils, with a power consumption of 200 to 300 W, are provided with an auxiliary
contact opening the trip circuit immediately at breaker tripping. Therefore, no heavy
duty breaking capacity is required for the tripping relays. Nevertheless heavy duty trip
relays are still often specified to ensure trip circuit opening also if the circuit breaker
fails due to a mechanical failure or a lack of energy for operation. This can particularly
occur during site testing. In this case it is recommended to use COMBIFLEX RXMH 2
or RXMVB 2 or MG6 heavy duty relays.

6.1.3.12 Trip circuit supervision M12121-3 v3

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 135

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

M12121-4 v3

Trip circuit supervision is mostly required to supervise the trip circuit from the
individual bay IED panel to the circuit breaker. It can be arranged also for the tripping
circuits from the busbar protection.

However, it can be stated that the circuit from a busbar protection trip relay located in
the busbar protection panel is not so essential to supervise as busbar faults are very rare
compared to faults in bays, especially on overhead power lines. Also it is normally a
small risk for faults in the tripping circuit and if there is a fault which affects only one
bay and all other bays are thus correctly tripped meaning that the fault current
disappears or is limited to a low value.

6.1.4 Two-zone busbar arrangements

6.1.4.1 General M6640-3 v2

Busbar differential protection application principles for typical busbar arrangements,

up to two differential zones, are shown and described in the following sections.

6.1.4.2 Single busbar arrangements M6641-3 v5

The simplest form of busbar protection is a one-zone protection for single busbar
configuration, as shown in Figure 54. When different CT ratios exist in the bays
compensation is done by setting the CT ratio individually for each bay.

The only requirement for busbar protection is that the protection scheme must have one
differential zone. For any internal fault all circuit breakers must be tripped, which will
cause loss of supply to all loads connected to the station.

ZA

152 152 152 152

xx06000087_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000087 V1 EN-US

Figure 54: Example of single busbar section with six feeder bays

This type of busbar arrangement can be very easily protected. The most common
setups for this type of station are described in the following table.

136 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 14: Typical solutions for single busbar arrangement

Version of REB670 IED Numbers of feeders per Number of REB670 IEDs
busbar required for the scheme
3PH; 2-zones, 4-bays BBP (A20) 4 1
3PH; 2-zones, 8-bays BBP (A31) 8 1
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B20) 12 3
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B21) 12 3
1Ph; 2-zones, 24-bays BBP (B31) 24 3

Please note that the above Table 14 is given for the preconfigured versions of REB670
which do not contain any VT inputs.

6.1.4.3 Single busbar arrangements with sectionalizer M6642-3 v5

This arrangement is very similar to the single busbar arrangement. The sectionalizer
allows the operator to split the station into two separate buses. However, switching of
the sectionalizing disconnector has to be done without any load. This means that one of
the two busbars has to be de-energized before any opening or closing of the
sectionalizer.

For this case the protection scheme must have two differential zones, which can be
either split to work independently from each other or switched to one overall
differential zone when sectionalizing disconnector is closed. Nevertheless, when
sectionalizer is closed, for internal fault on any of the two buses all feeder circuit
breakers have to be tripped, which causes loss of supply to all loads connected to this
station.

189
ZA ZB

152 152 152 152 152 152 152

ANSI11000238-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000238 V1 EN-US

Figure 55: Example of two single busbar sections with bus-sectionalizing

disconnector and eight feeder bays per each busbar section

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 137

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

The most common setups for this type of station are described in the following table.
Table 15: Typical solutions for stations with two single busbar sections with bus-sectionalizing
disconnector
Version of REB670 IED Total Number of feeders Number of REB670 IEDs
in both busbar sections required for the scheme
3PH; 2-zones, 4-bays BBP (A20) 4 1
3PH; 2-zones, 8-bays BBP (A31) 8 1
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B20) 12 3
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B21) 12 3
1Ph; 2-zones, 24-bays BBP (B31) 24 3

Please note that Table 15 is given for the preconfigured versions of REB670 which do
not contain any VT inputs.

Two differential zones are available in the IED and the connecting of the two zones is
simply controlled via zone interconnection logic, as described in Section "Zone
interconnection (Load transfer)". In practice, the closed position of the sectionalizer
shall start the zone interconnection logic inside the IED. All other thinks (that is,
tripping) will automatically be arranged.

6.1.4.4 Single busbar arrangements with bus-section breaker M6643-3 v5

This arrangement is very similar to the single busbar arrangement. The bus-section
breaker allows the operator to split the station into two separate buses under full load.
The requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
independent differential zones, one for each busbar section. If there is an internal fault
on one of the two sections, bus-section circuit breaker and all feeder circuit breakers
associated with this section have to be tripped, leaving the other busbar section in
normal operation.

138 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

ZA ZB
152

152 152 152 152 152 152

xx06000088_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000088 V1 EN-US

Figure 56: Example of two single busbar sections with bus-section circuit breaker
and eight feeder bays per each busbar section

This type of busbar arrangement can be quite easily protected. The most common
setups for this type of station are described in the following table.
Table 16: Typical solutions for single busbar arrangements with bus-section breaker
Version of REB670 IED Total number of feeders Number of REB670 IEDs
in both busbar sections required for the scheme
3PH; 2-zones, 4-bays BBP (A20) 3*)/6 1/2

3PH; 2-zones, 8-bays BBP (A31) 7*)/14 1/2

1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B20) 11*)/22 3/6

1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B21) 11*)/22 3/6

1Ph; 2-zones, 24-bays BBP (B31) 23*)/46 3/6

*) with just one CT input from bus-section bay

Please note that Table 16 is given for the preconfigured versions of REB670 which do
not contain any VT inputs.

For station with just one CT in the bus-section bay, it might be required, depending on
the client requirements, to provide the special scheme for disconnection of bus-section
CT when the bus-section CB is open. For more information, refer to Figure 48.

6.1.4.5 H-type busbar arrangements M6644-3 v5

The H-type stations are often used in transmission and sub-transmission networks as
load-centre substations, as shown in Figure 57. These arrangements are very similar to
the single busbar station with sectionalizer or bus-section breaker, but are characterized
by very limited number of feeder bays connected to the station (normally only two
OHL and two transformers).

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 139

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

01 02

52 52

52
ZA ZB

52 52

03 04

xx06000121_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000121 V1 EN-US

Figure 57: Example of H-type station

The requirement for the busbar protection scheme for this type of station may differ
from utility to utility. It is possible to apply just one overall differential zone, which
protects both busbar sections. However, at an internal fault on any of the two buses all
feeder circuit breakers have to be tripped, which will cause loss of supply to all loads
connected to this station. Some utilities prefer to have two differential zones, one for
each bus section.

The most common setups for this type of station are given in the following table.

140 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 17: Typical solutions for H-type stations

Version of REB670 IED Number of differential Number of REB670 IEDs
zones/number of feeders required for the scheme
per zone
3PH; 2-zones, 4-bays BBP (A20) 1/4 1
3PH; 2-zones, 8-bays BBP (A31) 2/3 1
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B20) NA NA
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B21) NA NA
1Ph; 2-zones, 24-bays BBP (B31) NA NA

Please note that Table 17 is given for the preconfigured versions of REB670 which do
not contain any VT inputs.

For station with double zone protection and just one set of CTs in the bus-section bay,
it might be required, depending on the client requirements, to provide the special
scheme for disconnection of bus-section CT when the bus-section CB is open. For
more information, refer to Figure 48.

6.1.4.6 Double circuit breaker busbar arrangement M6645-3 v5

The circuit breaker, disconnectors and instrument transformers are duplicated for every
feeder, as shown in Figure 58.

ZA

ZB
152 252 152 252 152 252 152 252 152 252

xx06000018_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000018 V1 EN-US

Figure 58: Example of double breaker station

This is an extremely flexible solution. In normal service all breakers are closed. The
requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
independent differential zones, one for each busbar. If there is an internal fault on one
of the two buses all circuit breakers associated with the faulty busbar have to be

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 141

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

tripped, but supply to any load will not be interrupted. The tripping logic for the circuit
breaker failure protection must be carefully arranged.

The most common setups for this type of busbar arrangement are described in the
following table.
Table 18: Typical solutions for double circuit breaker busbar arrangement
Version of REB670 IED Numbers of feeders per Number of REB670 IEDs
station required for the scheme
3PH; 2-zones, 4-bays BBP (A20) 4 2
3PH; 2-zones, 8-bays BBP (A31) 4/8 1/2
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B20) 6/12 3/6
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B21) 6/12 3/6
1Ph; 2-zones, 24-bays BBP (B31) 12/24 3/6

Please note that Table 18 is given for the preconfigured versions of REB670 which do
not contain any VT inputs.

A principle overall drawing of how to use REB670 for this type of station is given in
Figure 59.

142 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

REB 670
Bxxx BBP &
Zone A
BLKTR BFP
TRIP
TRIP
CTRLZA
152 Internal BFP CONNZA 152
Backup Trip Command CTRLZB
CONNZB
152
152
TRM
TRZONE
CT Input Parameter ZoneSel must
BI1 TRBAY be set to "FixedToZA"
A/D I3PB1
Feeder Other
Equipment

BOM

CT Input
Bxxx BBP &
A/D BFP
BI1 BLKTR TRIP
Other
TRIP
Equipment CTRLZA
CONNZA 252
CTRLZB
CONNZB
252
252 Internal BFP
TRZONE
Backup Trip Command Parameter ZoneSel must
TRBAY be set to "FixedToZB"
Zone B I3PB1
Double BFP
breaker OR Remote
Feeder
End
Inter-
Trip

en06000148_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000148 V1 EN-US

Figure 59: Feeder bay in double bus – double breaker station

6.1.4.7 Breaker-and-a-half busbar arrangements M6646-3 v5

A fewer number of circuit breakers are needed for the same flexibility as for double
circuit breaker busbar arrangement, as shown in Figure 60.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 143

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

ZA

152 152 152 152 152

252 252 252 252 252

352 352 352 352 352

ZB

ANSI11000240-1-en.vsd

ANSI11000240 V1 EN-US

Figure 60: Example of breaker-and-a-half station

All breakers are normally closed. The requirement for the busbar protection scheme is
that the scheme must have two independent differential zones, one for each busbar. In
case of an internal fault on one of the two buses, all circuit breakers associated with the
faulty busbar have to be tripped, but the supply to any load will not be interrupted. The
breaker failure protection tripping logic also needs careful design.

This type of busbar arrangement can be very easily protected. The most common
setups for this type of station are described in the following table.
Table 19: Typical solutions for breaker-and-a-half stations when CBF for middle breaker is not
required
Version of REB670 IED Number of diameters in Number of REB670 IEDs
the station required for the scheme
3PH; 2-zones, 4-bays BBP (A20) 2/4 1/2
3PH; 2-zones, 8-bays BBP (A31) 4/8 1/2
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B20) 6/12 3/6
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B21) 6/12 3/6
1Ph; 2-zones, 24-bays BBP (B31) 12/24 3/6

Please note that Table 19 is given for the preconfigured versions of REB670 which do
not contain any VT inputs.

144 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

A principle overall drawing of how to use REB670 for breaker-and-a-half station

including internal CBF protection for middle breaker is given in Figure 61.

REB 670 BFP

Remote
OR
End
Bxxx Inter-
Zone A Trip
BLKTR TRIP Feeder 1
152 Internal BFP CTRLZA
CONNZA
Backup Trip Command CTRLZB BBP &
CONNZB BFP
152 TRIP
TRM 152
TRZONE
CT Input
Feeder 1

TRBAY Parameter ZoneSel must

A/D I3PB1 be set to "FixedToZA"
BI1
Other
Equipment
Bxxx
BFP
BLKTR TRIP TRIP
252 ZERO- CTRLZA 252
CONNZA
CT Input ZERO- CTRLZB
CONNZB
A/D
BI2
TRZONE
Other OR Parameter ZoneSel must
TRBAY
Equipment be set to "CtrlIncludes"
252 Internal BFP I3PB1 and CTConnection="Off"
Backup Trip Command

CT Input
BI3 Bxxx BBP &
Feeder 2

A/D BFP
Other BLKTR TRIP
TRIP
Equipment CTRLZA
CONNZA 352
CTRLZB
CONNZB
352
352 Internal BFP
Backup Trip Command TRZONE
Parameter ZoneSel must
TRBAY be set to "FixedToZB"
Zone B I3PB1
1½ breaker BFP
Diameter OR Remote
End
Inter-
BOM
Trip
Feeder 2

en06000149_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000149 V1 EN-US

Figure 61: Diameter in breaker-and-a-half station with breaker failure protection

for all three breakers inside REB670

6.1.4.8 Double busbar single breaker arrangement M6647-3 v5

This type of arrangement is shown in Figure 62.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 145

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

ZA

ZB
189 289 189 289 189 289 189 289 189 289 189 289

152
152 152 152 152 152 152

ANSI11000239-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000239 V1 EN-US

Figure 62: Example of double busbar station

This type of busbar arrangement is very common. It is often preferred for larger
installations. It provides good balance between maintenance work requirements and
security of supply. If needed, two busbars can be split during normal service. The
requirement for busbar protection scheme is that the scheme must have two
independent differential zones, one for each busbar. In case of an internal fault on one
of the two buses, bus-coupler circuit breaker and all feeder circuit breakers associated
with the faulty bus have to be tripped, leaving other busbar still in normal operation.
Provision for zone selection, disconnector replica and zone interconnection have to be
included into the scheme design.

This type of busbar arrangement can be protected as described in the following table:
Table 20: Typical solutions for double busbar stations
Version of REB670 IED Number of feeders in the Number of REB670 IED
station (excluding bus- required for the scheme
coupler bay)
3PH; 2-zones, 4-bays BBP (A20) 3*) 1

3PH; 2-zones, 8-bays BBP (A31) 7*) 1

1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B20) NA NA

1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B21) 11*) 3

1Ph; 2-zones, 24-bays BBP (B31) 23*) 3

*) with just one CT input from bus-coupler bay

Please note that Table 20 is given for the preconfigured versions of REB670 which do
not contain any VT inputs.

146 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

For station with just one CT in the bus-coupler bay, it might be required, depending on
the client requirements, to provide the special scheme for disconnection of bus-coupler
CT when the bus-coupler CB is open. For more info please refer to Figure 48.

Some principle overall drawings of how to use REB670 in this type of station are given
in Figure 63 to Figure 67.
Disconnector aux. contact timing
(Aux. contact a timing is only crucial when Scheme2_INX is used)
Zone A Main
Open Closed
Zone B contact
Aux. a
Open Closed
contact
Aux. b
Closed Open
189 b a contact

SSxx
REB 670
DISABLE
CLOSED
NO
OPEN
NC ALARM
FORCED
289 b a

SSxx
DISABLE Set Parameter
CLOSED ZoneSel="CtrlIncludes"
NO
OPEN
NC ALARM
FORCED

BIM External or Internal

Feeder BFP Backup Trip Bxxx
Command BLKTR TRIP
CTRLZA
Feeder Backup CONNZA
OC Trip CTRLZB
152 CONNZB

CT Input TRZONE
TRBAY
A/D I3PB1
BOM
989 Other
Equipment TRM

Feeder Bay BBP & BFP trip command to feeder breaker

en06000151_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000151 V1 EN-US

Figure 63: Feeder bay where a&b aux. contacts are used

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 147

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

Zone A

Zone B Disconnector aux. contact timing

189 Main
b Open Closed
contact
Aux . b
Closed Open
contact

REB 670

289 b

Set Parameter
ZoneSel=" CtrlExcludes"

BIM External or Internal

Feeder BFP Backup Bxxx
Trip Command BLKTR
TRIP
CTRLZA
CONNZA
Feeder Backup
CTRLZB
152 OC Trip CONNZB

CT Input TRZONE

BI1 TRBAY
A/D I3PB1
BOM

989 Other
Equipment TRM

Feeder Bay BBP & BFP trip command to feeder breaker

ANSI06000152_2_en.vsd
ANSI06000152 V2 EN-US

Figure 64: Feeder bay where b aux. contacts are used

148 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Zone A
Zone B

REB 670 Parameter ZoneSel must

be set to "FixedToZA"
Bxxx
189
BLKTR TRIP
CTRLZA
289 CONNZA
Other CTRLZB
CONNZB
Equipment TRM

CT Input TRZONE
TRBAY
A/D I3PB1
BI1

152 OR
External or Internal
Bus-Coupler BFP
BI2 Backup Trip Command

Bus-Coupler
Bay Bxxx
Bus-Coupler Backup BLKTR TRIP
OC Trip CTRLZA BOM
CONNZA
CTRLZB
CONNZB

TRZONE
CT Input
TRBAY
A/D I3PB1

Parameter ZoneSel must

Other be set to "FixedToZB"
Equipment

BBP & BFP trip command to Bus-Coupler breaker

en06000153_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000153 V1 EN-US

Figure 65: Bus coupler bay with two sets of CTs

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 149

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

Zone A
Zone B

REB 670

189

CB Closing
289 Signal

b a t=1s
152 t
OR
SSxx
DISABLE
CLOSED
NO
OPEN
NC Bxxx
ALARM
BLKTR TRIP
BI1 FORCED
BIM CTRLZA
CONNZA
CTRLZB
CONNZB
External or Internal
ZEROCUR
Bus-Coupler Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command TRZONE
Bay
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip

TRM Parameter ZoneSel must be

CT Input
set to "FixedToZA&-ZB"
A/D tZeroCurrent=150ms

Other
Equipment

BBP & BFP trip command to Bus-Coupler breaker

en06000154_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000154 V1 EN-US

Figure 66: Bus coupler bay with one CT and a&b aux. contact from CB

150 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Zone A
Zone B
REB 670

189

289

t=1s
b t
152 OR

AND
Bxxx
BI1 BLKTR TRIP
CB Closing BIM CTRLZA
CONNZA
Signal CTRLZB
CONNZB
External or Internal
ZEROCUR
Bus-Coupler Bus-Coupler BFP
Backup Trip Command TRZONE
Bay
TRBAY
I3PB1
BOM
Bus-Coupler Backup
OC Trip

TRM Parameter ZoneSel must

CT Input
be set to "FixedToZA&-ZB"
A/D tZeroCurrent=150ms

Other
Equipment
BBP & BFP trip command to Bus-Coupler breaker

en06000155_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000155 V1 EN-US

Figure 67: Bus coupler bay with one CT and b aux. contact only from CB

6.1.4.9 Double busbar arrangements with two bus-section breakers and two
bus-coupler breakers M6649-3 v5

This type of station is commonly used for GIS installations. It offers high operational
flexibility. For this type of stations, two schemes similar to the double busbar station
scheme can be used.

ZA1 152 ZA2

ZB1 152 ZB2

189 289 189 289 189 289 189 289 189 289 189 289 189 289 189 289 189 289

152 152
152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152 152

xx06000016_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000016 V1 EN-US

Figure 68: Example of typical GIS station layout

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 151

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

With REB670 this type of arrangement can be protected as described in the following
table.
Table 21: Possible solutions for a typical GIS station
Version of REB670 IED Number of feeders on Number of REB670 IEDs
each side of the station required for the scheme
(excluding bus-coupler &
bus-section bays)
3PH; 2-zones, 4-bays BBP (A20) NA NA
3PH; 2-zones, 8-bays BBP (A31) 5*) 2

1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B20) NA NA

1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B21) 9*) 6

1Ph; 2-zones, 24-bays BBP (B31) 21*) 6

*) with just one CT input from bus-coupler bay

Please note that Table 21 is given for the preconfigured versions of REB670 which do
not contain any VT inputs.

Provision for zone selection, disconnector replica and zone interconnection have to be
included into the scheme design.

For station with just one CT in the bus-coupler or bus-section bays, it might be
required, depending on the client requirements, to provide the special scheme for
disconnection of bus-coupler or bus-section CT when the bus-coupler or bus-section
CB is open. For more info please refer to Figure 48

6.1.4.10 Combined busbar arrangements M6650-3 v5

There are stations which are practically a combination between two normal types of
station arrangements, which are already previously described. Some typical examples
will be shown here:

152 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

ZA
152 152 152 152 152

252 252 252 252 252

352 352 352 352 352

ZB
152 252

xx06000123_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000123 V1 EN-US

Figure 69: Combination between one-and-half and double breaker station layouts

This type of stations can be encountered very often in practice. Usually the station is
arranged in such a way that double breaker bays can be, at a later stage, transformed
into one-and-half breaker setup. For busbar protection this type of station can be
protected in exactly the same way as one-and-half breaker stations described above.
The same type of IEDs can be used, and same limitations regarding the number of
diameters apply.

ZA

ZB
152 252 152 252 189 289 189 289

152 152

xx06000124_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000124 V1 EN-US

Figure 70: Combination between double breaker and double busbar station
layouts

In this type of arrangement the double breaker bay has in the same time the role of the
bus-coupler bay for normal double busbar single breaker stations. Therefore, zone

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 153

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

interconnection, zone selection and disconnector replica facilities have to be provided

for all double busbar bays. Because of the very specific requirements on zone
interconnection feature, the following should be considered for this type of application:

• current inputs CT1 and CT2 shall be used for the first double breaker bay.
• current inputs CT3 and CT4 shall be used for the second double breaker bay.
• current inputs CT5 and CT6 shall be used for the third double breaker bay (only
available in 1ph version).

Accordingly the following solutions are possible:

Table 22: Typical solutions for combination between double breaker and double busbar station
layouts
Version of REB670 IED Number of double Number of REB670 IEDs
breaker feeders / required for the scheme
Number of double
busbar feeders in the
station
3PH; 2-zones, 4-bays BBP (A20) NA NA
3PH; 2-zones, 8-bays BBP (A31) 2/4 1
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B20) NA NA
1Ph; 2-zones, 12-bays BBP (B21) 3/6 3
1Ph; 2-zones, 24-bays BBP (B31) 3/18 3

Please note that Table 22 is given for the preconfigured versions of REB670 which do
not contain any VT inputs.

154 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

ZA

152 152 152 152 152

252 252 252 252 252

352 352 352 352 352

ZB
189 289 189 289

152 152

xx06000125_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000125 V1 EN-US

Figure 71: Combination between one-and-half breaker and double busbar station
layouts

For this type of busbar arrangement the double busbar bay is usually connected to the
reactive power compensation equipment (that is, shunt reactor or shunt capacitor). The
diameters in the one-and-half breaker part of the station have at the same time the role
of the bus-coupler bay. Therefore, zone interconnection, zone selection and
disconnector replica facilities have to be provided for all double busbar bays.

6.1.5 Six-zone busbar arrangements

6.1.5.1 General GUID-28529398-F8D1-419B-9FB6-700BF19A2989 v1

Busbar differential protection application for some complex busbar arrangements with
up to six differential zones are shown and described in the following sections.

6.1.5.2 Typical arrangement which can be covered GUID-2BC52A24-7844-4F83-A11E-944FC3487582 v1

The six-zone busbar differential protection is intended for applications with complex
switchgear layout. In general, there are the following restrictions:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 155

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

1. Up to six independent protection zones

2. Up to twenty-four CT inputs (depends on selected IED hardware)
3. Up to twenty-four feeder bays
4. Up to five bus interconnector (i.e. bus-ties) bays
5. For very large installation the total number of binary inputs and outputs, which can
be fitted in one IED, can also be a limiting factor. For such installations the
possibility to share the disconnector status among the three IEDs using
communication (e.g. GOOSE or LDCM) can be considered.

Five typical examples of busbar arrangements with up to six differential zones are
presented in Figure 72 - Figure 76. In the next section, the engineering procedure is
described for the example application shown in Figure 75 to illustrate the engineering
principles.
Sectionalizing disconnectors
QB11 Z3
Z1 Z5
Z2 Z6
QB21 Z4
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB10 QB20 QB2 QB20 QB1 QB10 QB1 QB2

QA1 QA1 QA1 QA1

B11 B11 B12 B14 B13 B11

QA1

Bus-Interconnector 2 Bus-Interconnector 3
Feeder 01-08 Bus-Interconnector 1 with two CTs Feeder 09-15
with one CT with one CT IEC16000142-1.en.vsdx
IEC16000142 V1 EN-US

Figure 72: Double busbar station with six protection zones

Sectionalizing disconnectors
QB11
Z1 Z3
Z2 Z4
QB21

QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB10 QB20 QB1 QB2

QA1 QB7 QA1 QB7

QB9 QB9
B11 B12
QA1
B11 B11

Feeder 01-06 Bus-Interconnector 1 with two CTs Feeder 07-18

IEC16000143-1.en.vsdx
IEC16000143 V1 EN-US

Figure 73: Double busbar station with breaker bypass facility and four protection
zones

156 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Sectionalizing disconnectors
QB11
Z1 Z4
QB21
Z2 Z5
Z3 Z3

QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB10 QB20 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2

QA1 QB7 QA1 QB7 QA1 QB7 QB7

QB9 QB9 QB9
B11 B12
QA1
B11 B11
B11 B11

Feeder 01 Feeder 02-06 Bus-Interconnector 1 with two CTs Feeder 07-12 Bus-Interconnector 2 with one CT
IEC16000144-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000144 V1 EN-US

Figure 74: Double busbar station with transfer bus and five protection zones

Section 1 Sectionalizing disconnectors Section 2

QB11
Z1 Z4
QB21
Z2 Z5
QB31
Z3 Z6

QB1 QB2 QB3 QB1 QB2 QB3 QB1 QB2 QB3 QB1 QB2 QB3 QB1 QB2 QB3 QB1 QB2 QB3 QB1 QB2 QB3 QB1 QB2 QB3

QA ... ... ... ... QA

CT1 CT8
QA QA QA
CT1 CT2 CT4 CT5 CT6 CT7

Feeder 01-08 bus-interconnector 1 bus-interconnector 2 bus-interconnector 3 Feeder 09-17

IEC16000145-1.en.vsdx

IEC16000145 V1 EN-US

Figure 75: Triple busbar station with two sections and six protection zones

Z1 Z1
Z2 Z2
Z3 Z3
Z4 Z4

QB1 QB2 QB3 QB1 QB2 QB3 QB10 QB20 QB30 QB1 QB2 QB20 QB30 QB1 QB2 QB3

QB7 QB7 QB7

QA1 QA1 QA1 QA1

CT1 CT1

CT1 CT1
BU1 BU1

Feeder 01-07 Feeder 08-20

IEC16000146-1.en.vsdx
IEC16000146 V1 EN-US

Figure 76: Triple busbar station with transfer bus and four protection zones

6.1.5.3 Example engineering procedure GUID-8E5A800E-F88D-4C93-B837-78D257774D3B v1

The procedure for how to engineer the triple busbar station with two sections and six
protection zones (see Figure 75) will be presented here.

Step 1: Allocation of protection zones

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 157

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

In the single line diagram the individual bus-protection zones in the station shall be
indicated and associated with the corresponding zones available within the IED. This
has been already done for all five example applications, see the marked zones Z1, Z2
etc. in the figures above.

Step 2: ACT engineering of the feeder bays at Section 1

The feeders located at the first section, namely Section 1, can be connected to either Z1
or Z2 or Z3, depending on the operational status of the three busbar disconnectors, in
this particular station. More specifically, the following steps need to be done, for each
feeder bay:
1. Connect the two auxiliary contacts (i.e. normally open and normally closed
auxiliary contacts or also sometimes called “a & b contacts”) from each of the
three busbar disconnectors to the IED. This can be done by wiring using binary
inputs or via communication (e.g. via GOOSE or via LDCM).
2. Use three BDCGAPC function blocks (i.e. one per busbar disconnector) to derive
open or closed status of the respective disconnector primary contacts.
3. Connect the close status output from each BDCGAPC function block to the
respective zone control input on the feeder bay function block BFPTRC_Fxx. This
will ensure proper dynamic inclusion of the feeder CT measurement towards the
differential protection zones.
4. Connect the feeder current from the TRM via pre-processing block to the bay
function block BFPTRC_Fxx.
5. Connect the trip output from BFPTRC_Fxx function block to the binary output
contact (alternatively the tripping can also be arranged using GOOSE
communication). This will ensure proper tripping of this feeder bay for any
relevant operation of the BBP including BFP tripping.

ACT configuration example for Feeder 01 located at Section 1 is given in Figure 77.
Any other feeders located at Section 1 shall be engineered in the similar way.

158 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

IEC16000147-1.en.vsdx

IEC16000147 V1 EN-US

Figure 77: ACT configuration example for Feeder 01 in Section 1

Step 3: ACT engineering of the feeder bays at Section 2

Identical steps to Step 2 shall be done for the feeders located at the second section,
namely Section 2. The only difference is that in Section 2, the relevant zones are Z4,
Z5 and Z6.

ACT configuration example for Feeder 17 located at Section 2 is given in Figure 78.
Any other feeders located at Section 2 shall be engineered in the similar way.

IEC16000148-1.en.vsdx

IEC16000148 V1 EN-US

Figure 78: ACT configuration example for Feeder 17 in Section 2

Step 4: ACT engineering of the Bus Coupler bays at Section 1

The bus-coupler bay is used to interconnect the differential zones via a circuit breaker
within one section. In this particular station, the Bus-Coupler 01 is located at Section 1
and consequently it can be connected to either Z1 or Z2 or Z3. How it is connected

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 159

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

depends on the status of the six busbar disconnectors (i.e. three on each side). More
specifically, the following need to be done, for each bus coupler bay:
1. Connect the two auxiliary contacts (i.e. normally open and normally closed
auxiliary contacts or also sometimes called “a & b contacts”) from each of the six
busbar disconnectors to the IED. This can be done by wiring using binary inputs
or via communication (e.g. via GOOSE or via LDCM).
2. Use six BDCGAPC function blocks (i.e. one per busbar disconnector) to derive
open or closed status of the respective disconnector primary contacts.
3. Connect the close status output from each BDCGAPC function block to the
respective zone control input on the bus-interconnector function block
BICPTRC_xx. This will ensure proper dynamic inclusion of the CT measurements
from the two CTs located within the bus-section bay towards the differential
protection zones.
4. Connect the two currents from the TRM via pre-processing blocks to the bus-
interconnector function block BICPTRC_xx. Ensure overlapping of the two CTs.
In case that only one CT is available, connect this CT to both CT inputs on the
BICPTRC_xx function block and then invert one of the two inputs in software by
using the parameter setting OperMode. This shall be done taking into account the
actual location of the CT star point in this bay.
5. Connect the trip output from BICPTRC_xx function block to the binary output
contact (alternatively the tripping can also be arranged using GOOSE
communication). This will ensure proper tripping of the bus-coupler bay for any
relevant operation of the BBP including BFP tripping.

ACT configuration example for Bus-coupler 01 located at Section 1 is given in Figure

79. Any other bus coupler bays located at Section 1 shall be engineered in the similar
way. For the bus coupler bays located at Section 2, similar steps to Step 3 shall be
done, except the relevant zones are then Z4, Z5 and Z6.

160 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

IEC16000149-1.en.vsdx

IEC16000149 V1 EN-US

Figure 79: ACT configuration example for Bus-Coupler 01 in Section 1

Step 5: ACT engineering of the Bus Section bay

The bus-section bay is used to interconnect the two section via a circuit breaker.
Similar steps to Step 4 can be done for bus section bay, except that the bus section bay
can be connected to Z1 or Z2 or Z3 on the first section and to Z4 or Z5 or Z6 on the
second section. How it is connected depends on the operational status of the six busbar
disconnectors (i.e. three on each side). More specifically, the following steps need to be
done:
1. Connect the two auxiliary contacts (i.e. normally open and normally closed
auxiliary contacts or also sometimes called “a & b contacts”) from each of the six
busbar disconnectors to the IED. This can be done by wiring using binary inputs
or via communication (e.g. via GOOSE or via LDCM).
2. Use six BDCGAPC function blocks (i.e. one per busbar disconnector) to derive
open or closed status of the respective disconnector primary contacts.
3. Connect the close status output from BDCGAPC function block to the respective
zone control input on the bus-interconnector function block BICPTRC_xx. This
will ensure proper dynamic inclusion of the CT measurements from the two CTs
located within the bus-section bay towards the differential protection zones.
4. Connect the two currents from the TRM via pre-processing blocks to the
BICPTRC_xx function block. Ensure overlapping of the two CTs. In case that
only one CT is available, connect this CT to both CT inputs on the BICPTRC_xx
function block and then invert one of the two in the software by using the

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 161

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

parameter setting OperMode. This shall be done taking into account the actual
location of the CT star point in this bay.
5. Connect the trip output from the BICPTRC_xx function block to the binary output
contact (alternatively tripping can also be arranged using GOOSE
communication). This will ensure proper tripping of the bus-section bay for any
relevant operation of the BBP including BFP tripping.

ACT configuration example for Bus-section bay is given in Figure 80.

IEC16000150-1.en.vsdx
IEC16000150 V1 EN-US

Figure 80: ACT configuration example for Bus-Section bay

Step 6: ACT engineering of the Bus Sectionalizing Disconnectors

Three bus-sectionalizing disconnectors are installed in this station. Each disconnector

is used to interconnect the two zones located at the two sections. Ultimately when this
type of disconnector is closed, the two relevant zones shall be merged (i.e. switched
into one common zone) in the IED software. In this particular station, the zones can be
possibly linked in the following way: Z1&Z4, Z2&Z5 and Z3&Z6. When any linking
shall occur, it depends on the operational status of the three bus-sectionalizing
disconnectors. More specifically, the following steps need to be done:

162 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

1. Connect the two auxiliary contacts (i.e. normally open and normally closed
auxiliary contacts or also sometimes called “a & b contacts”) from each of the
three sectionalizing disconnectors to the IED. This can be done by wiring using
binary inputs or via communication (e.g. via GOOSE or via LDCM).
2. Use three BDCGAPC function blocks (i.e. one per busbar disconnector) to derive
open or closed status of the respective disconnector primary contacts.
3. Connect the close status output from each BDCGAPC function block to the
respective zones merging input on the common BBP function block BDZSGAPC.
This will ensure proper dynamic linking of the affected differential zones.

ACT configuration example for three bus-sectionalizing disconnectors presenting in

this station is given in Figure 81.

IEC16000151-1.en.vsdx

IEC16000151 V1 EN-US

Figure 81: ACT configuration example for three bus-sectionalizing disconnectors

6.1.6 Summation principle

GUID-B09585B4-A1B8-4E29-A469-25997493E434 v1

Summation principle is mainly intended for two-zone busbar protection applications.

6.1.6.1 Introduction M12135-3 v4

A simplified bus differential protection for phase and ground faults can be obtained by
using a single one-phase IED with external auxiliary summation current transformers
for all busbar arrangements with up to two differential zones. By using this approach,
more cost effective bus differential protection can be obtained. Such a solution makes
it feasible to apply bus differential protection even to medium voltage substations. The

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 163

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

principal differences between full, phase-segregated bus differential protection scheme

and summation type bus differential protection scheme are shown in Figure 82.

Three one-phase Single one-phase Auxiliary Summation CT *)

REB670 REB670 type SLCE 8; 1/1A, 2/1A or 5/1A

REB670 REB670
REB670 @ Up to 18 pcs
with 1A
CT inputs
+ auxiliary CTs
REB670

*) One SLCE 8 per main CT

IEC06000126_2_en.vsd
IEC06000126 V2 EN-US

Figure 82: Difference between phase segregated & summation type differential
protection

In the full phase-segregated design, three one-phase REB670 IEDs (that is, one per
phase) are used. However for the summation type only single one-phase REB670 IED
plus one auxiliary summation CT per each main CT is required. These auxiliary
summation CTs convert each main CT three-phase currents to a single-phase output
current, which are all measured by one REB670 IED. The differential calculation is
then made on a single-phase basis. By doing so, this more cost effective bus
differential protection can be applied. Due to this characteristic, this summation type of
bus differential protection can be applied for all types of stations arrangements up to
two differential zones as shown in Section Two-zone busbar arrangments, for three
one-phase IEDs.

As an example, the necessary equipment for the summation type, busbar differential
protection for a single busbar station with up to 24 bays, is shown in Figure 83.

164 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

LA LB LX

IA1 IB1 IX1

Main CTs
52 52 52

A-bus

A B C N A B C N A B C N

IA2 IB2 IX2

Summation CTs

CT1 CT2 ... CT24

IED
with 1A
CT inputs

ANSI06000127_2_en.vsd
ANSI06000127 V2 EN-US

Figure 83: Principle CT connections for the complete station

This summation type bus differential protection still has the same main CT
requirements as outlined in section "Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements".
Some of these are:

• main CT ratio differences can be tolerated up to 10:1 (for example, 3000/5A CT

can be balanced against CT"s as low as 300/5)
• different main CT ratios are compensated numerically by a parameter setting
• main CT shall not saturate quicker than 2 ms ( refer to section "Rated equivalent
secondary e.m.f. requirements" for detailed CT requirements regarding main CT
knee-point voltage)

However, due to the summation principle this type of busbar protection scheme has the
following limitations:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 165

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

• Only one measuring circuit is utilized for all fault types (that is, no redundancy for
multi-phase faults)
• Primary fault sensitivity varies depending on the type of fault and involved
phase(s), see Table 24
• The load currents in the healthy phases might produce the stabilizing current when
an internal single phase to ground fault occurs. However, there is no problem for
solidly gounded systems with high ground-fault currents
• No indication of faulty phase(s) in case of an internal fault
• Not possible to fully utilize Open CT detection feature

6.1.6.2 Auxiliary summation CTs M12136-4 v4

Auxiliary Summation Current Transformer (that is, ASCT in further text) of the type
SLCE 8 is used with the summation principle of the IED. The principle drawing of one
such ASCT is shown in Figure 84.

Auxiliary Summation CT
type SLCE 8; X/1A

P1
N1
S1
P2

P3
N2 N4

P4

P5
N3
S2
P6

en03000118_ansi.vsd
ANSI03000118 V1 EN-US

Figure 84: Principle ASCT drawing

The ASCT has three primary windings and one secondary winding. In further text, turn
numbers of these windings will be marked with N1, N2, N3 & N4, respectively (see
Figure 84 for more information).

There are three types of ASCT for REB670:

166 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

1. ASCT type with ratio 1/1A, for balanced 3-Ph current input, shall be used with all
main current transformers with 1A rated secondary current (that is, 2000/1A)
2. ASCT type with ratio 5/1A, for balanced 3-Ph current input, shall be used with all
main current transformers with 5A rated secondary current (that is, 3000/5A)
3. ASCT type with ratio 2/1A, for balanced 3-Ph current input, shall be used with all
main current transformers with 2A rated secondary current (that is, 1000/2A)

Note the following:

• main CT rated primary current is not important for ASCT selection

• possible main CT ratio differences will be compensated by a parameter setting in
the IED
• rated secondary current of ASCT is 1A for all types. That means that secondary
ASCT winding should be always connected to the IED with 1A CT inputs,
irrespective of the rated secondary current of the main CT

All of these features simplify the ordering of the ASCTs. Practically, in order to
purchase ASCTs, the only required information is the main CT rated secondary current
that is, (1A, 2A or 5A).

Table 23 summarizes the ASCT data:

Table 23: Auxiliary summation CT data
Type of fault N1 N2 N3 N4 Vkp [V] Burden [VA]
ASCT SLCE 8; 52 52 104 90 33 1.0
1/1A
ASCT SLCE 8; 12 12 24 104 38 1.0
5/1A
ASCT SLCE 8; 26 26 52 90 33 1.0
2/1A

where:

• N1, N2, N3 & N4 are ASCT windings turn numbers (see Figure 84)
• Vkp is knee point voltage, at 1.6T, of the secondary winding with N4 turns
• Burden is the total 3Ph load of ASCT imposed to the main CT

Due to ASCT design, the ASCTs for summated bus differential

protection, must always be mounted as close as possible to the IED
(that is, in the same protection cubicle).

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 167

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

6.1.6.3 Possible ASCT connections for REB670 M12137-3 v4

It is possible to connect the ASCTs for summated bus differential protection with
REB670:

• at the end of the main CT circuit (for example, beyond the other protective relays,
as shown in Figure 85
• in series with other secondary equipment when some other relay must be located at
the end of the main CT circuit , as shown in Figure 86

End connection is the preferred arrangement as it gives greater sensitivity for

summation type bus differential protection (as shown in Table 24 for more
information).

However, it should be noted that these two connection types must not be mixed. This
means that within one busbar installation all auxiliary summation CTs have to be either
end-connected or series-connected.

Typical end-connection with ASCT is shown in Figure 85.

Main CT Auxiliary Summation CT

2000/1A or 2000/5A type SLCE 8;
or 2000/2A 1/1A or 5/1A or 2/1A
IA
A
P1 ISUMM
REB 670 with 1A CTs
N1
IB
B S1
P2 X401
Other 5

relays P3 AI03
N2 N4
IC
C 6

P4

P5
N3
IN S2
N
P6

en06000128_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000128 V1 EN-US

Figure 85: End-connection with ASCT connected to CT3 input

It is important to notice that even in the case of 5A or 2A main CTs, secondary current
of the summation CTs shall be connected to the IED with 1A CT inputs (as shown in
Figure 85). The reason for this is that the rated secondary current of ASCT is always
1A irrespective of the rated secondary current of the main CT.

Refer to section "SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for end-connection" for detailed ASCT
current calculations for end-connection.

Typical series-connection with ASCT is shown in Figure 86.

168 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Main CT
2000/1A
or 2000/5A
or 2000/2A
A B C N

Other
relays Auxiliary Summation CT
type SLCE 8; 1/1 or 5/1A or 2/1A
IA
P1 ISUMM
REB 670 with 1A CTs
N1
S1
P2 X401
5
P3 A103
N2 N4
IC 6
P4
P5
N3 S
IN
IA IB IC 2
P6

Other
relays

IN

en06000129_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000129 V1 EN-US

Figure 86: Series-connection with ASCT connected to CT3 input

Refer to Section "SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for series-connection" for detailed

ASCT current calculation for series-connection.

6.1.6.4 Main CT ratio mismatch correction M12138-3 v2

As stated before, three types of ASCTs for REB670 are available. The first type shall
be used for main CTs with 1A rated secondary current. The second type shall be used
for main CTs with 5A rated secondary current. The third type shall be used with 2A
main CTs. However REB670 with 1A CT inputs is always used. Therefore main CT
ratio shall always be set in such a way that the primary current is entered as for the
main CT, but secondary current is always entered as 1A (that is, 3000/5 main CT will
be entered as 3000/1 CT in REB670).

6.1.6.5 Primary pick-up levels for summation type differential protection M12139-3 v4

The minimal differential operating current level is entered directly in primary amperes.
However, as stated previously, in case of the summated differential protection the
primary fault sensitivity varies depending on the type of fault and involved phase(s).
The entered value, for the minimal differential operating current level, will exactly
correspond to the REB670 pickup value in the event of a 3-phase internal fault. For all

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 169

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

other fault types this value must be multiplied by a coefficient shown in the Table 24 in
order to calculate the actual primary pickup value.
Table 24: Pickup coefficients for Summated Differential Protection
Type of fault A-Gnd B-Gnd C-Gnd A-B BC C-A ABC
ASCT end 0.434 0.578 0.867 1.732 1.732 0.867 1.0
connected
ASCT series 1.732 0.867 0.578 1.732 1.732 0.867 1.0
connected

The coefficients in Table 24 are only relevant for ideal internal faults
(that is, load currents do not exist in the healthy phases).

Example 1:
The minimal differential operating current level in the IED is set to 1250A. All ASCTs
are series connected. What is the theoretical primary pickup value in case of C-Gnd
fault?

Answer 1:
According to Table 24, pickup coefficient for this type of ASCT connection and this
type of fault is 0.578. Therefore:

I Pickup ( L3 – Gnd ) = 0.578 × 1250 = 722.5A

EQUATION1106 V1 EN-US (Equation 11)

I Pickup (C - Gnd ) = 0.578 × 1250 = 722.5 A

EQUATION1784 V1 EN-US (Equation 11)

This means that if 722.5 primary amperes is injected only in phase C of any of the
connected main CTs, the IED shall display the differential current of 1250A (primary)
and should be on the point of the pickup (that is, trip).
SEMOD127594-37 v4

In addition to busbar protection differential zones, the IED can incorporate other
additional functions and features. If and how they can be used together with summation
busbar protection design is shown in Table 25:

170 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

Table 25: Functions

Functions Comment
Busbar Differential Protection Differential Protection, Sensitive differential protection, OCT
algorithm, Check Zone and Differential Supervision features
will be connected to the summated bay currents. Therefore,
they will have different level depending on the type of fault
and involved phase(s). For more information, refer to
Table 24. However, if all these limitations are acceptable it is
still possible to use all these internal busbar protection
features. Note that OCT operating logic will not work properly
in case of opening or shorting the main CT secondary leads
(that is, in-between main CT and ASCT). In case of opening
or shorting the ASCT secondary leads (that is, in-between
ASCT and the IED) the OCT logic will operate correctly.
Dynamic Zone Selection feature Zone Selection feature in the IED can be used in the exactly
same way as with phase segregated design. All built-in
features, even including breaker failure protection, protection
back-up trip command routing, EnFP logic can be used in the
exactly same way as for phase segregated design.
CCRBRF/CCSRBRF function Breaker Fail Protection function will be connected to the
summated bay current. Therefore it will have different pickup
level depending on the type of fault and involved phase(s).
See Table 24 for more info. It will not be possible to have
individual initiation per phase, but only three-phase initiation
can be effectively used. However, if all these limitations are
acceptable it is still possible to use internal CCRBRF/
CCSRBRF functions.
OC4PTOC/PHS4PTOCfunction Overcurrent Protection function will be connected to the
summated bay current. Therefore, it will have different pickup
level depending on the type of fault and involved phase(s).
See Table 24 for more info. Thus it will be very difficult to
insure proper pickup and time grading with downstream
overcurrent protection relays. Hence it will be quite difficult to
use OC4PTOC/PHS4PTOC as backup feeder protection with
summation design.
OC4PTOC/PHS4PTOC function End Fault Protection feature will be connected to the
summated bay current. Therefore it will have different pickup
level depending on the type of fault and involved phase(s).
See Table 24 for more info. However, OC4PTOC/
PHS4PTOC do not need any pickup or time coordination with
any other overcurrent protection. Thus if above limitations are
acceptable OC4PTOC/PHS4PTOC can be used with
summation design.
DRPRDRE function Disturbance Recording feature will be connected to the
individual summated bay current. Therefore recorded
currents will not correspond to any actual primary currents.
However such DRPRDRE records can still be used to
evaluate internal busbar protection, CCRBRF/CCSRBRF and
OC4PTOC/PHS4PTOC protections operation.
DRPRDRE function Event List feature in the IED can be used in the exactly the
same way as with phase segregated design.
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 171

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

Functions Comment
DRPRDRE function Trip Value Recording feature will be connected to the
individual summated bay current. Therefore recorded trip
current values will not correspond to any actual primary
currents. However such records can still be used to evaluate
internal busbar protection, CCRBRF/CCSRBRF and
OC4PTOC/PHS4PTOC protections operation.
Communication All communication features in the IED can be used in the
exactly the same way as with phase segregated design
SMBRREC function Autoreclosing function in the IED can be used in the exactly
same way as with phase segregated design.

6.1.6.6 SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for end-connection M12141-3 v4

Typical ASCT end-connection is shown in Figure 85. For this ASCT connection type,
the ampere-turn balance equation has the form according to Equation 12:

N 4 × I SUMM = N 1 × IA + N 2 × ( IA + IB ) + N 3 × ( IA + IB + IC )
EQUATION1785-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 12)

The relationships between number of turns for this SLCE 8, ASCT for REB670, is
shown in Equation 13, Equation 14 and Equation 15:

N1 = N2 = N;
EQUATION1108 V1 EN-US (Equation 13)

N3 = 2 × N
EQUATION1109 V1 EN-US (Equation 14)

N4 = k × 3 × N
EQUATION1110 V1 EN-US (Equation 15)

where:
k a constant, which depends on the type of ASCT
(that is, k=1, for 1/1A ASCT or k=5 for 5/1A ASCT or k=2 for 2/1A ASCT)

The well-known relationship, between positive, negative and zero sequence current
components and individual phase current quantities is shown in Equation 16:

172 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 6
Differential protection

é IA ù é 1 1 1ù é I1 ù
ê IB ú = ê a 2 a 1ú × ê I 2 ú
ê ú ê ú ê ú
êë IC úû êë a a2 1úû êë I 0 úû
EQUATION1786-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 16)

where:
a complex constant (that is, a=-0.5+j0.866).

By including Equation 13, Equation 14, Equation 15 and Equation 16 into the
Equation 12 the equation for the end-connected, ASCT secondary current (that is,
summated current) can be derived according to equation 17:

1 -j30° j30°
I SUMM = --- × ( I 1 × e + I2 × e + 3 × 3 × I0)
k
EQUATION1112 V1 EN-US (Equation 17)

From Equation 17 it is obvious that the ASCT rated ratio is declared for balanced three
phase current system, when only positive sequence current component exist. For any
unbalanced condition (that is, external or internal fault), both negative and zero
sequence current components will give their own contribution to the summated current.

6.1.6.7 SLCE 8/ASCT characteristics for series-connection M12143-3 v4

Typical ASCT series-connection is shown in Figure 86. For this ASCT connection
type, the ampere-turn balance equation has the form according to equation 18:

N 4 × I SUMM = N 1 × IA - N 2 × IC - N 3( IA + IB + IC )
EQUATION1787-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 18)

The relationships between the number of turns for this SLCE 8 ASCT for REB670, is
shown in Equation 19, Equation 20, Equation 21:

N1 = N2 = N;
EQUATION1108 V1 EN-US (Equation 19)

N3 = 2 × N
EQUATION1109 V1 EN-US (Equation 20)

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 173

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Differential protection

N4 = k × 3 × N
EQUATION1110 V1 EN-US (Equation 21)

where:
k is a constant, which depends on the type of ASCT
(that is, k=1, for 1/1A ASCT or k=5 for 5/1A ASCT or k=2 for 2/1A ASCT).

The well-known relationship, between positive, negative and zero sequence current
components and individual phase current quantities is shown in Equation 22:

é IA ù é 1 1 1ù é I1 ù
ê IB ú = ê a 2 a 1ú × ê I 2 ú
ê ú ê ú ê ú
êë IC úû êë a a 2
1úû êë I 0 úû
EQUATION1788-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 22)

where:
a is complex constant (that is, a=-0.5+j0.866).

By including Equation 19, Equation 20, Equation 21 and Equation 22 into the
Equation 18 the equation for the series-connected, ASCT secondary current (that is,
summated current) can be derived according to equation 23:

1 -j30° j30°
I SUMM = --- × ( I 1 × e + I2 × e + 2 × 3 × I0)
k
EQUATION1114 V1 EN-US (Equation 23)

From Equation 23 it is obvious that the ASCT rated ratio is declared for balanced three
phase current system, when only positive sequence current component exist. For any
unbalanced condition (that is, external or internal fault), both negative and zero
sequence current components will give their own contribution to the summated current.

174 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Section 7 Current protection

7.1 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps

OC4PTOC(51_67) SEMOD129998-1 v8

7.1.1 Identification
M14885-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional phase overcurrent OC4PTOC 51_67
protection, four steps

TOC-REVA V2 EN-US

7.1.2 Application M15335-3 v9

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC (51_67) is used in

several applications in the power system. Some applications are:

• Short circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems.

Normally these feeders have a radial structure.
• Back-up short circuit protection of transmission lines.
• Back-up short circuit protection of power transformers.
• Short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power
system such as; shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors, motors and others.
• Back-up short circuit protection of power generators.

In many applications several steps with different current pickup levels and time delays
are needed. OC4PTOC (51_67) can have up to four different, individually settable
steps. The following options are possible:

Non-directional / Directional function: In most applications the non-directional

functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the
protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the
directional function can be necessary.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 175

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, the setting parameter

DirModeSelx (x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4) shall be left to the default value
Non-directional.

Choice of time delay characteristics: There are several types of time delay
characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time
delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is
normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different
protections. To enable optimal co-ordination between all overcurrent protections, they
should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore, a wide range of standardized
inverse time characteristics are available for IEC and ANSI. It is also possible to tailor
make the inverse time characteristic.

Normally, it is required that the phase overcurrent protection shall reset as fast as
possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some
sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore, different kinds of reset characteristics can
be used.

For some protection applications, there can be a need to change the current pick-up
level for some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to a
large motor. At the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly
larger than the rated current of the motor. Therefore, there is a possibility to give a
setting of a multiplication factor to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor
is activated from a binary input signal to the function.

Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This
phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the
period. There is a risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current of
the phase overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large 2nd harmonic content.
This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection function. Therefore,
OC4PTOC (51/67) has a possibility of 2nd harmonic restrain if the level of 2nd
harmonic current reaches a value above a set percent of the fundamental current.

The phase overcurrent protection is often used as a protection for two and three phase
short circuits. In some cases, it is not wanted to detect single-phase ground faults by
the phase overcurrent protection. This fault type is detected and cleared after operation
of ground fault protection. Therefore, it is possible to make a choice how many phases,
at minimum, that have to have current above the pick-up level, to enable operation. If
set 1 of 3 it is sufficient to have high current in one phase only. If set 2 of 3 or 3 of 3
single-phase ground faults are not detected.

176 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.1.3 Setting guidelines IP14982-1 v1

M12982-4 v13

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time

of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
important to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

The parameters for the directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC
(51/67) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for OC4PTOC (51/67).

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in the global base values for settings function
GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: This is used to select GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

MeasType: Selection of discrete Fourier filtered (DFT) or true RMS filtered (RMS)
signals. RMS is used when the harmonic contents are to be considered, for example in
applications with shunt capacitors.

Operation: The protection can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

AngleRCA: Protection characteristic angle set in degrees. If the angle of the fault loop
current has the angle RCA, the direction to the fault is forward.

AngleROA: Angle value, given in degrees, to define the angle sector of the directional
function, shown in Figure 87.

NumPhSel: Number of phases, with high current, required for operation. The setting
possibilities are: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3. The default setting is 1 out of 3.

PUMinOpPhSel: Minimum current setting level for releasing the directional start
signals in % of IB. This setting should be less than the lowest step setting. The default
setting is 7% of IB.

2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the

fundamental current. The setting range is 5 - 100% in steps of 1%. The default setting
is 20%.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 177

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

Vref

2
4

Idir

ANSI09000636-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000636 V1 EN-US

Figure 87: Directional function characteristic

1. RCA = Relay characteristic angle

2. ROA = Relay operating angle
3. Reverse
4. Forward

7.1.3.1 Settings for each step M12982-19 v10

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are Disabled/Non-

directional/Forward/Reverse.

178 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and
different types of inverse time characteristics are available according to Table 26.
Table 26: Inverse time characteristics
Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG or RD (logarithmic)

The different characteristics are described in Technical manual.

Pickupx: Operate phase current level for step x given in % of IB.

Ix>Max and Ix>Min should only be changed if remote setting of operation current
level, Ix>, is used. The limits are used for decreasing the used range of the Ix> setting.
If Ix> is set outside Ix>Max and Ix>Min, the closest of the limits to Ix> is used by the
function. If Ix>Max is smaller than Ix>Min, the limits are swapped.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. The definite time tx is added to the inverse time when
inverse time characteristic is selected. Note that the value set is the time between
activation of the start and the trip outputs.

TDx: Time multiplier for inverse time delay for step x.

IMinx: Minimum operate current in % of IB for all inverse time characteristics, below
which no operation takes place.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 179

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

IMinx: Minimum pickup current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Pickupx for
every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set
above Pickupx for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current
drops below IMinx.

txMin: Minimum trip time for all inverse time characteristics. At high currents the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. Setting
range: 0.000 - 60.000s in steps of 0.001s.

MultPUx: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
ENMULTx (enableMultiplier) is activated the current operation level is increased by
this setting constant. Setting range: 1.0-10.0

Trip time

tx

txMin

Pickup current
ANSI10000058-1-en.vsdx
ANSI10000058 V1 EN-US

Figure 88: Minimum pickup current and trip time for inverse time characteristics

In order to fully comply with the definition of the curve, the setting parameter txMin
shall be set to a value equal to the operating time of the selected inverse curve for
twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operate time is dependent on
the selected time multiplier setting kx.

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made as shown in Table 27.

180 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Table 27: Reset possibilities

Curve name Curve index no.
Instantaneous 1
IEC Reset (constant time) 2
ANSI Reset (inverse time) 3

The delay characteristics are described in Technical manual. There are some
restrictions regarding the choice of the reset delay.

For the definite time delay characteristics, the possible delay time setting instantaneous
(1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time characteristics, all three types of reset time characteristics are
available: instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current
dependent reset time).

For IEC inverse time characteristics, the possible delay time settings are instantaneous
(1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the customer tailor-made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17), all three
types of reset time characteristics are available: instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant
time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current-dependent type
is used, settings pr, tr and cr must be given.

tResetx: Constant reset time delay in seconds for step x.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: These parameters are used by the customer to create
the inverse time characteristic curve. See equation 24 for the time characteristic
equation. For more information, refer to Technical manual.

æ ö
ç A ÷
t [s] = ç + B ÷ × MultPUx
çæ i ö ÷
p

çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
ANSI-EQUATION1261 V1 EN-US (Equation 24)

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: These parameters are used by the customer to create the
inverse reset time characteristic curve. For more information, refer to Technical
manual.

HarmRestrainx: Enables the block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd
harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk of an unwanted trip
caused by power transformer inrush currents. It can be set to Disabled/Enabled.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 181

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

7.1.3.2 Setting example GUID-20729467-24AB-42F0-9FD1-D2959028732E v1

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps can be used in different ways,
depending on the application where the protection is used. A general description is
given below.

The pickup current setting of the inverse time protection, or the lowest current step of
the definite time protection, must be defined so that the highest possible load current
does not cause protection operation. The protection reset current must also be
considered so that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause the operation of a
protection even when the overcurrent has ceased. This phenomenon is described in
Figure 89.

Current I

Line phase current

Pickup current

Reset current

The IED does not reset

Time t

ANSI09000146-en-1.vsd
ANSI09000146 V1 EN-US

Figure 89: Pickup and reset current for an overcurrent protection

The lowest setting value can be written according to Equation 25.

182 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Im ax
Ipu ³ 1.2 ×
k
EQUATION1262 V2 EN-US (Equation 25)

where:
1.2 is a safety factor
k is the reset ratio of the protection
Imax is the maximum load current

The load current up to the present situation can be found from operation statistics. The
current setting must remain valid for several years. In most cases, the setting values are
updated once every five years or less often. Investigate the maximum load current that
the equipment on the line can withstand. Study components, such as line conductors,
current transformers, circuit breakers, and disconnectors. The manufacturer of the
equipment normally gives the maximum thermal load current of the equipment.

The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. There is also a demand that
all faults within the zone that the protection shall cover must be detected by the phase
overcurrent protection. The minimum fault current Iscmin to be detected by the
protection must be calculated. Taking this value as a base, the highest pickup current
setting can be written according to Equation 26.

Ipu £ 0.7 × Isc min

EQUATION1263 V2 EN-US (Equation 26)

where:
0.7 is a safety factor
Iscmin is the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.

As a summary, the pickup current shall be chosen within the interval stated in
Equation 27.

Im ax
1.2 × £ Ipu £ 0.7 × Isc min
k
EQUATION1264 V2 EN-US (Equation 27)

The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short-delay
trip time, must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to other
protection functions in the power system. It is desirable to have rapid tripping of faults
within a large part of the power system to be protected by the protection (primary

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 183

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

protected zone). A fault current calculation gives the largest current of faults, Iscmax,
at the most remote part of the primary protected zone. The risk of transient overreach
must be considered, due to a possible DC component of the short circuit current. The
lowest current setting of the fastest stage can be written according to

I high ³ 1.2 × kt × I sc max

EQUATION1265 V1 EN-US (Equation 28)

where:
1.2 is a safety factor
kt is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current
and can be considered to be less than 1.05
Iscmax is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.

The operate time of the phase overcurrent protection has to be chosen so that the fault
time is short enough that the protected equipment will not be destroyed due to thermal
overload while, at the same time, selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection in a
radial fed network, the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly
used in the case of inverse time overcurrent protection. Figure 90 shows how the time-
versus-current curves are plotted in a diagram. The time setting is chosen to get the
shortest fault time with maintained selectivity. Selectivity is assured if the time
difference between the curves is larger than a critical time difference.

184 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Time-current curves
10

tfunc1n
Trip time

tfunc2n

0.01
10 Strn 10000
Fault Current
en05000204.ai
IEC05000204 V2 EN-US

Figure 90: Fault time with maintained selectivity

The operation time can be set individually for each overcurrent protection.

To assure selectivity between different protection functions in the radial network, there
has to be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. To
determine the shortest possible time difference, the operation time of the protection, the
breaker opening time and the protection resetting time must be known. These time
delays can vary significantly between different protective equipment. The following
time delays can be estimated:

Protection operation 15-60 ms

time:
Protection resetting time: 15-60 ms
Breaker opening time: 20-120 ms

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 185

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

Example for time coordination

Assume two substations A and B directly connected to each other via one line, as
shown in the Figure 91. Consider a fault located at another line from the station B. The
fault current to the overcurrent protection of IED B1 has a magnitude so that the
overcurrent protection will start and subsequently trip, and the overcurrent protection
of IED A1 must have a delayed operation in order to avoid maloperation. The sequence
of events during the fault can be described using a time axis shown in Figure 91.

A1 B1
Feeder

51 51

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

The fault Protection Breaker at Protection
occurs B1 trips B1 opens A1 resets en05000205_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000205 V1 EN-US

Figure 91: Sequence of events during fault

where:
t=0 is when the fault occurs
t=t1 is when protection IED B1 and protection IED A1 start

t=t2 is when the trip signal from the overcurrent protection at IED B1 is sent to the circuit breaker.

t=t3 is when the circuit breaker at IED B1 opens. The circuit breaker opening time is t3 - t2

t=t4 is when the overcurrent protection at IED A1 resets. The protection resetting time is t4 - t3.

To ensure that the overcurrent protection at IED A1 is selective to the overcurrent

protection at IED B1, the minimum time difference must be larger than the time t3.
There are uncertainties in the values of protection operation time, breaker opening time
and protection resetting time. Therefore a safety margin has to be included. With
normal values the needed time difference can be calculated according to Equation 29.

186 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Dt ³ 40 ms + 100 ms + 40 ms + 40 ms = 220 ms
EQUATION1266 V1 EN-US (Equation 29)

where it is considered that:

the operate time of overcurrent protection B1 is 40 ms
the breaker open time is 100 ms
the resetting time of protection A1 is 40 ms and
the additional margin is 40 ms

7.2 Four step single phase overcurrent protection

PH4SPTOC (51) SEMOD127812-1 v2

7.2.1 Identification
SEMOD127810-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Four step single phase overcurrent PH4SPTOC 51
protection I>
4
alt
4
OC V1 EN-US

7.2.2 Application SEMOD127937-4 v2

The Four step single phase overcurrent protection(PH4SPTOC, 51) function is used in
several applications in the power system. Some applications are:

• Short circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems.

Normally these feeders have radial structure.
• Back-up short circuit protection of transmission lines.
• Back-up short circuit protection of power transformers
• Short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power
system such as; shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors, motors and others.
• Back-up short circuit protection of power generators.

The single phase overcurrent protection is used in IEDs having only input from one
phase, for example busbar protection for large busbars (with many bays).

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 187

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

In many applications several steps with different current pick up levels and time delays
are needed. PH4SPTOC(51) can have up to four different, individual settable, steps.
The flexibility of each step of PH4SPTOC(51) function is great. The following options
are possible:

Choice of delay time characteristics: There are several types of time delay
characteristics available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time
delay characteristics. The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is
normally enabled by co-ordination between the function time delays of the different
protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent IEDs, to be co-ordinated
against each other, should have the same time delay characteristic. Therefore a wide
range of standardised inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI. It is
also possible to programme a user defined inverse time characteristic.

Normally it is required that the phase overcurrent function shall reset as fast as possible
when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of
time delayed reset is required. Therefore three different kinds of reset time
characteristics can be used.

For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pick-up
level for some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to a
large motor. At the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly
larger then the rated current of the motor. Therefore there is a possibility to give a
setting of a multiplication factor to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor
is activated from a binary input signal to the function.

Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This
phenomenon is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the
period. There is a risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current of
the phase overcurrent protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic
content. This can be used to avoid unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore the
Four step phase overcurrent protection (OC4PTOC, 51/67) function have a possibility
of second harmonic restrain if the level of this harmonic current reaches a value above
a set percentage of the fundamental current.

7.2.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD127939-1 v1

SEMOD127941-4 v3

A typical starting time delay of 24ms is subtracted from the set trip
time delay, so that the resulting trip time will take the internal IED start
time into consideration.

The parameters for the four step phase overcurrent protection function (OC) are set via
the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM 600).

188 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

The following settings can be done for the four step phase overcurrent protection.

Operation: Off/On

IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the protected
object.

2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the

fundamental current. The setting range is 5-100% of IBase in steps of 1%. Default
setting is 20%.

HarmRestrainx: Disabled/Enabled, enables blocking from harmonic restrain.

7.2.3.1 Settings for each step (x = 1-4) SEMOD127941-18 v4

Characteristx: Selection of time delay characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and
different types of inverse time delay characteristics are available according to table 28.
Table 28: Inverse time delay characteristics
Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

The different characteristics are described in the “Technical reference manual”.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 189

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

Ix>: Operation phase current level for step x given in % of IBase.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. Used if definite time characteristic is chosen. Setting
range: 0.000-60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. Note that the value set is the time between
activation of the start and the trip outputs.

kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic.

InxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
(enableMultiplier) is activated the current operation level is increase by this setting
constant. Setting range: 1.0-10.0

txMin: Minimum operation time for IEC inverse time characteristics. At high currents
the inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. Setting
range: 0.000-60.000 s in step of 0.001 s.

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By
choosing setting the possibilities are according to table 29.
Table 29: Reset possibilities
Curve name Curve index no.
Instantaneous 1
IEC Reset (constant time) 2
ANSI Reset (inverse time) 3

The delay characteristics are described in the “Technical reference manual”. There are
some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay.

For the independent time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics
are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 =
current dependent reset time).

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three types
of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time
reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is
used then settings pr, tr and cr must be given.

190 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

HarmRestrainx: Enable block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd
harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk if power transformer
inrush currents might cause unwanted trip. Can be set Off/On.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time
characteristic curve (Curve type = 17). See equation 30 for the time characteristic
equation.

æ ö
ç A ÷
t [s] = ç + B ÷ × IxMult
çæ i ö ÷
p

çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1261 V2 EN-US (Equation 30)

For more information, please refer to the “Technical reference manual”.

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse reset time
characteristic curve (Reset Curve type = 3). Further description can be found in the
“Technical reference manual”.

7.2.3.2 Second harmonic restrain SEMOD127941-90 v1

If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the transformer core will saturate
during part of the period, resulting in an inrush transformer current. This will give a
declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating between the
phases. There is a risk that the phase overcurrent function will give an unwanted trip.
The inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic component. This
component can be used to create a restrain signal to prevent this unwanted function.

The settings for the 2nd harmonic restrain are described below.

2ndHarmStab: The rate of second harmonic current content for activation of the 2nd
harmonic restrain signal, to block chosen steps. The setting is given in % of the
fundamental frequency residual current. The setting range is 5-100% in step of 1%.
The default setting is 20%.

HarmRestrainx: This parameter can be set Off/On, disable or enable the 2nd harmonic
restrain.

The four-step phase overcurrent protection can be used in different ways, depending on
the application where the protection is used. A general description is given below.

The pick up current setting inverse time protection or the lowest current step constant
inverse time protection must be given a current setting so that the highest possible load

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 191

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

current does not cause protection operation. Here consideration also has to be taken to
the protection reset current, so that a short peak of overcurrent does not cause operation
of the protection even when the overcurrent has ceased. This phenomenon is described
in figure 92.

Current (A)

Line phase current

Operate current

Reset current

The IED does not reset

Time (s)

IEC05000203-en-2.vsd
IEC05000203 V4 EN-US

Figure 92: Pick up and reset current for an overcurrent protection

The lowest setting value can be written according to equation 31.

Im ax
Ipu ³ 1.2 ×
k
EQUATION1262 V2 EN-US (Equation 31)

where:
1.2 is a safety factor,
k is the resetting ratio of the protection, and
Imax is the maximum load current.

The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. From operation statistics
the load current up to the present situation can be found. The current setting must be
valid also for some years ahead. It is, in most cases, realistic that the setting values are

192 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

updated not more often than once every five years. In many cases this time interval is
still longer. Investigate the maximum load current that different equipment on the line
can withstand. Study components such as line conductors, current transformers, circuit
breakers, and disconnectors. The manufacturer of the equipment normally gives the
maximum thermal load current of the equipment.

There is also a demand that all faults, within the zone that the protection shall cover,
must be detected by the phase overcurrent protection. The minimum fault current
Iscmin, to be detected by the protection, must be calculated. Taking this value as a base,
the highest pick up current setting can be written according to equation 32.

Ipu £ 0.7 × Isc min

EQUATION1263 V2 EN-US (Equation 32)

where:
0.7 is a safety factor and
Iscmin is the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.

As a summary the pick up current shall be chosen within the interval stated in
equation 33.

Im ax
1.2 × £ Ipu £ 0.7 × Isc min
k
EQUATION1264 V2 EN-US (Equation 33)

The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short delay
of the operation, must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to
other protection in the power system. It is desirable to have a rapid tripping of faults
within as large portion as possible of the part of the power system to be protected by
the protection (primary protected zone). A fault current calculation gives the largest
current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of the primary protected zone.
Considerations have to be made to the risk of transient overreach, due to a possible DC
component of the short circuit current. The lowest current setting of the most rapid
stage, of the phase overcurrent protection, can be written according to

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 193

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

I high ³ 1.2 × kt × I sc max

EQUATION1265 V1 EN-US (Equation 34)

where:
1.2 is a safety factor,
kt is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current
and can be considered to be less than 1.1
Iscmax is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.

The operate times of the phase overcurrent protection has to be chosen so that the fault
time is so short so that equipment will not be destroyed due to thermal overload, at the
same time as selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection, in a radial fed network,
the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly used in the case of
inverse time overcurrent protection. In the figure below is shown how the time-versus-
current curves are plotted in a diagram. The time setting is chosen to get the shortest
fault time with maintained selectivity. Selectivity is assured if the time difference
between the curves is larger than a critical time difference.

194 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Time-current curves
10

tfunc1n
Trip time

tfunc2n

0.01
10 Strn 10000
Fault Current
en05000204.ai
IEC05000204 V2 EN-US

Figure 93: Fault time with maintained selectivity

The operation time can be set individually for each overcurrent protection. To assure
selectivity between different protective protections, in the radial network, there have to
be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. The
minimum time difference can be determined for different cases. To determine the
shortest possible time difference between we must have knowledge about operation
time of protections, breaker opening time and protection resetting time. These time
delays can vary significantly between different pieces of equipment. The following
time delays can be estimated:

protection operation 15-60 ms

time:
protection resetting time: 15-60 ms
Breaker opening time: 20-120 ms

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 195

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

Example
Assume two substations A and B directly connected to each other via one line, as
shown in the figure below. We study a fault located at another line from the station B.
The fault current to the overcurrent protection of IED B1 has a magnitude so that the
protection will have instantaneous function. The overcurrent protection of IED A1
must have a delayed function. The sequence of events during the fault can be described
using a time axis, see figure 94.

A1 B1
Feeder

Fault
I> I>

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3 t=t4

The fault B1 and A1 B1 trips and Breaker at Protection
occurs start A1 starts B1 opens A1 resets
=IEC05000205=2=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000205 V2 EN-US

Figure 94: Sequence of events during fault

where:
t=0 is the fault occurs,
t=t1 is the trip signal from the overcurrent protection at IED B1 is sent. Operation time of this
protection is t1,
t=t2 is the circuit breaker at IED B1 opens. The circuit breaker opening time is t2 - t1 and

t=t3 is the overcurrent protection at IED A1 resets. The protection resetting time is t3 - t2.

To ensure that the overcurrent protection at IED A1, is selective to the overcurrent
protection at IED B1, the minimum time difference must be larger that the time t3.
There are uncertainties in the values of protection operation time, breaker opening time
and protection resetting time. Therefor a safety margin has to be included. With normal
values the needed time difference can be calculated according to equation 35.

196 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Dt ³ 40 ms + 100 ms + 40 ms + 40 ms = 220 ms
EQUATION1266 V1 EN-US (Equation 35)

where it is considered that:

the operation time of overcurrent protection B1 is 40 ms
the breaker open time is 100 ms
the resetting time of protection A1 is 40 ms and
the additional margin is 40 ms

7.3 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) IP14509-1 v8

7.3.1 Identification
M14881-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N_67N
4(IN>)
protection, four steps
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN-US

7.3.2 Setting guidelines IP14988-1 v1

M15282-3 v11

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time

of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
important to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

The parameters for the four step residual overcurrent protection are set via the local
HMI or PCM600. The following settings can be done for the function.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in the global base values for settings function
GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: This is used to select GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 197

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

SeqTypeUPol: This is used to select the type of voltage polarising quantity i.e. Zero seq
and Neg seq for direction detection.

SeqTypeIPol: This is used to select the type of current polarising quantity i.e. Zero seq
and Neg seq for direction detection.

SeqTypeIDir: This is used to select the type of operating current quantity i.e. Zero seq
and Neg seq for direction detection.

7.3.2.1 Common settings for all steps M15282-81 v10

AngleRCA: Relay characteristic angle given in degree. This angle is defined as shown
in Figure 95. The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference
voltage (Vpol = 3V0 or V2)

RCA V pol = 3V0 or V2

Operation

IDirPU

en 05000135-4- ansi. vsd

ANSI05000135 V3 EN-US

Figure 95: Relay characteristic angle given in degree

In a normal transmission network a normal value of RCA is about 65°. The setting
range is -180° to +180°.

polMethod: Defines if the directional polarization is from

198 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

• Voltage (3V0 or V2)

• Current (3I0 · ZNpol or 3I2 ·ZNpol where ZNpol is RNpol + jXNpol), or
• both currents and voltage, Dual (dual polarizing, (3V0 + 3I0 · ZNpol) or (V2 + I2 ·
ZNpol)).

Normally voltage polarizing from the internally calculated residual sum or an external
open delta is used.

Current polarizing is useful when the local source is strong and a high sensitivity is
required. In such cases the polarizing voltage (3V0) can be below 1% and it is then
necessary to use current polarizing or dual polarizing. Multiply the required set current
(primary) with the minimum impedance (ZNpol) and check that the percentage of the
phase-to-ground voltage is definitely higher than 1% (minimum 3V0>VPolMin setting)
as a verification.

RNPol, XNPol: The zero-sequence source is set in primary ohms as base for the current
polarizing. The polarizing voltage is then achieved as 3I0 · ZNpol. The ZNpol can be
defined as (ZS1-ZS0)/3, that is the ground return impedance of the source behind the
protection. The maximum ground-fault current at the local source can be used to
calculate the value of ZN as V/(√3 · 3I0) Typically, the minimum ZNPol (3 · zero
sequence source) is set. The setting is in primary ohms.

When the dual polarizing method is used, it is important that the setting Pickupx or the
product 3I0 · ZNpol is not greater than 3V0. If so, there is a risk for incorrect operation
for faults in the reverse direction.

IPolMin: is the minimum ground-fault current accepted for directional evaluation. For
smaller currents than this value, the operation will be blocked. A typical setting is
5-10% of IB.

VPolMin: Minimum polarization (reference) polarizing voltage for the directional

function, given in % of VBase/√3.

IDirPU: Operate residual current release level in % of IB for directional comparison

scheme. The setting is given in % of IB and must be set below the lowest INx> setting,
set for the directional measurement. The output signals, PUFW and PUREV can be
used in a teleprotection scheme. The appropriate signal should be configured to the
communication scheme block.

7.3.2.2 2nd harmonic restrain M15282-90 v6

If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the current transformer core will
saturate during part of the period, resulting in a transformer inrush current. This will
give a declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 199

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

between the phases. There is a risk that the residual overcurrent function will give an
unwanted trip. The inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic
component. This component can be used to create a restrain signal to prevent this
unwanted function.

At current transformer saturation a false residual current can be measured by the

protection. Here the 2nd harmonic restrain can prevent unwanted operation as well.

2ndHarmStab: The rate of 2nd harmonic current content for activation of the 2nd
harmonic restrain signal. The setting is given in % of the fundamental frequency
residual current.

7.3.2.3 Parallel transformer inrush current logic M15282-97 v6

In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of

the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the
asymmetric inrush current of the switched-in transformer will cause partial saturation
of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd
harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers will be in phase opposition.
The summation of the two currents will thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The
residual fundamental current will however be significant. The inrush current of the
transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, will be a little
delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore, we will have high 2nd harmonic
current initially. After a short period this current will however be small and the normal
2nd harmonic blocking will reset.

51N 51N
Power System

en05000136_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000136 V1 EN-US

Figure 96: Application for parallel transformer inrush current logic

If the BlkParTransf function is activated, the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will latch as
long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current
level. Assume that step 4 is chosen to be the most sensitive step of the four step
residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC (51N_67N). The harmonic restrain
blocking is enabled for this step. Also the same current setting as this step is chosen for
the blocking at parallel transformer energizing.

200 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

The settings for the parallel transformer logic are described below.

BlkParTransf: This is used to Enable blocking at energising of parallel transformers.

Use_PUValue: Gives which current level should be used for the activation of the
blocking signal. This is given as one of the settings of the steps: Step 1/2/3/4.
Normally, the step having the lowest operation current level should be set.

7.3.2.4 Switch onto fault logic M15282-106 v4

In case of energizing a faulty object there is a risk of having a long fault clearance
time, if the fault current is too small to give fast operation of the protection. The switch
on to fault function can be activated from auxiliary signals from the circuit breaker,
either the close command or the open/close position (change of position).

This logic can be used to issue a fast trip if one breaker pole does not close properly at
a manual or automatic closing.

SOTF and under time are similar functions to achieve fast clearance at asymmetrical
closing based on requirements from different utilities.

The function is divided into two parts. The SOTF function will give operation from
step 2 or 3 during a set time after change in the position of the circuit breaker. The
SOTF function has a set time delay. The under time function, which has 2nd harmonic
restrain blocking, will give operation from step 4. The 2nd harmonic restrain will
prevent unwanted function in case of transformer inrush current. The under time
function has a set time delay.

Below the settings for switch on to fault logics are described.

SOTF: This parameter can be set: Disabled/SOTF/Under Time/SOTF+Under Time.

SOTFSel: This setting will select the signal to activate SOTF function; CB position
open/CB position closed/CB close command.

StepForSOTF: If this parameter is set on step 3, the step 3 pickup signal will be used as
current set level. If set on step 2, the step 2 pickup signal will be used as current set
level.

HarmBlkSOTF: This is used to On/Off harmonic restrain during SOTF conditions.

tSOTF: Time delay for operation of the SOTF function. The setting range is 0.000 -
60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 0.100 s

t4U: Time interval when the SOTF function is active after breaker closing. The setting
range is 0.000 - 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 1.000 s.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 201

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

ActUndrTimeSel: Describes the mode to activate the sensitive undertime function. The
function can be activated by Circuit breaker position (change) or Circuit breaker
command.

tUnderTime: Time delay for operation of the sensitive undertime function. The setting
range is 0.000 - 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 0.300 s

7.3.2.5 Settings for each step (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4) M15282-9 v12

Operation: Sets the protection to Enabled or Disabled.

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are Disabled/Non-

directional/Forward/Reverse.

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and
different types of inverse time characteristics are available.

Inverse time characteristic enables fast fault clearance of high current faults at the same
time as selectivity to other inverse time phase overcurrent protections can be assured.
This is mainly used in radial fed networks but can also be used in meshed networks. In
meshed networks, the settings must be based on network fault calculations.

To assure selectivity between different protections, in the radial network, there has to
be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. To
determine the shortest possible time difference, the operation time of protections,
breaker opening time and protection resetting time must be known. These time delays
can vary significantly between different protective equipment. The following time
delays can be estimated:

Protection trip time: 15-60 ms

Protection resetting time: 15-60 ms
Breaker opening time: 20-120 ms

The different characteristics are described in the technical reference manual.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. The definite time tx is added to the inverse time when
inverse time characteristic is selected. Note that the value set is the time between
activation of the start and the trip outputs.

Pickup"x": Operate residual current level for step x given in % of IB.

INx>Max and INx>Min should only be changed if remote setting of operation current
level, INx>, is used. The limits are used for decreasing the used range of the INx>
setting. If INx> is set outside INx>Max and INx>Min, the closest of the limits to INx>
is used by the function. If INx>Max is smaller than INx>Min, the limits are swapped.

202 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic for step x.

IMinx: Minimum pickup current for step x in % of IB. Set IMinx below Pickupx for
every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set
above for any step, signal will reset at current equals to zero.

txMin: Minimum operating time for inverse time characteristics. At high currents, the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter, the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

Trip time

tx

txMin

Pickup current
ANSI10000058-1-en.vsdx
ANSI10000058 V1 EN-US

Figure 97: Minimum pickup current and trip time for inverse time characteristics

In order to fully comply with the curves definition, the setting parameter txMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operate time of the selected IEC inverse curve for
measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operate
time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier kx.

INxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
(MULTPUx) is activated, the current operation level is increased by this setting
constant.

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. The
possibilities are described in the technical reference manual.

tResetx: Constant reset time delay in s for step x.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 203

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

HarmBlockx: This is used to enable block of step x from 2nd harmonic restrain
function.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for user programmable of inverse time
characteristic curve. The time characteristic equation is according to equation 36:

æ ö
ç ÷
ç A
t [s ] = + B ÷ × TD
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è ipickup ø ø
EQUATION1722 V1 EN-US (Equation 36)

Further description can be found in the technical reference manual.

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for user programmable of inverse reset time
characteristic curve. Further description can be found in the technical reference
manual.

7.4 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2) GUID-E8CF8AA2-AF54-4FD1-A379-3E55DCA2FA3A v1

7.4.1 Identification
GUID-E1720ADA-7F80-4F2C-82A1-EF2C9EF6A4B4 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4
IEC10000053 V1 EN-US

7.4.2 Application GUID-343023F8-AFE3-41C2-8440-1779DD7F5621 v2

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) is used in

several applications in the power system. Some applications are:

204 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

• Ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of feeders in effectively

grounded distribution and subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have
radial structure.
• Back-up ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of transmission
lines.
• Sensitive ground-fault protection of transmission lines. NS4PTOC (4612) can
have better sensitivity to detect resistive phase-to-ground-faults compared to
distance protection.
• Back-up ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of power
transformers.
• Ground-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of different kinds of
equipment connected to the power system such as shunt capacitor banks, shunt
reactors and others.

In many applications several steps with different current pickup levels and time delays
are needed. NS4PTOC (4612) can have up to four, individual settable steps. The
flexibility of each step of NS4PTOC (4612) function is great. The following options
are possible:

Non-directional/Directional function: In some applications the non-directional

functionality is used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the
protected object itself. In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the
directional function can be necessary. This can be the case for unsymmetrical fault
protection in meshed and effectively grounded transmission systems. The directional
negative sequence overcurrent protection is also well suited to operate in teleprotection
communication schemes, which enables fast clearance of unsymmetrical faults on
transmission lines. The directional function uses the voltage polarizing quantity.

Choice of time characteristics: There are several types of time characteristics available
such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics. The
selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-
ordination between the operating time of the different protections. To enable optimal
co-ordination all overcurrent relays, to be co-ordinated against each other, should have
the same time characteristic. Therefore a wide range of standardized inverse time
characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI.
Table 30: Inverse time characteristics
Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 205

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

Curve name
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

There is also a user programmable inverse time characteristic.

Normally it is required that the negative sequence overcurrent function shall reset as
fast as possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some
cases some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset
characteristics can be used.

For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current pickup level
for some time. Therefore there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication
factor MultPUx to the negative sequence current pick-up level. This multiplication
factor is activated from a binary input signal MULTPUx to the function.

7.4.3 Setting guidelines GUID-460D6C58-598C-421E-AA9E-FD240210A6CC v2

The parameters for Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC
(46I2) are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

The following settings can be done for the four step negative sequence overcurrent
protection:

Operation: Sets the protection to Enabled or Disabled.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.
GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

206 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time

of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
important to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

7.4.3.1 Settings for each step GUID-CFB327EF-C5C4-44B5-AB4B-9C2916355FC5 v5

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are off/nondirectional/

forward/reverse.

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and
different types of inverse time characteristics are available.
Table 31: Inverse time characteristics
Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 207

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

The different characteristics are described in the Technical Reference Manual (TRM).

Pickupx: Operation negative sequence current level for step x given in % of IBase.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. The definite time tx is added to the inverse time when
inverse time characteristic is selected. Note that the value set is the time between
activation of the start and the trip outputs.

TDx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic.

IMinx: Minimum pickup current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Pickupx for
every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set
above Pickupx for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current
drops below IMinx.

MultPUx: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal
(ENMULTx) is activated the current operation level is multiplied by this setting
constant.

txMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristics. At high currents the
inverse time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this
parameter the operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

Operate time

tx

txMin

IMinx Current

IEC10000058
IEC10000058 V2 EN-US

Figure 98: Minimum operate current and operation time for inverse time
characteristics

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By
choosing setting there are the following possibilities:

208 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Curve name
Instantaneous
IEC Reset (constant time)
ANSI Reset (inverse time)

The different reset characteristics are described in the Technical Reference Manual
(TRM). There are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay.

For the independent time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics
are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 =
current dependent reset time).

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and
ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings
pr, tr and cr must be given.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for programmable inverse time

characteristic curve. The time characteristic equation is according to equation 37:

æ ö
ç ÷
ç A
t [s ] = + B ÷ × TD
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ - C ÷
è è ipickup ø ø
EQUATION1722 V1 EN-US (Equation 37)

Further description can be found in the Technical reference manual (TRM).

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse reset time
characteristic curve. Further description can be found in the Technical Reference
Manual.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 209

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

7.4.3.2 Common settings for all steps GUID-A00A942B-E760-42EE-8FEB-F723426783F3 v1

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

AngleRCA: Relay characteristic angle given in degrees. This angle is defined as shown
in figure 99. The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference
voltage (Vpol = -)

Reverse
Area

AngleRCA Vpol=-V2

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

ANSI10000031-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000031 V1 EN-US

Figure 99: Relay characteristic angle given in degree

In a transmission network a normal value of RCA is about 80°.

VPolMin: Minimum polarization (reference) voltage % of VBase.

I>Dir: Operate residual current level for directional comparison scheme. The setting is
given in % of IBase. The pickup forward or pickup reverse signals can be used in a
communication scheme. The appropriate signal must be configured to the
communication scheme block.

210 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.5 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR (49) IP14513-1 v4

7.5.1 Identification
M14877-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants

SYMBOL-A V1 EN-US

7.5.2 Application M15341-3 v5

Transformers in the power system are designed for a certain maximum load current
(power) level. If the current exceeds this level the losses will be higher than expected.
As a consequence the temperature of the transformer will increase. If the temperature
of the transformer reaches too high a value, the equipment might be damaged;

• The insulation within the transformer experiences forced ageing. As a

consequence of this, the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground faults
increases.
• There might be hot spots within the transformer, which degrades the paper
insulation. It might also cause bubbling in the transformer oil.

In stressed situations in the power system it can be required to overload transformers

for a limited time. This should be done without the above mentioned risks. The thermal
overload protection provides information and makes temporary overloading of
transformers possible.

The permissible load level of a power transformer is highly dependent on the cooling
system of the transformer. There are two main principles:

• OA: The air is naturally circulated to the coolers without fans and the oil is
naturally circulated without pumps.
• FOA: The coolers have fans to force air for cooling and pumps to force the
circulation of the transformer oil.

The protection can have two sets of parameters, one for non-forced cooling and one for
forced cooling. Both the permissive steady state loading level as well as the thermal

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 211

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

time constant is influenced by the cooling system of the transformer. The two
parameters sets can be activated by the binary input signal COOLING. This can be
used for transformers where forced cooling can be taken out of operation, for example
at fan or pump faults.

The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer
(temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the
transformer which is based on current measurement.

If the heat content of the protected transformer reaches a set alarm level a signal can be
given to the operator. Two alarm levels are available. This enables preventive actions
in the power system to be taken before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the
temperature continues to increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the
protected transformer.

After tripping by the thermal overload protection, the transformer will cool down over
time. There will be a time gap before the heat content (temperature) reaches such a
level so that the transformer can be taken into service again. Therefore, the function
will continue to estimate the heat content using a set cooling time constant. Energizing
of the transformer can be blocked until the heat content has reached a set level.

7.5.3 Setting guideline M13250-3 v8

The parameters for the thermal overload protection, two time constants (TRPTTR, 49)
are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600).

The following settings can be done for the thermal overload protection:

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

Operation: Sets the mode of operation. Disabled switches off the complete function.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (UBase) and (SBase).

IRef: Reference level of the current given in % of IBase. When the current is equal to
IRef the final (steady state) heat content is equal to 1. It is suggested to give a setting
corresponding to the rated current of the transformer winding.

IRefMult: If a binary input ENMULT is activated the reference current value can be
multiplied by the factor IRefMult. The activation could be used in case of deviating
ambient temperature from the reference value. In the standard for loading of a
transformer an ambient temperature of 20°C is used. For lower ambient temperatures
the load ability is increased and vice versa. IRefMult can be set within a range: 0.01 -
10.00.

212 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

IBase1: Base current for setting given as percentage of IBase. This setting shall be
related to the status with no COOLING input. It is suggested to give a setting
corresponding to the rated current of the transformer with natural cooling (OA).

IBase2: Base current for setting given as percentage of IBase. This setting shall be
related to the status with activated COOLING input. It is suggested to give a setting
corresponding to the rated current of the transformer with forced cooling (FOA). If the
transformer has no forced cooling IBase2 can be set equal to IBase1.

Tau1: The thermal time constant of the protected transformer, related to IBase1 (no
cooling) given in minutes.

Tau2: The thermal time constant of the protected transformer, related to IBase2 (with
cooling) given in minutes.

The thermal time constant should be obtained from the transformer manufacturers
manuals. The thermal time constant is dependent on the cooling and the amount of oil.
Normal time constants for medium and large transformers (according to IEC 60076-7)
are about 2.5 hours for naturally cooled transformers and 1.5 hours for forced cooled
transformers.

The time constant can be estimated from measurements of the oil temperature during a
cooling sequence (described in IEC 60076-7). It is assumed that the transformer is
operated at a certain load level with a constant oil temperature (steady state operation).
The oil temperature above the ambient temperature is DQo0. Then the transformer is
disconnected from the grid (no load). After a time t of at least 30 minutes the
temperature of the oil is measured again. Now the oil temperature above the ambient
temperature is DQot. The thermal time constant can now be estimated as:

t
t=
ln DQ o 0 - ln DQ ot
EQUATION1180 V1 EN-US (Equation 38)

If the transformer has forced cooling (FOA) the measurement should be made both
with and without the forced cooling in operation, giving Tau2 and Tau1.

The time constants can be changed if the current is higher than a set value or lower
than a set value. If the current is high it is assumed that the forced cooling is activated
while it is deactivated at low current. The setting of the parameters below enables
automatic adjustment of the time constant.

Tau1High: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau1 if the current is higher
than the set value IHighTau1. IHighTau1 is set in % of IBase1.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 213

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

Tau1Low: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau1 if the current is lower
than the set value ILowTau1. ILowTau1 is set in % of IBase1.

Tau2High: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau2 if the current is higher
than the set value IHighTau2. IHighTau2 is set in % of IBase2.

Tau2Low: Multiplication factor to adjust the time constant Tau2 if the current is lower
than the set value ILowTau2. ILowTau2 is set in % of IBase2.

The possibility to change time constant with the current value as the base can be useful
in different applications. Below some examples are given:

• In case a total interruption (low current) of the protected transformer all cooling
possibilities will be inactive. This can result in a changed value of the time
constant.
• If other components (motors) are included in the thermal protection, there is a risk
of overheating of that equipment in case of very high current. The thermal time
constant is often smaller for a motor than for the transformer.

ITrip: The steady state current that the transformer can withstand. The setting is given
in % of IBase1 or IBase2.

Alarm1: Heat content level for activation of the signal ALARM1. ALARM1 is set in %
of the trip heat content level.

Alarm2: Heat content level for activation of the output signal ALARM2. ALARM2 is
set in % of the trip heat content level.

LockoutReset: Lockout release level of heat content to release the lockout signal. When
the thermal overload protection trips a lock-out signal is activated. This signal is
intended to block switching on of the protected circuit transformer as long as the
transformer temperature is high. The signal is released when the estimated heat content
is below the set value. This temperature value should be chosen below the alarm
temperature. LockoutReset is set in % of the trip heat content level.

ThetaInit: Heat content before activation of the function. This setting can be set a little
below the alarm level. If the transformer is loaded before the activation of the
protection function, its temperature can be higher than the ambient temperature. The
start point given in the setting will prevent risk of no trip at overtemperature during the
first moments after activation. ThetaInit: is set in % of the trip heat content level.

Warning: If the calculated time to trip factor is below the setting Warning a warning
signal is activated. The setting is given in minutes.

214 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.6 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF(50BF) IP14514-1 v6

7.6.1 Identification
M14878-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN-US

7.6.2 Application M13916-3 v7

In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means
that a fault needs to be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is
faulty. One necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker. It
is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker for
the protected object. Instead a breaker failure protection is used.

Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output (CCRBRF, 50BF) will issue a
back-up trip command to adjacent circuit breakers in case of failure to trip of the
“normal” circuit breaker for the protected object. The detection of failure to break the
current through the breaker is made by means of current measurement or as detection
of remaining trip signal (unconditional).

CCRBRF (50BF) can also give a re-trip. This means that a second trip signal is sent to
the protected circuit breaker. The re-trip function can be used to increase the
probability of operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid back-up trip of many
breakers in case of mistakes during relay maintenance and testing.

7.6.3 Setting guidelines M11546-4 v9

The parameters for Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF
(50BF) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 215

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

FunctionMode This parameter can be set Current or Contact. This states the way the
detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the mode current the current
measurement is used for the detection. In the mode Contact the long duration of
breaker position signal is used as indicator of failure of the breaker. The mode Current/
Contact means that both ways of detections are activated. Contact mode can be usable
in applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is small. This can be
the case for some generator protection application (for example reverse power
protection) or in case of line ends with weak end infeed.

RetripMode: This setting states how the re-trip function shall operate. Retrip Off means
that the re-trip function is not activated. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check)
and Current means that a phase current must be larger than the operate level to allow
re-trip. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Contact means re-trip is
done when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). No CBPos Check means
re-trip is done without any check of breaker position.
Table 32: Dependencies between parameters RetripMode and FunctionMode
RetripMode FunctionMode Description
Retrip Off N/A the re-trip function is not
activated
CB Pos Check Current re-trip is done if the phase
current is larger than the operate
level after re-trip time has
elapsed
Contact re-trip is done when auxiliary
contact position indicates that
breaker is still closed after re-trip
time has elapsed
Current/Contact both methods according to above
are used but taken into account
also I>BlkCont
No CBPos Check Current re-trip is done without check of
current level
Contact re-trip is done without check of
auxiliary contact position
Current/Contact re-trip is done without check of
current level or auxiliary contact
position

BuTripMode: Back-up trip mode is given to state sufficient current criteria to detect
failure to break. For Current operation 2 out of 4 means that at least two currents, of
the three-phase currents and the residual current, shall be high to indicate breaker
failure. 1 out of 3 means that at least one current of the three-phase currents shall be
high to indicate breaker failure. 1 out of 4 means that at least one current of the three-
phase currents or the residual current shall be high to indicate breaker failure. In most

216 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient. For Contact operation means back-up trip is done
when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used).

Pickup_PH: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This
parameter should be set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The
setting can be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start
the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 10% of IBase.

Pickup_BlkCont: If any contact based detection of breaker failure is used, this function
can be blocked if any phase current is larger than this setting level. If the
FunctionMode is set Current/Contact breaker failure for high current faults are safely
detected by the current measurement function. To increase security the contact based
function should be disabled for high currents. The setting can be given within the range
5 – 200% of IBase.

Pickup_N: Residual current level for detection of breaker failure set in % of IBase. In
high impedance grounded systems the residual current at phase- to-ground faults are
normally much smaller than the short circuit currents. In order to detect breaker failure
at single-phase-ground faults in these systems it is necessary to measure the residual
current separately. Also in effectively grounded systems the setting of the ground-fault
current protection can be chosen to relatively low current level. The BuTripMode is set
1 out of 4. The current setting should be chosen in accordance to the setting of the
sensitive ground-fault protection. The setting can be given within the range 2 – 200 %
of IBase.

t1: Time delay of the re-trip. The setting can be given within the range 0 – 60s in steps
of 0.001 s. Typical setting is 0 – 50ms.

t2: Time delay of the back-up trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as
possible at the same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting is 90
– 200ms (also dependent of re-trip timer).

The minimum time delay for the re-trip can be estimated as:

t 2 ³ t1 + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + t margin

EQUATION1430 V1 EN-US (Equation 39)

where:
tcbopen is the maximum opening time for the circuit breaker

tBFP_reset is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function (the
current criteria reset)
tmargin is a safety margin

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 217

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical
time. This time is often dependent of the ability to maintain transient stability in case
of a fault close to a power plant.

Protection
operate time
Normal tcbopen

The fault Retrip delay t1 tcbopen after re-trip

occurs
tBFPreset
Margin

Minimum back-up trip delay t2

Critical fault clearance time for stability

Time
Trip and Pickup
CCRBRF
(50BF)

ANSI05000479_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000479 V3 EN-US

Figure 100: Time sequence

t2MPh: Time delay of the back-up trip at multi-phase initiate. The critical fault
clearance time is often shorter in case of multi-phase faults, compared to single phase-
to-ground faults. Therefore there is a possibility to reduce the back-up trip delay for
multi-phase faults. Typical setting is 90 – 150 ms.

t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip TRBU2. In some applications
there might be a requirement to have separated back-up trip functions, tripping
different back-up circuit breakers.

tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There is
a binary input 52FAIL from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when internal
supervision in the circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to clear fault.
This could be the case when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker. After the set
time an alarm is given, so that actions can be done to repair the circuit breaker. The
time delay for back-up trip is bypassed when the 52FAIL is active. Typical setting is
2.0 seconds.

218 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the critical impulse time of
circuit breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 200
ms.

7.7 Breaker failure protection, single phase version

CCSRBRF (50BF) SEMOD127864-1 v2

7.7.1 Identification
SEMOD127866-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, single phase CCSRBRF 50BF
version
I>BF

SYMBOL-II V1 EN-US

7.7.2 Application SEMOD127974-4 v2

In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means
that a fault shall be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is
faulty. One necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker. It
is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker for
the protected component. Instead a breaker failure protection is used.

Breaker failure protection, single phase version (CCSRBRF,50BF) function will issue
a back-up trip command to adjacent circuit breakers in case of failure to trip of the
“normal” circuit breaker for the protected component. The detection of failure to break
the current through the breaker is made by means of current measurement or as
detection of remaining trip signal (unconditional).

CCSRBRF (50BF) function can also give a re-trip. This means that a second trip signal
is sent to the protected circuit breaker. The re-trip function can be used to increase the
probability of operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid back-up trip of many
breakers in case of mistakes during relay maintenance and test.

7.7.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD127980-4 v5

The parameters for Breaker failure protection, single phase version (CCSRBRF,50BF)
are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 219

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: Disabled or Enabled

FunctionMode: This parameter can be set to Current or Contact. This states the way
the detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the mode Current the current
measurement is used for the detection. In the mode Contact the long duration of initiate
signal (trip) is used as indicator of failure of the breaker. The mode Current&Contact
means that both ways of detections are activated. Contact mode can be usable in
applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is small. This can be the
case for some generator protection application (for example, reverse power protection)
or in case of line ends with weak end infeed.

RetripMode: This setting states how the re-trip function shall operate. Retrip Off means
that the re-trip function is not activated. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check)
and Current means that a phase current must be larger than the operate level to allow
re-trip. CB Pos Check (circuit breaker position check) and Contact means retrip is done
when circuit breaker is closed (breaker position is used). No CB Pos Check means re-
trip is done without check of breaker position.

Pickup_PH: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This
parameter must be set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The
setting can be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to
initiate the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 10% of IBase.

PU_BlkCont: If any contact based detection of breaker failure is used this function can
be blocked if the current is larger than this setting level. If the FunctionMode is set to
Current&Contact breaker failure for high current faults are safely detected by the
current measurement function. To increase security the contact based function must be
disabled for high currents. The setting can be given within the range 5 – 200% of
IBase.

t1: Time delay of the re-trip. The setting can be given within the range 0 – 60 s in steps
of 0.001 s. Typical setting is 0 – 50 ms.

t2: Time delay of the back-up trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as
possible at the same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting is 90
– 150 ms (also dependent of re-trip timer).

The minimum time delay for the re-trip can be estimated as:

t 2 ³ t1 + tcbopen + t BFP _ reset + t margin

EQUATION1430 V1 EN-US (Equation 40)

220 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

where:
tcbopen is the maximum opening time for the circuit breaker

tBFP_reset is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function (the
current criteria reset)
tmargin is a safety margin

It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical
time. This time is often dependent of the ability to maintain transient stability in case
of a fault close to a power plant.

Protection
operate time
Normal tcbopen

The fault Retrip delay t1 tcbopen after re-trip

occurs
tBFPreset
Margin

Minimum back-up trip delay t2

Critical fault clearance time for stability

Time
Trip and Pickup
CCRBRF
(50BF)

ANSI05000479_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000479 V3 EN-US

Figure 101: Time sequence

t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second back-up trip TRBU2. In some applications
there might be a requirement to have separated back-up trip functions, tripping
different back-up circuit breakers.

tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There is
a binary input 52FAIL from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when internal
supervision in the circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to clear fault.
This could be the case when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker, of others.
After the set time an alarm is given, so that actions can be done to repair the circuit

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 221

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

breaker. The time delay for back-up trip is bypassed when the 52FAIL is active.
Typical setting is 2.0 seconds.

tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the critical impulse time of
circuit breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 200
ms.

7.8 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37) SEMOD156693-1 v4

7.8.1 Identification
SEMOD158941-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN-US

7.8.2 Application SEMOD151283-4 v5

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a

torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as
motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is
very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it
to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.

Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the
steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have
reverse power protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse
power: break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine
or inadvertent closing of the main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to

222 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

have a reliable reverse power protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise

undamaged plant.

During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power
protection gives the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By
doing so, one prevents the disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has
become zero. Earlier disconnection would cause an acceleration of the turbine
generator at all routine shutdowns. This should have caused overspeed and high
centrifugal stresses.

When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will
disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses.
Instead, the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the
blades. When a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power
consumption will be about 2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it
will soon become overheated and damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the
turbine loses the vacuum.

The critical time to overheating a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes
depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades
will become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy
blades. The conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the
turbine manufacturer in each case.

Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer
connected to the secondary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from
a start-up service transformer connected to the external network. One has to design the
reverse power protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of
power to the power plant auxiliaries.

Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only
Kaplan turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that
the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always
strong enough to withstand the associated stresses.

Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero.
Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake
may cause cavitations. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse
power protection in unattended plants.

A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power
from the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If
there is only air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%.

Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about
15% of its rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 223

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

25% of the rated power to motor it. An engine that is good run in might need no more
than 5%. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to
measure the reverse power during commissioning.

Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection.

Figure 102 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower protection and
with overpower protection. The underpower protection gives a higher margin and
should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation
immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower
protection (reference angle set to 0) to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower protection (reference angle set to 180) to
trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

Underpower protection Overpower protection

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC09000019-2-en.vsd
IEC09000019 V2 EN-US

Figure 102: Reverse power protection with underpower or overpower protection

7.8.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD172134-4 v7

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

Mode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement. The setting
possibilities are shown in table 33.

224 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Table 33: Complex power calculation

Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
A, B, C
S = V A × I A* + VB × I B* + VC × I C *
EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 42)
Arone
S = VAB × I A* - VBC × IC *
EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 43)
PosSeq
S = 3 × VPosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 44)
AB
S = VAB × ( I A* - I B* )
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 45)
BC
S = VBC × ( I B* - I C * )
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 46)
CA
S = VCA × ( I C * - I A* )
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 47)
A
S = 3 × VA × I A*
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 48)
B
S = 3 × VB × I B*
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 49)
C
S = 3 × VC × I C *
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 50)

The function has two stages that can be set independently.

With the parameter OpMode1(2) the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting
Angle1(2) is smaller than the set pick up power value Power1(2)

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 225

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

Power1(2)

Angle1(2)
P
Operate

en06000441.vsd
IEC06000441 V1 EN-US

Figure 103: Underpower mode

The setting Power1(2) gives the power component pick up value in the Angle1(2)
direction. The setting is given in p.u. of the generator rated power, see equation 51.

Minimum recommended setting is 0.2% of SN when metering class CT inputs into the
IED are used.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN-US (Equation 51)

The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the
power protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set
angle should be 0° or 180°. 0° should be used for generator low forward active power
protection.

226 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Operate
Angle1(2) = 0°
P
Power1(2)

en06000556.vsd
IEC06000556 V1 EN-US

Figure 104: For low forward power the set angle should be 0° in the underpower
function

TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up.

Hysteresis1(2) is given in p.u. of generator rated power according to equation 52.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN-US (Equation 52)

The drop out power will be Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2).

The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown
in the formula:

S = TD ⋅ SOld + (1 − TD ) ⋅ SCalculated
EQUATION1893-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 53)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD is settable parameter

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 227

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

The value of k=0.92 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is

normally quite long.

The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated
current/voltage:

IMagComp5, IMagComp30, IMagComp100

VMagComp5, VMagComp30, VMagComp100

IMagComp5, IMagComp30, IMagComp100

The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle
errors.

The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The
values should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.

7.9 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32) SEMOD172360-1 v4

7.9.1 Identification
SEMOD176574-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN-US

7.9.2 Application SEMOD172358-4 v2

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a

torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as
motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is
very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it
to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

228 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.

Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the
steam ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have
reverse power protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse
power: break of a main steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine
or inadvertent closing of the main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to
have a reliable reverse power protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise
undamaged plant.

During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power
protection gives the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By
doing so, one prevents the disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has
become zero. Earlier disconnection would cause an acceleration of the turbine
generator at all routine shutdowns. This should have caused overspeed and high
centrifugal stresses.

When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will
disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses.
Instead, the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the
blades. When a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power
consumption will be about 2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it
will soon become overheated and damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the
turbine loses the vacuum.

The critical time to overheating of a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes
depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades
will become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy
blades. The conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the
turbine manufacturer in each case.

Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer
connected to the primary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from a
start-up service transformer connected to the external network. One has to design the
reverse power protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of
power to the power plant auxiliaries.

Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only
Kaplan turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that
the turbine runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always
strong enough to withstand the associated stresses.

Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero.
Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 229

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

may cause cavitations. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse
power protection in unattended plants.

A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power
from the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If
there is only air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%.

Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about
15% of its rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps
25% of the rated power to motor it. An engine that is well run in might need no more
than 5%. It is necessary to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to
measure the reverse power during commissioning.

Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection.

Figure 105 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower IED and with
overpower IED. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better
dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after
synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active
power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to
trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN-US

Figure 105: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

7.9.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD172150-4 v7

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

230 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Mode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement. The setting
possibilities are shown in table 34.
Table 34: Complex power calculation
Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
A,B,C * * *
S = V A × IA + V B × IB + V C × IC
EQUATION2038 V1 EN-US (Equation 55)
Arone * *
S = V AB × I A - V BC × I C
EQUATION2039 V1 EN-US (Equation 56)
PosSeq *
S = 3 × V PosSeq × I PosSeq
EQUATION2040 V1 EN-US (Equation 57)
A,B * *
S = V AB × (I A - I B )
EQUATION2041 V1 EN-US (Equation 58)
B,C * *
S = V BC × (I B - I C )
EQUATION2042 V1 EN-US (Equation 59)
C,A * *
S = V CA × (I C - I A )
EQUATION2043 V1 EN-US (Equation 60)
A *
S = 3 × V A × IA
EQUATION2044 V1 EN-US (Equation 61)
B *
S = 3 × V B × IB
EQUATION2045 V1 EN-US (Equation 62)
C *
S = 3 × V C × IC
EQUATION2046 V1 EN-US (Equation 63)

The function has two stages that can be set independently.

With the parameter OpMode1(2) the function can be set Enabled/Disabled.

The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting
Angle1(2) is larger than the set pick up power value Power1(2)

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 231

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

Operate

Power1(2)

Angle1(2)
P

en06000440.vsd
IEC06000440 V1 EN-US

Figure 106: Overpower mode

The setting Power1(2) gives the power component pick up value in the Angle1(2)
direction. The setting is given in p.u. of the generator rated power, see equation 64.

Minimum recommended setting is 0.2% of SN when metering class CT inputs into the
IED are used.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN-US (Equation 64)

The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the
power protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set
angle should be 0° or 180°. 180° should be used for generator reverse power
protection.

232 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Operate Angle1(2 ) = 180 o

P
Power1(2)

IEC06000557-2-en.vsd
IEC06000557 V2 EN-US

Figure 107: For reverse power the set angle should be 180° in the overpower
function

TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up.

Hysteresis1(2) is given in p.u. of generator rated power according to equation 65.

SN = 3 × VBase × IBase
EQUATION2047 V1 EN-US (Equation 65)

The drop out power will be Power1(2) - Hysteresis1(2).

The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown
in the formula:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 233

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

S = TD ⋅ SOld + (1 − TD ) ⋅ SCalculated
EQUATION1893-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 66)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD is settable parameter

The value of TD=0.92 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is

normally quite long.

The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated
current/voltage:

IMagComp5, IMagComp30, IMagComp100

VMagComp5, VMagComp30, VMagComp100

IAngComp5, IAngComp30, IAngComp100

The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle
errors.

The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The
values should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.

7.10 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC GUID-41731DCF-840C-4717-9F51-899FC648F881 v2

7.10.1 Identification
GUID-67FC8DBF-4391-4562-A630-3F244CBB4A33 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC - -

234 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

7.10.2 Application GUID-5EC8BAEC-9118-49EC-970C-43D6C416640A v1

GUID-BACAE67B-E64B-4963-B323-ECB0B69031B9 v2

Shunt capacitor banks (SCBs) are somewhat specific and different from other power
system elements. These specific features of SCB are briefly summarized in this section.

A capacitor unit is the building block used for SCB construction. The capacitor unit is
made up of individual capacitor elements, arranged in parallel or series connections.
Capacitor elements normally consist of aluminum foil, paper, or film-insulated cells
immersed in a biodegradable insulating fluid and are sealed in a metallic container. The
internal discharge resistor is also integrated within the capacitor unit in order to reduce
trapped residual voltage after disconnection of the SCB from the power system. Units
are available in a variety of voltage ratings (240V to 25kV) and sizes (2.5kVAr to
about 1000kVAr). Capacitor unit can be designed with one or two bushings.

The high-voltage SCB is normally constructed using individual capacitor units

connected in series and/or parallel to obtain the required voltage and MVAr rating.
Typically the neighboring capacitor units are mounted in racks. Each rack must be
insulated from the other by insulators because the can casing within each rack are at a
certain potential. Refer figure 108 for an example:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 235

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

Rack

Capacitor Unit
(Can)

IEC09000753_1_en.vsd
IEC09000753 V1 EN-US

Figure 108: Replacement of a faulty capacitor unit within SCB

There are four types of the capacitor unit fusing designs which are used for
construction of SCBs:

Externally where an individual fuse, externally mounted, protects each capacitor unit.
fused
Internally where each capacitor element is fused inside the capacitor unit
fused
Fuseless where SCB is built from series connections of the individual capacitor units (that is,
strings) and without any fuses
Unfused where, in contrary to the fuseless configuration, a series or parallel connection of the
capacitor units is used to form SCB, still without any fuses

236 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

Which type of fusing is used may depend on can manufacturer or utility preference and
previous experience.

Because the SCBs are built from the individual capacitor units the overall connections
may vary. Typically used SCB configurations are:

1. Delta-connected banks (generally used only at distribution voltages)

2. Single wye-connected banks
3. Double wye-connected banks
4. H-configuration, where each phase is connected in a bridge

Additionally, the SCB star point, when available, can be either grounded , grounded via
impedance or isolated from ground. Which type of SCB grounding is used depends on
voltage level, used circuit breaker, utility preference and previous experience. Many
utilities have standard system grounding principle to ground neutrals of SCB above
100 kV.

Switching of SCB will produce transients in power system. The transient inrush current
during SCB energizing typically has high frequency components and can reach peak
current values, which are multiples of SCB rating. Opening of capacitor bank circuit
breaker may produce step recovery voltages across open CB contact, which can
consequently cause restrikes upon the first interruption of capacitive current. In modern
power system the synchronized CB closing/opening may be utilized in such a manner
that transients caused by SCB switching are avoided.

7.10.2.1 SCB protection GUID-9E537AFB-BB23-4431-AC98-D4827A608F81 v2

IED protection of shunt capacitor banks requires an understanding of the capabilities

and limitations of the individual capacitor units and associated electrical equipment.
Different types of shunt capacitor bank fusing, configuration or grounding may affect
the IED selection for the protection scheme. Availability and placement of CTs and
VTs can be additional limiting factor during protection scheme design.

SCB protection schemes are provided in order to detect and clear faults within the
capacitor bank itself or in the connected leads to the substation busbar. Bank protection
may include items such as a means to disconnect a faulted capacitor unit or capacitor
element(s), a means to initiate a shutdown of the bank in case of faults that may lead to
a catastrophic failure and alarms to indicate unbalance within the bank.

Capacitor bank outages and failures are often caused by accidental contact by animals.
Vermin, monkeys, birds, may use the SCB as a resting place or a landing site. When
the animal touches the HV live parts this can result in a flash-over, can rapture or a
cascading failures that might cause extensive damages, fire or even total destruction of
the whole SCB, unless the bank is sufficiently fitted with protection IEDs.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 237

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

In addition, to fault conditions SCB can be exposed to different types of abnormal

operating conditions. In accordance with IEC and ANSI standards capacitors shall be
capable of continuous operation under contingency system and bank conditions,
provided the following limitations are not exceeded:

1. Capacitor units should be capable of continuous operation including harmonics,

but excluding transients, to 110% of rated IED root-mean-square (RMS) voltage
and a crest voltage not exceeding of rated RMS voltage. The capacitor should also
be able to carry 135% of nominal current. The voltage capability of any series
element of a capacitor unit shall be considered to be its share of the total capacitor
unit voltage capability.
2. Capacitor units should not give less than 100% nor more than 110% of rated
reactive power at rated sinusoidal voltage and frequency, measured at a uniform
case and internal temperature of 25°C.
3. Capacitor units mounted in multiple rows and tiers should be designed for
continuous operation for a 24h average temperature of 40 °C during the hottest
day, or −40 °C during the coldest day expected at the location.
4. Capacitor units should be suitable for continuous operation at up to 135% of rated
reactive power caused by the combined effects of:
• Voltage in excess of the nameplate rating at fundamental frequency, but not
over 110% of rated RMS voltage
• Harmonic voltages superimposed on the fundamental frequency
• Reactive power manufacturing tolerance of up to 115% of rated reactive
power
5. Capacitor units rated above 600 V shall have an internal discharge device to
reduce the residual voltage to 50 V or less in 5 or 10 minutes (depending on
national standard).

Note that capacitor units designed for special applications can exceed these ratings.

Thus, as a general rule, the minimum number of capacitor units connected in parallel
within a SCB is such that isolation of one capacitor unit in a group should not cause a
voltage unbalance sufficient to place more than 110% of rated voltage on the remaining
capacitors of that parallel group. Equally, the minimum number of series connected
groups within a SCB is such that complete bypass of one group should not pause
voltage higher than 110% of the rated voltage on the remaining capacitors of that serial
group. The value of 110% is the maximum continuous overvoltage capability of
capacitor units as per IEEE Std 18-1992.

The SCB typically requires the following types of IED protection:

238 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

1. Short circuit protection for SCB and connecting leads (can be provided by using
PHPIOC, OC4PTOC, CVGAPC, T2WPDIF/T3WPDIF or HZPDIF functions)
2. Ground-fault protection for SCB and connecting leads (can be provided by using
EFPIOC, EF4PTOC, CVGAPC, T2WPDIF/T3WPDIF or HZPDIF functions)
3. Current or Voltage based unbalance protection for SCB (can be provided by using
EF4PTOC, OC4PTOC, CVGAPC or VDCPTOV functions)
4. Overload protection for SCB
5. Undercurrent protection for SCB
6. Reconnection inhibit protection for SCB
7. Restrike condition detection

CBPGAPC function can be used to provide the last four types of protection mentioned
in the above list.

7.10.3 Setting guidelines GUID-CECD6525-779C-4A77-844D-031AAEE3A5B6 v1

GUID-7C456976-BA0D-4AAC-9C7A-F73AF52B2B44 v2

This setting example will be done for application as shown in figure 109:

400kV

Preprocessing Capacitor bank

Function Block protection function
SMAI CBPGAPC

500/1

200MVAr
400kV IED

IEC09000754-1-en.vsd
IEC09000754 V1 EN-US

Figure 109: Single line diagram for the application example

From figure 109 it is possible to calculate the following rated fundamental frequency
current for this SCB:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 239

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

1000 × 200[ MVAr ]

Ir = = 289 A
3 × 400[ kV ]
IEC09000755 V1 EN-US (Equation 67)

or on the secondary CT side:

289 A
I r _ S ec = = 0.578 A
500 1
IEC09000756 V1 EN-US (Equation 68)

Note that the SCB rated current on the secondary CT side is important for secondary
injection of the function.

The parameters for the Capacitor bank protection function CBPGAPC are set via the
local HMI or PCM600. The following settings are done for this function:

General Settings:

Operation =Enabled; to enable the function

IBase =289A; Fundamental frequency SCB rated current in primary amperes. This
value is used as a base value for pickup settings of all other features integrated in this
function.

Reconnection inhibit feature:

OperationRecIn =Enabled; to enable this feature

IRecInhibit =10% (of IBase); Current level under which function will detect that SCB
is disconnected from the power system

tReconnInhibit =300s; Time period under which SCB shall discharge remaining
residual voltage to less than 5%.

Overcurrent feature:

OperationOC =Enabled; to enable this feature

PU 51 =135% (of IBase); Current level for overcurrent pickup. Selected value gives
pickup recommended by international standards.

tOC =30s; Time delay for overcurrent trip

Undercurrent feature:

Operation37 =Enabled; to enable this feature

240 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 7
Current protection

PU_37 =70% (of IBase); Current level for undercurrent pickup

tUC =5s; Time delay for undercurrent trip

Undercurrent feature is blocked by operation of Reconnection inhibit

feature.

Reactive power overload feature:

Operation QOL =Enabled; to enable this feature

UP_QOL =130% (of SCB MVAr rating); Reactive power level required for pickup.
Selected value gives pickup recommended by international standards.

tQOL =60s; Time delay for reactive power overload trip

Harmonic voltage overload feature:

OperationHOL =Enabled; to enable this feature

Settings for definite time delay step

HOL_DT_V =200% (of SCB voltage rating); Voltage level required for pickup

tHOL_DT =10s; Definite time delay for harmonic overload trip

Settings for IDMT delay step

PU_HOL_DT_V =110% (of SCB voltage rating); Voltage level required for pickup of
IDMT stage. Selected value gives pickup recommended by international standards.

k_HOL_IDMT =1.0; Time multiplier for IDMT stage. Selected value gives operate
time in accordance with international standards

tMax_HOL_IDMT =2000s; Maximum time delay for IDMT stage for very low level of
harmonic overload

tMin_HOL_IDMT =0.1s; Minimum time delay for IDMT stage. Selected value gives
operate time in accordance with international standards

7.10.3.1 Restrike detection GUID-114747A5-0F7C-4F48-A32D-0C13BFF6ADCE v1

Opening of SCBs can be quite problematic for certain types of circuit breakers (CBs).
Typically such problems are manifested as CB restrikes.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 241

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Current protection

In simple words this means that the CB is not breaking the current at the first zero
crossing after separation of the CB contacts. Instead current is re-ignited and only
braked at consecutive current zero crossings. This condition is manifested as high
current pulses at the moment of current re-ignition.

To detect this CB condition, the built in overcurrent feature can be used. Simply, any
start of the overcurrent feature during breaker normal opening means a restrike.
Therefore simple logic can be created in the Application Configuration tool to detect
such CB behavior. Such CB condition can be just alarmed, and if required, the built in
disturbance recorder can also be triggered.

To create this logic, a binary signal that the CB is going to be opened (but not trip
command) shall be made available to the IED.

242 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

Section 8 Voltage protection

8.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) IP14544-1 v3

8.1.1 Identification
M16876-1 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

V2 EN-US
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN

8.1.2 Setting guidelines M13851-3 v9

All the voltage conditions in the system where UV2PTUV (27) performs its functions
should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage
and time characteristic.

There is a very wide application area where general undervoltage functions are used.
All voltage-related settings are made as a percentage of the global base value VBase,
which normally is set to the primary rated voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power
system or the high voltage equipment under consideration.

The trip time setting for UV2PTUV (27) is normally not critical, since there must be
enough time available for the main protection to clear short circuits and ground faults.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are described in
the following sections.

8.1.2.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators M13851-50 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the lowest
acceptable voltage for the equipment.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 243

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.1.2.2 Disconnected equipment detection M13851-53 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the highest
occurring voltage, caused by inductive or capacitive coupling, when the equipment is
disconnected.

8.1.2.3 Power supply quality M13851-56 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the lowest
acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.

8.1.2.4 Voltage instability mitigation M13851-59 v3

This setting is very much dependent on the power system characteristics, and thorough
studies have to be made to find the suitable levels.

8.1.2.5 Backup protection for power system faults M13851-62 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the highest
occurring voltage during the fault conditions under consideration.

8.1.2.6 Settings for two step undervoltage protection M13851-65 v14

The following settings can be done for Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
(27):

ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase-to-ground fundamental value,

phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase
RMS value.

Operation: Disabled or Enabled.

VBase (given in GlobalBaseSel): Base voltage phase-to-phase in primary kV. This

voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. UV2PTUV (27) will operate if the
voltage becomes lower than the set percentage of VBase. This setting is used when
ConnType is set to PhPh DFT or PhPh RMS. Therefore, always set VBase as rated
primary phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object. For more information, refer to
the Technical manual.

The setting parameters described below are identical for the two steps (n = 1 or 2).
Therefore, the setting parameters are described only once.

Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting
can be Definite time, Inverse Curve A, Inverse Curve B, Prog. inv. curve. The selection
is dependent on the protection application.

244 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages should
be below the set level to give operation for step n. The setting can be 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3. In most applications, it is sufficient that one phase voltage is low to
give operation. If UV2PTUV (27) shall be insensitive for single phase-to-ground
faults, 2 out of 3 can be chosen. In subtransmission and transmission networks the
undervoltage function is mainly a system supervision function and 3 out of 3 is
selected.

Pickupn: Set pickup undervoltage operation value for step n, given as % of the
parameter VBase. The setting is highly dependent on the protection application. It is
essential to consider the minimum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally, this
non-faulted voltage is larger than 90% of the nominal voltage.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. This setting is dependent on the protection
application. In many applications the protection function shall not directly trip when
there is a short circuit or ground faults in the system. The time delay must be
coordinated to the other short circuit protections.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s.
When using inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage function during very low
voltages can give a short operation time. This might lead to unselective tripping. By
setting t1Min longer than the operation time for other protections, such unselective
tripping can be avoided.

ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter for inverse time characteristic can be set to

Instantaneous, Frozen time, Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

TDn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for
coordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to create a programmable under

voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the Technical
manual.

CrvSatn: Tuning parameter that is used to compensate for the undesired discontinuity
created when the denominator in the equation for the customer programmable curve is
equal to zero. For more information, see the Technical manual.

IntBlkSeln: This parameter can be set to Disabled, Block of trip, Block all. In case of a
low voltage the undervoltage function can be blocked. This function can be used to

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 245

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Voltage protection

prevent function when the protected object is switched off. If the parameter is set Block
of trip or Block all unwanted trip is prevented.

IntBlkStValn: Voltage level under which the blocking is activated set in % of VBase.
This setting must be lower than the setting Pickupn. As switch of shall be detected the
setting can be very low, that is, about 10%.

tBlkUVn: Time delay to block the undervoltage step n when the voltage level is below
IntBlkStValn, given in s. It is important that this delay is shorter than the trip time delay
of the undervoltage protection step.

8.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) IP14545-1 v3

8.2.1 Identification
M17002-1 v8

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN-US

8.2.2 Application M13799-3 v9

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high voltage is necessary. OV2PTOV (59) is used for supervision
and detection of abnormal conditions, which, in combination with other protection
functions, increase the security of a complete protection system.

High overvoltage conditions are caused by abnormal situations in the power system.
OV2PTOV (59) is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers,
motors and power lines in order to detect high voltage conditions. OV2PTOV (59) is
used in combination with low current signals, to identify a transmission line, open in
the remote end. In addition to that, OV2PTOV (59) is also used to initiate voltage
correction measures, like insertion of shunt reactors, to compensate for low load, and
thereby decreasing the voltage. The function has a high measuring accuracy and
hysteresis setting to allow applications to control reactive load.

OV2PTOV (59) is used to disconnect apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be
damaged when subject to service under high voltage conditions. It deals with high
voltage conditions at power system frequency, which can be caused by:

246 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

1. Different kinds of faults, where a too high voltage appears in a certain power
system, like metallic connection to a higher voltage level (broken conductor
falling down to a crossing overhead line, transformer flash over fault from the high
voltage winding to the low voltage winding and so on).
2. Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control
(symmetrical voltage decrease).
3. Low load compared to the reactive power generation (symmetrical voltage
decrease).
4. Ground-faults in high impedance grounded systems causes, beside the high
voltage in the neutral, high voltages in the two non-faulted phases, (unsymmetrical
voltage increase).

OV2PTOV (59) prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could
cause their overheating or stress of insulation material, and, thus, shorten their life time
expectancy. In many cases, it is a useful function in circuits for local or remote
automation processes in the power system.

8.2.3 Setting guidelines M13852-4 v10

The parameters for Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV ,59) are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

All the voltage conditions in the system where OV2PTOV (59) performs its functions
should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage
and time characteristic.

There are wide applications where general overvoltage functions are used. All voltage
related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base primary voltage, which is
normally set to the nominal voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power system or the
high voltage equipment under consideration.

The time delay for the OV2PTOV (59) can sometimes be critical and related to the size
of the overvoltage - a power system or a high voltage component can withstand smaller
overvoltages for some time, but in case of large overvoltages the related equipment
should be disconnected more rapidly.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are given below:

The hysteresis is for overvoltage functions very important to prevent that a transient
voltage over set level is not “sealed-in” due to a high hysteresis. Typical values should
be ≤ 0.5%.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 247

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.2.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and

transformers M13852-10 v3

High voltage will cause overexcitation of the core and deteriorate the winding
insulation. The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and
well below the highest acceptable voltage for the equipment.

8.2.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors M13852-13 v1

High voltage will deteriorate the dielectricum and the insulation. The setting has to be
well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and well below the highest
acceptable voltage for the capacitor.

8.2.3.3 Power supply quality M13852-16 v1

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and below the
highest acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.

8.2.3.4 High impedance grounded systems M13852-19 v6

In high impedance grounded systems, ground-faults cause a voltage increase in the

non-faulty phases. Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) is used to detect
such faults. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and
below the lowest occurring voltage during faults. A metallic single-phase ground-fault
causes the non-faulted phase voltages to increase a factor of √3.

8.2.3.5 The following settings can be done for the two step overvoltage
protection M13852-22 v10

ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase-to-ground fundamental value,

phase-to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase
RMS value.

Operation: Disabled/Enabled.

VBase (given in GlobalBaseSel): Base voltage phase to phase in primary kV. This
voltage is used as reference for voltage setting. OV2PTOV (59) measures selectively
phase-to-ground voltages, or phase-to-phase voltage chosen by the setting ConnType.
The function will operate if the voltage gets lower than the set percentage of VBase.
When ConnType is set to PhN DFT or PhN RMS then the IED automatically divides set
value for VBase by √3. When ConnType is set to PhPh DFT or PhPh RMS then set
value for VBase is used. Therefore, always set VBase as rated primary phase-to-phase
ground voltage of the protected object. If phase to neutral (PhN) measurement is

248 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

selected as setting, the operation of phase-to-ground over voltage is automatically

divided by sqrt3. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage over:

V > (%) × VBase( kV ) / 3

EQUATION1713 V2 EN-US (Equation 69)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

Vpickup > (%) × VBase(kV)

EQUATION1992-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 70)

The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps (n = 1 or 2).
Therefore the setting parameters are described only once.

Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting
can be Definite time, Inverse Curve A, Inverse Curve B, Inverse Curve C or I/Prog. inv.
curve. The choice is highly dependent of the protection application.

OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages that
should be above the set level to give operation. The setting can be 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3,
3 out of 3. In most applications it is sufficient that one phase voltage is high to give
operation. If the function shall be insensitive for single phase-to-ground faults 1 out of
3 can be chosen, because the voltage will normally rise in the non-faulted phases at
single phase-to-ground faults. In subtransmission and transmission networks the UV
function is mainly a system supervision function and 3 out of 3 is selected.

Pickupn: Set pickup overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of VBase. The
setting is highly dependent of the protection application. Here it is essential to consider
the maximum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally this voltage is less than 110%
of nominal voltage.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection
application. In many applications the protection function is used to prevent damages to
the protected object. The speed might be important for example in case of protection of
transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be co-ordinated with other
automated actions in the system.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s.
For very high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can
give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min
longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be
avoided.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 249

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Voltage protection

ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter for inverse time characteristic can be set:

Instantaneous, Frozen time, Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

TDn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for co-
ordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under
voltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the technical
reference manual.

CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal
to zero the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity.
Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the
voltage interval Pickup> up to Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used, this parameter must
be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1448 V1 EN-US (Equation 71)

HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis set in % of VBase. The setting of this parameter is

highly dependent of the application. If the function is used as control for automatic
switching of reactive compensation devices the hysteresis must be set smaller than the
voltage change after switching of the compensation device.

8.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

(59N) IP14546-1 v4

8.3.1 Identification
SEMOD54295-2 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
2(U0>)

IEC15000108 V1 EN-US

250 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

8.3.2 Application M13809-3 v8

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is primarily used in high
impedance grounded distribution networks, mainly as a backup for the primary ground
fault protection of the feeders and the transformer. To increase the security for different
ground fault related functions, the residual overvoltage signal can be used as a release
signal. The residual voltage can be measured either at the transformer neutral or from a
voltage transformer open delta connection. The residual voltage can also be calculated
internally, based on the measurement of the three phase-to-ground voltages.

In high impedance grounded systems the residual voltage will increase in case of any
fault connected to ground. Depending on the type of fault and fault resistance the
residual voltage will reach different values. The highest residual voltage, equal to three
times the phase-to-ground voltage, is achieved for a single phase-to-ground fault. The
residual voltage increases approximately to the same level in the whole system and
does not provide any guidance in finding the faulted component. Therefore,
ROV2PTOV (59N) is often used as a backup protection or as a release signal for the
feeder ground fault protection.

8.3.3 Setting guidelines M13853-3 v8

All the voltage conditions in the system where ROV2PTOV (59N) performs its
functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its
voltage withstand capability and time characteristic.

All voltage-related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which
shall be set to the primary nominal voltage (phase-phase) level of the power system or
the high-voltage equipment under consideration.

The time delay for ROV2PTOV (59N) is seldom critical, since residual voltage is
related to ground faults in a high-impedance grounded system, and enough time must
normally be given for the primary protection to clear the fault. In some more specific
situations, where the residual overvoltage protection is used to protect some specific
equipment, the time delay is shorter.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the residual voltage level are given
below.

8.3.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and

transformersEquipment protection for transformers M13853-9 v8

High residual voltage indicates ground fault in the system, perhaps in the component to
which two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) is connected. For
selectivity reasons to the primary protection for the faulted device, ROV2PTOV (59N)
must trip the component with some time delay. The setting must be above the highest

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 251

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Voltage protection

occurring "normal" residual voltage and below the highest acceptable residual voltage
for the equipment.

8.3.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors M13853-12 v4

High voltage will deteriorate the dielectric and the insulation. Two step residual
overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) has to be connected to a neutral or open
delta winding. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual
voltage and below the highest acceptable residual voltage for the capacitor.

8.3.3.3 Power supply quality M13853-15 v3

The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and below
the highest acceptable residual voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other
agreements.

8.3.3.4 High impedance grounded systems M13853-18 v10

In high impedance grounded systems, ground faults cause a neutral voltage in the
feeding transformer neutral. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV
(59N) is used to trip the transformer, as a backup protection for the feeder ground fault
protection, and as a backup for the transformer primary ground fault protection. The
setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage, and below the
lowest occurring residual voltage during the faults under consideration. A metallic
single-phase ground fault causes a transformer neutral to reach a voltage equal to the
nominal phase-to-ground voltage.

The voltage transformers measuring the phase-to-ground voltages measure zero

voltage in the faulty phase. The two healthy phases will measure full phase-to-phase
voltage, as the faulty phase will be connected to ground. The residual overvoltage will
be three times the phase-to-ground voltage. See figure 110.

252 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

V_A
F

V_
C
V_

BF
C V_
V_ B

3V0

CF
V_

ANSI07000190-1-en.vsd
ANSI07000190 V1 EN-US

Figure 110: Ground fault in Non-effectively grounded systems

8.3.3.5 Direct grounded system GUID-EA622F55-7978-4D1C-9AF7-2BAB5628070A v8

In direct grounded systems, an ground fault on one phase is indicated by voltage

collapse in that phase. The other healthy phase will still have normal phase-to-ground
voltage. The residual sum will have the same value as the remaining phase-to-ground
voltage, which is shown in Figure 111.
V_A

F
IL1
F
V_A

V_
B
3V0

C C V_
V_ V_ B

ANSI07000189-1-en.vsd
ANSI07000189 V1 EN-US

Figure 111: Ground fault in Direct grounded system

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 253

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.3.3.6 Settings for two step residual overvoltage protection M13853-21 v13

Operation: Disabled or Enabled

VBase (given in GlobalBaseSel) is used as voltage reference for the set pickup values.
The voltage can be fed to the IED in different ways:
1. The IED is fed from a normal voltage transformer group where the residual
voltage is calculated internally from the phase-to-ground voltages within the
protection. The setting of the analogue input is given as VBase=Vph-ph.
2. The IED is fed from a broken delta connection normal voltage transformer group.
In an open delta connection the protection is fed by the voltage 3V0 (single input).
Section Analog inputs in the Application manual explains how the analog input
needs to be set.
3. The IED is fed from a single voltage transformer connected to the neutral point of
a power transformer in the power system. In this connection the protection is fed
by the voltage VN=V0 (single input). Section Analog inputs in the Application
manual explains how the analog input needs to be set.

ROV2PTOV (59N) will measure the residual voltage corresponding to the nominal
phase-to-ground voltage for a high-impedance grounded system. The measurement will
be based on the neutral voltage displacement.

The setting parameters described below are identical for the two steps (n = step 1 and
2). Therefore the setting parameters are described only once.

OperationStepn: This is to enable/disable operation of step n.

Characteristicn: Selected inverse time characteristic for step n. This parameter gives
the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be, Definite time or Inverse curve A
or Inverse curve B or Inverse curve C or Prog. inv. curve. The choice is highly
dependent of the protection application.

Pickupn: Set operate overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of residual
voltage corresponding to VBase:

V > ( % ) × VBase ( kV ) 3
ANSIEQUATION2290 V1 EN-US (Equation 72)

The setting depends on the required sensitivity of the protection and the type of system
grounding. In non-effectively grounded systems, the residual voltage cannot be higher
than three times the rated phase-to-ground voltage, which should correspond to 100%.

In effectively grounded systems, this value depends on the ratio Z0/Z1. The required
setting to detect high resistive ground faults must be based on network calculations.

254 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent on the protection
application. In many applications, the protection function has the task to prevent
damage to the protected object. The speed might be important, for example, in the case
of the protection of a transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be
co-ordinated with other automated actions in the system.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s.
For very high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can
give very short operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min
longer than the operation time for other protections such unselective tripping can be
avoided.

ResetTypeCrvn: Set reset type curve for step n. This parameter can be set:
Instantaneous,Frozen time,Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default
value is 25 ms.

TDn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for co-
ordination between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters for step n, to set to create
programmable undervoltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be
found in the technical reference manual.

CrvSatn: Set tuning parameter for step n. When the denominator in the expression of
the programmable curve is equal to zero, the time delay will be infinite. There will be
an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate
for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Pickup> up to Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/
100) the used voltage will be: Pickup> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1448 V1 EN-US (Equation 73)

HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis for step n, set in % of VBase. The setting of this
parameter is highly dependent of the application. The hysteresis is used to avoid
oscillations of the PICKUP output signal. This signal resets when the measured voltage
drops below the setting level and leaves the hysteresis area. Make sure that the set
value for parameter HystABSn is somewhat smaller than the set pickup value.
Otherwise there is a risk that step n will not reset properly.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 255

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Voltage protection

8.4 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60) SEMOD153860-1 v2

8.4.1 Identification
SEMOD167723-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60

8.4.2 Application SEMOD153893-5 v3

The Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60) functions can be used in some
different applications.

• Voltage unbalance protection for capacitor banks. The voltage on the bus is
supervised with the voltage in the capacitor bank, phase- by phase. Difference
indicates a fault, either short-circuited or open element in the capacitor bank. It is
mainly used on elements with external fuses but can also be used on elements with
internal fuses instead of a current unbalance protection measuring the current
between the neutrals of two half’s of the capacitor bank. The function requires
voltage transformers in all phases of the capacitor bank. Figure 112 shows some
different alternative connections of this function.

256 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

V1

Vd>L1
Single grounded wye
V2

Ph C Ph B

Vd>A Double wye

V1 V2

Ph C Ph B Ph C Ph B
en06000390_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000390 V1 EN-US

Figure 112: Connection of voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60) function to

detect unbalance in capacitor banks (one phase only is shown)

VDCPTOV (60) function has a block input (BLOCK) where a fuse failure supervision
(or MCB tripped) can be connected to prevent problems if one fuse in the capacitor
bank voltage transformer set has opened and not the other (capacitor voltage is
connected to input V2). It will also ensure that a fuse failure alarm is given instead of a
Undervoltage or Differential voltage alarm and/or tripping.

8.4.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD153915-5 v3

The parameters for the voltage differential function are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

The following settings are done for the voltage differential function.

Operation: Off/On

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 257

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Voltage protection

BlkDiffAtVLow: The setting is to block the function when the voltages in the phases are
low.

RFLx: Is the setting of the voltage ratio compensation factor where possible differences
between the voltages is compensated for. The differences can be due to different
voltage transformer ratios, different voltage levels e.g. the voltage measurement inside
the capacitor bank can have a different voltage level but the difference can also e.g. be
used by voltage drop in the secondary circuits. The setting is normally done at site by
evaluating the differential voltage achieved as a service value for each phase. The
factor is defined as V2 · RFLx and shall be equal to the V1 voltage. Each phase has its
own ratio factor.

VDTrip: The voltage differential level required for tripping is set with this parameter.
For application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage
and the number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Capacitor banks must be
tripped before excessive voltage occurs on the healthy capacitor elements. The setting
values required are normally given by the capacitor bank supplier. For other
applications it has to be decided case by case. For fuse supervision normally only the
alarm level is used.

tTrip: The time delay for tripping is set by this parameter. Normally, the delay does not
need to be so short in capacitor bank applications as there is no fault requiring urgent
tripping.

tReset: The time delay for reset of tripping level element is set by this parameter.
Normally, it can be set to a short delay as faults are permanent when they occur.

For the advanced users following parameters are also available for setting. Default
values are here expected to be acceptable.

V1Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the first voltage input is decided by
this parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%.

V2Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the second voltage input is decided by
this parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%.

tBlock: The time delay for blocking of the function at detected undervoltages is set by
this parameter.

VDAlarm: The voltage differential level required for alarm is set with this parameter.
For application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage
and the number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Normally values required
are given by capacitor bank supplier.

For fuse supervision normally only this alarm level is used and a suitable voltage level
is 3-5% if the ratio correction factor has been properly evaluated during
commissioning.

258 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 8
Voltage protection

For other applications it has to be decided case by case.

tAlarm: The time delay for alarm is set by this parameter. Normally, few seconds delay
can be used on capacitor banks alarm. For fuse failure supervision (SDDRFUF) the
alarm delay can be set to zero.

8.5 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) SEMOD171868-1 v2

8.5.1 Identification
SEMOD171954-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

8.5.2 Application SEMOD171876-4 v3

The trip of the circuit breaker at a prolonged loss of voltage at all the three phases is
normally used in automatic restoration systems to facilitate the system restoration after
a major blackout. Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27) generates a TRIP signal only
if the voltage in all the three phases is low for more than the set time. If the trip to the
circuit breaker is not required, LOVPTUV (27) is used for signallization only through
an output contact or through the event recording function.

8.5.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD171929-4 v5

Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27) is in principle independent of the protection

functions. It requires to be set to open the circuit breaker in order to allow a simple
system restoration following a main voltage loss of a big part of the network and only
when the voltage is lost with breakers still closed.

All settings are in primary values or per unit. Set operate level per phase to typically
70% of the global parameter VBase level. Set the time delay tTrip=5-20 seconds.

8.5.3.1 Advanced users settings SEMOD171929-8 v4

For advanced users the following parameters need also to be set. Set the length of the
trip pulse to typical tPulse=0.15 sec. Set the blocking time tBlock to block Loss of
voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27), if some but not all voltage are low, to typical 5.0
seconds and set the time delay for enabling the function after restoration tRestore to 3 -
40 seconds.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 259

Application manual
260
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

Section 9 Frequency protection

9.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) IP15746-1 v3

9.1.1 Identification
M14865-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN-US

9.1.2 Application M13350-3 v4

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is applicable in all situations, where reliable

detection of low fundamental power system frequency is needed. The power system
frequency, and the rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance between
the actual generation and the load demand. Low fundamental frequency in a power
system indicates that the available generation is too low to fully supply the power
demanded by the load connected to the power grid. SAPTUF (81) detects such
situations and provides an output signal, suitable for load shedding, generator boosting,
HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up and so on. Sometimes shunt reactors are
automatically switched in due to low frequency, in order to reduce the power system
voltage and hence also reduce the voltage dependent part of the load.

SAPTUF (81) is very sensitive and accurate and is used to alert operators that
frequency has slightly deviated from the set-point, and that manual actions might be
enough. The underfrequency signal is also used for overexcitation detection. This is
especially important for generator step-up transformers, which might be connected to
the generator but disconnected from the grid, during a roll-out sequence. If the
generator is still energized, the system will experience overexcitation, due to the low
frequency.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 261

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Frequency protection

9.1.3 Setting guidelines M13355-3 v8

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPTUF (81)
performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated
equipment, its frequency and time characteristic.

There are two specific application areas for SAPTUF (81):

1. to protect equipment against damage due to low frequency, such as generators,

transformers, and motors. Overexcitation is also related to low frequency
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by
shedding load, in generation deficit situations.

The under frequency pickup value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings
are made as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter. The UBase value should
be set as a primary phase-to-phase value.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given
below:

Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well
above the lowest acceptable frequency for the equipment.

Power system protection, by load shedding

The setting has to be below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above
the lowest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting
level, the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or in
frequency) depends very much on the characteristics of the power system under
consideration. The size of the "largest loss of production" compared to "the size of the
power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the load shedding can be set at
a fairly high frequency level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller
systems the frequency pickup level has to be set at a lower value, and the time delay
must be rather short.

The voltage related time delay is used for load shedding. The settings of SAPTUF (81)
could be the same all over the power system. The load shedding is then performed
firstly in areas with low voltage magnitude, which normally are the most problematic
areas, where the load shedding also is most efficient.

9.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) IP15747-1 v3

262 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

9.2.1 Identification
M14866-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN-US

9.2.2 Application M14952-3 v4

Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where

reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed. The power
system frequency, and rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance
between the actual generation and the load demand. High fundamental frequency in a
power system indicates that the available generation is too large compared to the power
demanded by the load connected to the power grid. SAPTOF (81) detects such
situations and provides an output signal, suitable for generator shedding, HVDC-set-
point change and so on. SAPTOF (81) is very sensitive and accurate and can also be
used to alert operators that frequency has slightly deviated from the set-point, and that
manual actions might be enough.

9.2.3 Setting guidelines M14959-3 v7

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPTOF (81)
performs its functions must be considered. The same also applies to the associated
equipment, its frequency and time characteristic.

There are two application areas for SAPTOF (81):

1. to protect equipment against damage due to high frequency, such as generators,

and motors
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by
shedding generation, in over production situations.

The overfrequency pickup value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings are
made as a percentage of a settable global base voltage parameter VBase. The UBase
value should be set as a primary phase-to-phase value.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given
below:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 263

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Frequency protection

Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and well
below the highest acceptable frequency for the equipment.

Power system protection, by generator shedding

The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and below the
highest acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting level,
the number of levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or in frequency)
depend very much on the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The
size of the "largest loss of load" compared to "the size of the power system" is a critical
parameter. In large systems, the generator shedding can be set at a fairly low frequency
level, and the time delay is normally not critical. In smaller systems the frequency
PICKUP level has to be set at a higher value, and the time delay must be rather short.

9.3 Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC (81) IP15748-1 v4

9.3.1 Identification
M14868-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN-US

9.3.2 Application M14966-3 v5

Rate-of-change of frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) is applicable in all situations,

where reliable detection of change of the fundamental power system voltage frequency
is needed. SAPFRC (81) can be used both for increasing frequency and for decreasing
frequency. SAPFRC (81) provides an output signal, suitable for load shedding or
generator shedding, generator boosting, HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up
and so on. Very often SAPFRC (81) is used in combination with a low frequency
signal, especially in smaller power systems, where loss of a fairly large generator will
require quick remedial actions to secure the power system integrity. In such situations
load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency level, but in combination
with a large negative rate-of-change of frequency the underfrequency protection can be
used at a rather high setting.

264 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 9
Frequency protection

9.3.3 Setting guidelines M14971-3 v7

The parameters for Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) are set via the
local HMI or or through the Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPFRC (81)
performs its functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated
equipment, its frequency and time characteristic.

There are two application areas for SAPFRC (81):

1. to protect equipment against damage due to high or too low frequency, such as
generators, transformers, and motors
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown by
shedding load or generation, in situations where load and generation are not in
balance.

SAPFRC (81) is normally used together with an overfrequency or underfrequency

function, in small power systems, where a single event can cause a large imbalance
between load and generation. In such situations load or generation shedding has to take
place very quickly, and there might not be enough time to wait until the frequency
signal has reached an abnormal value. Actions are therefore taken at a frequency level
closer to the primary nominal level, if the rate-of-change frequency is large (with
respect to sign).

The pickup value for SAPFRC (81) is set in Hz/s. All voltage magnitude related
settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to
the primary nominal voltage level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high
voltage equipment under consideration.

SAPFRC (81) is not instantaneous, since the function needs some time to supply a
stable value. It is recommended to have a time delay long enough to take care of signal
noise. However, the time, rate-of-change frequency and frequency steps between
different actions might be critical, and sometimes a rather short operation time is
required, for example, down to 70 ms.

Smaller industrial systems might experience rate-of-change frequency as large as 5

Hz/s, due to a single event. Even large power systems may form small islands with a
large imbalance between load and generation, when severe faults (or combinations of
faults) are cleared - up to 3 Hz/s has been experienced when a small island was isolated
from a large system. For more "normal" severe disturbances in large power systems,
rate-of-change of frequency is much less, most often just a fraction of 1.0 Hz/s.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 265

Application manual
266
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Section 10 Multipurpose protection

10.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC IP14552-1 v2

10.1.1 Identification
M14886-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -

10.1.2 Application IP15008-1 v1

M13084-3 v4

A breakdown of the insulation between phase conductors or a phase conductor and

ground results in a short circuit or a ground fault respectively. Such faults can result in
large fault currents and may cause severe damage to the power system primary
equipment. Depending on the magnitude and type of the fault different overcurrent
protections, based on measurement of phase, ground or sequence current components
can be used to clear these faults. Additionally it is sometimes required that these
overcurrent protections shall be directional and/or voltage controlled/restrained.

The over/under voltage protection is applied on power system elements, such as

generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect abnormal voltage
conditions. Depending on the type of voltage deviation and type of power system
abnormal condition different over/under voltage protections based on measurement of
phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase, residual- or sequence- voltage components can be
used to detect and operate for such incident.

The IED can be provided with multiple General current and voltage protection
(CVGAPC) protection modules. The function is always connected to three-phase
current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always
measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the
setting tool.

Each CVGAPC function module has got four independent protection elements built
into it.

1. Two overcurrent steps with the following built-in features:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 267

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both
steps
• Second harmonic supervision is available in order to only allow operation of
the overcurrent stage(s) if the content of the second harmonic in the
measured current is lower than pre-set level
• Directional supervision is available in order to only allow operation of the
overcurrent stage(s) if the fault location is in the pre-set direction (Forward
or Reverse). Its behavior during low-level polarizing voltage is settable
(Non-Directional,Block,Memory)
• Voltage restrained/controlled feature is available in order to modify the pick-
up level of the overcurrent stage(s) in proportion to the magnitude of the
measured voltage
• Current restrained feature is available in order to only allow operation of the
overcurrent stage(s) if the measured current quantity is bigger than the set
percentage of the current restrain quantity.
2. Two undercurrent steps with the following built-in features:
• Definite time delay for both steps
3. Two overvoltage steps with the following built-in features
• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both
steps
4. Two undervoltage steps with the following built-in features
• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both
steps

All these four protection elements within one general protection function works
independently from each other and they can be individually enabled or disabled.
However it shall be once more noted that all these four protection elements measure
one selected current quantity and one selected voltage quantity (see table 35 and
table 36). It is possible to simultaneously use all four-protection elements and their
individual stages. Sometimes in order to obtain desired application functionality it is
necessary to provide interaction between two or more protection elements/stages
within one CVGAPC function by appropriate IED configuration (for example, dead
machine protection for generators).

10.1.2.1 Current and voltage selection for CVGAPC function SEMOD53443-6 v3

CVGAPC function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage

input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only the single current and
the single voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool (selected current
quantity and selected voltage quantity).

268 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

The user can select, by a setting parameter CurrentInput, to measure one of the
following current quantities shown in table 35.
Table 35: Available selection for current quantity within CVGAPC function
Set value for parameter Comment
"CurrentInput”
1 PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the phase A current phasor
2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B current phasor
3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive
sequence current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence current phasor
6 3 · ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and current phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 PhaseA-PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase A current
phasor and phase B current phasor (VA-VB)
11 PhaseB-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase B current
phasor and phase C current phasor (VB-VC)
12 PhaseC-PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase C current
phasor and phase A current phasor ( VC-VA)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and
ph-ph current phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be
set to 0° all the time

The user can select, by a setting parameter VoltageInput, to measure one of the
following voltage quantities shown in table 36.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 269

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Table 36: Available selection for voltage quantity within CVGAPC function
Set value for parameter Comment
"VoltageInput"
1 PhaseA CVGAPC function will measure the phase A voltage phasor
2 PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the phase B voltage phasor
3 PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the phase C voltage phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive
sequence voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.
6 -3*ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be
intentionally rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for
the directional feature when used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0° all the time
10 PhaseA-PhaseB CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase A voltage
phasor and phase B voltage phasor (VA-VB)
11 PhaseB-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase B voltage
phasor and phase C voltage phasor (VB-VC)
12 PhaseC-PhaseC CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase C voltage
phasor and phase A voltage phasor (VC-VA)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and
ph-ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will
be set to 0° all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 36 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-groundvoltages VA, VB and VC or three

270 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

phase-to-phase voltages VAB, VBC and VCA. This information about actual VT
connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will
then take automatically care about it.

10.1.2.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function SEMOD53443-112 v3

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every
CVGAPC function.

Base current shall be entered as:

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured
Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 35.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by √3
(1.732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as
shown in table 35.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 36.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 36.

10.1.2.3 Application possibilities SEMOD53443-136 v2

Due to its flexibility the general current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function
can be used, with appropriate settings and configuration in many different applications.
Some of possible examples are given below:

1. Transformer and line applications:

• Underimpedance protection (circular, non-directional characteristic) (21)
• Underimpedance protection (circular mho characteristic) (21)
• Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection (51C, 51V)
• Phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence (Non-Directional or Directional)
Overcurrent protection (50, 51, 46, 67, 67N, 67Q)
• Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under
voltage protection (27, 59, 47)
• Special thermal overload protection (49)
• Open Phase protection
• Unbalance protection
2. Generator protection

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 271

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

• 80-95% Stator earth fault protection (measured or calculated 3Vo) (59GN)

• Rotor earth fault protection (with external COMBIFLEX RXTTE4 injection
unit) (64F)
• Underimpedance protection (21)
• Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection (51C, 51V)
• Turn-to-Turn & Differential Backup protection (directional Negative
Sequence. Overcurrent protection connected to generator HV terminal CTs
looking into generator) (67Q)
• Stator Overload protection (49S)
• Rotor Overload protection (49R)
• Loss of Excitation protection (directional pos. seq. OC protection) (40)
• Reverse power/Low forward power protection (directional pos. seq. OC
protection, 2% sensitivity) (32)
• Dead-Machine/Inadvertent-Energizing protection (51/27)
• Breaker head flashover protection
• Improper synchronizing detection
• Sensitive negative sequence generator over current protection and alarm (46)
• Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under
voltage protection (27x, 59x, 47)
• Generator out-of-step detection (based on directional pos. seq. OC) (78)
• Inadvertent generator energizing

10.1.2.4 Inadvertent generator energization SEMOD151947-4 v2

When the generator is taken out of service, and stand-still, there is a risk that the
generator circuit breaker is closed by mistake.

Three-phase energizing of a generator, which is at standstill or on turning gear, causes

it to behave and accelerate similarly to an induction motor. The machine, at this point,
essentially represents the subtransient reactance to the system and it can be expected to
draw from one to four per unit current, depending on the equivalent system impedance.
Machine terminal voltage can range from 20% to 70% of rated voltage, again,
depending on the system equivalent impedance (including the block transformer).
Higher quantities of machine current and voltage (3 to 4 per unit current and 50% to
70% rated voltage) can be expected if the generator is connected to a strong system.
Lower current and voltage values (1 to 2 per unit current and 20% to 40% rated
voltage) are representative of weaker systems.

Since a generator behaves similarly to an induction motor, high currents will develop
in the rotor during the period it is accelerating. Although the rotor may be thermally
damaged from excessive high currents, the time to damage will be on the order of a
few seconds. Of more critical concern, however, is the bearing, which can be damaged
in a fraction of a second due to low oil pressure. Therefore, it is essential that high
speed tripping is provided. This tripping should be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms).

272 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be
limited so that the “normal” overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect
the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. The
reverse power protection might detect the situation but the operation time of this
protection is normally too long.

For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should,
therefore, be included in the protective scheme.

The protection against inadvertent energization can be made by a combination of

undervoltage, overvoltage and overcurrent protection functions. The undervoltage
function will, with a delay for example 10 s, detect the situation when the generator is
not connected to the grid (standstill) and activate the overcurrent function. The
overvoltage function will detect the situation when the generator is taken into operation
and will disable the overcurrent function. The overcurrent function will have a pick-up
value about 50% of the rated current of the generator. The trip delay will be about 50
ms.

10.1.3 Setting guidelines IP15009-1 v2

GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time

of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set
definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
important to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.
M13088-237 v3

The parameters for the general current and voltage protection function (CVGAPC) are
set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

The overcurrent steps has a IMinx (x=1 or 2 depending on step) setting

to set the minimumpickup current. Set IMinx below PickupCurr_OCx
for every step to achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to
standard. If IMinx is set above PickupCurr_OCx for any step the ANSI
reset works as if current is zero when current drops below IMinx.

10.1.3.1 Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection M13088-3 v5

Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection is typically used as sensitive

ground-fault protection of power lines where incorrect zero sequence polarization may
result from mutual induction between two or more parallel lines. Additionally, it can be
used in applications on underground cables where zero-sequence impedance depends
on the fault current return paths, but the cable negative-sequence impedance is

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 273

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

practically constant. It shall be noted that directional negative sequence OC element

offers protection against all unbalance faults (phase-to-phase faults as well). Care shall
be taken that the minimum pickup of such protection function shall be set above
natural system unbalance level.

An example will be given, how sensitive-ground-fault protection for power lines can
be achieved by using negative-sequence directional overcurrent protection elements
within a CVGAPC function.

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following
shall be done to ensure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase power line currents and three-phase power line voltages to
one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF04)
2. Set CurrentInput to NegSeq (please note that CVGAPC function measures I2
current and NOT 3I2 current; this is essential for proper OC pickup level setting)
3. Set VoltageInput to -NegSeq (please note that the negative sequence voltage phasor
is intentionally inverted in order to simplify directionality
4. Set base current IBase value equal to the rated primary current of power line CTs
5. Set base voltage UBase value equal to the rated power line phase-to-phase voltage
in kV
6. Set RCADir to value +65 degrees (NegSeq current typically lags the inverted
NegSeq voltage for this angle during the fault)
7. Set ROADir to value 90 degree
8. Set LowVolt_VM to value 2% (NegSeq voltage level above which the directional
element will be enabled)
9. Enable one overcurrent stage (for example, OC1)
10. By parameter CurveType_OC1 select appropriate TOC/IDMT or definite time
delayed curve in accordance with your network protection philosophy
11. Set PickupCurr_OC1 to value between 3-10% (typical values)
12. Set tDef_OC1 or parameter “TD” when TOC/IDMT curves are used to insure
proper time coordination with other ground-fault protections installed in the
vicinity of this power line
13. Set DirMode_OC1 to Forward
14. Set DirPrinc_OC1 to IcosPhi&U
15. Set ActLowVolt1_VM to Block
• In order to insure proper restraining of this element for CT saturations during
three-phase faults it is possible to use current restraint feature and enable this
element to operate only when NegSeq current is bigger than a certain
percentage (10% is typical value) of measured PosSeq current in the power
line. To do this the following settings within the same function shall be done:
16. Set EnRestrainCurr to On
17. Set RestrCurrInput to PosSeq
18. Set RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.1

274 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

If required, this CVGAPC function can be used in directional comparison protection

scheme for the power line protection if communication channels to the remote end of
this power line are available. In that case typically two NegSeq overcurrent steps are
required. One for forward and one for reverse direction. As explained before the OC1
stage can be used to detect faults in forward direction. The built-in OC2 stage can be
used to detect faults in reverse direction.

However the following shall be noted for such application:

• the set values for RCADir and ROADir settings will be as well applicable for OC2
stage
• setting DirMode_OC2 shall be set to Reverse
• setting parameter PickupCurr_OC2 shall be made more sensitive than pickup
value of forward OC1 element (that is, typically 60% of OC1 set pickup level) in
order to insure proper operation of the directional comparison scheme during
current reversal situations
• pickup signals from OC1 and OC2 elements shall be used to send forward and
reverse signals to the remote end of the power line
• the available scheme communications function block within IED shall be used
between multipurpose protection function and the communication equipment in
order to insure proper conditioning of the above two pickup signals

Furthermore the other built-in UC, OV and UV protection elements can be used for
other protection and alarming purposes.

10.1.3.2 Negative sequence overcurrent protection M13088-5 v4

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide negative
sequence inverse time overcurrent protection for a generator with capability constant of
20s, and maximum continuous negative sequence rating of 7% of the generator rated
current.

The capability curve for a generator negative sequence overcurrent protection, often
used world-wide, is defined by the ANSI standard in accordance with the following
formula:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 275

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

TD
t op = 2
æ I NS ö
ç I ÷
è r ø
EQUATION1740-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 74)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the negative sequence overcurrent IED

TD is the generator capability constant in seconds

INS is the measured negative sequence current

Ir is the generator rated current

By defining parameter x equal to maximum continuous negative sequence rating of the

generator in accordance with the following formula

x = 7% = 0.07 pu
EQUATION1756-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 75)

Equation 74 can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the
operate time of the negative sequence inverse overcurrent IED:

1
TD ×
t op = x2
2
æ I NS ö
ç x×I ÷
è r ø

EQUATION1741-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 76)

In order to achieve such protection functionality with one CVGAPC functions the
following must be done:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents to one CVGAPC instance (for example,

GF01)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to value NegSeq
3. Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes
4. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
5. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value Programmable

276 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

æ A ö
t op = TD × ç + B÷
è M -C
P
ø
EQUATION1742-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 77)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm
TD is time multiplier (parameter setting)
M is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent
TOC/IDMT calculation

When the equation 74 is compared with the equation 76 for the inverse time
characteristic of the OC1 it is obvious that if the following rules are followed:

1. set TD equal to the generator negative sequence capability value

2. set A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
3. set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1=0.0 and P_OC1=2.0
4. set PickupCurr_OC1 equal to the value x

then the OC1 step of the CVGAPC function can be used for generator negative
sequence inverse overcurrent protection.

For this particular example the following settings shall be entered to insure proper
function operation:

1. select negative sequence current as measuring quantity for this CVGAPC function
2. make sure that the base current value for the CVGAPC function is equal to the
generator rated current
3. set TD_OC1 = 20
4. set A_OC1= 1/0.072 = 204.0816
5. set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0
6. set PickupCurr_OC1 = 7%

Proper timing of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required
delayed time reset for OC1 step can be set in order to ensure proper function operation
in case of repetitive unbalance conditions.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes (for example, use OC2 for negative sequence overcurrent alarm and
OV1 for negative sequence overvoltage alarm).

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 277

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

10.1.3.3 Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI

standards M13088-81 v3

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide generator stator
overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI standard if minimum-operating
current shall be set to 116% of generator rating.

The generator stator overload protection is defined by IEC or ANSI standard for turbo
generators in accordance with the following formula:

TD
t op = 2
æ Im ö
ç ÷ -1
è Ir ø
EQUATION1743-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 78)

where:
top is the operating time of the generator stator overload IED

TD is the generator capability constant in accordance with the relevant standard (TD = 37.5 for the
IEC standard or TD = 41.4 for the ANSI standard)
Im is the magnitude of the measured current

Ir is the generator rated current

This formula is applicable only when measured current (for example, positive sequence
current) exceeds a pre-set value (typically in the range from 105 to 125% of the
generator rated current).

By defining parameter x equal to the per unit value for the desired pickup for the
overload IED in accordance with the following formula:

x = 116% = 1.16 pu
EQUATION1755-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 79)

formula 3.5can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the
operate time of the generator stator overload IED:

1
TD ×
t op = x2
2
æ Im ö 1
ç ÷ - 2
è x × Ir ø x
EQUATION1744-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 80)

278 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

In order to achieve such protection functionality with one CVGAPC functions the
following must be done:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents to one CVGAPC instance (for example,

GF01)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to value PosSeq
3. Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes
4. Enable one overcurrent step (for example OC1)
5. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value Programmable

æ A ö
t op = TD × ç + B÷
è M P
- C ø
EQUATION1745-ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 81)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm

TD is time multiplier (parameter setting)

M is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent
TOC/IDMT calculation

When the equation 80 is compared with the equation 81 for the inverse time
characteristic of the OC1 step in it is obvious that if the following rules are followed:

1. set TD equal to the IEC or ANSI standard generator capability value

2. set parameter A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
3. set parameter C_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
4. set parameters B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1=2.0
5. set PickupCurr_OC1 equal to the value x

then the OC1 step of the CVGAPC function can be used for generator negative
sequence inverse overcurrent protection.

1. select positive sequence current as measuring quantity for this CVGAPC function
2. make sure that the base current value for CVGAPC function is equal to the
generator rated current
3. set TD = 37.5 for the IEC standard or TD = 41.4 for the ANSI standard
4. set A_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432
5. set C_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432
6. set B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0
7. set PickupCurr_OC1 = 116%

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 279

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

Proper timing of CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required
delayed time reset for OC1 step can be set in order to insure proper function operation
in case of repetitive overload conditions.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes.

In the similar way rotor overload protection in accordance with ANSI standard can be
achieved.

10.1.3.4 Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators and circuit
breaker head flashover protection for generators M13088-142 v3

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide open phase
protection. This can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function by comparing the
unbalance current with a pre-set level. In order to make such a function more secure it
is possible to restrain it by requiring that at the same time the measured unbalance
current must be bigger than 97% of the maximum phase current. By doing this it will
be insured that function can only pickup if one of the phases is open circuited. Such an
arrangement is easy to obtain in CVGAPC function by enabling the current restraint
feature. The following shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase currents from the protected object to one CVGAPC instance
(for example, GF03)
2. Set CurrentInput to value UnbalancePh
3. Set EnRestrainCurr to On
4. Set RestrCurrInput to MaxPh
5. Set RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.97
6. Set base current value to the rated current of the protected object in primary
amperes
7. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
8. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value IEC Def. Time
9. Set parameter PickupCurr_OC1 to value 5%
10. Set parameter tDef_OC1 to desired time delay (for example, 2.0s)

Proper operation of CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall
be noted that set values for restrain current and its coefficient will as well be applicable
for OC2 step as soon as it is enabled.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes. For example, in case of generator application by enabling OC2 step
with set pickup to 200% and time delay to 0.1s simple but effective protection against
circuit breaker head flashover protection is achieved.

280 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

10.1.3.5 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up

transformer M13088-158 v4

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide voltage restrained
overcurrent protection for a generator. Let us assume that the time coordination study
gives the following required settings:

• Inverse Time Over Current TOC/IDMT curve: ANSI very inverse

• Pickup current of 185% of generator rated current at rated generator voltage
• Pickup current 25% of the original pickup current value for generator voltages
below 25% of rated voltage

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following
shall be done in order to ensure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents and voltages to one CVGAPC instance

(for example, GF05)
2. Set CurrentInput to value MaxPh
3. Set VoltageInput to value MinPh-Ph (it is assumed that minimum phase-to-phase
voltage shall be used for restraining. Alternatively, positive sequence voltage can
be used for restraining by selecting PosSeq for this setting parameter)
4. Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes
5. Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV
6. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
7. Select CurveType_OC1 to value ANSI Very inv
8. If required set minimum operating time for this curve by using parameter
tMin_OC1 (default value 0.05s)
9. Set PickupCurr_OC1 to value 185%
10. Set VCntrlMode_OC1 to On
11. Set VDepMode_OC1 to Slope
12. Set VDepFact_OC1 to value 0.25
13. Set VHighLimit_OC1 to value 100%
14. Set VLowLimit_OC1 to value 25%

Proper operation of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. Furthermore the
other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming
purposes.

10.1.3.6 Loss of excitation protection for a generator M13088-182 v3

Example will be given how by using positive sequence directional overcurrent

protection element within a CVGAPC function, loss of excitation protection for a

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 281

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Multipurpose protection

generator can be achieved. Let us assume that from rated generator data the following
values are calculated:

• Maximum generator capability to contentiously absorb reactive power at zero

active loading 38% of the generator MVA rating
• Generator pull-out angle 84 degrees

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following
shall be done in order to insure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents and three-phase generator voltages to one

CVGAPC instance (for example, GF02)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to PosSeq
3. Set parameter VoltageInput to PosSeq
4. Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes
5. Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV
6. Set parameter RCADir to value -84 degree (that is, current lead voltage for this
angle)
7. Set parameter ROADir to value 90 degree
8. Set parameter LowVolt_VM to value 5%
9. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
10. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value IEC Def. Time
11. Set parameter PickupCurr_OC1 to value 38%
12. Set parameter tDef_OC1 to value 2.0s (typical setting)
13. Set parameter DirMode_OC1 to Forward
14. Set parameter DirPrinc_OC1 to IcosPhi&V
15. Set parameter ActLowVolt1_VM to Block

Proper operation of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by
secondary injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall
be noted that set values for RCA & ROA angles will be applicable for OC2 step if
directional feature is enabled for this step as well. Figure 113 shows overall protection
characteristic

Furthermore the other build-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes.

282 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Q [pu]
A Operating region
0.8

ILowSet
0.6 B IPS
0.4

rca
0.2

0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 P [pu] VPS
-rca
-0.2
C
-0.4 ILowSet
D

-0.6 Operating Region

-0.8
en05000535_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000535 V1 EN-US

Figure 113: Loss of excitation

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 283

Application manual
284
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

Section 11 Secondary system supervision

11.1 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC IP14556-1 v3

11.1.1 Identification
M14869-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -

11.1.2 Application SEMOD113803-4 v10

Different protection functions within the protection IED, operates on the basis of the
measured voltage in the relay point. Examples are:

• impedance protection functions

• undervoltage function
• energizing check function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic

These functions can operate unintentionally if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits
between the voltage instrument transformers and the IED.

It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted operations. Miniature

circuit breakers in the voltage measuring circuits should be located as close as possible
to the voltage instrument transformers, and shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts
that are wired to the IEDs. Separate fuse-failure monitoring IEDs or elements within
the protection and monitoring devices are another possibilities. These solutions are
combined to get the best possible effect in the fuse failure supervision function
(FUFSPVC).

FUFSPVC function built into the IED products can operate on the basis of external
binary signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The
first case influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second
one does not affect the impedance measuring functions.

The negative sequence detection algorithm, based on the negative-sequence measuring

quantities is recommended for use in isolated or high-impedance grounded networks: a

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 285

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

high value of voltage 3V2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2 is
a condition that is related to a fuse failure event.

The zero sequence detection algorithm, based on the zero sequence measuring
quantities is recommended for use in directly or low impedance grounded networks: a
high value of voltage 3V0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0 is a condition
that is related to a fuse failure event. In cases where the line can have a weak-infeed of
zero sequence current this function shall be avoided.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the
fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure. This is
beneficial for example during three phase transformer switching.

11.1.3 Setting guidelines IP15000-1 v1

11.1.3.1 General M13683-3 v5

The negative and zero sequence voltages and currents always exist due to different
non-symmetries in the primary system and differences in the current and voltage
instrument transformers. The minimum value for the operation of the current and
voltage measuring elements must always be set with a safety margin of 10 to 20%,
depending on the system operating conditions.

Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities when the function
is used on long untransposed lines, on multicircuit lines and so on.

The settings of negative sequence, zero sequence and delta algorithm are in percent of
the base voltage and base current for the function. Common base IED values for
primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and primary power (SBase) are set in
Global Base Values GBASVAL. The setting GlobalBaseSel is used to select a particular
GBASVAL and used its base values.

11.1.3.2 Setting of common parameters M13683-9 v9

Set the operation mode selector Operation to Enabled to release the fuse failure
function.

The voltage threshold VPPU is used to identify low voltage condition in the system.
Set VPPU below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency
conditions. We propose a setting of approximately 70% of VBase.

The drop off time of 200 ms for dead phase detection makes it recommended to always
set SealIn to Enabled since this will secure a fuse failure indication at persistent fuse
fail when closing the local breaker when the line is already energized from the other
end. When the remote breaker closes the voltage will return except in the phase that

286 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

has a persistent fuse fail. Since the local breaker is open there is no current and the
dead phase indication will persist in the phase with the blown fuse. When the local
breaker closes the current will start to flow and the function detects the fuse failure
situation. But due to the 200 ms drop off timer the output BLKZ will not be activated
until after 200 ms. This means that distance functions are not blocked and due to the
“no voltage but current” situation might issue a trip.

The operation mode selector OpModeSel has been introduced for better adaptation to
system requirements. The mode selector enables selecting interactions between the
negative sequence and zero sequence algorithm. In normal applications, the
OpModeSel is set to either V2I2 for selecting negative sequence algorithm or V0I0 for
zero sequence based algorithm. If system studies or field experiences shows that there
is a risk that the fuse failure function will not be activated due to the system conditions,
the dependability of the fuse failure function can be increased if the OpModeSel is set
to V0I0 OR V2I2 or OptimZsNs. In mode V0I0 OR V2I2 both negative and zero
sequence based algorithms are activated and working in an OR-condition. Also in
mode OptimZsNs both negative and zero sequence algorithms are activated and the one
that has the highest magnitude of measured negative or zero sequence current will
operate. If there is a requirement to increase the security of the fuse failure function
OpModeSel can be selected to V0I0 AND V2I2 which gives that both negative and zero
sequence algorithms are activated and working in an AND-condition, that is, both
algorithms must give condition for block in order to activate the output signals BLKV
or BLKZ.

11.1.3.3 Negative sequence based M13683-17 v9

The relay setting value 3V2PU is given in percentage of the base voltage VBase and
should not be set lower than the value that is calculated according to equation 82.

V2
3V 2 PU  100
VBase 3
EQUATION1757-ANSI V4 EN-US (Equation 82)

where:
V2PU is the maximal negative sequence voltage during normal operation conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
VBase is the base voltage for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

The setting of the current limit 3I2PU is in percentage of parameter IBase. The setting
of 3I2PU must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the
system and can be calculated according to equation 83.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 287

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

I2
3 I 2 PU   100
IBase
EQUATION1758-ANSI V4 EN-US (Equation 83)

where:
I2 is the maximal negative sequence current during normal operating conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
IBase is the base current for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

11.1.3.4 Zero sequence based M13683-43 v8

The IED setting value 3V0PU is given in percentage of the base voltage VBase. The
setting of 3V0PU should not be set lower than the value that is calculated according to
equation 84.

3V 0
3V 0 PU  100
VBase 3
EQUATION1759-ANSI V4 EN-US (Equation 84)

where:
3V0 is the maximal zero sequence voltage during normal operation conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
VBase is the base voltage for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

The setting of the current limit 3I0PU is done in percentage of IBase. The setting of
pickup must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the
system. The setting can be calculated according to equation 85.

3I 0
3I 0 PU = × 100
IBase
EQUATION2293-ANSI V2 EN-US (Equation 85)

where:
3I0PU is the maximal zero sequence current during normal operating conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
IBase is the base current for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

288 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

11.1.3.5 Delta V and delta I GUID-02336F26-98C0-419D-8759-45F5F12580DE v7

Set the operation mode selector OpDVDI to Enabled if the delta function shall be in
operation.

The setting of DVPU should be set high (approximately 60% of VBase) and the current
threshold DIPU low (approximately 10% of IBase) to avoid unwanted operation due to
normal switching conditions in the network. The delta current and delta voltage
function shall always be used together with either the negative or zero sequence
algorithm. If VSetprim is the primary voltage for operation of dU/dt and ISetprim the
primary current for operation of dI/dt, the setting of DVPU and DIPU will be given
according to equation 86 and equation 87.

VSet prim
DVPU = ⋅100
VBase
EQUATION1765-ANSI V2 EN-US (Equation 86)

ISet prim
DIPU = ⋅100
IBase
ANSIEQUATION2385 V2 EN-US (Equation 87)

The voltage thresholds VPPU is used to identify low voltage condition in the system.
Set VPPU below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency
conditions. A setting of approximately 70% of VBase is recommended.

The current threshold 50P shall be set lower than the IMinOp for the distance
protection function. A 5...10% lower value is recommended.

11.1.3.6 Dead line detection M13683-78 v4

The condition for operation of the dead line detection is set by the parameters IDLDPU
for the current threshold and UDLD< for the voltage threshold.

Set the IDLDPU with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected load current. A
safety margin of at least 15-20% is recommended. The operate value must however
exceed the maximum charging current of an overhead line, when only one phase is
disconnected (mutual coupling to the other phases).

Set the VDLDPU with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected operating
voltage. A safety margin of at least 15% is recommended.

11.2 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60) GUID-9C5BA1A7-DF2F-49D4-A13A-C6B483DDFCDC v2

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 289

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

11.2.1 Identification GUID-109434B0-23E5-4053-9E6E-418530A07F9C v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60

11.2.2 Application GUID-AD63BF6C-0351-4E48-9FB2-9AB5CF0C521E v2

Some protection functions operate on the basis of measured voltage at the relay point.
Examples of such protection functions are distance protection function, undervoltage
function and energisation-check function. These functions might mal-operate if there is
an incorrect measured voltage due to fuse failure or other kind of faults in voltage
measurement circuit.

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit

based on comparison of the voltages of the main and pilot fused circuits phase wise.
VDSPVC output can be configured to block voltage dependent protection functions
such as high-speed distance protection, undervoltage relays, underimpedance relays
and so on.

290 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 11
Secondary system supervision

A B C

V1C
V1A

V1B
V2C
V2A

V2B

Main Vt circuit
Pilot VT circuit

IED
FuseFailSupvn

ANSI12000143-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000143 V1 EN-US

Figure 114: Application of VDSPVC

11.2.3 Setting guidelines GUID-0D5A517C-1F92-46B9-AC2D-F41ED4E7C39E v1

GUID-52BF4E8E-0B0C-4F75-99C4-0BCB22CDD166 v2

The parameters for Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.
GUID-0B298162-C939-47E4-A89B-7E6BD7BEBB2C v2

The voltage input type (phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral) is selected using

ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot parameters, for main and pilot fuse groups
respectively.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 291

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Secondary system supervision

The connection type for the main and the pilot fuse groups must be
consistent.

The settings Vdif Main block, Vdif Pilot alarm and VSealIn are in percentage of the
base voltage, VBase. Set VBase to the primary rated phase-to-phase voltage of the
potential voltage transformer. VBase is available in the Global Base Value groups; the
particular Global Base Value group, that is used by VDSPVC (60), is set by the setting
parameter GlobalBaseSel.

The settings Vdif Main block and Vdif Pilot alarm should be set low (approximately
30% of VBase) so that they are sensitive to the fault on the voltage measurement
circuit, since the voltage on both sides are equal in the healthy condition. If VSetPrim is
the desired pick up primary phase-to-phase voltage of measured fuse group, the setting
of Vdif Main block and Vdif Pilot alarm will be given according to equation 88.

VSetPrim
Vdif Main block or Vdif Pilot alarm= ⋅100
VBase
ANSI13000279 V1 EN-US (Equation 88)

VSetPrim is defined as phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage dependent of the

selected ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot. If ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot are set to
Ph-N than the function performs internally the rescaling of VSetPrim.

When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are
restored above the VSealIn setting. The fuse failure outputs are deactivated when the
normal voltage conditions are restored.

292 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

Section 12 Control

12.1 Synchronism check, energizing check, and

synchronizing SESRSYN (25) IP14558-1 v4

12.1.1 Identification
M14889-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN-US

12.1.2 Application IP15111-1 v1

12.1.2.1 Synchronizing SEMOD171992-5 v9

To allow closing of breakers between asynchronous networks, a synchronizing feature

is provided. The breaker close command is issued at the optimum time when
conditions across the breaker are satisfied in order to avoid stress on the network and
its components.

The systems are defined as asynchronous when the frequency difference between bus
and line is larger than an adjustable parameter. If the frequency difference is less than
this threshold value the system is defined to have a parallel circuit and the synchronism
check function is used.

The synchronizing function measures the difference between the V-Line and the V-
Bus. It operates and enables a closing command to the circuit breaker when the
calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angle and the following
conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 293

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

• The voltages V-Line and V-Bus are higher than the set values for VHighBusSynch
and VHighLineSynch of the respective base voltages GblBaseSelBus and
GblBaseSelLine.
• The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of VDiffSynch.
• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiffMax and larger
than the set value of FreqDiffMin. If the frequency is less than FreqDiffMin the
synchronism check is used and the value of FreqDiffMin must thus be identical to
the value FreqDiffM resp FreqDiffA for synchronism check function. The bus and
line frequencies must also be within a range of ±5 Hz from the rated frequency.
When the synchronizing option is included also for autoreclose there is no reason
to have different frequency setting for the manual and automatic reclosing and the
frequency difference values for synchronism check should be kept low.
• The frequency rate of change is less than set value for both V-Bus and V-Line.
• The difference in the phase angle is smaller than the set value of CloseAngleMax.
• The closing angle is decided by the calculation of slip frequency and required pre-
closing time.

The synchronizing function compensates for the measured slip frequency as well as the
circuit breaker closing delay. The phase angle advance is calculated continuously. The
calculation of the operation pulse sent in advance is using the measured SlipFrequency
and the set tBreaker time. To prevent incorrect closing pulses, a maximum closing
angle between bus and line is set with CloseAngleMax. Table 37 below shows the
maximum settable value for tBreaker when CloseAngleMax is set to 15 or 30 degrees,
at different allowed slip frequencies for synchronizing. To minimize the moment stress
when synchronizing near a power station, a narrower limit for the CloseAngleMax
needs to be used.
Table 37: Dependencies between tBreaker and SlipFrequency with different CloseAngleMax
values
tBreaker [s] (max settable value) tBreaker [s] (max settable value) with SlipFrequency [Hz]
with CloseAngleMax = 15 degrees CloseAngleMax = 30 degrees [max (BusFrequency -
[default value] value] LineFrequency)
0.040 0.080 1.000
0.050 0.100 0.800
0.080 0.160 0.500
0.200 0.400 0.200
0.400 0.810 0.100
1.000 0.080
0.800 0.050
1.000 0.040

294 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

The reference voltage can be phase-neutral A, B, C or phase-phase A-B, B-C, C-A or

positive sequence (Require a three phase voltage, that is VA, VB and VC) . By setting
the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2,
SelPhaseLine2 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made automatically for the
voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle difference caused if different setting
values are selected for the two sides of the breaker. If needed an additional phase angle
adjustment can be done for selected line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.

12.1.2.2 Synchronism check M12309-6 v10

The main purpose of the synchronism check function is to provide control over the
closing of circuit breakers in power networks in order to prevent closing if conditions
for synchronism are not detected. It is also used to prevent the re-connection of two
systems, which are divided after islanding and after a three pole reclosing.

Single pole auto-reclosing does not require any synchronism check

since the system is tied together by two phases.

SESRSYN (25) function block includes both the synchronism check function and the
energizing function to allow closing when one side of the breaker is dead. SESRSYN
(25) function also includes a built in voltage selection scheme which allows adoption
to various busbar arrangements.

~ ~
en04000179_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000179 V1 EN-US

Figure 115: Two interconnected power systems

Figure 115 shows two interconnected power systems. The cloud means that the
interconnection can be further away, that is, a weak connection through other stations.
The need for a check of synchronization increases if the meshed system decreases
since the risk of the two networks being out of synchronization at manual or automatic
closing is greater.

The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. Output is generated only when all measured conditions are
within their set limits simultaneously. The check consists of:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 295

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

• Live line and live bus.

• Voltage level difference.
• Frequency difference (slip). The bus and line frequency must also be within a
range of ±5 Hz from rated frequency.
• Phase angle difference.

A time delay is available to ensure that the conditions are fulfilled for a minimum
period of time.

In very stable power systems the frequency difference is insignificant or zero for
manually initiated closing or closing by automatic restoration. In steady conditions a
bigger phase angle difference can be allowed as this is sometimes the case in a long
and loaded parallel power line. For this application we accept a synchronism check
with a long operation time and high sensitivity regarding the frequency difference. The
phase angle difference setting can be set for steady state conditions.

Another example is the operation of a power network that is disturbed by a fault event:
after the fault clearance a highspeed auto-reclosing takes place. This can cause a power
swing in the net and the phase angle difference may begin to oscillate. Generally, the
frequency difference is the time derivative of the phase angle difference and will,
typically oscillate between positive and negative values. When the circuit breaker
needs to be closed by auto-reclosing after fault-clearance some frequency difference
should be tolerated, to a greater extent than in the steady condition mentioned in the
case above. But if a big phase angle difference is allowed at the same time, there is
some risk that auto-reclosing will take place when the phase angle difference is big and
increasing. In this case it should be safer to close when the phase angle difference is
smaller.

To fulfill the above requirements the synchronism check function is provided with
duplicate settings, one for steady (Manual) conditions and one for operation under
disturbed conditions (Auto).

296 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

52

SynchroCheck
Bus voltage
VHighBusSC > 50 – 120% of GblBaseSelBus Fuse fail
VHighLineSC >50 – 120% of GblBaseSelLine
Line
VDiffSC < 0.02 – 0.50 p.u. Line Bus Voltage
reference
PhaseDiffM < 5 – 90 degrees voltage
PhaseDiffA < 5 – 90 degrees Fuse fail Line Voltage
FreqDiffM < 3 – 1000 mHz
FreqDiffA < 1000 mHz

ANSI10000079-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000079 V2 EN-US

Figure 116: Principle for the synchronism check function

12.1.2.3 Energizing check M12310-3 v12

The main purpose of the energizing check function is to facilitate the controlled re-
connection of disconnected lines and buses to energized buses and lines.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold values. The output is given only when the actual
measured conditions match the set conditions. Figure 117 shows two substations,
where one (1) is energized and the other (2) is not energized. The line between CB A
and CB B is energized (DLLB) from substation 1 via the circuit breaker A and
energization of station 2 is done by CB B energization check device for that breaker
DBLL. (or Both).

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 297

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

1 2
A B

Bus voltage Line voltage

EnergizingCheck
VLiveBusEnerg > 50 - 120 % of GblBaseSelBus
VLiveLineEnerg > 50 - 120 % of GblBaseSelLine
VDeadBusEnerg < 10 - 80 % of GblBaseSelBus
VDeadLineEnerg < 10 - 80 % of GblBaseSelLine
VMaxEnerg < 50 - 180 % of GblBaseSelBus and/or
GblBaseSelLine

ANSI10000078-4-en.vsd
ANSI10000078 V4 EN-US

Figure 117: Principle for the energizing check function

The energizing operation can operate in the dead line live bus (DLLB) direction, dead
bus live line (DBLL) direction, or in both directions over the circuit breaker.
Energizing from different directions can be different for automatic reclosing and
manual closing of the circuit breaker. For manual closing it is also possible to allow
closing when both sides of the breaker are dead, Dead Bus Dead Line (DBDL).

The equipment is considered energized (Live) if the voltage is above the set value for
VLiveBusEnerg or VLiveLineEnerg of the base voltages GblBaseSelBus and
VGblBaseSelLine, which are defined in the Global Base Value groups, according to the
setting of GblBaseSelBus and GblBaseSelLine; in a similar way, the equipment is
considered non-energized (Dead) if the voltage is below the set value for
VDeadBusEnerg or VDeadLineEnerg of the respective Global Base Value groups. A
disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to factors such as induction
from a line running in parallel, or feeding via extinguishing capacitors in the circuit
breakers. This voltage can be as high as 50% or more of the base voltage of the line.
Normally, for breakers with single breaking elements (<330 kV) the level is well below
30%.

When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to remain
constant for a certain period of time before the close signal is permitted. The purpose
of the delayed operate time is to ensure that the dead side remains de-energized and
that the condition is not due to temporary interference.

12.1.2.4 Voltage selection M12321-3 v11

The voltage selection function is used for the connection of appropriate voltages to the
synchronism check, synchronizing and energizing check functions. For example, when
the IED is used in a double bus arrangement, the voltage that should be selected

298 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

depends on the status of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the status of
the disconnectors auxiliary contacts, the right voltages for the synchronism check and
energizing check functions can be selected.

Available voltage selection types are for single circuit breaker with double busbars and
the breaker-and-a-half arrangement. A double circuit breaker arrangement and single
circuit breaker with a single busbar do not need any voltage selection function. Neither
does a single circuit breaker with double busbars using external voltage selection need
any internal voltage selection.

Manual energization of a completely open diameter in breaker-and-a-half switchgear is

allowed by internal logic.

The voltages from busbars and lines must be physically connected to the voltage inputs
in the IED and connected, using the PCM software, to each of the SESRSYN (25)
functions available in the IED.

12.1.2.5 External fuse failure M12322-3 v12

Either external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse (or miniature circuit
breaker) are connected to HW binary inputs of the IED; these signals are connected to
inputs of SESRSYN function in the application configuration tool of PCM600. The
internal fuse failure supervision function can also be used if a three phase voltage is
present. The signal BLKV, from the internal fuse failure supervision function, is then
used and connected to the fuse supervision inputs of the SESRSYN function block. In
case of a fuse failure, the SESRSYN energizing (25) function is blocked.

The VB1OK/VB2OK and VB1FF/VB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and
the VL1OK/VL2OK and VL1FF/VL2FF inputs are related to the line voltage.

External selection of energizing direction M12322-10 v8

The energizing can be selected by use of the available logic function blocks. Below is
an example where the choice of mode is done from a symbol ,created in the Graphical
Design Editor (GDE) tool on the local HMI, through selector switch function block,
but alternatively there can for example, be a physical selector switch on the front of the
panel which is connected to a binary to integer function block (B16I).

If the PSTO input is used, connected to the Local-Remote switch on the local HMI, the
choice can also be from the station HMI system, typically ABB Microscada through
IEC 61850–8–1 communication.

The connection example for selection of the manual energizing mode is shown in
figure 118. Selected names are just examples but note that the symbol on the local HMI
can only show the active position of the virtual selector.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 299

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

SLGGIO

PSTO SESRSYN (25)

INTONE

NAME1 SWPOSN MENMODE

OFF
NAME2
DL
DB NAME3
DLB NAME4

ANSI09000171_1_en.vsd
ANSI09000171 V1 EN-US

Figure 118: Selection of the energizing direction from a local HMI symbol through a
selector switch function block.

12.1.3 Application examples M12323-3 v7

The synchronism check function block can also be used in some switchyard
arrangements, but with different parameter settings. Below are some examples of how
different arrangements are connected to the IED analog inputs and to the function
block SESRSYN, 25. One function block is used per circuit breaker.

The input used below in example are typical and can be changed by use
of configuration and signal matrix tools.

The SESRSYN and connected SMAI function block instances must

have the same cycle time in the application configuration.

300 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.1.3.1 Single circuit breaker with single busbar M12324-3 v12

SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
Bus 1 V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
189 BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
Fuse
BUS2_OP B1SEL
VT
BUS2_CL B2SEL
bus1Voltage LINE1_OP L1SEL
V REF1 152 LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
lineVoltage/1/2/3 VL2FF FRDIFFA
VA/VB/VC STARTSYN PHDIFFA
Fuse TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
VT TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
Line MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

ANSI0000093-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000093 V1 EN-US

Figure 119: Connection of SESRSYN (25) function block in a single busbar

arrangement

Figure 119 illustrates connection principles for a single busbar. For the SESRSYN (25)
function there is one voltage transformer on each side of the circuit breaker. The
voltage transformer circuit connections are straightforward; no special voltage
selection is necessary.

The voltage from busbar VT is connected to V3PB1 and the voltage from the line VT
is connected to V3PL1. The conditions of the VT fuses shall also be connected as
shown above. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 301

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

12.1.3.2 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage selection M12325-3 v8

SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
Bus 1 V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
Bus 2 BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
Fuse BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
Fuse VT BUS2_OP B1SEL
VT BUS2_CL B2SEL
bus Voltage LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
VREF1 LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
189 VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
289 VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
152 AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Voltag Vbus
Line 1/2/3
V e VLine
MODEAEN
VA/VB/ Fuse
MODEMEN
C VT
Line
ANSI10000094-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000094 V1 EN-US

Figure 120: Connection of SESRSYN (25) function block in a single breaker,

double busbar arrangement with external voltage selection

In this type of arrangement no internal voltage selection is required. The voltage

selection is made by external relays typically connected according to figure 120.
Suitable voltage and VT fuse failure supervision from the two busbars are selected
based on the position of the busbar disconnectors. This means that the connections to
the function block will be the same as for the single busbar arrangement. The voltage
selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel.

302 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.1.3.3 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage selection M12326-3 v7

SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
Bus 1 BLOCK MANENOK
Bus 2 BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
Fuse
bus1 Voltage VT
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
VREF 1 LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
Fuse
bus2 Voltage VT VB1OK VOKSYN
V REF 2 VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
189 VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
289 TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
152 Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
lineVoltage /1/2/3
VA/VB/VC
Fuse
VT

Line ANSI10000095-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000095 V1 EN-US

Figure 121: Connection of the SESRSYN function block in a single breaker, double
busbar arrangement with internal voltage selection

When internal voltage selection is needed, the voltage transformer circuit connections
are made according to figure 121. The voltage from the busbar 1 VT is connected to
V3PB1 and the voltage from busbar 2 is connected to V3PB2. The voltage from the
line VT is connected to V3PL1. The positions of the disconnectors and VT fuses shall
be connected as shown in figure 121. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set
to Double bus.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 303

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

12.1.3.4 Double circuit breaker M12329-3 v7

152
SESRSYN (25)
Bus 1 V3PB1* SYNOK
Bus 2 V3PB2*
V3PL1*
AUTOSYOK
AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
Fuse BUS2_OP B1SEL
bus 1 Voltage VT BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
VREF1 LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
Fuse LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
bus 2 Voltage VT 152 VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VREF2 VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
252 VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
lineVoltage/1/2/3 PHDIFFME
Fuse Vbus
VA/VB/VC VT
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Line 252
SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
ANSI10000096-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000096 V1 EN-US

Figure 122: Connections of the SESRSYN (25) function block in a double breaker
arrangement

304 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

A double breaker arrangement requires two function blocks, one for breaker
WA1_QA1 and one for breaker WA2_QA1. No voltage selection is necessary, because
the voltage from busbar 1 VT is connected to V3PB1 on SESRSYN for WA1_QA1
and the voltage from busbar 2 VT is connected toV3PB1 on SESRSYN for
WA2_QA1. The voltage from the line VT is connected to V3PL1 on both function
blocks. The condition of VT fuses shall also be connected as shown in figure 121. The
voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel. for both function blocks.

12.1.3.5 Breaker-and-a-half M12330-3 v8

Figure 123 describes a breaker-and-a-half arrangement with three SESRSYN functions

in the same IED, each of them handling voltage selection for WA1_QA1, TIE_QA1
and WA2_QA1 breakers respectively. The voltage from busbar 1 VT is connected to
V3PB1 on all three function blocks and the voltage from busbar 2 VT is connected to
V3PB2 on all three function blocks. The voltage from line1 VT is connected to V3PL1
on all three function blocks and the voltage from line2 VT is connected to V3PL2 on
all three function blocks. The positions of the disconnectors and VT fuses shall be
connected as shown in Figure 123.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 305

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Bus 1 Bus 1 CB
SESRSYN (25)
Bus 2 V3PB1* SYNOK
V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
189 189 V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
152 152 BLKSC TSTAUTSY
Fuse BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
bus1 Voltage VT BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
VREF1 289 289 BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
Fuse LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
bus 2Voltage VT LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
VREF2 LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
152 VL2FF
STARTSYN
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
6189 6289 TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
989 989 MENMODE FRDIFFME
line 1 Voltage Fuse PHDIFFME
VT Vbus
1/2/3 VLine
VA/VB/VC MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Fuse SESRSYN (25)
line 2 Voltage VT V3PB1* SYNOK
VREF3 V3PB2* AUTOSYOK
V3PL1* AUTOENOK
V3PL2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
Line 1 Line 2 BLKENERG TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP TSTENOK
BUS1_CL VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP B1SEL
BUS2_CL B2SEL
LINE1_OP L1SEL
LINE1_CL L2SEL
LINE2_OP SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL SYNFAIL
VB1OK VOKSYN
VB1FF VDIFFSYN
VB2OK FRDIFSYN
VB2FF FRDIFFOK
VL1OK FRDERIVA
VL1FF VOKSC
VL2OK VDIFFSC
VL2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE VDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
Tie CB
ANSI10000097-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000097 V1 EN-US

Figure 123: Connections of the SESRSYN (25) function block in a breaker-and-a-half arrangement with internal
voltage selection

306 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

The connections are similar in all SESRSYN functions, apart from the breaker position
indications. The physical analog connections of voltages and the connection to the IED
and SESRSYN (25) function blocks must be carefully checked in PCM600. In all
SESRSYN functions the connections and configurations must abide by the following
rules: Normally apparatus position is connected with contacts showing both open (b-
type) and closed positions (a-type).

WA1_QA1:

• BUS1_OP/CL = Position of TIE_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• BUS2_OP/CL = Position of WA2_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LINE1_OP/CL = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LINE2_OP/CL = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• VB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• VB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• VL1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• VL2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = 1 1/2 bus CB

TIE_QA1:

• BUS1_OP/CL = Position of WA1_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• BUS2_OP/CL = Position of WA2_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LINE1_OP/CL = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LINE2_OP/CL = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• VB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• VB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• VL1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• VL2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = Tie CB

WA2_QA1:

• BUS1_OP/CL = Position of WA1_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• BUS2_OP/CL = Position of TIE_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LINE1_OP/CL = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LINE2_OP/CL = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• VB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• VB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• VL1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• VL2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = 1 1/2 bus alt. CB

If only two SESRSYN functions are provided in the same IED, the connections and
settings are according to the SESRSYN functions for WA1_QA1 and TIE_QA1.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 307

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

12.1.4 Setting guidelines M12550-3 v14

The setting parameters for the Synchronizing, synchronism check and energizing check
function SESRSYN (25) are set via the local HMI (LHMI) or PCM600.

This setting guidelines describes the settings of the SESRSYN (25) function via the
LHMI.

Common base IED value for primary voltage ( VBase ) is set in a Global base value
function, GBASVAL, found under Main menu//Configuration/Power system/
GlobalBaseValue/GBASVAL_X/VBase. The SESRSYN (25) function has one setting
for the bus reference voltage (GblBaseSelBus) and one setting for the line reference
voltage (GblBaseSelLine) which independently of each other can be set to select one of
the twelve GBASVAL functions used for reference of base values. This means that the
reference voltage of bus and line can be set to different values. The settings for the
SESRSYN (25) function are found under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/Control/
Synchronizing(25,SC/VC)/SESRSYN(25,SC/VC):X has been divided into four
different setting groups: General, Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizingcheck.

General settings
Operation: The operation mode can be set Enabled or Disabled. The setting Disabled
disables the whole function.

GblBaseSelBus and GblBaseSelLine

These configuration settings are used for selecting one of twelve GBASVAL functions,
which then is used as base value reference voltage, for bus and line respectively.

SelPhaseBus1 and SelPhaseBus2

Configuration parameters for selecting the measuring phase of the voltage for busbar 1
and 2 respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral), two-phase (phase-
phase) or a positive sequence voltage.

SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2

Configuration parameters for selecting the measuring phase of the voltage for line 1
and 2 respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral), two-phase (phase-
phase) or a positive sequence voltage.

CBConfig

This configuration setting is used to define type of voltage selection. Type of voltage
selection can be selected as:

308 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

• no voltage selection, No voltage sel.

• single circuit breaker with double bus, Double bus
• breaker-and-a-half arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 1, 1 1/2 bus
CB
• breaker-and-a-half arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 2, 1 1/2 bus
alt. CB
• breaker-and-a-half arrangement with the breaker connected to line 1 and 2, Tie CB

PhaseShift

This setting is used to compensate the phase shift between the measured bus voltage
and line voltage when:
• different phase-neutral voltages are selected (for example UL1 for bus and UL2
for line);
• one available voltage is phase-phase and the other one is phase-neutral (for
example UL1L2 for bus and UL1 for line).

The set value is added to the measured line phase angle. The bus voltage is reference
voltage.

Synchronizing settings
OperationSynch

The setting Off disables the Synchronizing function. With the setting On, the function
is in the service mode and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch

The voltage level settings shall be chosen in relation to the bus/line network voltage.
The threshold voltages VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch have to be set lower than
the value where the network is expected to be synchronized. A typical value is 80% of
the rated voltage.

VDiffSynch

Setting of the voltage difference between the line voltage and the bus voltage. The
difference is set depending on the network configuration and expected voltages in the
two networks running asynchronously. A normal setting is 0.10-0.15 p.u.

FreqDiffMin

The setting FreqDiffMin is the minimum frequency difference where the systems are
defined to be asynchronous. For frequency differences lower than this value, the
systems are considered to be in parallel. A typical value for FreqDiffMin is 10 mHz.
Generally, the value should be low if both synchronizing and synchrocheck functions

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 309

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

are provided, and it is better to let the synchronizing function close, as it will close at
exactly the right instance if the networks run with a frequency difference.

To avoid overlapping of the synchronizing function and the

synchrocheck function the setting FreqDiffMin must be set to a higher
value than used setting FreqDiffM, respective FreqDiffA used for
synchrocheck.

FreqDiffMax

The setting FreqDiffMax is the maximum slip frequency at which synchronizing is

accepted. 1/FreqDiffMax shows the time for the vector to move 360 degrees, one turn
on the synchronoscope, and is called Beat time. A typical value for FreqDiffMax is
200-250 mHz, which gives beat times on 4-5 seconds. Higher values should be avoided
as the two networks normally are regulated to nominal frequency independent of each
other, so the frequency difference shall be small.

FreqRateChange

The maximum allowed rate of change for the frequency.

CloseAngleMax

The setting CloseAngleMax is the maximum closing angle between bus and line at
which synchronizing is accepted. To minimize the moment stress when synchronizing
near a power station, a narrower limit should be used. A typical value is 15 degrees.

tBreaker

The tBreaker shall be set to match the closing time for the circuit breaker and should
also include the possible auxiliary relays in the closing circuit. It is important to check
that no slow logic components are used in the configuration of the IED as there then
can be big variations in closing time due to those components. Typical setting is
80-150 ms depending on the breaker closing time.

tClosePulse

The setting for the duration of the breaker close pulse.

tMaxSynch

The setting tMaxSynch is set to reset the operation of the synchronizing function if the
operation does not take place within this time. The setting must allow for the setting of
FreqDiffMin, which will decide how long it will take maximum to reach phase
equality. At the setting of 10 mHz, the beat time is 100 seconds and the setting would
thus need to be at least tMinSynch plus 100 seconds. If the network frequencies are

310 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

expected to be outside the limits from the start, a margin needs to be added. A typical
setting is 600 seconds.

tMinSynch

The setting tMinSynch is set to limit the minimum time at which the synchronizing
closing attempt is given. The synchronizing function will not give a closing command
within this time, from when the synchronizing is started, even if a synchronizing
condition is fulfilled. A typical setting is 200 ms.

Synchrocheck settings
OperationSC

The OperationSC setting Off disables the synchrocheck function and sets the outputs
AUTOSYOK, MANSYOK, TSTAUTSY and TSTMANSY to low. With the setting
On, the function is in the service mode and the output signal depends on the input
conditions.

VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC

The voltage level settings must be chosen in relation to the bus or line network voltage.
The threshold voltages VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC have to be set lower than the
value at which the breaker is expected to close with the synchronism check. A typical
value can be 80% of the base voltages.

VDiffSC

The setting for voltage difference between line and bus in p.u. This setting in p.u. is
defined as (V-Bus/GblBaseSelBus) - (V-Line/GblBaseSelLine). A normal setting is
0,10-0,15 p.u.

FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA

The frequency difference level settings, FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA, shall be chosen
depending on the condition in the network. At steady conditions a low frequency
difference setting is needed, where the FreqDiffM setting is used. For autoreclosing a
bigger frequency difference setting is preferable, where the FreqDiffA setting is used.
A typical value for FreqDiffM can be10 mHz, and a typical value for FreqDiffA can be
100-200 mHz.

PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA

The phase angle difference level settings, PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA, shall also be
chosen depending on conditions in the network. The phase angle setting must be
chosen to allow closing under maximum load condition. A typical maximum value in
heavy-loaded networks can be 45 degrees, whereas in most networks the maximum
occurring angle is below 25 degrees. The PhaseDiffM setting is a limitation to

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 311

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

PhaseDiffA setting. Fluctuations occurring at high speed autoreclosing limit

PhaseDiffA setting.

tSCM and tSCA

The purpose of the timer delay settings, tSCM and tSCA, is to ensure that the
synchrocheck conditions remains constant and that the situation is not due to a
temporary interference. Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the
delay timer is reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled
again. Circuit breaker closing is thus not permitted until the synchrocheck situation has
remained constant throughout the set delay setting time. Manual closing is normally
under more stable conditions and a longer operation time delay setting is needed,
where the tSCM setting is used. During auto-reclosing, a shorter operation time delay
setting is preferable, where the tSCA setting is used. A typical value for tSCM can be 1
second and a typical value for tSCA can be 0.1 seconds.

Energizingcheck settings
AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit
breaker. The settings for each of them are:

• Disabled, the energizing function is disabled.

• DLLB, Dead Line Live Bus, the line voltage is below set value of
VDeadLineEnerg and the bus voltage is above set value of VLIveBusEnerg.
• DBLL, Dead Bus Live Line, the bus voltage is below set value of VDeadBusEnerg
and the line voltage is above set value of VLiveLineEnerg.
• Both, energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL.

ManEnergDBDL

If the parameter is set to Enabled, manual closing is also enabled when both line
voltage and bus voltage are below VDeadLineEnerg and VDeadBusEnerg respectively,
and ManEnerg is set to DLLB, DBLL or Both.

VLiveBusEnerg and VLiveLineEnerg

The voltage level settings must be chosen in relation to the bus or line network voltage.
The threshold voltages VLiveBusEnerg and VLiveLineEnerg have to be set lower than
the value at which the network is considered to be energized. A typical value can be
80% of the base voltages.

VDeadBusEnerg and VDeadLineEnerg

312 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

The threshold voltages VDeadBusEnerg and VDeadLineEnerg, have to be set to a

value greater than the value where the network is considered not to be energized. A
typical value can be 40% of the base voltages.

A disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for

instance, induction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via
the extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be
as high as 30% or more of the base line voltage.

Because the setting ranges of the threshold voltages VLiveBusEnerg/VLiveLineEnerg

and VDeadBusEnerg/VDeadLineEnerg partly overlap each other, the setting conditions
may be such that the setting of the non-energized threshold value is higher than that of
the energized threshold value. The parameters must therefore be set carefully to avoid
overlapping.

VMaxEnerg

This setting is used to block the closing when the voltage on the live side is above the
set value of VMaxEnerg.

tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg

The purpose of the timer delay settings, tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg, is to ensure that
the dead side remains de-energized and that the condition is not due to a temporary
interference. Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the delay timer is
reset and the procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit
breaker closing is thus not permitted until the energizing condition has remained
constant throughout the set delay setting time.

12.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase

operation SMBRREC (79) IP14559-1 v6

12.2.1 Identification
M14890-1 v7

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 SMBRREC 79
phase
5(0 -->1)
IEC15000204 V1 EN-US

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 313

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

12.2.2 Application M12391-3 v8

In certain countries it is standard practice to provide delayed restoration after busbar

protection operation for internal fault, reason being that many busbar faults are of the
transient natures that is, animals, birds, storm, flying objects, etc. In such applications,
typically one pre-selected feeder is automatically closed with certain time delay in
order to try to re-energize the faulty bus. Typically, the longest overhead line is
selected in order to limit the fault current in case of permanent busbar fault. If the first
feeder is successfully closed, all other feeder which have been connected to the same
busbar, are automatically put back into service.

Sensitive differential protection level available in REB670 can be used during such
operation, if increased sensitivity from busbar protection is required. Such busbar
restoration logic can be implemented by using optionally available auto reclosers and
built-in logical gates. Two auto reclosers are available.

Automatic reclosing is a well-established method for the restoration of service in a

power system after a transient line fault. The majority of line faults are flashovers,
which are transient by nature. When the power line is switched off by the operation of
line protection and line breakers, the arc de-ionizes and recovers its ability to withstand
voltage at a somewhat variable rate. Thus, a certain dead time with a de-energized line
is necessary. Line service can then be resumed by automatic reclosing of the line
breakers. The dead time selected should be long enough to ensure a high probability of
arc de-ionization and successful reclosing.

For individual line breakers, auto reclosing equipment, the required circuit breaker
dead time is used to determine the “dead time” setting value. When simultaneous
tripping and reclosing at the two line ends occurs, line dead time is approximately
equal to the auto recloser “dead time”. If the auto reclosing dead time and line “dead
time” differ then, the line will be energized until the breakers at both ends have opened.

314 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

Instant of fault

Operates
Operates
Line

Resets

Resets
Fault
protection

Operate
Operate time
time

Closed
Circuit
breaker

Open

Break time Closing time Break time

Contacts separated

Contact closed
Close command
Are extinguishers
Trip command

Fault duration AR open time for breaker Fault duration

Set AR open time Reset time

Auto-reclosing

Reclosing
command
function
Initiate

AR reset
AR

en04000146_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000146 V1 EN-US

Figure 124: Single-shot automatic reclosing at a permanent fault

Single-pole tripping and single-phase automatic reclosing is a way of limiting the

effect of a single-phase line fault on power system operation. Especially at higher
voltage levels, the majority of faults are of single-phase type (around 90%). To
maintain system stability in power systems with limited meshing or parallel routing
single-phase auto reclosing is of particular value. During the single-phase dead time
the system is still capable of transmitting load on the two healthy phases and the
system is still synchronized. It requires that each circuit breaker pole can be operated
individually, which is usually the case for higher transmission voltages.

A somewhat longer dead time may be required for single-phase reclosing compared to
high-speed three-phase reclosing. This is due to the influence on the fault arc from the
voltage and the current in the non-faulted phases.

To maximize the availability of the power system it is possible to choose single-phase

tripping and automatic reclosing during single-phase faults and three-phase tripping
and automatic reclosing during multi-phase faults. Three-phase automatic reclosing can
be performed with or without the use of synchrocheck.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 315

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

During the single-phase dead time there is an equivalent "series"-fault in the system
resulting in a flow of zero sequence current. It is therefore necessary to coordinate the
residual current protections (ground fault protection) with the single-phase tripping and
the auto reclosing function. Attention shall also be paid to “pole discrepancy” that
arises when circuit breakers are provided with single-phase operating devices. These
breakers need pole discrepancy protection. They must also be coordinated with the
single-phase auto recloser and blocked during the dead time when a normal
discrepancy occurs. Alternatively, they should use a trip time longer than the set single-
phase dead time.

For the individual line breakers and auto reclosing equipment, the auto reclosing dead
time expression is used. This is the dead time setting for the auto recloser. During
simultaneous tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, auto reclosing dead time is
approximately equal to the line dead time. Otherwise these two times may differ as one
line end might have a slower trip than the other end which means that the line will not
be dead until both ends have opened.

If the fault is permanent, the line protection will trip again when reclosing is attempted
in order to clear the fault.

It is common to use one automatic reclosing function per line circuit breaker (CB).
When one CB per line end is used, then there is one auto- recloser per line end. If auto
reclosers are included in duplicated line protection, which means two auto reclosers per
CB, one should take measures to avoid uncoordinated reclosing commands. In breaker-
and-a-half, double-breaker and ring bus arrangements, two CBs per line end are
operated. One auto recloser per CB is recommended. Arranged in such a way, that
sequential reclosing of the two CBs can be arranged with a priority circuit available in
the auto recloser. In case of a permanent fault and unsuccessful reclosing of the first
CB, reclosing of the second CB is cancelled and thus the stress on the power system is
limited.

The auto recloser can be selected to perform single-phase and/or three-phase automatic
reclosing from several single-shot to multiple-shot reclosing programs. The three-phase
auto reclosing dead time can be set to give either High-Speed Automatic Reclosing
(HSAR) or Delayed Automatic Reclosing (DAR). These expressions, HSAR and DAR,
are mostly used for three-phase auto reclosing as single-phase auto reclosing is always
high speed to avoid maintaining the unsymmetrical condition. HSAR usually means a
dead time of less than 1 second.

In power transmission systems it is common practice to apply single- and/or three-

phase, single-shot auto reclosing. In sub-transmission and distribution systems tripping
and auto reclosing are usually three-phase. The mode of automatic reclosing varies
however. Single-shot and multi-shot are in use. The first shot can have a short delay,
HSAR, or a longer delay, DAR. The second and following reclosing shots have a rather
long delay. When multiple shots are used the dead time must harmonize with the
breaker duty-cycle capacity.

316 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

Automatic reclosing is usually started by the line protection and in particular by

instantaneous tripping of such protection. The auto recloser can be inhibited (blocked)
when certain protection functions detecting permanent faults, such as shunt reactor,
cable or busbar protection are in operation. Back-up protection zones indicating faults
outside the own line are typically connected to inhibit the auto recloser.

Automatic reclosing should not be attempted when closing a CB and energizing a line
onto a fault (SOTF), except when multiple-shots are used where shots 2 etc. will be
started at SOTF. Likewise a CB in a multi-breaker busbar arrangement which was not
closed when a fault occurred should not be closed by operation of the auto recloser.
Auto reclosing is often combined with a release condition from synchronism check and
dead line or dead busbar check. In order to limit the stress on turbo generator sets from
auto reclosing onto a permanent fault, one can arrange to combine auto reclosing with
a synchronism check on line terminals close to such power stations and attempt
energizing from the side furthest away from the power station and perform the
synchronism check at the local end if the energizing was successful.

Transmission protection systems are usually sub-divided and provided with two
redundant protection IEDs. In such systems it is common to provide auto reclosing in
only one of the sub-systems as the requirement is for fault clearance and a failure to
reclose because of the auto recloser being out of service is not considered a major
disturbance. If two auto reclosers are provided on the same breaker, the application
must be carefully checked and normally one must be the master and be connected to
inhibit the other auto recloser if it has started. This inhibit can, for example, be done
from an auto recloser for 3-phase operation in progress signal.

When Single and/or three phase auto reclosing is considered, there are a number of
cases where the tripping shall be three phase anyway. For example:

• Evolving fault where the fault during the dead-time spreads to another phase. The
other two phases must then be tripped and a three phase dead-time and auto
reclose initiated
• Permanent fault
• Fault during three-phase dead time
• Auto recloser out of service or circuit breaker not ready for an auto reclosing cycle

“Prepare three-pole tripping” is then used to switch the tripping to three-pole. This
signal is generated by the auto-recloser and connected to the trip function block and
also connected outside the IED through IO when a common auto-recloser is provided
for two sub-systems. An alternative signal “Prepare 1 Pole tripping” is also provided
and can be used as an alternative when the autorecloser is shared with another
subsystem. This provides a fail safe connection so that even a failure in the IED with
the auto-recloser will mean that the other sub-system will start a three-pole trip.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 317

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

A permanent fault will cause the line protection to trip again when it recloses in an
attempt to energize the line.

The auto reclosing function allows a number of parameters to be adjusted.

Examples:

• number of auto reclosing shots

• auto reclosing program
• auto reclosing dead times for each shot

12.2.2.1 Auto reclosing operation Off and On M12391-91 v6

Operation of the automatic recloser can be set to Off and On by a setting parameter or
by external control. The setting parameter Operation = Disabled, or Enabled sets the
function to Off or On. With the settings Operation = Enabled and ExternalCtrl =
Enabled , the control is made by input signal pulses to the inputs On and Off, for
example, from a control system or by a control switch.

When the auto recloser is set On, the SETON output is set, and the auto recloser
becomes operative if other conditions such as circuit breaker is closed and circuit
breaker is ready are also fulfilled, the READY output is activated (high). Then the auto
recloser is ready to accept a start.

12.2.2.2 Initiate auto reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle M12391-94 v5

The usual way to start an auto reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it at selective
tripping by line protection by applying a signal to the RI input. Starting signals can be
either, general trip signals or, only the conditions for differential, distance protection
zone 1 and distance protection aided trip. In some cases also directional ground fault
protection aided trip can be connected to start an auto reclose attempt. If general trip is
used to start the auto recloser it is important to block it from other functions that should
not start an auto reclosing sequence.

In cases where one wants to differentiate three-phase auto reclosing dead time, for
different power system configuration or at tripping by different protection stages, one
can also use the RI_HS input (initiate high-speed reclosing). When initiating RI_HS,
the auto reclosing dead time for three-phase shot 1, t1 3PhHS is used and the closing is
done without checking the synchrocheck condition.

A number of conditions need to be fulfilled for the start to be accepted and a new auto
reclosing cycle to be started. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are:

318 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

• CBREADY, circuit breaker ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged
operating gear.
• CBCLOSED to ensure that the circuit breaker was closed when the line fault
occurred and start was applied.
• No signal at INHIBIT input that is, no blocking or inhibit signal present. After the
start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal “start” is set. It can be
interrupted by certain events, like an “inhibit” signal.

12.2.2.3 Initiate auto reclosing from circuit breaker open information M12391-100 v6

If a user wants to initiate auto reclosing from the circuit breaker open position instead
of from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode
is selected with the setting parameter StartByCBOpen=Enabled. Typically a circuit
breaker auxiliary contact of type NO (normally open) is connected to CBCLOSED and
RI. When the signal changes from circuit breaker closed to circuit breaker open an auto
reclosing start pulse is generated and latched in the function, subject to the usual
checks. The auto reclosing sequence continues then as usual. Signals from manual
tripping and other functions, which shall prevent auto reclosing, need to be connected
to the INHIBIT input.

12.2.2.4 Blocking of the auto recloser M12391-103 v4

Auto reclose attempts are expected to take place only for faults on the own line. The
auto recloser must be blocked by activating the INHIBIT input for the following
conditions:

• Tripping from delayed distance protection zones

• Tripping from back-up protection functions
• Tripping from breaker failure function
• Intertrip received from remote end circuit breaker failure function
• Busbar protection tripping

Depending of the starting principle (general trip or only instantaneous trip) adopted
above the delayed and back-up zones might not be required. Breaker failure trip local
and remote must however always be connected.

12.2.2.5 Control of the auto reclosing dead time for shot 1 M12391-113 v5

Up to four different time settings can be used for the first shot, and one extension time.
There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase auto reclosing dead time,
t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied, and an auto reclosing
program with single-phase auto reclosing is selected, the auto reclosing dead time t1
1Ph will be used. If one of the TR2P or TR3P inputs is activated in connection with the

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 319

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

start, the auto reclosing dead time for two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing is used.
There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto reclosing
without synchrocheck, t1 3PhHS, available for use when required. It is activated by the
RI_HS input.

A time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the dead time delay for the first
shot. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line
protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault
clearance at the two line ends, where a longer auto reclosing dead time can be useful.
This time extension is controlled by the setting Extended t1 = On and the PLCLOST
input. If this functionality is used the auto recloser start must also be allowed from
distance protection zone 2 time delayed trip. Time extension delay is not possible to
add to the three-phase high-speed auto reclosing dead time, t1 3PhHS.

12.2.2.6 Long trip signal M12391-117 v4

In normal circumstances the auto recloser is started with a protection trip command
which resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can set a maximum start pulse
duration tLongStartInh. This start pulse duration time is controlled by setting
LongStartInhib.

When start pulse duration signal is longer than set maximum start pulse duration, the
auto reclosing sequence interrupts in the same way as for a signal to the INHIBIT input.

12.2.2.7 Maximum number of reclosing shots M12391-120 v7

The maximum number of auto reclosing shots in an auto reclosing cycle is selected by
the setting NoOfShots. A maximum of five shots can be done. The type of auto
reclosing used at the first auto reclosing shot is set by the setting ARMode. The first
alternative is three-phase auto reclosing. The other alternatives include some single-
phase or two-phase auto reclosing. Usually there is no two-pole tripping arranged, and
then there will be no two-phase auto reclosing.

The decision for single- and three-phase trip is also made in the tripping logic
(SMPTTRC) function block where the setting 3 phase, 1ph/3Ph (or 1ph/2ph/3Ph) is
selected.

12.2.2.8 ARMode = 3ph, (normal setting for a three-phase shot) M12391-124 v5

Three-phase auto reclosing, one to five shots according to the NoOfShots setting. The
prepare three-pole trip PREP3P output is always set (high). A trip operation is made as
a three-pole trip for all type of faults. The auto reclosing is as a three-phase auto
reclosing as in mode 1/2/3ph described below. All signals, blockings, inhibits, timers,
requirements and so on, are the same as in the example described below.

320 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.2.2.9 ARMode = 1/2/3ph M12391-127 v8

Single-phase, two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing first shot, followed by 3-phase

auto reclosing shots, if selected. Here, the auto recloser is assumed to be "On" and
"Ready". The circuit breaker is closed and the operation gear ready (operating energy
stored). START input (or STARTHS) is received and sealed-in. The READY output is
reset (set to false). ACTIVE output is set.

• If TR2P and TR3P inputs are low (i.e. single-phase trip): The timer for single-
phase auto reclosing dead time is started and the 1PT1 output (single-phase
reclosing in progress) is activated. It can be used to suppress pole disagreement
and earth-fault protection trip during the single-phase dead time interval..
• If TR2P input is high and TR3P input is low (i.e. two-phase trip): The timer for
two-phase auto reclosing dead time is started and the 2PT1 output (two-phase
reclosing in progress) is activated.
• If TR3P input is high (i.e. three-phase trip): The timer for three-phase auto
reclosing dead time, t1 3Ph or t1 3PhHS, is started depending on if START or
STARTHS input has been activated and 3PT1 output (three-phase reclosing shot 1
in progress) is set..

While any of the auto reclosing dead time timers are running, the INPROGR output is
activated. When the dead time runs out, the respective internal signal is transmitted to
the output module for further checks and to issue a breaker closing command.

When a circuit breaker closing command is issued, the prepare three-pole output trip is
set. When issuing a circuit breaker closing command the tReclaim timer is started. If no
tripping takes place during that time, the auto recloser resets to the “Ready” state and
the ACTIVE output resets. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-phase trip will be
initiated and three-phase reclosing can follow, if selected.

12.2.2.10 ARMode = 1/2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot M12391-136 v5

At single-pole or two-pole tripping, the operation is as in the example described above,

program mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-pole trip will be issued
and three-pole auto reclosing can follow, if selected. In the event of a three-pole trip,
TR3P input high, the auto recloser will be inhibited and no auto reclosing takes place.

12.2.2.11 ARMode = 1ph+1*2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot M12391-139 v5

At single-pole tripping, the operation is as in the above described example, program

mode 1/2/3ph. The single-pole auto reclosing attempt can be followed by three-pole
reclosing, if selected. At two-pole trip, a failure of a two-pole auto reclosing attempt
will inhibit the auto recloser. No more shots are attempted. If the first trip is a three-
pole trip, the auto-reclosing will be inhibited. No more shots are attempted. The

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 321

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

expression “1*2ph” should be understood as “Only one shot at two-phase auto

reclosing”.

12.2.2.12 ARMode = 1/2ph + 1*3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the

first shot GUID-9C2FB801-F324-465E-8FD2-715A9C3D0BD8 v2

At single-pole or two-pole tripping, the operation is as in the example described above,

program mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-pole trip will be issued
and three-pole reclosing will follow, if selected. At three-pole trip, a failure of a three-
pole auto reclosing attempt will inhibit the auto recloser. No more shots are attempted.
The expression “1*3ph” should be understood as “Only one shot at three-pole auto
reclosing”.

12.2.2.13 ARMode = 1ph + 1*2/3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the

first shot M12391-146 v5

At single-pole or two-pole tripping, the operation is as in the above described example,

program mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-pole trip will be issued
and three-pole reclosing will follow, if selected. At two-pole or three-pole trip a failure
of a two-pole or three-pole auto reclosing attempt will inhibit the auto recloser. No
more shots are attempted. The expression “1*2/3ph” should be understood as “Only
one shot at two-pole or three-pole auto reclosing”.
Table 38: Type of reclosing shots at different settings of ARMode or integer inputs to MODEINT
MODEINT (integer) ARMode Type of fault 1st shot 2nd-5th shot
1ph 3ph 3ph
1 3ph 2ph 3ph 3ph
3ph 3ph 3ph
1ph 1ph 3ph
2 1/2/3ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph 3ph
1ph 1ph 3ph
3 1/2ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph ..... .....
1ph 1ph 3ph
4 1ph + 1*2ph 2ph 2ph .....
3ph ..... .....
1ph 1ph 3ph
5 1/2ph + 1*3ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph .....
Table continues on next page

322 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

MODEINT (integer) ARMode Type of fault 1st shot 2nd-5th shot

1ph 1ph 3ph
6 1ph + 1*2/3ph 2ph 2ph .....
3ph 3ph .....

A start of a new auto reclosing cycle during the set “reset time” is blocked when the set
number of reclosing shots have been reached.

12.2.2.14 External selection of auto reclosing mode M12391-241 v5

The auto reclosing mode can be selected by use of available logic function blocks.
Below is an example where the choice of mode, ARMode=3ph or ARMode=1/2/3ph, is
done from a hardware function key at the front of the IED, but alternatively there can
for example, be a physical selector switch on the front of the panel which is connected
to a binary to integer function block (BTIGAPC).

The connection example for selection of the auto reclosing mode is shown in Figure
125.

SLGGIO

PSTO
INTONE
SMBRREC (79)
NAME1 SWPOSN MODEINT
3
1/3 NAME2

ANSI09000168_1_en.vsd
ANSI09000168 V1 EN-US

Figure 125: Selection of the auto-reclose mode from a hardware functional key in
front of the IED

12.2.2.15 Auto reclosing reset timer M12391-202 v4

The tReset timer defines the time it takes from issue of the breaker closing command,
until the auto recloser resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a
continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the circuit breaker
closing command is given.

12.2.2.16 Pulsing of the circuit breaker closing command and counter M12391-205 v4

The circuit breaker closing command, CLOSECB is given as a pulse with a duration set
by the tPulse setting. For circuit breakers without an anti-pumping function, close
pulse cutting can be used. It is selected by the CutPulse setting. In case of a new start

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 323

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

pulse (trip), the breaker closing command pulse is then cut (interrupted). The minimum
breaker closing command pulse length is always 50ms. At the issue of the breaker
closing command, the appropriate auto recloser operation counter is incremented.
There is a counter for each type of auto reclosing command and one for the total
number of auto reclosing commands.

12.2.2.17 Transient fault M12391-208 v4

After the breaker closing command the reclaim timer keeps running for the set
tReclaim time. If no start (trip) occurs within this time, the auto recloser will reset. The
circuit breaker remains closed and the operating gear recharges. The CBCLOSED and
CBREADY input signals will be set.

12.2.2.18 Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal M12391-211 v5

If a new start occurs, and the number of auto reclosing shots is set to 1, and a new
START or TRSOTF input signal appears, after the circuit breaker closing command, the
UNSUCCL output (unsuccessful reclosing) is set high. The timer for the first shot can
no longer be started. Depending on the set number of auto reclosing shots further shots
may be made or the auto reclosing sequence is ended. After reclaim timer time-out the
auto recloser resets, but the circuit breaker remains open. The circuit breaker closed
information through the CBCLOSED input is missing. Thus, the auto recloser is not
ready for a new auto reclosing cycle. Normally, the UNSUCCL output appears when a
new start is received after the last auto reclosing shot has been made and the auto
recloser is inhibited. The output signal resets after reclaim time. The “unsuccessful”
signal can also be made to depend on the circuit breaker position input. The
UnsucClByCBChk setting should then be set to CBCheck, and the tUnsucCl timer
should be set too. If the circuit breaker does not respond to the breaker closing
command and does not close, but remains open, the UNSUCCL output is set high after
the set tUnsucCl time. The UNSUCCL output can for example, be used in multi-
breaker arrangement to cancel the auto reclosing for the second circuit breaker, if the
first circuit breaker closed onto a persistent fault. It can also be used to generate a lock-
out of manual circuit breaker closing until the operator has reset the lock-out, see
separate section.

12.2.2.19 Lock-out initiation M12391-214 v8

In many cases there is a requirement that a lock-out is generated when the auto
reclosing attempt fails. This is done with logic connected to the in- and outputs of the
auto recloser and connected to binary I/O as required. Many alternative ways of
performing the logic exist depending on whether manual circuit breaker closing is
interlocked in the IED, whether an external physical lock-out relay exists and whether
the reset is hardwired, or carried out by means of communication. There are also

324 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

different alternatives regarding what shall generate lock-out. Examples of questions

are:

• shall back-up time delayed trip give lock-out (normally yes)

• shall lock-out be generated when closing onto a fault (mostly)
• shall lock-out be generated when the auto recloser is Off at the fault or for
example, in single-phase auto recloser mode and the fault was multi-phase
(normally not as no closing attempt has been given)
• shall lock-out be generated if the circuit breaker did not have sufficient operating
power for an auto reclosing sequence (normally not as no auto closing attempt has
been given)

In Figures 126 and 127 the logic shows how a closing lock-out logic can be designed
with the lock-out relay as an external relay alternatively with the lock-out created
internally with the manual closing going through the synchrocheck function. An
example of lock-out logic.
SMBRREC (79)
BJ-TRIP
ZCVPSOF-TRIP OR INHIBIT

UNSUCCL

SMBO
OR ELECTRICAL RESET
RELAY
Lock-out
CCRBRF (50BF) RXMD1
11
TRBU SET 21
12
RESET

MAIN ZAK CLOSE CLOSE COMMAND

ANSI05000315_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000315 V2 EN-US

Figure 126: Lock-out arranged with an external lock-out relay

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 325

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

SMBRREC (79)
BJ-TRIP
ZCVPSOF-TRIP OR INHIBIT

UNSUCCL
SMPPTRC (94)

OR SETLKOUT

CLLOUT
CCRBRF (50BF) SOFTWARE RESET LOCK-OUT RSTLOUT
OR IO RESET
BJTRIP

MAN CLOSE SMBO

OR AND
SMBRREC (79) CLOSE

SESRSYN (25)

AUTO STOP
CLOSE COMMAND
OR
MAN ENOK

ANSI05000316_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000316 V2 EN-US

Figure 127: Lock-out arranged with internal logic with manual closing going through
in IED

12.2.2.20 Evolving fault M12391-217 v4

An evolving fault starts as a single-phase fault which leads to single-pole tripping and
then the fault spreads to another phase. The second fault is then cleared by three-pole
tripping.

The auto recloser will first receive a start signal (START) without any three-phase
signal (TR3P). The auto recloser will start a single-phase auto reclosing sequence, if
programmed to do so. At the evolving fault clearance there will be a new START signal
and three-phase trip information, TR3P. The single-phase auto reclosing sequence will
then be stopped, and instead the timer, t1 3Ph, for three-pole auto reclosing will be
started from zero. The sequence will continue as a three-pole auto reclosing sequence,
if it is a selected alternative reclosing mode. The second fault which can be single-
phase is tripped three-pole because the trip function (SMPPTRC) in the IED has an
evolving fault timer which ensures that second fault is always tripped three-pole. For
other types of relays where the relays do not include this function, the PREP3PH
output (or the inverted PERMIT1PH output) is used to prepare the other sub-system for
three-phase tripping. This signal will, for evolving fault situations, be activated a short
time after the first trip has reset and will thus ensure that new starts (trips) will be three
phase.

12.2.2.21 Automatic continuation of the auto reclosing sequence M12391-223 v5

The auto recloser can be programmed to proceed to the next auto reclosing shots (if
multiple shots are selected) even if start signals are not received from protection

326 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

functions, but the circuit breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting AutoCont =
Enabled and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceed without a
new start.

12.2.2.22 Thermal overload protection holding the auto recloser back M12391-226 v3

If the THOLHOLD input (thermal overload protection holding auto reclosing back) is
activated, it will keep the auto recloser on a hold until it is reset. There may thus be a
considerable delay between start of the auto recloser and the breaker closing command
to the circuit breaker. An external logic limiting the time and sending an inhibit to the
INHIBIT input can be used. The input can also be used to set the auto recloser on hold
for a longer or shorter period.

12.2.3 Setting guidelines IP14929-1 v1

12.2.3.1 Configuration M12399-3 v3

Use the PCM600 configuration tool to configure signals.

Auto recloser function parameters are set via the local HMI or Parameter Setting Tool
(PST). Parameter Setting Tool is a part of PCM600.

Recommendations for input signals M12399-7 v10

Please see Figure 128, Figure 129 and Figure 130 and default factory configuration for
examples.

BLKOFF
Used to unblock the auto recloser when it has been blocked due to activating BLKON
input or by an unsuccessful auto reclosing attempt if the BlockByUnsucCl setting is set
to On.

BLKON
Used to block the auto recloser, for example, when certain special service conditions
arise. When used, blocking must be reset with BLKOFF.

CBCLOSED and CBREADY

These binary inputs should pick-up information from the circuit breaker. At three
operating gears in the circuit breaker (single pole operated circuit breakers) the
connection should be “All poles closed” (series connection of the NO contacts) or “At
least one pole open” (parallel connection of NC contacts). The CBREADY is a signal
meaning that the circuit breaker is ready for an auto reclosing operation, either Close-
Open (CO), or Open-Close-Open (OCO). If the available signal is of type “circuit

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 327

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

breaker not charged” or “not ready”, an inverter can be inserted in front of the
CBREADY input.

INHIBIT
To this input shall be connected signals that interrupt an auto reclosing cycle or prevent
a start from being accepted. Such signals can come from protection for a line
connected shunt reactor, from transfer trip receive, from back-up protection functions,
busbar protection trip or from breaker failure protection. When the circuit breaker open
position is set to start the auto recloser, then manual opening must also be connected
here. The inhibit is often a combination of signals from external IEDs via the I/O and
internal functions. An OR-gate is then used for the combination.

MODEINT
The auto reclosing mode is selected with the ARMode setting. As an alternative to the
setting, the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for example from function
block B16I, to the MODEINT input. The six possible modes are described in table 6
with their corresponding MODEINT integer value. When a valid integer is connected
to the input MODEINT the selected ARMode setting will be invalid and the MODEINT
input value will be used instead. The selected mode is reported as an integer on the
MODE output.

ON and OFF
These inputs can be connected to binary inputs or to a communication interface block
for external control.

PLCLOST
This is intended for line protection permissive signal channel lost (fail) for example,
PLC= Power Line Carrier failure. It can be connected, when it is required to prolong
the auto reclosing dead time when communication is not working, that is, one line end
might trip with a zone2 delay. If this is used the auto recloser must also be started from
zone2 time delayed trip.

RESET
Used to reset the auto recloser to start conditions. Possible hold by thermal overload
protection will be reset. Circuit breaker position will be checked and time settings will
be restarted with their set times.

RSTCOUNT
There is a counter for each type of auto reclosing and one for the total number of
circuit breaker close commands issued. All counters are reset with the RSTCOUNT
input or by an IEC 61850 command.

328 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

SKIPHS
The high-speed auto reclosing sequence can be skipped and be replaced by normal auto
reclosing sequence by activating SKIPHS input before the STARTHS high-speed start
input is activated. The replacement is done for the 1st shot.

RI
The START input should be connected to the trip function (SMPPTRC) output, which
starts the auto recloser for 1/2/3-phase operation. It can also be connected to a binary
input for start from an external contact. A logical OR-gate can be used to combine the
number of start sources.

If StartByCBOpen is used, the circuit breaker open condition shall also

be connected to the RI input.

RI_HS, Initiate high-speed auto reclosing

It may be used when one wants to use two different dead times in different protection
trip operations. This input starts the dead time t1 3PhHS. High-speed reclosing shot 1
started by this input is without a synchronization check.

SYNC
This input is connected to the internal synchronism check function when required or to
an external device for synchronism. If neither internal nor external synchronism or
energizing check is required, it can be connected to a permanently high source, TRUE.
The signal is required for three-phase shots 1-5 to proceed (Note! Not the high-speed
step).

THOLHOLD
Signal “Thermal overload protection holding back auto reclosing”. It can be connected
to a thermal overload protection trip signal which resets only when the thermal content
has fallen to an acceptable level, for example, 70%. As long as the signal is high,
indicating that the line is hot, the auto reclosing is held back. When the signal resets, a
reclosing cycle will continue. Observe that this have a considerable delay. Input can
also be used for other purposes if for some reason the auto reclosing shot needs to be
halted.

TR2P and TR3P

They are usually connected to the corresponding output of the trip function block. They
control the choice of dead time and the auto reclosing cycle according to the selected
program. Signal TR2P needs to be connected only if the trip function block has been
selected to give 1/2/3 pole trip and an auto reclosing cycle with two phase reclosing is
foreseen.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 329

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

TRSOTF
This is the signal “Trip by Switch Onto Fault”. It is usually connected to the “switch
onto fault” output of line protection if multi-shot auto reclosing attempts are used. The
input will start the shots two to five.

WAIT
Used to hold back reclosing of the “low priority unit” during sequential auto reclosing.
See “Recommendation for multi-breaker arrangement” below. The signal is activated
from output WFMASTER on the second breaker auto recloser in multi-breaker
arrangements.

ZONESTEP
The ZONESTEP input is used when coordination between local auto reclosers and
down stream auto reclosers is needed. When this input is activated the auto recloser
increases its actual shot number by one and enters “reclaim time” status. If a start is
received during this reclaim time the auto recloser is proceeding as usual but with the
dead time for the increased shot number. Every new increase of the shot number needs
a new activation of the ZONESTEP input. This functionality is controlled by the setting
ZoneSeqCoord.

Recommendations for output signals M12399-46 v9

Please see Figure 128, Figure 129 and Figure 130 and default factory configuration for
examples.

1PT1 and 2PT1

Indicates that single-pole or two-pole auto reclosing is in progress. It is used to
temporarily block an ground-fault and/or pole disagreement function during the single-
pole or two-pole open interval.

3PT1, 3PT2, 3PT3, 3PT4 and 3PT5

Indicates that three-pole auto reclosing shots one to five are in progress. The signals
can be used as an indication of progress or for own logic.

ABORTED
The ABORTED output indicates that the auto recloser is inhibited while it is in one of
the following internal states:
• inProgress: auto recloser is started and dead time is in progress
• reclaimTimeStarted: the circuit breaker closing command has started the reclaim
timer
• wait: an auto recloser, acting as slave, is waiting for a release from the master to
proceed with its own reclosing sequence

330 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

ACTIVE
Indicates that the auto recloser is active, from start until end of reset time.

BLOCKED
Indicates that auto recloser is temporarily or permanently blocked.

CLOSECMD
Connect to a binary output for circuit breaker closing command.

COUNT1P, COUNT2P, COUNT3P1, COUNT3P2, COUNT3P3,

COUNT3P4 and COUNT3P5
Indicates the number of auto reclosing shots made for respective shot.

COUNTAR
Indicates the total number of auto reclosing shots made.

INHIBOUT
If the INHIBIT input is activated it is reported on the INHIBOUT output.

INPROGR
Indicates that an auto recloser sequence is in progress, from start until circuit breaker
close command.

MODE
When a valid integer is connected to the MODEINT input, the selected ARMode setting
will be invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The selected mode
is reported as an integer on the MODE output. The six possible modes are described in
Table 38 with their corresponding MODEINT integer value.

PERMIT1P
Permit single-pole trip is the inverse of PREP3P. It can be connected to a binary output
relay for connection to external protection or trip relays. In case of a total loss of
auxiliary power, the output relay drops and does not allow single-pole trip.

PREP3P
Prepare three-pole trip is usually connected to the trip block to force a coming trip to
be a three-pole one. If the auto recloser cannot make a single-pole or two-pole auto
reclosing, the tripping should be three-pole.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 331

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

READY
Indicates that the auto recloser is ready for a new and complete auto reclosing
sequence. It can be connected to the zone extension if a line protection should have
extended zone reach before auto reclosing.

SETON
Indicates that auto recloser is switched on and operative.

SUCCL
If the circuit breaker closing command is given and the circuit breaker is closed within
the set time interval tUnsucCl, the SUCCL output is activated after the set time interval
tSuccessful.

SYNCFAIL
The SYNCFAIL output indicates that the auto recloser is inhibited because the
synchrocheck or energizing check condition has not been fulfilled within the set time
interval, tSync. Also ABORTED output will be activated.

UNSUCCL
Indicates unsuccessful reclosing.

WFMASTER
Wait from master is used in high priority units to hold back auto reclosing of the low
priority unit during sequential auto reclosing. Refer to the recommendation for multi-
breaker arrangements in Figure 130.

Connection and setting examples

Figure 128 is showing an example of how to connect the auto recloser when used for
three-pole auto reclosing and Figure 129 is showing an example of how to connect the
auto recloser when used for single-pole, two-pole or three-pole auto reclosing.

332 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

IOM IOM
INPUT SMBRREC (79) OUTPUT
xx ON BLOCKED xx
xx OFF SETON xx
xx BLKON INPROGR xx
xx BLKOFF ACTIVE xx
xx INHIBIT UNSUCCL xx
xx SUCCL xx
xx CBREADY xx
xx 52a xx
xx PLCLOST CLOSECMD xx
xx xx
RESET PERMIT1P
PREP3P
PROTECTION READY
xxxx-TRIP OR RI
RI_HS 1PT1
SKIPHS 2PT1
ZCVPSOF-TRIP 3PT1
ZMQPDIS (21)--TRIP OR TRSOTF 3PT2
3PT3
THOLHOLD
3PT4
TR2P
TRUE 3PT5
TR3P
SESRSYN (25)-AUTOOK
SYNC
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER

ANSI04000135-3-en.vsd
ANSI04000135 V3 EN-US

Figure 128: Example of I/O-signal connections at a three-phase auto reclosing

sequence

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 333

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

IOM IOM
INPUT SMBRREC (79) OUTPUT
xx ON BLOCKED xx
xx OFF SETON xx
xx BLKON INPROGR xx
xx BLKOFF ACTIVE xx
xx INHIBIT UNSUCCL xx
xx SUCCL xx
xx CBREADY xx
xx 52a xx
xx PLCLOST CLOSECB xx
xx PERMIT1P xx
RESET
PREP3P TRIP-P3PTR
PROTECTION RI READY
xxxx-TRIP OR 1PT1 GROUND RELAYS
OR BLOCK
2PT1

RI_HS 3PT1
3PT2
SKIPHS
ZCVPSOF-TRIP 3PT3
TRSOTF 3PT4
ZMQPDIS (21)-TRIP OR
3PT5
THOLHOLD
TRIP-TR2P
TR2P
TRIP-TR3P TR3P
SESRSYN (25)-AUTOOK SYNC
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER

ANSI04000136-3-en.vsd
ANSI04000136 V3 EN-US

Figure 129: Example of I/O-signal connections for a single-phase, two-phase or

three-phase auto reclosing sequence

Setting recommendations for multi-breaker arrangements M12399-87 v6

Sequential reclosing in multi-breaker arrangements, like breaker-and-a-half, double

breaker and ring bus, is achieved by giving the two line breakers different priorities.
Refer to figure 130. In a single breaker arrangement the setting is Priority = None. In a
multi-breaker arrangement the setting for the first circuit breaker, the master, is Priority
= High and for the other circuit breaker Priority = Low.

While the auto reclosing of the master is in progress, it issues the WFMASTER output.
After an unsuccessful reclosing the WFMASTER output is also maintained by the
UNSUCCL signal. When activating the WAIT input, in the auto recloser set as slave,
every dead timer is changed to the value of setting tSlaveDeadTime and holds back the
auto reclosing operation. When the WAIT input is reset at the time of a successful
reclosing of the first circuit breaker, the slave is released to continue the reclosing
sequence after the set tSlaveDeadTime. The reason for shortening the time, for the
normal dead timers with the value of tSlaveDeadTime, is to give the slave permission
to react almost immediately when the WAIT input resets. The mimimum settable time

334 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

for tSlaveDeadTime is 0.1sec because both master and slave should not send the
breaker closing command at the same time. The slave should take the duration of the
breaker closing time of the master into consideration before sending the breaker
closing command. A setting tWaitForMaster sets a maximum wait time for the WAIT
input to reset. If the wait time expires, the reclosing cycle of the slave is inhibited. If
auto reclosing of the first breaker is unsuccessful, the UNSUCCL output connected to
the INHIBIT input of the slave unit interrupts the auto reclosing sequence of the latter.

The signals can be cross-connected to allow simple changing of the

priority by just setting the High and the Low priorities without
changing the configuration. The input 52a for each circuit breaker is
important in multi-breaker arrangements to ensure that the circuit
breaker was closed at the beginning of the cycle. If the High priority
circuit breaker is not closed the High priority moves to the low priority
circuit breaker.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 335

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Terminal ‘‘ Master ”
Priority = High
SMBRREC (79)
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON INPROGR
BLKOFF ACTIVE
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
RESET SUCCL
PLCLOST READY
RI CB1 x
CLOSEMD
RI_HS
PERMIT1P
SKIPHS
PREP3P
THOLHOLD
TRSOTF 1PT1
2PT1
CBREADY 3PT1
52a 3PT2
SYNC 3PT3
3PT4
WAIT 3PT5
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER

Terminal ‘‘ Slave ”
Priority = Low

SMBRREC (79)
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON INPROGR
BLOCKOFF ACTIVE
INHIBIT
UNSUCCL
RESET
SUCCL
PLCLOST READY
RI x
CLOSEMD CB2
RI_HS
SKIPHS PERMIT1P
PREP3P
TRSOTF
THOLHOLD 1PT1
2PT1
CBREADY
3PT1
52a
3PT2
SYNC 3PT3
WAIT 3PT4
3PT5
WFMASTER

*) Other input/output signals as in previous single

breaker arrangements

ANSI04000137-3-en.vsd
ANSI04000137 V3 EN-US

Figure 130: Additional input and output signals at multi-breaker arrangement. The
connections can be made "symmetrical" to make it possible to control
the priority by the settings, Priority: High/Low

12.2.3.2 Auto recloser settings GUID-74980A07-CF89-488F-AB17-E5351D0032EE v1

The settings for the auto recloser are set using the local HMI (LHMI) or PCM600.

This setting guideline describes the settings of the auto recloser using the LHMI.

The settings for the auto recloser are found under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/
Control/AutoRecloser(79,5(0->1))/SMBRREC(79,5(0->)):X and have been divided
into four different setting groups: General, CircuitBreaker, DeadTime and MasterSlave.

336 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

General settings
Operation: The operation of the auto recloser can be switched Enabled or Disabled.

ExternalCtrl: This setting makes it possible to switch the auto recloser On or Off using
an external switch via IO or communication ports.

ARMode: There are six different possibilities in the selection of auto reclosing
programs. The type of auto reclosing used for different kinds of faults depends on the
power system configuration and the users practices and preferences. When the circuit
breaker only have three-pole operation, then three-pole auto reclosing has to be chosen.
This is usually the case in sub-transmission and distribution lines. Three-pole tripping
and reclosing for all types of faults is also widely accepted in completely meshed
power systems. In transmission systems with few parallel circuits, single-pole
reclosing for single-phase faults is an attractive alternative for maintaining service and
system stability.

AutoContinue: Automatic continuation to the next shot if the circuit breaker is not
closed within the set time of tAutoContWait. The normal setting is AutoContinue =
Disabled.

tAutoContWait: This is the length in time the auto recloser waits to see if the circuit
breaker is closed when AutoContinue is set to Enabled. Normally, the setting of
tAutoContWait can be 2 sec.

StartByCBOpen: The normal setting Disabled is used when the function is started by
protection trip signals. If set Enabled the start of the auto recloser is controlled by an
circuit breaker auxiliary contact.

LongStartInhib: Usually the protection trip command, used as an auto reclosing start
signal, resets quickly as the fault is cleared. A prolonged trip command may depend on
a circuit breaker failing to clear the fault. A protection trip signal present when the
circuit breaker is reclosed will result in a new trip. The user can set a maximum start
pulse duration time tLongStartInh. This start pulse duration time is controlled by the
LongStartInhib setting. When the start pulse duration signal is longer than set
maximum start pulse duration, the auto reclosing sequence interrupts in the same way
as for a signal to the INHIBIT input.

tLongStartInh: The user can set a maximum start pulse duration time tLongStartInh. At
a set time somewhat longer than the auto reclosing dead time, this facility will not
influence the auto reclosing. A typical setting of tLongStartInh could be close to the
auto reclosing dead time.

tInhibit: To ensure reliable interruption and temporary blocking of the auto recloser a
resetting time delay tInhibit is used. The auto recloser will be blocked this time after
the deactivation of the INHIBIT input. A typical resetting delay is 5.0 s.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 337

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

ZoneSeqCoord: The ZONESTEP input is used when coordination between local auto
reclosers and down stream auto reclosers is needed. When this input is activated the
auto recloser increases its actual shot number by one and enters “reset time” status. If a
start is received during this reclaim time the auto recloser is proceeding as usual but
with the dead time for the increased shot number. Every new increase of the shot
number needs a new activation of the ZONESTEP input. The setting NoOfShots limits
of course the possibility to increase the shot number. This functionality is controlled by
the setting ZoneSeqCoord.

CircuitBreaker settings
CBReadyType: The selection depends on the type of performance available from the
circuit breaker operating gear. At setting OCO (circuit breaker ready for an Open –
Close – Open cycle), the condition is checked only at the start of the auto reclosing
cycle. The signal will disappear after tripping, but the circuit breaker will still be able
to perform the C-O sequence. For the selection CO (circuit breaker ready for a Close –
Open cycle) the condition is also checked after the set auto reclosing dead time. This
selection has a value first of all at multi-shot auto reclosing to ensure that the circuit
breaker is ready for a C-O sequence at shot two and further shots. During single-shot
auto reclosing, the OCO selection can be used. A breaker shall according to its duty
cycle always have storing energy for a CO operation after the first trip. (IEC 56 duty
cycle is O – 0.3sec – CO – 3min – CO).

FollowCB: The usual setting is Follow CB = Off. The setting On can be used for
delayed auto reclosing with long delay, to cover the case when a circuit breaker is
being manually closed during the auto reclosing dead time before the auto recloser has
issued its breaker close command.

UnsucClByCBChk: The normal setting is NoCBCheck and the auto reclosing

unsuccessful event is then decided by a new trip within the reclaim time after the last
reclosing shot. If one wants to get the UNSUCCL (Reclosing is unsuccessful) signal in
the case the circuit breaker does not respond to the circuit breaker close command, one
can set UnsucClByCBCheck = CB Check and set tUnsucCl for instance to 1.0 s.

BlockByUnsucCl: Setting of whether an unsuccessful auto reclosing attempt shall set

the auto recloser in blocked status. If used the BLKOFF input must be configured to
unblock the function after an unsuccessful auto reclosing attempt. Normal setting is
Disabled.

CutPulse: In circuit breakers without anti-pumping relays, the setting CutPulse =

Enabled can be used to avoid repeated closing operation when reclosing onto a fault. A
new start will then cut the ongoing pulse.

tPulse: The circuit breaker closing command should be long enough to ensure reliable
operation of the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker closing command pulse has a
duration set by the tPulse setting. A typical setting may be tPulse = 200 ms. A longer

338 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

pulse setting may facilitate dynamic indication at testing, for example, in debug mode
of the Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in PCM600. In circuit breakers without
anti-pumping relays, the setting CutPulse = Enabled can be used to avoid repeated
closing operations when reclosing onto a fault. A new start will then cut the ongoing
pulse.

tReset: The reclaim time sets the time for resetting the function to its original state,
after which a line fault and tripping will be treated as an independent new case with a
new auto reclosing cycle. One may consider a nominal CB duty cycle of for instance,
O – 0.3sec – CO – 3min – CO. However the 3 minute (180 s) recovery time is usually
not critical as fault levels are mostly lower than rated value and the risk of a new fault
within a short time is negligible. A typical time may be tReset = 60 or 180 s dependent
on the fault level and circuit breaker duty cycle.

tSync: Maximum wait time for fulfilled synchrocheck conditions. The time window
should be coordinated with the operate time and other settings of the synchrocheck
function. Attention should also be paid to the possibility of a power swing when
reclosing after a line fault. Too short a time may prevent a potentially successful auto
reclosing.

tCBClosedMin: A typical setting is 5.0 s. If the circuit breaker has not been closed for
at least this minimum time, an auto reclosing start will not be accepted.

tSuccessful: If the circuit breaker closing command is given and the circuit breaker is
closed within the set time interval tUnsucCl, the SUCCL output is activated after the
set time interval tSuccessful.

tUnsucCl: The reclaim timer, tReset, is started each time a circuit breaker closing
command is given. If no start occurs within this time, the auto recloser will reset. A
new start received in “restart time” status will reenter the auto recloser to “in progress”
status as long as the final shot is not reached. The auto recloser will reset and enter
“inactive” status if a new start is given during the final restart time. This will also
happen if the circuit breaker has not closed within set time interval tUnsucCl at the end
of the reclaim time. This latter case is controlled by setting UnsucClByCBChk. The
auto reclosing sequence is considered unsuccessful for both above cases and the
UNSUCCL output is activated.

DeadTime settings
NoOfShots: In power transmission one shot is mostly used. In most cases one auto
reclosing shot is sufficient as the majority of arcing faults will cease after the first auto
reclosing shot. In power systems with many other types of faults caused by other
phenomena, for example wind, a greater number of auto reclosing attempts (shots) can
be motivated.

t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph: There are separate settings for the first shot for single-, two-
and three-phase auto reclosing dead times.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 339

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Single-phase auto reclosing dead time: A typical setting is t1 1Ph = 800ms. Due to the
influence of energized phases the arc extinction may not be instantaneous. In long lines
with high voltage the use of shunt reactors in the form of a star with a neutral reactor
improves the arc extinction.

Three-phase auto reclosing dead time: Different local phenomena, such as moisture,
salt, pollution, can influence the required dead time. Some users apply Delayed Auto
Reclosing (DAR) with delays of 10s or more.

Extended t1: The time extension below is controlled by the Extended t1 setting.

tExtended t1: A time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the dead time
delay for the first shot. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for
permissive line protection is lost. The communication link in a permissive (not strict)
line protection scheme, for instance a power line carrier (PLC) link, may not always be
available. If lost, it can result in delayed tripping at one end of a line. There is a
possibility to extend the auto reclosing dead time in such a case by use of the
PLCLOST input, and the tExtended t1 setting. Typical setting in such a case: Extended
t1 = Enabled and tExtended t1 = 0.8 s.

t1 3PhHS: There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto
reclosing, t1 3PhHS. This high-speed auto reclosing is activated by the STARTHS input
and is used when auto reclosing is done without the requirement of synchrocheck
conditions to be fulfilled. A typical dead time is 400ms.

t2 3Ph, t3 3Ph, t4 3Ph, t5 3Ph: The delay of auto reclosing shot two and possible later
shots are usually set at 30s or more. A check that the circuit breaker duty cycle can
manage the selected setting must be done. The setting can in some cases be restricted
by national regulations. For multiple shots the setting of shots two to five must be
longer than the circuit breaker duty cycle time.

MasterSlave settings
Priority: In single circuit breaker applications, one sets Priority = None. At sequential
reclosing the auto recloser for the first circuit breaker, e.g. near the busbar, is set as
master (High) and the auto recloser for the second circuit breaker is set as slave (Low).

tWaitForMaster: The slave should take the duration of the circuit breaker closing time
of the master into consideration before sending the circuit breaker closing command. A
setting tWaitForMaster sets a maximum wait time for the WAIT input to reset. If the
wait time expires, the auto reclosing cycle of the slave is inhibited. The maximum wait
time, tWaitForMaster for the second circuit breaker is set longer than the auto
reclosing dead time plus a margin for synchrocheck conditions to be fulfilled for the
first circuit breaker. Typical setting is 2sec.

tSlaveDeadTime: When activating the WAIT input, in the auto recloser set as slave,
every dead timer is changed to the value of setting tSlaveDeadTime and holds back the

340 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

auto reclosing operation. When the WAIT input is reset at the time of a successful
reclosing of the first circuit breaker, the slave is released to continue the auto reclosing
sequence after the set tSlaveDeadTime. The reason for shortening the time, for the
normal dead timers with the value of tSlaveDeadTime, is to give the slave permission
to react almost immediately when the WAIT input resets. The minimum settable time
for tSlaveDeadTime is 0.1sec because both master and slave should not send the circuit
breaker closing command at the same time.

12.3 Apparatus control APC IP14560-1 v2

12.3.1 Application IP14931-1 v1

M13443-4 v13

The apparatus control is a functionality for control and supervising of circuit breakers,
disconnectors, and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given
after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchronism
check, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

The complete apparatus control function is not included in this product,

and the information below is included for understanding of the
principle for the use of QCBAY, LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL, SCILO,
SCSWI, SXCBR.

Figure 131 shows from which places the apparatus control function receives
commands. The commands to an apparatus can be initiated from the Control Centre
(CC), the station HMI or the local HMI on the IED front.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 341

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

cc

Station HMI

GW

Station bus

Local Local Local

HMI HMI HMI
IED IED IED
Apparatus Apparatus Apparatus
Control Control Control
CLOSE/OPEN CLOSE/OPEN CLOSE/OPEN

breakers disconnectors grounding switches

ANSI08000227.vsd
ANSI08000227 V1 EN-US

Figure 131: Overview of the apparatus control functions

Features in the apparatus control function:

• Operation of primary apparatuses

• Select-Execute principle to give high security
• Selection and reservation function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchronism check
• Pole discrepancy supervision
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position

The apparatus control function is realized by means of a number of function blocks

designated:

• Switch controller SCSWI

• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI
• Bay control QCBAY
• Bay reserve QCRSV

342 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

• Reservation input RESIN

• Local remote LOCREM
• Local remote control LOCREMCTRL

The signal flow between the function blocks is shown in Figure 132. To realize the
reservation function, the function blocks Reservation input (RESIN) and Bay reserve
(QCRSV) also are included in the apparatus control function. The application
description for all these functions can be found below. The function SCILO in the
Figure below is the logical node for interlocking.

When the circuit breaker or switch is located in a breaker IED, two more functions are
added:
• GOOSE receive for switching device GOOSEXLNRCV
• Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY

The extension of the signal flow and the usage of the GOOSE communication are
shown in Figure 133.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 343

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

IEC 61850

QCBAY SCSWI SXCBR 189

SXCBR
SXCBR 152
SCILO

SCSWI SXSWI 989

SCILO

en05000116_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000116 V1 EN-US

Figure 132: Signal flow between apparatus control function blocks when all
functions are situated within the IED

344 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

IEC 61850 on
station bus

Bay level IED

QCBAY SCSWI

SCILO

GOOSEXLNRCV XLNPROXY

SCSWI

SCILO

GOOSEXLNRCV XLNPROXY

GOOSE over process bus

Merging Unit
XCBR
XCBR -QB1
XCBR -QA1

XSWI -QB9

IEC16000070-1-EN.vsdx
IEC16000070 V1 EN-US

Figure 133: Signal flow between apparatus control functions with XCBR and XSWI
located in a breaker IED

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 345

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Control operation can be performed from the local IED HMI. If users are defined in the
IED, then the local/remote switch is under authority control, otherwise the default user
can perform control operations from the local IED HMI without logging in. The default
position of the local/remote switch is on remote.

Accepted originator categories for PSTO

If the requested command is accepted by the authority control, the value will change.
Otherwise the attribute blocked-by-switching-hierarchy is set in the cause signal. If the
PSTO value is changed during a command, then the command is aborted.

The accepted originator categories for each PSTO value are shown in Table 39.
Table 39: Accepted originator categories for each PSTO

Permitted Source To Operate Originator (orCat)

0 = Off 4,5,6
1 = Local 1,4,5,6
2 = Remote 2,3,4,5,6
3 = Faulty 4,5,6
4 = Not in use 4,5,6
5 = All 1,2,3,4,5,6
6 = Station 2,4,5,6
7 = Remote 3,4,5,6

PSTO = All, then it is no priority between operator places. All operator places are
allowed to operate.

According to IEC 61850 standard the orCat attribute in originator category are defined
in Table 40
Table 40: orCat attribute according to IE C61850

Value Description
0 not-supported
1 bay-control
2 station-control
3 remote-control
4 automatic-bay
5 automatic-station
6 automatic-remote
7 maintenance
8 process

346 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.1.1 Bay control QCBAY M16595-3 v9

The Bay control (QCBAY) is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay.
The function gives permission to operate from two main types of locations either from
Remote (for example, control centre or station HMI) or from Local (local HMI on the
IED) or from all (Local and Remote). The Local/Remote switch position can also be
set to Off, which means no operator place selected that is, operation is not possible
either from local or from remote.

For IEC 61850-8-1 communication, the Bay Control function can be set to discriminate
between commands with orCat station and remote (2 and 3). The selection is then done
through the IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 command LocSta.

QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different

apparatuses within the bay. There are two different blocking alternatives:

• Blocking of update of positions

• Blocking of commands

IEC13000016-2-en.vsd
IEC13000016 V2 EN-US

Figure 134: APC - Local remote function block

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 347

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

12.3.1.2 Switch controller SCSWI M16596-3 v5

SCSWI may handle and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase
switching devices.

After the selection of an apparatus and before the execution, the switch controller
performs the following checks and actions:

• A request initiates to reserve other bays to prevent simultaneous operation.

• Actual position inputs for interlocking information are read and evaluated if the
operation is permitted.
• The synchronism check/synchronizing conditions are read and checked, and
performs operation upon positive response.
• The blocking conditions are evaluated
• The position indications are evaluated according to given command and its
requested direction (open or closed).

The command sequence is supervised regarding the time between:

• Select and execute.

• Select and until the reservation is granted.
• Execute and the final end position of the apparatus.
• Execute and valid close conditions from the synchronism check.

At error the command sequence is cancelled.

In the case when there are three one-phase switches (SXCBR) connected to the switch
controller function, the switch controller will "merge" the position of the three switches
to the resulting three-phase position. In case of a pole discrepancy situation, that is, the
positions of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than a settable time;
an error signal will be given.

The switch controller is not dependent on the type of switching device SXCBR or
SXSWI. The switch controller represents the content of the SCSWI logical node
(according to IEC 61850) with mandatory functionality.

12.3.1.3 Switches SXCBR/SXSWI M16602-3 v6

Switches are functions used to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal
conditions, or to interrupt the circuit under fault, or emergency conditions. The
intention with these functions is to represent the lowest level of a power-switching
device with or without short circuit breaking capability, for example, circuit breakers,
disconnectors, grounding switches etc.

348 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

The purpose of these functions is to provide the actual status of positions and to
perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to the primary apparatus
via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

Switches have the following functionalities:

• Local/Remote switch intended for the switchyard

• Block/deblock for open/close command respectively
• Update block/deblock of position indication
• Substitution of position indication
• Supervision timer that the primary device starts moving after a command
• Supervision of allowed time for intermediate position
• Definition of pulse duration for open/close command respectively

The realizations of these functions are done with SXCBR representing a circuit breaker
and with SXSWI representing a circuit switch that is, a disconnector or an grounding
switch.

Circuit breaker (SXCBR) can be realized either as three one-phase switches or as one
three-phase switch.

The content of this function is represented by the IEC 61850 definitions for the logical
nodes Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) with mandatory
functionality.

12.3.1.4 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY GUID-2DA1E47C-5A9A-4C53-8D60-7B1729EF6B90 v1

The purpose of the proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE
(XLNPROXY) is to give the same internal representation of the position status and
control response for a switch modeled in a breaker IED as if represented by a SXCBR
or SXSWI function.

The command response functionality is dependent on the connection of the execution

information, XIN, from the SCSWI function controlling the represented switch.
Otherwise, the function only reflects the current status of the switch, such as blocking,
selection, position, operating capability and operation counter.

Since different switches are represented differently on IEC 61850, the data that is
mandatory to model in IEC 61850 is mandatory inputs and the other useful data for the
command and status following is optional. To make it easy to choose which data to use
for the XLNPROXY function, their usage is controlled by the connection of each
data’s signal input and valid input. These connections are usually from the
GOOSEXLNRCV function (see Figure 135 and Figure 136).

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 349

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

IEC16000071 V1 EN-US

Figure 135: Configuration with XLNPROXY and GOOSEXLNRCV where all the
IEC 61850 modelled data is used, including selection

350 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

IEC16000072 V1 EN-US

Figure 136: Configuration with XLNPROXY and GOOSEXLNRCV where only the
mandatory data in the IEC 61850 modelling is used

All the information from the XLNPROXY to the SCSWI about command following
status, causes for failed command and selection status is transferred in the output
XPOS. The other outputs may be used by other functions in the same way as the
corresponding outputs of the SXCBR and SXSWI function.

When a command has been issued from the connected SCSWI function, the
XLNPROXY function awaits the response on it from the represented switch through
the inputs POSVAL and OPOK. While waiting for the switch to start moving, it checks
if the switch is blocked for the operation. When the switch has started moving and no
blocking condition has been detected, XLNPROXY issues a response to the SCSWI
function that the command has started. If OPOK is used, this response is given when
XLNPROXY receives the signal.

If no movement of the switch is registered within the limit tStartMove, the command is
considered failed, and the cause of the failure is evaluated. In the evaluation, the
function checks if the state of the represented switch is indicating that the command is
blocked in any way during the command, and gives the appropriate cause to the
SCSWI function. This cause is also shown on the output L_CAUSE as indicated in the
following table:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 351

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Table 41: Possible cause values from XLNPROXY

Cause No Cause Description Conditions
8 Blocked-by-Mode The BEH input is 5.
2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy The LOC input indicates that only local commands are
allowed for the breaker IED function.
-24 Blocked-for-open-cmd The BLKOPN is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for open commands.
-25 Blocked-for-close-cmd The BLKCLS is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for close commands.
9 Blocked-by-process If the Blk input is connected and active indicating that the
switch is dynamically blocked. Or if the OPCAP input is
connected, it indicates that the operation capability of the
switch is not enough to perform the command.
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position.
-31 Switch-not-start-moving Switch did not start moving within tStartMove.
-32 Persistent-intermediate-state The switch stopped in intermediate state for longer than
tIntermediate.
-33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos Switch returned to the initial position.
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position.
-35 Not-expected-final-position Switch did not reach the expected final position.

The OPCAP input and output are used for the CBOpCap data of a
XCBR respectively SwOpCap for a XSWI. The interpretation for the
command following is controlled through the setting SwitchType.

12.3.1.5 Reservation function (QCRSV and RESIN) M16609-3 v4

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.

For interlocking evaluation in a substation, the position information from switching

devices, such as circuit breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches can be required
from the same bay or from several other bays. When information is needed from other
bays, it is exchanged over the station bus between the distributed IEDs. The problem
that arises, even at a high speed of communication, is a space of time during which the
information about the position of the switching devices are uncertain. The interlocking
function uses this information for evaluation, which means that also the interlocking
conditions are uncertain.

To ensure that the interlocking information is correct at the time of operation, a unique
reservation method is available in the IEDs. With this reservation method, the bay that

352 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

wants the reservation sends a reservation request to other bays and then waits for a
reservation granted signal from the other bays. Actual position indications from these
bays are then transferred over the station bus for evaluation in the IED. After the
evaluation the operation can be executed with high security.

This functionality is realized over the station bus by means of the function blocks
QCRSV and RESIN. The application principle is shown in Figure 137.

The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. It sends out either the reservation
request to other bays or the acknowledgement if the bay has received a request from
another bay.

The other function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays.
The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60
instances are available). The received signals are either the request for reservation from
another bay or the acknowledgment from each bay respectively, which have received a
request from this bay. Also the information of valid transmission over the station bus
must be received.

IED IED

SCSWI
RES_GRT
RES_RQ

3 RESIN
EXCH_IN
QCRSV
EXCH_ OUT
RES_RQ1
... From other ..
SCSWI in RES_RQ8
...

the bay
RES_GRT1 To other
RESIN ..
SCSWI
EXCH_IN RES_GRT8
in the
EXCH_OUT RES_ DATA bay
3 2

...

Station bus

en 05000117_ansi. vsd
ANSI05000117 V2 EN-US

Figure 137: Application principles for reservation over the station bus

The reservation can also be realized with external wiring according to the application
example in Figure 138. This solution is realized with external auxiliary relays and extra
binary inputs and outputs in each IED, but without use of function blocks QCRSV and
RESIN.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 353

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

IED IED

SCSWI
RES_ EXT
SELECTED

OR
Other SCSWI in the bay

BI BO BI BO

en 05000118_ ansi. vsd

ANSI05000118 V2 EN-US

Figure 138: Application principles for reservation with external wiring

The solution in Figure 138 can also be realized over the station bus according to the
application example in Figure 139. The solutions in Figure 138 and Figure 139 do not
have the same high security compared to the solution in Figure 137, but instead have a
higher availability, since no acknowledgment is required.

IED IED

IntlReceive SCSWI
RESGRANT RES_EXT

SELECTED
. . .
. . .

IntlReceive SPGAPC
RESGRANT Other SCWI in OR IN
the bay

...
Station bus

IEC05000178-3-en.vsd
IEC05000178 V3 EN-US

Figure 139: Application principle for an alternative reservation solution

12.3.2 Interaction between modules M16626-3 v8

A typical bay with apparatus control function consists of a combination of logical

nodes or functions that are described here:

354 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

• The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes all operations for one apparatus. It is the
command interface of the apparatus. It includes the position reporting as well as
the control of the position
• The Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is the process interface to the circuit breaker for the
apparatus control function.
• The Circuit switch (SXSWI) is the process interface to the disconnector or the
grounding switch for the apparatus control function.
• The Bay control (QCBAY) fulfils the bay-level functions for the apparatuses, such
as operator place selection and blockings for the complete bay.
• The Reservation (QCRSV) deals with the reservation function.
• The Protection trip logic (SMPPTRC, 94) connects the "trip" outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common "trip" to be transmitted to SXCBR.
• The Autorecloser (SMBRREC, 79) consists of the facilities to automatically close
a tripped breaker with respect to a number of configurable conditions.
• The logical node Interlocking (SCILO, 3) provides the information to SCSWI
whether it is permitted to operate due to the switchyard topology. The interlocking
conditions are evaluated with separate logic and connected to SCILO (3).
• The Synchronism, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN, 25) calculates
and compares the voltage phasor difference from both sides of an open breaker
with predefined switching conditions (synchronism check). Also the case that one
side is dead (energizing-check) is included.
• The Generic Automatic Process Control function, GAPC, handles generic
commands from the operator to the system.

The overview of the interaction between these functions is shown in Figure 140 below.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 355

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

SMPPTRC SESRSYN Synchronizing OK

(Trip logic) (Synchrocheck & Synchronizer)

Trip

Synchronizing
Synchrocheck

Synchronizing

in progress
Start
OK
QCBAY Operator place
(Bay control) selection Open cmd
Start AR

Close cmd
Res. req. SCSWI SXCBR
(Switching control) (Circuit breaker)
QCRSV Res. granted
(Reservation) Res. req.

Close CB
SMBRREC
Enable

Enable
close
(Auto- open Position
reclosure)
I/O
SCILO
(Interlocking)
other bays
Pos. from

Open rel.
Interlocking Close rel.
function Open rel.
block Close rel. SCILO
(Not a LN) Position (Interlocking)
Enable Enable
open close

GAPC Res.
granted Open cmd
(Generic
Close cmd
Automatic SCSWI SXSWI
Process Open/Close (Switching control) (Disconnector)
Control) Open/Close

Position

I/O

IEC05000120-3-EN.vsdx
IEC05000120 V3 EN-US

356 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

ZMQPDIS SMPPTRC SECRSYN

(Distance) (Trip logic) (Synchrocheck)

Trip
Synchrocheck
OK

QCBAY Operator place

Initiate AR (Bay control) selection Open cmd
Close cmd
Res. req. SCSWI SXCBR
Res. granted (Switching control) (Circuit breaker)
QCRSV
(Reservation) Res. req.

Close CB
SMBRREC

Enable

Enable
open

close
(Auto- Position
reclosure)
I/O
SCILO
(Interlocking)
other bays
Pos. from

Open rel.
Interlocking Close rel.
function Open rel.
block Close rel. SCILO
(Not a LN) Position (Interlocking)
Enable Enable
open close

GAPC Res.
granted Open cmd
(Generic
Close cmd
Automatic SCSWI SXSWI
Process Open/Close (Switching control) (Disconnector)
Control) Open/Close

Position

I/O
ANSI05000120-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000120 V2 EN-US

Figure 140: Example overview of the interactions between functions in a typical

bay

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 357

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

12.3.3 Setting guidelines M16669-3 v4

The setting parameters for the apparatus control function are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

12.3.3.1 Bay control (QCBAY) M16670-3 v7

If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set to No priority, all originators from local and
remote are accepted without any priority.

If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set to Yes, commands from IEC 61850-8-1 clients
at both station and remote level are accepted, when the QCBAY function is in Remote.
If set to No, the command LocSta controls which operator place is accepted when
QCBAY is in Remote. If LocSta is true, only commands from station level are
accepted, otherwise only commands from remote level are accepted.

The parameter RemoteIncStation has only effect on the IEC 61850-8-1

communication. Further, when using IEC 61850 edition 1
communication, the parameter should be set to Yes, since the command
LocSta is not defined in IEC 61850-8-1 edition 1.

12.3.3.2 Switch controller (SCSWI) M16673-3 v6

The parameter CtlModel specifies the type of control model according to IEC 61850.
The default for control of circuit breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches the
control model is set to SBO Enh (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security.

When the operation shall be performed in one step, and no monitoring of the result of
the command is desired, the model direct control with normal security is used.

At control with enhanced security there is an additional supervision of the status value
by the control object, which means that each command sequence must be terminated
by a termination command.

The parameter PosDependent gives permission to operate depending on the position

indication, that is, at Always permitted it is always permitted to operate independent of
the value of the position. At Not perm at 00/11 it is not permitted to operate if the
position is in bad or intermediate state.

tSelect is the maximum allowed time between the select and the execute command
signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the
selection of the object to operate. When the time has expired, the selected output signal
is set to false and a cause-code is given.

358 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

The time parameter tResResponse is the allowed time from reservation request to the
feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function. When
the time has expired, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is given.

tSynchrocheck is the allowed time for the synchronism check function to fulfill the
close conditions. When the time has expired, the function tries to start the
synchronizing function. If tSynchrocheck is set to 0, no synchrocheck is done, before
starting the synchronizing function.

The timer tSynchronizing supervises that the signal synchronizing in progress is

obtained in SCSWI after start of the synchronizing function. The start signal for the
synchronizing is set if the synchronism check conditions are not fulfilled. When the
time has expired, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is given. If no
synchronizing function is included, the time is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function is done, and when tSynchrocheck has expired, the control
function is reset and a cause-code is given.

tExecutionFB is the maximum time between the execute command signal and the
command termination. When the time has expired, the control function is reset and a
cause-code is given.

tPoleDiscord is the allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles at control of
three single-phase breakers. At discrepancy an output signal is activated to be used for
trip or alarm, and during a command, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is
given.

SuppressMidPos when On suppresses the mid-position during the time tIntermediate of

the connected switches.

The parameter InterlockCheck decides if interlock check should be done at both select
and operate, Sel & Op phase, or only at operate, Op phase.

12.3.3.3 Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) M16675-3 v8

tStartMove is the supervision time for the apparatus to start moving after a command
execution is done from the SCSWI function. When the time has expired, the command
supervision is reset, and a cause-code is given.

During the tIntermediate time, the position indication is allowed to be in an

intermediate (00) state. When the time has expired, the command supervision is reset,
and a cause-code is given. The indication of the mid-position at SCSWI is suppressed
during this time period when the position changes from open to close or vice-versa if
the parameter SuppressMidPos is set to On in the SCSWI function.

If the parameter AdaptivePulse is set to Adaptive the command output pulse resets
when a new correct end position is reached. If the parameter is set to Not adaptive the

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 359

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

command output pulse remains active until the timer tOpenPulsetClosePulse has
elapsed.

tOpenPulse is the output pulse length for an open command. If AdaptivePulse is set to
Adaptive, it is the maximum length of the output pulse for an open command. The
default length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a
disconnector (SXSWI).

tClosePulse is the output pulse length for a close command. If AdaptivePulse is set to
Adaptive, it is the maximum length of the output pulse for an open command. The
default length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a
disconnector (SXSWI).

12.3.3.4 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY GUID-7C253FE7-6E02-4F94-96C7-81C9129D925D v1

The SwitchType setting controls the evaluation of the operating capability. If

SwitchType is set to Circuit Breaker, the input OPCAP is interpreted as a breaker
operating capability, otherwise it is interpreted as a switch operating capability.
Table 42: Operating capability values for breaker/switches
Value Breaker operating capability, CbOpCap Switch operating capability, SwOpCap
1 None None
2 Open Open
3 Close – Open Close
4 Open – Close – Open Close and Open
5 Close – Open – Close – Open Larger values handled as 4, both Close and
Open
6 Open – Close – Open – Close – Open
7 more

tStartMove is the supervision time for the apparatus to start moving after a command
execution is done from the SCSWI function. When the time has expired, the command
supervision is reset, and a cause-code is given.

During the tIntermediate time, the position indication is allowed to be in an

intermediate (00) state. When the time has expired, the command supervision is reset,
and a cause-code is given. The indication of the mid-position at SCSWI is suppressed
during this time period when the position changes from open to close or vice-versa if
the parameter SuppressMidPos is set to On in the SCSWI function.

In most cases, the same value can be used for both tStartMove and tIntermediate as in
the source function. However, tStartMove may need to be increased to accommodate
for the communication delays, mainly when representing a circuit breaker.

360 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.3.3.5 Bay Reserve (QCRSV) M16677-3 v3

The timer tCancelRes defines the supervision time for canceling the reservation, when
this cannot be done by requesting bay due to for example communication failure.

When the parameter ParamRequestx (x=1-8) is set to Only own bay res. individually
for each apparatus (x) in the bay, only the own bay is reserved, that is, the output for
reservation request of other bays (RES_BAYS) will not be activated at selection of
apparatus x.

12.3.3.6 Reservation input (RESIN) M16678-3 v3

With the FutureUse parameter set to Bay future use the function can handle bays not
yet installed in the SA system.

12.4 Interlocking (3) IP15572-1 v2

M13530-4 v4

The main purpose of switchgear interlocking is:

• To avoid the dangerous or damaging operation of switchgear

• To enforce restrictions on the operation of the substation for other reasons for
example, load configuration. Examples of the latter are to limit the number of
parallel transformers to a maximum of two or to ensure that energizing is always
from one side, for example, the high voltage side of a transformer.

This section only deals with the first point, and only with restrictions caused by
switching devices other than the one to be controlled. This means that switch interlock,
because of device alarms, is not included in this section.

Disconnectors and grounding switches have a limited switching capacity.

Disconnectors may therefore only operate:

• With basically zero current. The circuit is open on one side and has a small
extension. The capacitive current is small (for example, < 5A) and power
transformers with inrush current are not allowed.
• To connect or disconnect a parallel circuit carrying load current. The switching
voltage across the open contacts is thus virtually zero, thanks to the parallel circuit
(for example, < 1% of rated voltage). Paralleling of power transformers is not
allowed.

Grounding switches are allowed to connect and disconnect grounding of isolated

points. Due to capacitive or inductive coupling there may be some voltage (for

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 361

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

example < 40% of rated voltage) before grounding and some current (for example <
100A) after grounding of a line.

Circuit breakers are usually not interlocked. Closing is only interlocked against
running disconnectors in the same bay, and the bus-coupler opening is interlocked
during a busbar transfer.

The positions of all switching devices in a bay and from some other bays determine the
conditions for operational interlocking. Conditions from other stations are usually not
available. Therefore, a line grounding switch is usually not fully interlocked. The
operator must be convinced that the line is not energized from the other side before
closing the grounding switch. As an option, a voltage indication can be used for
interlocking. Take care to avoid a dangerous enable condition at the loss of a VT
secondary voltage, for example, because of a blown fuse.

The switch positions used by the operational interlocking logic are obtained from
auxiliary contacts or position sensors. For each end position (open or closed) a true
indication is needed - thus forming a double indication. The apparatus control function
continuously checks its consistency. If neither condition is high (1 or TRUE), the
switch may be in an intermediate position, for example, moving. This dynamic state
may continue for some time, which in the case of disconnectors may be up to 10
seconds. Should both indications stay low for a longer period, the position indication
will be interpreted as unknown. If both indications stay high, something is wrong, and
the state is again treated as unknown.

In both cases an alarm is sent to the operator. Indications from position sensors shall be
self-checked and system faults indicated by a fault signal. In the interlocking logic, the
signals are used to avoid dangerous enable or release conditions. When the switching
state of a switching device cannot be determined operation is not permitted.

For switches with an individual operation gear per phase, the evaluation must consider
possible phase discrepancies. This is done with the aid of an AND-function for all three
phases in each apparatus for both open and close indications. Phase discrepancies will
result in an unknown double indication state.

12.4.1 Configuration guidelines M13529-4 v4

The following sections describe how the interlocking for a certain switchgear
configuration can be realized in the IED by using standard interlocking modules and
their interconnections. They also describe the configuration settings. The inputs for
delivery specific conditions (Qx_EXy) are set to 1=TRUE if they are not used, except
in the following cases:

• 989_EX2 and 989_EX4 in modules BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B

• 152_EX3 in module AB_TRAFO

362 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

when they are set to 0=FALSE.

12.4.2 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3) IP14139-1 v2

12.4.2.1 Application M13561-3 v8

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 141. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a
single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)

189 289 789

189G

152
289G

989
989G

en04000478_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000478 V1 EN-US

Figure 141: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE (3)

M13560-4 v5

The signals from other bays connected to the module ABC_LINE (3) are described
below.

12.4.2.2 Signals from bypass busbar M13560-6 v5

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB7_D_OP All line disconnectors on bypass WA7 except in the own bay are open.
VP_BB7_D The switch status of disconnectors on bypass busbar WA7 are valid.
EXDU_BPB No transmission error from any bay containing disconnectors on bypass busbar
WA7

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 363

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) except that of the own bay are
needed:
Signal
789OPTR 789 is open
VP789TR The switch status for 789 is valid.
EXDU_BPB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For bay n, these conditions are valid:

789OPTR (bay 1)
789OPTR (bay 2) AND BB7_D_OP
. . .
. . .
789OPTR (bay n-1)

VP789TR (bay 1)
VP789TR (bay 2) AND VP_BB7_D
. . .
. . .
VP789TR (bay n-1)

EXDU_BPB (bay 1)
EXDU_BPB (bay 2) AND EXDU_BPB
. . .
. . .
EXDU_BPB (bay n-1)
en04000477_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000477 V1 EN-US

Figure 142: Signals from bypass busbar in line bay n

12.4.2.3 Signals from bus-coupler M13560-31 v4

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus sections, the busbar-
busbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within
the other bus section.

364 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
ABC_LINE ABC_BC ABC_LINE ABC_BC

en04000479_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000479 V1 EN-US

Figure 143: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BC_12_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
BC_17_OP No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA1 and WA7.
BC_17_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1and WA7.
BC_27_OP No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA2 and WA7.
BC_27_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
VP_BC_17 The switch status of BC_17 is valid.
VP_BC_27 The switch status of BC_27 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal
BC12CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1
and WA2.
BC17OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1 and
WA7.
BC17CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1
and WA7.
BC27OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA2 and
WA7.
BC27CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA2
and WA7.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
VPBC17TR The switch status of BC_17 is valid.
VPBC27TR The switch status of BC_27 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 365

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
DCCLTR The bus-section disconnector is closed.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC)
must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same
type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
S1S2CLTR A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For a line bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

366 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

BC12CLTR (sect.1)
BC_12_CL
DCCLTR (A1A2) OR
DCCLTR (B1B2) AND
BC12CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) VP_BC_12
VPDCTR (B1B2) AND
VPBC12TR (sect.2)

BC17OPTR (sect.1)
BC_17_OP
DCOPTR (A1A2) AND
OR
BC17OPTR (sect.2)

BC17CLTR (sect.1)
BC_17_CL
DCCLTR (A1A2) OR
AND
BC17CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC17TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) VP_BC_17
AND
VPBC17TR (sect.2)

BC27OPTR (sect.1)
BC_27_OP
DCOPTR (B1B2) AND
BC27OPTR (sect.2) OR

BC27CLTR (sect.1)
BC_27_CL
DCCLTR (B1B2) OR
AND
BC27CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC27TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (B1B2) VP_BC_27
AND
VPBC27TR (sect.2)

EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_BC
AND
EXDU_DC (B1B2)
EXDU_BC (sect.2)

en04000480_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000480 V1 EN-US

Figure 144: Signals to a line bay in section 1 from the bus-coupler bays in each
section

For a line bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section
1 to section 2 and vice versa.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 367

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

12.4.2.4 Configuration setting M13560-108 v4

If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no 789 disconnector, then the interlocking for
789 is not used. The states for 789, 7189G, BB7_D, BC_17, BC_27 are set to open by
setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and
1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 789_OP = 1
• 789_CL = 0

• 7189G_OP = 1
• 7189G_CL = 0

• BB7_D_OP = 1

• BC_17_OP = 1
• BC_17_CL = 0
• BC_27_OP = 1
• BC_27_CL = 0

• EXDU_BPB = 1

• VP_BB7_D = 1
• VP_BC_17 = 1
• VP_BC_27 = 1

If there is no second busbar WA2 and therefore no 289 disconnector, then the
interlocking for 289 is not used. The state for 289, 2189G, BC_12, BC_27 are set to
open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block
diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289_CL = 0

• 2189G_OP = 1
• 2189G_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• BC_27_OP = 1
• BC_27_CL = 0

• VP_BC_12 = 1

368 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.4.3 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3) IP14144-1 v2

12.4.3.1 Application M13555-3 v8

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC, 3) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 145. The function
can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)

189 289 2089 789

189G

152

289G

en04000514_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000514 V1 EN-US

Figure 145: Switchyard layout ABC_BC (3)

12.4.3.2 Configuration M13553-138 v4

The signals from the other bays connected to the bus-coupler module ABC_BC are
described below.

12.4.3.3 Signals from all feeders M13553-6 v4

To derive the signals:

Signal
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-coupler.
VP_BBTR The switch status is valid for all apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from any bay connected to the WA1/WA2 busbars.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bus-coupler bay are needed:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 369

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Signal
Q1289OPTR 189 or 289 or both are open.
VP1289TR The switch status of 189 and 289 are valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For bus-coupler bay n, these conditions are valid:

1289OPTR (bay 1)
BBTR_OP
1289OPTR (bay 2) AND
. . .
. . .
1289OPTR (bay n-1)

VP1289TR (bay 1)
VP_BBTR
VP1289TR (bay 2) AND
. . .
. . .
VP1289TR (bay n-1)

EXDU_12 (bay 1)
EXDU_12
EXDU_12 (bay 2) AND
. . .
. . .
EXDU_12 (bay n-1)

en04000481_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000481 V1 EN-US

Figure 146: Signals from any bays in bus-coupler bay n

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals

BBTR are connected in parallel - if both bus-section disconnectors are closed. So for
the basic project-specific logic for BBTR above, add this logic:

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC
ABC_LINE ABC_BC ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO

en04000482_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000482 V1 EN-US

Figure 147: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

370 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

The following signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC),
have to be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The
same type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-
section circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

BBTR_OP (sect.1)
BBTR_OP
DCOPTR (A1A2) AND
DCOPTR (B1B2) OR
BBTR_OP (sect.2)

VP_BBTR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) VP_BBTR
AND
VPDCTR (B1B2)
VP_BBTR (sect.2)

EXDU_12 (sect.1)
EXDU_DC (A1A2) EXDU_12
AND
EXDU_DC (B1B2)
EXDU_12 (sect.2)

en04000483_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000483 V1 EN-US

Figure 148: Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from any bays in each section

For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing
section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 371

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

12.4.3.4 Signals from bus-coupler M13553-58 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals

BC_12 from the busbar coupler of the other busbar section must be transmitted to the
own busbar coupler if both disconnectors are closed.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
ABC_BC ABC_BC

en04000484_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000484 V1 EN-US

Figure 149: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BC_12_CL Another bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bay, are needed:
Signal
BC12CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar WA1
and WA2.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCCLTR The bus-section disconnector is closed.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

372 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC),
must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same
type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
S1S2CLTR A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay containing the above information.

For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

DCCLTR (A1A2)
AND BC_12_CL
DCCLTR (B1B2)
BC12CLTR (sect.2)

VPDCTR (A1A2)
AND VP_BC_12
VPDCTR (B1B2)
VPBC12TR (sect.2)

EXDU_DC (A1A2)
AND EXDU_BC
EXDU_DC (B1B2)
EXDU_BC (sect.2)

en04000485_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000485 V1 EN-US

Figure 150: Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from a bus-coupler bay in

another section

For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing
section 1 to section 2 and vice versa.

12.4.3.5 Configuration setting M13553-107 v4

If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no 289 and 789 disconnectors, then the
interlocking for 289 and 789 is not used. The states for 289, 789, 7189G are set to open
by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0
and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289_CL = 0

• 789_OP = 1
• 789_CL = 0

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 373

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

• 7189G_OP = 1
• 7189G_CL = 0

If there is no second busbar B and therefore no 289 and 2089 disconnectors, then the
interlocking for 289 and 2089 are not used. The states for 289, 2089, 2189G, BC_12,
BBTR are set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the
functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289_CL = 0

• 2089_OP = 1
• 2089_CL = 0

• 2189G_OP = 1
• 2189G_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• VP_BC_12 = 1

• BBTR_OP = 1
• VP_BBTR = 1

12.4.4 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3) IP14149-1 v2

12.4.4.1 Application M13567-3 v7

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO, 3) function is used for a

transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 151.
The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and
transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function can be
used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

374 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)

189 289
189G

152 AB_TRAFO

289G

389G

252 252 and 489G are not

used in this interlocking
489G

389 489

en04000515_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000515 V1 EN-US

Figure 151: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO (3)

M13566-4 v4

The signals from other bays connected to the module AB_TRAFO are described
below.

12.4.4.2 Signals from bus-coupler M13566-6 v4

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the busbar-

busbar connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within
the other bus-section.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 375

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)

AB_TRAFO ABC_BC AB_TRAFO ABC_BC

en04000487_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000487 V1 EN-US

Figure 152: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic for input signals concerning bus-coupler are the same as the
specific logic for the line bay (ABC_LINE):
Signal
BC_12_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from bus-coupler bay (BC).

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration “Signals from bus-coupler“.

12.4.4.3 Configuration setting M13566-22 v5

If there are no second busbar B and therefore no 289 disconnector, then the
interlocking for 289 is not used. The state for 289, 2189G, BC_12 are set to open by
setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and
1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 289_OP = 1
• 289QB2_CL = 0

• 2189G_OP = 1
• 2189G_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• VP_BC_12 = 1

376 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

If there is no second busbar B at the other side of the transformer and therefore no 489
disconnector, then the state for 489 is set to open by setting the appropriate module
inputs as follows:

• 489_OP = 1
• 489_CL = 0

12.4.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3) IP14154-1 v2

12.4.5.1 Application M15110-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS ,3) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 153. The function
can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

189G 189 289 289G

152

389G 489G

A1A2_BS
en04000516_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000516 V1 EN-US

Figure 153: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS (3)

M15111-4 v3

The signals from other bays connected to the module A1A2_BS are described below.

12.4.5.2 Signals from all feeders M15111-6 v4

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers into bus-sections and both
circuit breakers are closed, the opening of the circuit breaker must be blocked if a bus-
coupler connection exists between busbars on one bus-section side and if on the other
bus-section side a busbar transfer is in progress:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 377

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_BS
B1B2_BS

ABC_BC ABC_BC
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO

en04000489_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000489 V1 EN-US

Figure 154: Busbars divided by bus-section circuit breakers

To derive the signals:

Signal
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-section.
VP_BBTR The switch status of BBTR is valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from any bay connected to busbar 1(A) and 2(B).

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal
1289OPTR 189 or 289 or both are open.
VP1289TR The switch status of 189 and 289 are valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal
BC12OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1 and
WA2.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from the bus-section circuit breaker bay (A1A2_BS, B1B2_BS) are
needed.

378 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For a bus-section circuit breaker between A1 and A2 section busbars, these conditions
are valid:

S1S2OPTR (B1B2)
BC12OPTR (sect.1)

1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) OR

... AND BBTR_OP
... AND
1289OPTR (bay n/sect.2)

S1S2OPTR (B1B2)
BC12OPTR (sect.2)

1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) OR

...
... AND
1289OPTR (bay n /sect.1)

VPS1S2TR (B1B2)
VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)
AND VP_BBTR

VPBC12TR (sect.2)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)

EXDU_BS (B1B2)
EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2)
AND EXDU_12

EXDU_BC (sect.2)
EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)

en04000490_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000490 V1 EN-US

Figure 155: Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between
sections A1 and A2

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 379

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

For a bus-section circuit breaker between B1 and B2 section busbars, these conditions
are valid:

S1S2OPTR (A1A2)
BC12OPTR (sect.1)
1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) OR
... AND BBTR_OP
... AND
1289OPTR (bay n/sect.2)

S1S2OPTR (A1A2)
BC12OPTR (sect.2)
1289OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) OR
... AND
...
1289OPTR (bay n /sect.1)

VPS1S2TR (A1A2)
VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)
AND VP_BBTR

VPBC12TR (sect.2)
VP1289TR (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
VP1289TR (bay n/sect.1)

EXDU_BS (A1A2)
EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2)
AND EXDU_12

EXDU_BC (sect.2)
EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)

en04000491_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000491 V1 EN-US

Figure 156: Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between
sections B1 and B2

12.4.5.3 Configuration setting M15111-57 v3

If there is no other busbar via the busbar loops that are possible, then either the
interlocking for the 152 open circuit breaker is not used or the state for BBTR is set to
open. That is, no busbar transfer is in progress in this bus-section:

• BBTR_OP = 1
• VP_BBTR = 1

380 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.4.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3) IP14159-1 v2

12.4.6.1 Application M13544-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC, 3) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 157. A1A2_DC
(3) function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section
disconnector.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

52

189G 289G

A1A2_DC en04000492_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000492 V1 EN-US

Figure 157: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC (3)

M13542-4 v4

The signals from other bays connected to the module A1A2_DC are described below.

12.4.6.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement M13542-6 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition no other

disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both
bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding
signals from busbar B are used.

Section 1 Section 2 A2
(WA1)A1 A3
B2
(WA2)B1 B3
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO

en04000493_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000493 V1 EN-US

Figure 158: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 381

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE).
22089OTR 289 and 2089 are open (ABC_BC).
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
V22089TR The switch status of 289 and 2089 are valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If there is an additional bus-section disconnector, the signal from the bus-section

disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If there is an additional bus-section circuit breaker rather than an additional bus-section

disconnector the signals from the bus-section, circuit-breaker bay (A1A2_BS) rather
than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains the
above information.

382 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A1)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1)

en04000494_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000494 V1 EN-US

Figure 159: Signals from any bays in section A1 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)
DCOPTR (A2/A3)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A2)
VPDCTR (A2/A3)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2)
EXDU_DC (A2/A3)

en04000495_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000495 V1 EN-US

Figure 160: Signals from any bays in section A2 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 383

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay n/sect.B1)

VP289TR (V22089TR)(bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP289TR (V22089TR)(bay n/sect.B1)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1)

en04000496_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000496 V1 EN-US

Figure 161: Signals from any bays in section B1 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (22089OTR)(bay n/sect.B2)
DCOPTR (B2/B3)

VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay n/sect.B2)
VPDCTR (B2/B3)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2)
EXDU_DC (B2/B3)

en04000497_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000497 V1 EN-US

Figure 162: Signals from any bays in section B2 to a bus-section disconnector

12.4.6.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement M13542-80 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar
disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by
a project-specific logic.

384 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both
bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding
signals from busbar B are used.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS

en04000498_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000498 V1 EN-US

Figure 163: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from double-breaker bay (DB) that contains the above
information.

These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_DB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration “Signals in single breaker
arrangement”.

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 385

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A1)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A1)

en04000499_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000499 V1 EN-US

Figure 164: Signals from double-breaker bays in section A1 to a bus-section

disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A2)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A2)

en04000500_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000500 V1 EN-US

Figure 165: Signals from double-breaker bays in section A2 to a bus-section

disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

386 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

289OPTR (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND S1DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (bay n/sect.B1)

VP289TR (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND VPS1_DC
...
...
VP289TR (bay n/sect.B1)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B1)

en04000501_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000501 V1 EN-US

Figure 166: Signals from double-breaker bays in section B1 to a bus-section

disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

289OPTR (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND S2DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR (bay n/sect.B2)

VP289TR (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND VPS2_DC
...
...
VP289TR (bay n/sect.B2)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B2)

en04000502_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000502 V1 EN-US

Figure 167: Signals from double-breaker bays in section B2 to a bus-section

disconnector

12.4.6.4 Signals in breaker and a half arrangement M13542-127 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar
disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by
a project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both
bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding
signals from busbar B are used.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 387

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE

en04000503_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000503 V1 EN-US

Figure 168: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic is the same as for the logic for the double-breaker
configuration.
Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from breaker and a half (BH) that contains the above
information.

12.4.7 Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3) IP14164-1 v4

12.4.7.1 Application M15015-3 v7

The interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES, 3) function is used for one
busbar grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 169.

89G

en04000504.vsd
ANSI04000504 V1 EN-US

Figure 169: Switchyard layout BB_ES (3)

M15053-4 v4

The signals from other bays connected to the module BB_ES are described below.

388 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.4.7.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement M15053-6 v5

The busbar grounding switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus-
section are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
BB_ES ABC_BC BB_ES
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE

en04000505_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000505 V1 EN-US

Figure 170: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnector on this part of the busbar is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay containing the above information.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO),
and each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE)
22089OTR 289 and 2089 are open (ABC_BC)
789OPTR 789 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
V22089TR The switch status of 289and 2089 is valid.
VP789TR The switch status of 789 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 389

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If no bus-section disconnector exists, the signal DCOPTR, VPDCTR and EXDU_DC

are set to 1 (TRUE).

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC)
must be used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same
type of module (A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
circuit breakers A1A2_BS and B1B2_BS.
Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains the
above information.

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)
DCOPTR (A1/A2)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A1)
VPDCTR (A1/A2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1)
EXDU_DC (A1/A2)

en04000506_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000506 V1 EN-US

Figure 171: Signals from any bays in section A1 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

390 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

189OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
189OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)
DCOPTR (A1/A2)

VP189TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP189TR (bay n/sect.A2)
VPDCTR (A1/A2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2)
EXDU_DC (A1/A2)

en04000507_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000507 V1 EN-US

Figure 172: Signals from any bays in section A2 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 391

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

289OPTR(22089OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1)
... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
289PTR (22089OTR)(bay n/sect.B1)
DCOPTR (B1/B2)

VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay 1/sect.B1) VP_BB_DC

... AND
...
...
VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay n/sect.B1)
VPDCTR (B1/B2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1)
EXDU_DC (B1/B2)

en04000508_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000508 V1 EN-US

Figure 173: Signals from any bays in section B1 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

For a busbar grounding switch, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

289OPTR(22089OTR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND BB_DC_OP
...
...
289OPTR(22089OTR) (bay n/sect.B2)
DCOPTR (B1/B2)

VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP289TR(V22089TR) (bay n/sect.B2)
VPDCTR (B1/B2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2)
EXDU_DC (B1/B2)
en04000509_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000509 V1 EN-US

Figure 174: Signals from any bays in section B2 to a busbar grounding switch in
the same section

392 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

For a busbar grounding switch on bypass busbar C, these conditions are valid:

789OPTR (bay 1)
... BB_DC_OP
... AND
...
789OPTR (bay n)

VP789TR (bay 1)
... AND VP_BB_DC
...
...
VP789TR (bay n)

EXDU_BB (bay 1)
... AND EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n)
en04000510_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000510 V1 EN-US

Figure 175: Signals from bypass busbar to busbar grounding switch

12.4.7.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement M15053-83 v4

The busbar grounding switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus
section are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
BB_ES B1B2_DC(BS) BB_ES
DB_BUS DB_BUS

en04000511_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000511 V1 EN-US

Figure 176: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors of this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar are valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 393

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Signal
189OPTR 189 is open.
289OPTR 289 is open.
VP189TR The switch status of 189 is valid.
VP289TR The switch status of 289 is valid.
EXDU_DB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed.
For B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of
module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnectors A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.
Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration described in section “Signals
in single breaker arrangement”.

12.4.7.4 Signals in breaker and a half arrangement M15053-123 v4

The busbar grounding switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus-
section are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
BB_ES B1B2_DC(BS) BB_ES
BH_LINE BH_LINE

en04000512_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000512 V1 EN-US

Figure 177: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic are the same as for the logic for the double busbar
configuration described in section “Signals in single breaker arrangement”.
Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

394 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.4.8 Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3) IP14167-1 v2

12.4.8.1 Application M13585-3 v10

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A
(3), DB_BUS_B (3) and DB_LINE (3) functions are used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement according to figure 178.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)

189 289
189G 489G

DB_BUS_A 152 252 DB_BUS_B

289G 589G

6189 6289
389G

DB_LINE
989

989G

en04000518_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000518 V1 EN-US

Figure 178: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A (3) handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and
the disconnectors and grounding switches of this section. DB_BUS_B (3) handles the
circuit breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and
grounding switches of this section.
M13584-4 v4

For a double circuit-breaker bay, the modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and

DB_BUS_B must be used.

12.4.8.2 Configuration setting M13584-6 v5

For application without 989 and 989G, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and
disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated
0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 395

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

• 989_OP = 1
• 989_CL = 0

• 989G_OP = 1
• 989G_CL = 0

If, in this case, line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting 989 to open
state, specify the state of the voltage supervision:

• 989_OP = VOLT_OFF
• 989_CL = VOLT_ON

If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows:

• VOLT_OFF = 1
• VOLT_ON = 0

12.4.9 Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3) IP14173-1 v3

12.4.9.1 Application M13570-3 v6

The interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH_CONN(3), BH_LINE_A(3),

BH_LINE_B(3)) functions are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half
diameter according to figure 179.

396 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189 289
189G 189G

152 152
289G 289G

689 689

389G 389G
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

6189 6289
152

989 989
189G 289G
989G 989G

BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000513 V1 EN-US

Figure 179: Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half

M13570-7 v4

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A (3) and
BH_LINE_B (3) are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN (3) is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker-and-a-half switchyard
layout.
M13569-4 v4

For a breaker-and-a-half arrangement, the modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and

BH_LINE_B must be used.

12.4.9.2 Configuration setting M13569-6 v5

For application without 989 and 989G, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and
disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated
0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• 989_OP = 1
• 989_CL = 0

• 989G_OP = 1
• 989G_CL = 0

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 397

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

If, in this case, line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting 989 to open
state, specify the state of the voltage supervision:

• 989_OP = VOLT_OFF
• 989_CL = VOLT_ON

If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows:

• VOLT_OFF = 1
• VOLT_ON = 0

12.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC SEMOD114936-1 v4

12.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167845-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation

12.5.2 Application SEMOD114927-4 v6

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation function
(SLGAPC) (or the selector switch function block, as it is also known) is used to get a
selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware multi-
position selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities,
in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are
however sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended
purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems.

SLGAPC function block has two operating inputs (UP and DOWN), one blocking
input (BLOCK) and one operator position input (PSTO).

SLGAPC can be activated both from the local HMI and from external sources
(switches), via the IED binary inputs. It also allows the operation from remote (like the
station computer). SWPOSN is an integer value output, giving the actual output
number. Since the number of positions of the switch can be established by settings (see
below), one must be careful in coordinating the settings with the configuration (if one

398 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

sets the number of positions to x in settings – for example, there will be only the first x
outputs available from the block in the configuration). Also the frequency of the (UP or
DOWN) pulses should be lower than the setting tPulse.

From the local HMI, the selector switch can be operated from Single-line diagram
(SLD).

12.5.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD115063-294 v6

The following settings are available for the Logic rotating switch for function selection
and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) function:

Operation: Sets the operation of the function Enabled or Disabled.

NrPos: Sets the number of positions in the switch (max. 32).

OutType: Steady or Pulsed.

tPulse: In case of a pulsed output, it gives the length of the pulse (in seconds).

tDelay: The delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the
output activation.

StopAtExtremes: Sets the behavior of the switch at the end positions – if set to
Disabled, when pressing UP while on first position, the switch will jump to the last
position; when pressing DOWN at the last position, the switch will jump to the first
position; when set to Enabled, no jump will be allowed.

12.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158754-1 v3

12.6.1 Identification
SEMOD167850-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - 43

12.6.2 Application SEMOD158803-5 v8

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function is a multipurpose function used in the

configuration tool in PCM600 for a variety of applications, as a general purpose
switch. VSGAPC can be used for both acquiring an external switch position (through

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 399

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

the IPOS1 and the IPOS2 inputs) and represent it through the single line diagram
symbols (or use it in the configuration through the outputs POS1 and POS2) as well as,
a command function (controlled by the PSTO input), giving switching commands
through the CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21 outputs.

The output POSITION is an integer output, showing the actual position as an integer
number 0 – 3, where 0 = MidPos, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed and 3 = Error.

An example where VSGAPC is configured to switch Autorecloser enabled–disabled

from a button symbol on the local HMI is shown in figure180. The Close and Open
buttons on the local HMI are normally used for enable–disable operations of the circuit
breaker.

INV
OUT INPUT
VSGAPC
PSTO
INTONE
IPOS1
IPOS2
SMBRREC_79
NAM_POS1 CMDPOS12 ON SETON
Disabled
Enabled NAM_POS2 CMDPOS21 OFF

ANSI07000112-3-en.vsd
ANSI07000112 V3 EN-US

Figure 180: Control of Autorecloser from local HMI through Selector mini switch

VSGAPC is also provided with IEC 61850 communication so it can be controlled from
SA system as well.

12.6.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD158807-4 v4

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can generate pulsed or steady commands (by
setting the Mode parameter). When pulsed commands are generated, the length of the
pulse can be set using the tPulse parameter. Also, being accessible on the single line
diagram (SLD), this function block has two control modes (settable through CtlModel):
Dir Norm and SBO Enh.

12.7 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC SEMOD55384-1 v4

400 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

12.7.1 Identification
GUID-E16EA78F-6DF9-4B37-A92D-5C09827E2297 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

12.7.2 Application SEMOD55391-5 v8

Generic communication function for Double Point indication (DPGAPC) function

block is used to send double point position indication to other systems, equipment or
functions in the substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols.
It is especially intended to be used in the interlocking station-wide logics. To be able to
get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use other tools,
described in the Engineering manual, and define which function block in which
systems, equipment or functions should receive this information.

More specifically, DPGAPC function reports a combined double point position

indication output POSITION, by evaluating the value and the timestamp attributes of
the inputs OPEN and CLOSE, together with the logical input signal VALID.

When the input signal VALID is active, the values of the OPEN and CLOSE inputs
determine the two-bit integer value of the output POSITION. The timestamp of the
output POSITION will have the latest updated timestamp of the inputs OPEN and
CLOSE.

When the input signal VALID is inactive, DPGAPC function forces the position to
intermediated state.

When the value of the input signal VALID changes, the timestamp of the output
POSITION will be updated as the time when DPGAPC function detects the change.

Refer to Table 43 for the description of the input-output relationship in terms of the
value and the quality attributes.
Table 43: Description of the input-output relationship
POSITION
VALID OPEN CLOSE
Value Description
0 - - 0 Intermediate
1 0 0 0 Intermediate
1 1 0 1 Open
1 0 1 2 Closed
1 1 1 3 Bad State

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 401

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

12.7.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD55398-5 v4

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

12.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC SEMOD176448-1 v3

12.8.1 Identification
SEMOD176456-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -

12.8.2 Application SEMOD176511-4 v6

The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function block is a collection
of 8 single point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of
LED's or putting IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple
commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation
(status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such
as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Even if PSTO can be configured to allow LOCAL or ALL operator
positions, the only functional position usable with the SPC8GAPC
function block is REMOTE.

12.8.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD176518-4 v6

The parameters for the single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function are
set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Operation: turning the function operation Enabled/Disabled.

There are two settings for every command output (totally 8):

PulseModex: decides if the command signal for output x is Latched (steady) or Pulsed.

402 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

tPulsex: if PulseModex is set to Pulsed, then tPulsex will set the length of the pulse (in
seconds).

12.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS SEMOD158589-1 v3

12.9.1 Identification
GUID-C3BB63F5-F0E7-4B00-AF0F-917ECF87B016 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3

12.9.2 Application SEMOD158637-5 v4

Automation bits, command function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600
in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the DNP3.0
protocol.The AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV
(for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).AUTOBITS function block have 32
individual outputs which each can be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The
output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object contains parameters for
control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point,
send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The
remaining parameters are regarded as appropriate. For example, pulse-On, on-
time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, refer to the Communication

manual.

12.9.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD158639-5 v3

AUTOBITS function block has one setting, (Operation: Enabled/Disabled) enabling or

disabling the function. These names will be seen in the DNP3 communication
management tool in PCM600.

12.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD SEMOD119849-1 v2

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 403

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

12.10.1 Identification
GUID-2217CCC2-5581-407F-A4BC-266CD6808984 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -

12.10.2 Application M12445-3 v3

Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) is a common function and always

included in the IED.

The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive commands either from a
substation automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has
outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in
switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used. Together with
the configuration logic circuits, the user can govern pulses or steady output signals for
control purposes within the IED or via binary outputs.

Figure 181 shows an application example of how the user can connect SINGLECMD
via configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type of
command control is normally carried out by sending a pulse to the binary outputs of
the IED. Figure 181 shows a close operation. An open breaker operation is performed
in a similar way but without the synchro-check condition.

Single
command
function Configuration logic circuits
SINGLECMD

Close CB1 CMDOUTy

OUTy
User- AND
defined
conditions
Synchro-
check
en04000206_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000206 V2 EN-US

Figure 181: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit
breaker via configuration logic circuits

Figure 182 and figure 183 show other ways to control functions, which require steady
Enabled/Disabled signals. Here, the output is used to control built-in functions or
external devices.

404 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 12
Control

Single
command
function Function n
SINGLECMD

Function n CMDOUTy

OUTy

en04000207.vsd
IEC04000207 V2 EN-US

Figure 182: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in
functions

Single
command
function Configuration logic circuits
SINGLESMD

Device 1 CMDOUTy

OUTy
User- AND
defined
conditions

en04000208_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000208 V2 EN-US

Figure 183: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external
devices via configuration logic circuits

12.10.3 Setting guidelines M12448-3 v2

The parameters for Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) are set via the local
HMI or PCM600.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 405

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Control

Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and CMDOUTy which
includes the user defined name for each output signal. The MODE input sets the
outputs to be one of the types Disabled, Steady, or Pulse.

• Disabled, sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station
level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
• Steady, sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
• Pulse, gives a pulse with 100 ms duration, if a value sent from the station level is
changed from 0 to 1. That means the configured logic connected to the command
function block may not have a cycle time longer than the cycle time for the
command function block.

406 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Section 13 Logic

13.1 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC IP15121-1 v4

13.1.1 Identification
SEMOD167882-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -

13.1.2 Application M15321-3 v12

The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.

The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected
to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable
pulse or steady output.

13.1.3 Setting guidelines M15291-3 v5

Operation: Operation of function Enabled/Disabled.

PulseTime: Defines the pulse time when in Pulsed mode. When used for direct tripping
of circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in
order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker
trip coils.

OnDelay: Used to prevent output signals to be given for spurious inputs. Normally set
to 0 or a low value.

OffDelay: Defines a delay of the reset of the outputs after the activation conditions no
longer are fulfilled. It is only used in Steady mode. When used for direct tripping of
circuit breaker(s) the off delay time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to
obtain a satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

ModeOutputx: Defines if output signal OUTPUTx (where x=1-3) is Steady or Pulsed.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 407

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Logic

13.2 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

13.2.1 Identification GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -

13.2.2 Application GUID-70B268A9-B248-422D-9896-89FECFF80B75 v1

Group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route alarm signals to different
LEDs and/or output contacts on the IED.

ALMCALH output signal and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the alarm
signal to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.

13.2.3 Setting guidelines GUID-0BDD898A-360B-4443-A5CF-7619C80A17F4 v2

Operation: Enabled or Disabled

13.3 Logic for group alarm WRNCALH

13.3.1 Identification GUID-3EBD3D5B-F506-4557-88D7-DFC0BD21C690 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -

13.3.1.1 Application GUID-FC0DBB7B-FF86-44BF-83D6-DDF120A176DE v1

Group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route warning signals to LEDs
and/or output contacts on the IED.

WRNCALH output signal WARNING and the physical outputs allows the user to
adapt the warning signal to physical tripping outputs according to the specific
application needs.

408 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.3.1.2 Setting guidelines GUID-B08F2636-33DA-4937-92EB-1A8AC0909AB4 v2

OperationEnabled or Disabled

13.4 Logic for group indication INDCALH

13.4.1 Identification GUID-3B5D4371-420D-4249-B6A4-5A168920D635 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -

13.4.1.1 Application GUID-9BAD30FB-4B75-4E14-82A8-6A59B09FA6EA v1

Group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route indication signals to

different LEDs and/or output contacts on the IED.

INDCALH output signal IND and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the
indication signal to physical outputs according to the specific application needs.

13.4.1.2 Setting guidelines GUID-7E776D39-1A42-4F90-BF50-9B38F494A01E v2

Operation: Enabled or Disabled

13.5 Configurable logic blocks IP11009-1 v3

The configurable logic blocks are available in two categories:

• Configurable logic blocks that do not propagate the time stamp and the quality of
signals. They do not have the suffix QT at the end of their function block name,
for example, SRMEMORY. These logic blocks are also available as part of an
extension logic package with the same number of instances.
• Configurable logic blocks that propagate the time stamp and the quality of signals.
They have the suffix QT at the end of their function block name, for example,
SRMEMORYQT.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 409

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Logic

13.5.1 Application GUID-F5D6F065-441B-4296-AC56-F4DC1F5487E3 v3

A set of standard logic blocks, like AND, OR etc, and timers are available for adapting
the IED configuration to the specific application needs. Additional logic blocks that,
beside the normal logical function, have the capability to propagate timestamp and
quality are also available. Those blocks have a designation including the letters QT,
like ANDQT, ORQT etc.

13.5.2 Setting guidelines GUID-E6BD982D-9E47-4CC2-9666-6E5CABA414C0 v3

There are no settings for AND gates, OR gates, inverters or XOR gates as well as, for
ANDQT gates, ORQT gates or XORQT gates.

For normal On/Off delay and pulse timers the time delays and pulse lengths are set
from the local HMI or via the PST tool.

Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and the one delayed
on drop-out) always have a common setting value.

For controllable gates, settable timers and SR flip-flops with memory, the setting
parameters are accessible via the local HMI or via the PST tool.

13.5.2.1 Configuration GUID-D93E383C-1655-46A3-A540-657141F77CF0 v4

Logic is configured using the ACT configuration tool in PCM600.

Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs according to a

fixed sequence with different cycle times.

For each cycle time, the function block is given an serial execution number. This is
shown when using the ACT configuration tool with the designation of the function
block and the cycle time, see example below.

410 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 13
Logic

IEC09000695_2_en.vsd
IEC09000695 V2 EN-US

Figure 184: Example designation, serial execution number and cycle time for logic
function

IEC09000310-2-en.vsd
IEC09000310 V2 EN-US

Figure 185: Example designation, serial execution number and cycle time for logic
function that also propagates timestamp and quality of input signals

The execution of different function blocks within the same cycle is determined by the
order of their serial execution numbers. Always remember this when connecting two or
more logical function blocks in series.

Always be careful when connecting function blocks with a fast cycle

time to function blocks with a slow cycle time.
Remember to design the logic circuits carefully and always check the
execution sequence for different functions. In other cases, additional
time delays must be introduced into the logic schemes to prevent errors,
for example, race between functions.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 411

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Logic

13.6 Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN IP15080-1 v2

13.6.1 Identification
SEMOD167904-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

13.6.2 Application M15322-3 v12

The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be
used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other
function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer,
floating point, string types of signals are available.

One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.

Example for use of GRP_OFF signal in FXDSIGN

The Restricted earth fault function REFPDIF (87N) can be used both for auto-
transformers and normal transformers.

When used for auto-transformers, information from both windings parts, together with
the neutral point current, needs to be available to the function. This means that three
inputs are needed.

REFPDIF (87N)
I3PW1CT1
I3PW2CT1
I3P

ANSI11000083_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000083 V1 EN-US

Figure 186: REFPDIF (87N) function inputs for autotransformer application

For normal transformers only one winding and the neutral point is available. This
means that only two inputs are used. Since all group connections are mandatory to be
connected, the third input needs to be connected to something, which is the GRP_OFF
signal in FXDSIGN function block.

412 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 13
Logic

REFPDIF (87N)
I3PW1CT1
I3PW2CT1
I3P

FXDSIGN
GRP_OFF

ANSI11000084_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000084 V1 EN-US

Figure 187: REFPDIF (87N) function inputs for normal transformer application

13.7 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I SEMOD175715-1 v1

13.7.1 Identification
SEMOD175721-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

13.7.2 Application SEMOD175832-4 v4

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary

(logical) signals into an integer. It can be used – for example, to connect logical output
signals from a function (like distance protection) to integer inputs from another
function (like line differential protection). B16I does not have a logical node mapping.

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up

to 16 binary inputs INx where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value
according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx =
2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on
the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is
an integer. When all INx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds
to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. B16I function is designed for

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 413

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Logic

receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will

freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block B16I.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

13.8 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node

representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC SEMOD175753-1 v4

414 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.8.1 Identification
SEMOD175757-2 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logical node representation, 16 bit

13.8.2 Application SEMOD175849-4 v6

Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is

used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. BTIGAPC has a
logical node mapping in IEC 61850.

The BTIGAPC function will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx

where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below
from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum
of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of
the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx
where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is
available on the output OUT. BTIGAPC function is designed for receiving up to 16
booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the output at the
last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 415

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

13.9 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16 SEMOD158367-1 v2

13.9.1 Identification
SEMOD167941-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

13.9.2 Application SEMOD158499-5 v4

Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer into a

set of 16 binary (logical) signals. It can be used – for example, to connect integer
output signals from one function to binary (logical) inputs to another function. IB16
function does not have a logical node mapping.

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (IB16) will transfer a combination of up

to 16 binary inputs INx where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value
according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx =
2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on
the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is
an integer. When all INx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds
to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. IB16 function is designed for
receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.

416 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 13
Logic

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where
1≤x≤16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the IB16 function block.

13.10 Integer to Boolean conversion for six-zone busbar

BCTZCONN GUID-CCB3768D-0013-47D7-9726-EF8DFE80F433 v1

13.10.1 Identification
GUID-62637FE1-696A-4841-8C76-074565B9CAE2 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Integer to Boolean conversion for BCTZCONN - -
six-zone busbar

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 417

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Logic

13.10.2 Application GUID-221AFC68-C31C-459F-8301-2A8048CB93CE v1

Integer to Boolean conversion for six-zone busbar BCTZCONN is used to transform

the zone connection integer signal of each CT from one bay function block into 7
binary (logical) signals in the six-zone busbar differential protection. It is intended to
facilitate the recording of zone connection information from each bay function block to
the disturbance recorder.

The BCTZCONN function does not have a logical node mapping and is designed to
receive only an integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it freezes the
logical outputs at the last values.

More specifically, it transfers an integer input ZONCONI to a combination of activated

binary outputs ZONEx (1≤x≤6) and CZ, so that:

6
ZONCONI  CZ  26  ZONEx  2 x 1
x 1

IECEQUATION16077 V1 EN-US (Equation 89)

where 0≤ZONCONI≤127. Note that when a binary output ZONEx or CZ is activated,

it has the logical value one. Otherwise, it has the logical value zero.

The equation above also implies that each individual binary output corresponds
actually to one integer, which is presented in the input ZONCONI and can be defined
by:

CZ×26 or ZONEx×2x-1, (1≤x≤6).

Refer to Table 44 for the description of such representations.

Table 44: Integer representations for the binary outputs of BCTZCONN
Corresponding integer value
in ZONCONI
Output names Type Description
When When
deactivated activated
ZONE1 BOOLEAN Bay is connected to Z1 0 1
ZONE2 BOOLEAN Bay is connected to Z2 0 2
ZONE3 BOOLEAN Bay is connected to Z3 0 4
ZONE4 BOOLEAN Bay is connected to Z4 0 8
ZONE5 BOOLEAN Bay is connected to Z5 0 16
ZONE6 BOOLEAN Bay is connected to Z6 0 32
CZ BOOLEAN Supervision status of the check 0 64
zone on differential zones (Valid
only for feeder bays)

418 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Figure 188 shows an example how to use BCTZCONN to facilitate the recording of
the zone connection information from one bay, say feeder 01, to a disturbance recorder
in ACT for any six-zone busbar differential protection application.

IEC16000075-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000075 V1 EN-US

Figure 188: BCTZCONN connection example

13.11 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC SEMOD158419-1 v3

13.11.1 Identification
SEMOD167944-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation

13.11.2 Application SEMOD158512-5 v7

Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC)

is used to transform an integer into a set of 16 boolean signals. ITBGAPC function can
receive an integer from a station computer – for example, over IEC 61850–8–1. This
function is very useful when the user wants to generate logical commands (for selector
switches or voltage controllers) by inputting an integer number. ITBGAPC function
has a logical node mapping in IEC 61850.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated
via IEC 61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of
activated outputs OUTx where 1≤x≤16.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 419

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Logic

The values of the different OUTx are according to the Table 45.

If the BLOCK input is activated, it freezes the logical outputs at the last value.
Table 45: Output signals
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16)
are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted by the
ITBGAPC function block.

13.12 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

13.12.1 Identification GUID-1913E066-37D1-4689-9178-5B3C8B029815 v3

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -

420 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 13
Logic

13.12.2 Application GUID-B4B47167-C8DE-4496-AEF1-5F0FD1768A87 v2

The function TEIGAPC is used for user-defined logics and it can also be used for
different purposes internally in the IED. An application example is the integration of
elapsed time during the measurement of neutral point voltage or neutral current at
earth-fault conditions.

Settable time limits for warning and alarm are provided. The time limit for overflow
indication is fixed to 999999.9 seconds.

13.12.3 Setting guidelines GUID-2911D624-87D5-4427-BB2F-E0D1072394FA v3

The settings tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits defined in seconds. The
achievable resolution of the settings depends on the level of the values defined.

A resolution of 10 ms can be achieved when the settings are defined within the range

1.00 second ≤ tAlarm ≤ 99 999.99 seconds

1.00 second ≤ tWarning ≤ 99 999.99 seconds.

If the values are above this range, the resolution becomes lower due to the 32 bit float
representation

99 999.99 seconds < tAlarm ≤ 999 999.0 seconds

99 999.99 seconds < tWarning ≤ 999 999.0 seconds

Note that tAlarm and tWarning are independent settings, that is, there is
no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds.

13.13 Comparator for integer inputs - INTCOMP

13.13.1 Identification GUID-5992B0F2-FC1B-4838-9BAB-2D2542BB264D v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Comparison of integer values INTCOMP Int<=>

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 421

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Logic

13.13.2 Application GUID-4C6D730D-BB1C-45F1-A719-1267234BF1B9 v1

The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be
used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

13.13.3 Setting guidelines GUID-ADA3E806-BEF1-4D15-B270-207386A0AEE4 v2

For proper operation of comparison the set value should be set within the range of ± 2
×109.

Setting procedure on the IED:

EnaAbs: This setting is used to select the comparison type between signed and absolute
values.
• Absolute: Comparison is performed on absolute values of input and reference
values
• Signed: Comparison is performed on signed values of input and reference values.

RefSource: This setting is used to select the reference source between input and setting
for comparison.
• Input REF: The function will take reference value from input REF
• Set Value: The function will take reference value from setting SetValue

SetValue: This setting is used to set the reference value for comparison when setting
RefSource is selected as SetValue.

13.13.4 Setting example GUID-13302FD6-1585-42FE-BD6D-44F231982C59 v2

For absolute comparison between inputs:

Set the EnaAbs = Absolute

Set the RefSource = Input REF

Similarly for Signed comparison between inputs

Set the EnaAbs = Signed

Set the RefSource =Input REF

For absolute comparison between input and setting

422 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 13
Logic

Set the EnaAbs = Absolute

Set the RefSource = Set Value

SetValue shall be set between -2000000000 to 2000000000

Similarly for signed comparison between input and setting

Set the EnaAbs = Signed

Set the RefSource = Set Value

SetValue shall be set between -2000000000 to 2000000000

13.14 Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP

13.14.1 Identification GUID-0D68E846-5A15-4C2C-91A2-F81A74034E81 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP Real<=>

13.14.2 Application GUID-5F7B1683-9799-4D27-B333-B184F8861A5B v1

The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real values in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be
used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

13.14.3 Setting guidelines GUID-DE69FF5B-7D34-4A30-9060-214E98BFF798 v2

Setting procedure on the IED:

EnaAbs: This setting is used to select the comparison type between signed and absolute
values.

• Absolute: Comparison is performed with absolute values of input and reference.

• Signed: Comparison is performed with signed values of input and reference.

RefSource: This setting is used to select the reference source between input and setting
for comparison.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 423

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Logic

• Input REF: The function will take reference value from input REF
• Set Value: The function will take reference value from setting SetValue

SetValue: This setting is used to set the reference value for comparison when setting
RefSource is selected as Set Value. If this setting value is less than 0.2% of the set unit
then the output INLOW will never pickup.

RefPrefix: This setting is used to set the unit of the reference value for comparison
when setting RefSource is selected as SetValue. It has 5 unit selections and they are
Milli, Unity, Kilo, Mega and Giga.

EqualBandHigh: This setting is used to set the equal condition high band limit in % of
reference value. This high band limit will act as reset limit for INHIGH output when
INHIGH.

EqualBandLow: This setting is used to set the equal condition low band limit in % of
reference value. This low band limit will act as reset limit for INLOW output when
INLOW.

13.14.4 Setting example GUID-E7070CF6-B44B-4799-BE18-5C75B9FE2A87 v2

Let us consider a comparison is to be done between current magnitudes in the range of

90 to 110 with nominal rating is 100 and the order is kA.

For the above condition the comparator can be designed with settings as follows,

EnaAbs = Absolute

RefSource = Set Value

SetValue = 100

RefPrefix = Kilo

EqualBandHigh = 5.0 % of reference value

EqualBandLow = 5.0 % of reference value

Operation

The function will set the outputs for the following conditions,

INEQUAL will set when the INPUT is between the ranges of 95 to 105 kA.

INHIGH will set when the INPUT crosses above 105 kA.

INLOW will set when the INPUT crosses below 95 kA.

424 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 13
Logic

If the comparison should be done between two current magnitudes then those current
signals need to be connected to function inputs, INPUT and REF. Then the settings
should be adjusted as below,

EnaAbs = Absolute

RefSource = Input REF

EqualBandHigh = 5.0 % of reference value

EqualBandLow = 5.0 % of reference value.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 425

Application manual
426
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Section 14 Monitoring

14.1 Measurement GUID-9D2D47A0-FE62-4FE3-82EE-034BED82682A v1

14.1.1 Identification
SEMOD56123-2 v8

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Power system measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN-US

Phase current measurement CMMXU -

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN-US

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN-US

Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN-US

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 427

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

14.1.2 Application SEMOD54488-4 v12

Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital
for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides
to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control
IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers
(CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value
from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog
measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction
orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.

The available measured values from an IED are depending on the

actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the
impact of noise in the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system

quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• V: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
• I: phase current magnitude
• F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:

428 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

• I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• V: voltages (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage, magnitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current and voltage signals. The
measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities
or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected
settings.

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware,

(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

• V: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).

14.1.3 Zero clamping GUID-8DABC3F5-6615-493C-B839-A5C557A2FAE8 v4

Measuring functions CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU have no

interconnections regarding any settings or parameters.

Zero clampings are also handled entirely by ZeroDb separately for each function's
every output signal. For example, zero clamping of U12 is handled by UL12ZeroDb in
VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 is handled by IL1ZeroDb in CMMXU, and so on.

Example of CVMMXN operation

Outputs seen on the local HMI under Main menu/Measurements/Monitoring/

Servicevalues(P_Q)/CVMMXN(P_Q):

S Apparent three-phase power

P Active three-phase power
Q Reactive three-phase power
PF Power factor
ILAG I lagging U
ILEAD I leading U
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 429

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

U System mean voltage, calculated according to selected mode

I System mean current, calculated according to selected mode
F Frequency

Relevant settings and their values on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED
settings/Monitoring/Servicevalues(P_Q)/CVMMXN(P_Q):

• When system voltage falls below UGenZeroDB, values for S, P, Q, PF, ILAG,
ILEAD, U and F are forced to zero.
• When system current falls below IGenZeroDB, values for S, P, Q, PF, ILAG,
ILEAD, U and F are forced to zero.
• When the value of a single signal falls below its set deadband, the value is forced
to zero. For example, if the apparent three-phase power falls below SZeroDb, the
value for S is forced to zero.

14.1.4 Setting guidelines SEMOD54481-165 v14

The available setting parameters of the measurement function CVMMXN, CMMXU,

VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The parameters for the Measurement functions CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU,

CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Operation: Disabled/Enabled. Every function instance (CVMMXN, CMMXU,

VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU) can be taken in operation (Enabled) or out
of operation (Disabled).

The following general settings can be set for the Measurement function (CVMMXN).

PowMagFact: Magnitude factor to scale power calculations.

PowAngComp: Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & V.

Mode: Selection of measured current and voltage. There are 9 different ways of
calculating monitored three-phase values depending on the available VT inputs
connected to the IED. See parameter group setting table.

k: Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, V and I.

430 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

VGenZeroDb: Minimum level of voltage in % of VBase, used as indication of zero

voltage (zero point clamping). If measured value is below VGenZeroDb calculated S, P,
Q and PF will be zero.

IGenZeroDb: Minimum level of current in % of IBase, used as indication of zero

current (zero point clamping). If measured value is below IGenZeroDb calculated S, P,
Q and PF will be zero.

VMagCompY: Magnitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of

Vn, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IMagCompY: Magnitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of In,

where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of In, where

Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for the Phase current measurement
(CMMXU).

IMagCompY: Magnitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of In,

where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of In, where

Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for the Phase-phase voltage measurement
(VMMXU).

VMagCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of

Vn, where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

VAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Vn,

where Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for all monitored quantities included in the
functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU) X in
setting names below equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA,IB,IC, VA, VB, VCVAB, VBC,
VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0.

Xmin: Minimum value for analog signal X set directly in applicable measuring unit.
This forms the minimum limit of the range.

Xmax: Maximum value for analog signal X. This forms the maximum limit of the
range.

XZeroDb: Zero point clamping. A signal value less than XZeroDb is forced to zero.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 431

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

Observe the related zero point clamping settings in Setting group N for CVMMXN
(VGenZeroDb and IGenZeroDb). If measured value is below VGenZeroDb and/or
IGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero and these settings will override
XZeroDb.

XRepTyp: Reporting type. Cyclic (Cyclic), magnitude deadband (Dead band), integral
deadband (Int deadband) or Deadband and xx se cyclic (xx: 5 sec, 30 sec, 1 min). The
reporting interval is controlled by the parameter XDbRepInt.

XDbRepInt: This setting handles all the reporting types. If setting is deadband in
XRepTyp, XDbRepInt defines the deadband in m% of the measuring range. For cyclic
reporting type (XRepTyp : cyclic), the setting value reporting interval is in seconds.
Magnitude deadband is the setting value in m% of measuring range. Integral deadband
setting is the integral area, that is, measured value in m% of measuring range
multiplied by the time between two measured values.

XHiHiLim: High-high limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for
Voltage measurement and IBase for current measurement).

XHiLim: High limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for Voltage
measurement and IBase for current measurement).

XLowLim: Low limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for Voltage
measurement and IBase for current measurement).

XLowLowLim: Low-low limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for
Voltage measurement and IBase for current measurement).

XLimHyst: Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits.

All phase angles are presented in relation to defined reference channel. The parameter
PhaseAngleRef defines the reference.

Calibration curves
It is possible to calibrate the functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and
VNMMXU) to get class 0.5 presentations of currents, voltages and powers. This is
accomplished by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current
and voltage. The compensation curve will have the characteristic for magnitude and
angle compensation of currents as shown in figure 189 (example). The first phase will
be used as reference channel and compared with the curve for calculation of factors.
The factors will then be used for all related channels.

432 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Magnitude
% of In compensation

+10
IMagComp5 Measured
IMagComp30 current

IMagComp100
5 30 100 % of In
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant

Degrees Angle
compensation

+10

IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN-US

Figure 189: Calibration curves

14.1.4.1 Setting examples SEMOD54481-4 v5

Three setting examples, in connection to Measurement function (CVMMXN), are

provided:

• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application for a OHL

• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application on the secondary side of a
transformer
• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application for a generator

For each of them detail explanation and final list of selected setting parameters values
will be provided.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual

hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 433

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

Measurement function application for a 380kV OHL SEMOD54481-12 v11

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 190:

380kV Busbar

800/5 A

IED
380kV 120V
/ kV
3 3

P Q

380kV OHL ANSI09000039-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000039 V1 EN-US

Figure 190: Single line diagram for 380kV OHL application

In order to monitor, supervise and calibrate the active and reactive power as indicated
in figure 190 it is necessary to do the following:

1. Set correctly CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef
using PCM600 for analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to three-phase CT and VT inputs
3. Set under General settings parameters for the Measurement function:
• general settings as shown in table 46.
• level supervision of active power as shown in table 47.
• calibration parameters as shown in table 48.

434 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Table 46: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
Operation Operation Off/On On Function must be On
PowAmpFact Amplitude factor to scale power 1.000 It can be used during commissioning
calculations to achieve higher measurement
accuracy. Typically no scaling is
required
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 0.0 It can be used during commissioning
shift between measured I & U to achieve higher measurement
accuracy. Typically no angle
compensation is required. As well
here required direction of P & Q
measurement is towards protected
object (as per IED internal default
direction)
Mode Selection of measured current L1, L2, L3 All three phase-to-ground VT inputs
and voltage are available
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is
power measurement, V and I required
VGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25 Set minimum voltage level to 25%.
Ubase Voltage below 25% will force S, P and
Q to zero.
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 3 Set minimum current level to 3%.
Ibase Current below 3% will force S, P and
Q to zero.
VBase (set in Base setting for voltage level in 400.00 Set rated OHL phase-to-phase
Global base) kV voltage
IBase (set in Base setting for current level in 1000 Set rated primary CT current used for
Global base) A OHL
SBase (set in Base Setting for power base in 1000 Set based on rated Power
Global base) MVA

Table 47: Settings parameters for level supervision

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
PMin Minimum value -100 Minimum expected load
PMax Minimum value 100 Maximum expected load
PZeroDb Zero point clamping in 0.001% of 3000 Set zero point clamping to 60 MW
range that is, 3% of 200 MW
PRepTyp Reporting type db Select magnitude deadband
supervision
PDbRepInt Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 2000 Set ±Δdb=40 MW that is, 2% (larger
0.001% of range, Int Db: In changes than 40 MW will be reported)
0.001%s
Table continues on next page

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 435

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

Setting Short Description Selected Comments

value
PHiHiLim High High limit (physical value), 60 High alarm limit that is, extreme
% of SBase overload alarm, hence it will be 415
MW.
PHiLim High limit (physical value), in % 50 High warning limit that is, overload
of SBase warning, hence it will be 371 MW.
PLowLim Low limit (physical value), in % of -50 Low warning limit -500 MW
SBase
PLowLowlLim Low Low limit (physical value), in -60 Low alarm limit -600 MW
% of SBase
PLimHyst Hysteresis value in % of range 1 Set ±Δ Hysteresis 20 MW that is, 1%
(common for all limits) of range (2000 MW)

Table 48: Settings for calibration parameters

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
IMagComp5 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 5% of In
IMagComp30 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 30% of In
IMagComp100 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 100% of In
VAmpComp5 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 5% of Vn
VMagComp30 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 30% of Vn
VMagComp100 Magnitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 100% of Vn
IAngComp5 Angle calibration for current at 0.00
5% of In
IAngComp30 Angle pre-calibration for current 0.00
at 30% of In
IAngComp100 Angle pre-calibration for current 0.00
at 100% of In

Measurement function application for a power transformer SEMOD54481-61 v9

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 191.

436 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

132kV Busbar

200/5

31.5 MVA IED

P Q

VAB
500/5 33kV 120V
/
3 3
33kV Busbar ANSI09000040-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000040 V1 EN-US

Figure 191: Single line diagram for transformer application

In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 191, it is
necessary to do the following:

1. Set correctly all CT and VT and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef
data using PCM600 for analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to LV side CT & VT inputs
3. Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the
following table 49:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 437

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

Table 49: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short description Selected Comment
value
Operation Operation Disabled/Enabled Enabled Function must be Enabled
PowAmpFact Magnitude factor to scale power 1.000 Typically no scaling is required
calculations
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 180.0 Typically no angle compensation is
shift between measured I & V required. However here the required
direction of P & Q measurement is
towards busbar (Not per IED internal
default direction). Therefore angle
compensation have to be used in
order to get measurements in aliment
with the required direction.
Mode Selection of measured current L1L2 Only UL1L2 phase-to-phase voltage
and voltage is available
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is
power measurement, V and I required
VGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25 Set minimum voltage level to 25%
Vbase
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 3 Set minimum current level to 3%
Ibase
VBase (set in Base setting for voltage level in 35.00 Set LV side rated phase-to-phase
Global base) kV voltage
IBase (set in Base setting for current level in 495 Set transformer LV winding rated
Global base) A current
SBase (set in Base setting for power in MVA 31.5 Set based on rated power
Global base)

Measurement function application for a generator SEMOD54481-110 v8

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 192.

438 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

230kV Busbar

300/5

100 MVA
IED

15/0.12kV
VAB ,, VBC

P Q

100 MVA G
15.65kV
4000/5

ANSI09000041-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000041 V1 EN-US

Figure 192: Single line diagram for generator application

In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 192, it is
necessary to do the following:

1. Set correctly all CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel
PhaseAngleRef using PCM600 for analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to the generator CT & VT inputs
3. Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the
following table:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 439

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

Table 50: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short description Selected Comment
value
Operation Operation Off/On On Function must be On
PowAmpFact Amplitude factor to scale power 1.000 Typically no scaling is required
calculations
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 0.0 Typically no angle compensation is
shift between measured I & V required. As well here required
direction of P & Q measurement is
towards protected object (as per IED
internal default direction)
Mode Selection of measured current Arone Generator VTs are connected
and voltage between phases (V-connected)
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is
power measurement, V and I required
VGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25% Set minimum voltage level to 25%
Vbase
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 3 Set minimum current level to 3%
Ibase
VBase (set in Base setting for voltage level in 15,65 Set generator rated phase-to-phase
Global base) kV voltage
IBase (set in Base setting for current level in 3690 Set generator rated current
Global base) A

14.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63) GUID-358AD8F8-AE06-4AEA-9969-46E5299D5B4B v3

14.2.1 Identification
GUID-AD96C26E-C3E5-4B21-9ED6-12E540954AC3 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG - 63

14.2.2 Application GUID-A840E38C-CC42-4995-A569-A6092DDB81B2 v5

Gas medium supervision (SSIMG ,63) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Proper arc extinction by the compressed gas in the circuit breaker is very
important. When the pressure becomes too low compared to the required value, the
circuit breaker operation shall be blocked to minimize the risk of internal failure.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as an input
signal to the function. The function generates alarms based on the received
information.

440 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.2.3 Setting guidelines GUID-DF6BEC98-F806-41CE-8C29-BEE9C88FC1FD v2

The parameters for Gas medium supervision SSIMG can be set via local HMI or
Protection and Control Manager PCM600.

Operation: This is used to disable/enable the operation of gas medium supervision i.e.
Off/On.

PresAlmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a pressure alarm condition in the circuit
breaker.

PresLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a pressure lockout condition in the circuit
breaker.

TempAlarmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature alarm condition in the
circuit breaker.

TempLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature lockout condition in the
circuit breaker.

tPressureAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a pressure alarm indication,
given in s.

tPressureLO: This is used to set the time delay for a pressure lockout indication, given
in s.

tTempAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature alarm indication,
given in s.

tTempLockOut: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature lockout indication,
given in s.

tResetPressAlm: This is used for the pressure alarm indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

tResetPressLO: This is used for the pressure lockout indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

tResetTempLO: This is used for the temperature lockout indication to reset after a set
time delay in s.

tResetTempAlm: This is used for the temperature alarm indication to reset after a set
time delay in s.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 441

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

14.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71) GUID-37669E94-4830-4C96-8A67-09600F847F23 v3

14.3.1 Identification
GUID-4CE96EF6-42C6-4F2E-A190-D288ABF766F6 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML - 71

14.3.2 Application GUID-140AA10C-4E93-4C23-AD57-895FADB0DB29 v6

Liquid medium supervision (SSIML ,71) is used for monitoring the transformers and
tap changers. When the level becomes too low compared to the required value, the
operation is blocked to minimize the risk of internal failures. Binary information based
on the oil level in the transformer and the tap changer is used as input signals to the
function. In addition to that, the function generates alarms based on received
information.

14.3.3 Setting guidelines GUID-0C8E498B-2A65-44ED-91D6-53EC72F49222 v2

The parameters for Liquid medium supervision SSIML can be set via local HMI or
Protection and Control Manager PCM600.

Operation: This is used to disable/enable the operation of liquid medium supervision

i.e. Off/On.

LevelAlmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a level alarm condition in the
transformer.

LevelLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a level lockout condition in the
transformer.

TempAlarmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature alarm condition in the
transformer.

TempLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature lockout condition in the
transformer.

tLevelAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a level alarm indication, given in s.

tLevelLockOut: This is used to set the time delay for a level lockout indication, given
in s.

442 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

tTempAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature alarm indication,
given in s.

tTempLockOut: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature lockout indication,
given in s.

tResetLevelAlm: This is used for the level alarm indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

tResetLevelLO: This is used for the level lockout indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

tResetTempLO: This is used for the temperature lockout indication to reset after a set
time delay in s.

tResetTempAlm: This is used for the temperature alarm indication to reset after a set
time delay in s.

14.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

14.4.1 Identification GUID-0FC081B2-0BC8-4EB8-9529-B941E51F18EE v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

14.4.2 Application GUID-45572680-3A39-4B3C-8639-4E4C5A95AA26 v9

The circuit breaker maintenance is usually based on regular time intervals or the
number of operations performed. This has some disadvantages because there could be
a number of abnormal operations or few operations with high-level currents within the
predetermined maintenance interval. Hence, condition-based maintenance scheduling
is an optimum solution in assessing the condition of circuit breakers.

Circuit breaker contact travel time

Auxiliary contacts provide information about the mechanical operation, opening time
and closing time of a breaker. Detecting an excessive traveling time is essential to
indicate the need for maintenance of the circuit breaker mechanism. The excessive
travel time can be due to problems in the driving mechanism or failures of the contacts.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 443

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

Circuit breaker status

Monitoring the breaker status ensures proper functioning of the features within the
protection relay such as breaker control, breaker failure and autoreclosing. The breaker
status is monitored using breaker auxiliary contacts. The breaker status is indicated by
the binary outputs. These signals indicate whether the circuit breaker is in an open,
closed or error state.

Remaining life of circuit breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the circuit breaker life reduces due to wear. The wear
in a breaker depends on the interrupted current. For breaker maintenance or
replacement at the right time, the remaining life of the breaker must be estimated. The
remaining life of a breaker can be estimated using the maintenance curve provided by
the circuit breaker manufacturer.

Circuit breaker manufacturers provide the number of make-break operations possible at

various interrupted currents. An example is shown in figure 193.

444 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

100000

50000

P1
20000

10000
Number of make-break operations ( n)

5000

2000

1000

500

200

P2
100

50

20

10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100

Interrupted current (kA)

IEC12000623_1_en.vsd
IEC12000623 V1 EN-US

Figure 193: An example for estimating the remaining life of a circuit breaker

Calculation for estimating the remaining life

The graph shows that there are 10000 possible operations at the rated operating current
and 900 operations at 10 kA and 50 operations at rated fault current. Therefore, if the
interrupted current is 10 kA, one operation is equivalent to 10000/900 = 11 operations
at the rated current. It is assumed that prior to tripping, the remaining life of a breaker
is 10000 operations. Remaining life calculation for three different interrupted current
conditions is explained below.

• Breaker interrupts at and below the rated operating current, that is, 2 kA, the
remaining life of the CB is decreased by 1 operation and therefore, 9999
operations remaining at the rated operating current.
• Breaker interrupts between rated operating current and rated fault current, that is,
10 kA, one operation at 10kA is equivalent to 10000/900 = 11 operations at the

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 445

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

rated current. The remaining life of the CB would be (10000 – 10) = 9989 at the
rated operating current after one operation at 10 kA.
• Breaker interrupts at and above rated fault current, that is, 50 kA, one operation at
50 kA is equivalent to 10000/50 = 200 operations at the rated operating current.
The remaining life of the CB would become (10000 – 200) = 9800 operations at
the rated operating current after one operation at 50 kA.

Accumulated energy
Monitoring the contact erosion and interrupter wear has a direct influence on the
required maintenance frequency. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately estimate the
erosion of the contacts and condition of interrupters using cumulative summation of Iy.
The factor "y" depends on the type of circuit breaker. The energy values were
accumulated using the current value and exponent factor for CB contact opening
duration. When the next CB opening operation is started, the energy is accumulated
from the previous value. The accumulated energy value can be reset to initial
accumulation energy value by using the Reset accumulating energy input, RSTIPOW.

Circuit breaker operation cycles

Routine breaker maintenance like lubricating breaker mechanism is based on the
number of operations. A suitable threshold setting helps in preventive maintenance.
This can also be used to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing
in case of an oil circuit breaker.

Circuit breaker operation monitoring

By monitoring the activity of the number of operations, it is possible to calculate the
number of days the breaker has been inactive. Long periods of inactivity degrade the
reliability for the protection system.

Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring

For normal circuit breaker operation, the circuit breaker spring should be charged
within a specified time. Detecting a long spring charging time indicates the time for
circuit breaker maintenance. The last value of the spring charging time can be given as
a service value.

Circuit breaker gas pressure indication

For proper arc extinction by the compressed gas in the circuit breaker, the pressure of
the gas must be adequate. Binary input available from the pressure sensor is based on
the pressure levels inside the arc chamber. When the pressure becomes too low
compared to the required value, the circuit breaker operation is blocked.

446 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.4.3 Setting guidelines GUID-AB93AD9B-E6F8-4F1A-B353-AA1008C15679 v2

The breaker monitoring function is used to monitor different parameters of the circuit
breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations has reached
a predefined value. For proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is also essential to
monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel
time, number of operation cycles and accumulated energy during arc extinction.

14.4.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED GUID-4E895FEA-74BF-4B11-A239-0574F8FF5188 v4

The parameters for breaker monitoring (SSCBR) can be set using the local HMI or
Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Operation: Enabled or Disabled.

IBase: Base phase current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current
settings.

OpenTimeCorr: Correction factor for circuit breaker opening travel time.

CloseTimeCorr: Correction factor for circuit breaker closing travel time.

tTrOpenAlm: Setting of alarm level for opening travel time.

tTrCloseAlm: Setting of alarm level for closing travel time.

OperAlmLevel: Alarm limit for number of mechanical operations.

OperLOLevel: Lockout limit for number of mechanical operations.

CurrExponent: Current exponent setting for energy calculation. It varies for different
types of circuit breakers. This factor ranges from 0.5 to 3.0.

AccStopCurr: RMS current setting below which calculation of energy accumulation

stops. It is given as a percentage of IBase.

ContTrCorr: Correction factor for time difference in auxiliary and main contacts'
opening time.

AlmAccCurrPwr: Setting of alarm level for accumulated energy.

LOAccCurrPwr: Lockout limit setting for accumulated energy.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 447

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

SpChAlmTime: Time delay for spring charging time alarm.

tDGasPresAlm: Time delay for gas pressure alarm.

tDGasPresLO: Time delay for gas pressure lockout.

DirCoef: Directional coefficient for circuit breaker life calculation.

RatedOperCurr: Rated operating current of the circuit breaker.

RatedFltCurr: Rated fault current of the circuit breaker.

OperNoRated: Number of operations possible at rated current.

OperNoFault: Number of operations possible at rated fault current.

CBLifeAlmLevel: Alarm level for circuit breaker remaining life.

AccSelCal: Selection between the method of calculation of accumulated energy.

OperTimeDelay: Time delay between change of status of trip output and start of main
contact separation.

14.5 Event function EVENT IP14590-1 v2

14.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167950-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN-US

14.5.2 Application M12805-6 v11

When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-
tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level.
These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the
Event function (EVENT). The EVENT function block is used for remote
communication.

Analog, integer and double indication values are also transferred through the EVENT
function.

448 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.5.3 Setting guidelines IP14841-1 v1

M12811-3 v3

The input parameters for the Event function (EVENT) can be set individually via the
local HMI (Main Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Monitoring / Event Function) or
via the Parameter Setting Tool (PST).

EventMask (Ch_1 - 16) M12811-5 v3

The inputs can be set individually as:

• NoEvents
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria
for integers have no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

LONChannelMask or SPAChannelMask M12811-15 v2

Definition of which part of the event function block that shall generate events:

• Disabled
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16

MinRepIntVal (1 - 16) M12811-29 v3

A time interval between cyclic events can be set individually for each input channel.
This can be set between 0 s to 3600 s in steps of 1 s. It should normally be set to 0, that
is, no cyclic communication.
M12811-34 v1

It is important to set the time interval for cyclic events in an optimized

way to minimize the load on the station bus.

14.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE IP14584-1 v2

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 449

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

14.6.1 Identification
M16055-1 v8

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - B22RBDR - -

14.6.2 Application M12152-3 v9

To get fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or
in the secondary system it is very important to gather information on fault currents,
voltages and events. It is also important having a continuous event-logging to be able
to monitor in an overview perspective. These tasks are accomplished by the
disturbance report function DRPRDRE and facilitate a better understanding of the
power system behavior and related primary and secondary equipment during and after
a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can
be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change of IED setting plan, improve existing
equipment, and so on. This information can also be used in a longer perspective when
planning for and designing new installations, that is, a disturbance recording could be a
part of Functional Analysis (FA).

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog and binary signals connected to the function blocks that is,
• Maximum 30 external analog signals,
• 10 internal derived analog signals, and
• 352 binary signals

Disturbance report function is a common name for several functions; Indications

(IND), Event recorder (ER), Sequential of events (SOE), Trip value recorder (TVR),
Disturbance recorder (DR).

Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration,

starting conditions, recording times, and storage capacity are concerned. Thus,
disturbance report is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it can
record disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or
another. Disturbance report can be used as an advanced stand-alone disturbance
recorder.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED. The same applies to all events,
which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. Local HMI can be used to get
information about the recordings, and the disturbance report files may be uploaded in

450 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

the PCM600 using the Disturbance handling tool, for report reading or further analysis
(using WaveWin, that can be found on the PCM600 installation CD). The user can also
upload disturbance report files using FTP or MMS (over 61850–8–1) clients.

If the IED is connected to a station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), the disturbance recorder
(record made and fault number) and the fault locator information are available. The
same information is obtainable if IEC 60870-5-103 is used.

14.6.3 Setting guidelines IP14874-1 v1

M12179-64 v8

The setting parameters for the Disturbance report function DRPRDRE are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 352 binary signals, either internal signals or
signals coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical in all functions
that is, Disturbance recorder (DR), Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND), Trip value
recorder (TVR) and Sequential of events (SOE) function.

User-defined names of binary and analog input signals is set using PCM600. The
analog and binary signals appear with their user-defined names. The name is used in all
related functions (Disturbance recorder (DR), Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND),
Trip value recorder (TVR) and Sequential of events (SOE)).

Figure 194 shows the relations between Disturbance report, included functions and
function blocks. Sequential of events (SOE), Event recorder (ER) and Indication (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder
(TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR).
Disturbance report function acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 451

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

AxRADR Disturbance Report

DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec

BxRBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals
Sequential of
events
Event recorder

Indications

ANSI09000337-2-en.vsd

ANSI09000337 V2 EN-US

Figure 194: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

For Disturbance report function there are a number of settings which also influences
the sub-functions.

Three LED indications placed above the LCD screen makes it possible to get quick
status information about the IED.

Green LED:
Steady light In Service
Flashing light Internal failure
Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:
Steady light Triggered on binary signal N with SetLEDx = Start (or Start and
Trip)
Flashing light The IED is in test mode

Table continues on next page

452 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

Red LED:
Steady light Triggered on binary signal N with SetLEDx = Trip (or Start and
Trip)
Flashing The IED is in configuration mode

Operation M12179-82 v6

The operation of Disturbance report function DRPRDRE has to be set Enabled or

Disabled. If Disabled is selected, note that no disturbance report is registered, and none
sub-function will operate (the only general parameter that influences Sequential of
events (SOE)).

Operation = Disabled:

• Disturbance reports are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - pickup, red - trip) is not stored or changed.

Operation = Enabled:

• Disturbance reports are stored, disturbance data can be read from the local HMI
and from a PC for example using PCM600.
• LED information (yellow - pickup, red - trip) is stored.

Every recording will get a number (0 to 999) which is used as identifier (local HMI,
disturbance handling tool and IEC 61850). An alternative recording identification is
date, time and sequence number. The sequence number is automatically increased by
one for each new recording and is reset to zero at midnight. The maximum number of
recordings stored in the IED is 100. The oldest recording will be overwritten when a
new recording arrives (FIFO).

To be able to delete disturbance records, Operation parameter has to be

Enabled.

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 453

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

14.6.3.1 Recording times M12179-88 v5

Prefault recording time (PreFaultRecT) is the recording time before the starting point
of the disturbance. The setting should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for the
estimation of pre-fault values in the Trip value recorder (TVR) function.

Postfault recording time (PostFaultRecT) is the maximum recording time after the
disappearance of the trig-signal (does not influence the Trip value recorder (TVR)
function).

Recording time limit (TimeLimit) is the maximum recording time after trig. The
parameter limits the recording time if some trigging condition (fault-time) is very long
or permanently set (does not influence the Trip value recorder (TVR) function).

Operation in test mode M12179-492 v4

If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest = Disabled. Disturbance report function
does not save any recordings and no LED information is displayed.

If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest = Enabled. Disturbance report function
works in normal mode and the status is indicated in the saved recording.

Post Retrigger M12155-173 v7

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However,
under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault
recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig

= Enabled) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will
pickup and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Disabled), a new recording will
not pickup until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a
new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding
recording a new complete recording will be started.

Disturbance report function can handle a maximum of 3 simultaneous disturbance

recordings.

14.6.3.2 Binary input signals M12179-90 v9

Up to 352 binary signals can be selected among internal logical and binary input
signals. The configuration tool is used to configure the signals.

454 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

For each of the 352 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be used as a
trigger for the start of the Disturbance report and if the trigger should be activated on
positive (1) or negative (0) slope.

TrigDRN: Disturbance report may trig for binary input N (Enabled) or not (Disabled).

TrigLevelN: Trig on positive (Trig on 1) or negative (Trig on 0) slope for binary input
N.

Func103N: Function type number (0-255) for binary input N according to

IEC-60870-5-103, that is, 128: Distance protection, 160: overcurrent protection, 176:
transformer differential protection and 192: line differential protection.

Info103N: Information number (0-255) for binary input N according to

IEC-60870-5-103, that is, 69-71: Trip L1-L3, 78-83: Zone 1-6.

See also description in the chapter IEC 60870-5-103.

14.6.3.3 Analog input signals M12179-92 v5

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected among internal analog and analog input
signals. PCM600 is used to configure the signals.

For retrieving remote data from LDCM module, the Disturbance report
function should be connected to a 8 ms SMAI function block if this is
the only intended use for the remote data.

The analog trigger of Disturbance report is not affected if analog input M is to be

included in the disturbance recording or not (OperationM = Enabled/Disabled).

If OperationM = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in

graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported.
The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If OperationM = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in

graph.

NomValueM: Nominal value for input M.

OverTrigOpM, UnderTrigOpM: Over or Under trig operation, Disturbance report may

trig for high/low level of analog input M (Enabled) or not (Disabled).

OverTrigLeM, UnderTrigLeM: Over or under trig level, Trig high/low level relative
nominal value for analog input M in percent of nominal value.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 455

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

14.6.3.4 Sub-function parameters M12179-389 v3

All functions are in operation as long as Disturbance report is in operation.

Indications M12179-448 v4

IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of
that particular input, will be fetched and shown in the disturbance summary on local
HMI. If not set (Hide), status change will not be indicated.

SetLEDN: Set red LED on local HMI in front of the IED if binary input N changes
status.

Disturbance recorder M12179-446 v4

OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder

(Enabled) or not (Disabled).

If OperationM = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in

graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported.
The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If OperationM = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in

graph.

Setting information GUID-B0D40F6D-3CE4-4FF3-81B4-B453FDD389CB v1

SetInfoInDrep: Parameter used to enable or disable the settings information in

disturbance header.

Event recorder M12179-444 v4

Event recorder (ER) function has no dedicated parameters.

Trip value recorder M12179-442 v3

ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal that will be used as phase
angle reference for all other analog input signals. This signal will also be used for
frequency measurement and the measured frequency is used when calculating trip
values. It is suggested to point out a sampled voltage input signal, for example, a line
or busbar phase voltage (channel 1-30).

Sequential of events M12179-440 v3

function has no dedicated parameters.

14.6.3.5 Consideration M12179-420 v6

The density of recording equipment in power systems is increasing, since the number
of modern IEDs, where recorders are included, is increasing. This leads to a vast
number of recordings at every single disturbance and a lot of information has to be

456 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

handled if the recording functions do not have proper settings. The goal is to optimize
the settings in each IED to be able to capture just valuable disturbances and to
maximize the number that is possible to save in the IED.

The recording time should not be longer than necessary (PostFaultrecT and
TimeLimit).

• Should the function record faults only for the protected object or cover more?
• How long is the longest expected fault clearing time?
• Is it necessary to include reclosure in the recording or should a persistent fault
generate a second recording (PostRetrig)?

Minimize the number of recordings:

• Binary signals: Use only relevant signals to start the recording that is, protection
trip, carrier receive and/or pickup signals.
• Analog signals: The level triggering should be used with great care, since
unfortunate settings will cause enormously number of recordings. If nevertheless
analog input triggering is used, chose settings by a sufficient margin from normal
operation values. Phase voltages are not recommended for trigging.

There is a risk of flash wear out if the disturbance report triggers too
often.

Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere are linked to the information on a
report. Such parameters are, for example, station and object identifiers, CT and VT
ratios.

14.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP GUID-E7A2DB38-DD96-4296-B3D5-EB7FBE77CE07 v2

14.7.1 Identification GUID-E0247779-27A2-4E6C-A6DD-D4C31516CA5C v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 457

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

14.7.2 Application GUID-F9D225B1-68F7-4D15-AA89-C9211B450D19 v3

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible to poll
signals from various other function blocks.

BINSTATREP has 16 inputs and 16 outputs. The output status follows the inputs and
can be read from the local HMI or via SPA communication.

When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input
signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal
resets.

INPUTn

OUTPUTn
t t

IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN-US

Figure 195: BINSTATREP logical diagram

14.7.3 Setting guidelines GUID-BBDA6900-4C1A-4A7C-AEA5-3C49C2749254 v2

The pulse time t is the only setting for the Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP).
Each output can be set or reset individually, but the pulse time will be the same for all
outputs in the entire BINSTATREP function.

14.8 Limit counter L4UFCNT GUID-22E141DB-38B3-462C-B031-73F7466DD135 v1

14.8.1 Identification GUID-F3FB7B33-B189-4819-A1F0-8AC7762E9B7E v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

458 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 14
Monitoring

14.8.2 Application GUID-41B13135-5069-4A5A-86CE-B7DBE9CFEF38 v2

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) is intended for applications where positive and/or negative
sides on a binary signal need to be counted.

The limit counter provides four independent limits to be checked against the
accumulated counted value. The four limit reach indication outputs can be utilized to
initiate proceeding actions. The output indicators remain high until the reset of the
function.

It is also possible to initiate the counter from a non-zero value by resetting the function
to the wanted initial value provided as a setting.

If applicable, the counter can be set to stop or rollover to zero and continue counting
after reaching the maximum count value. The steady overflow output flag indicates the
next count after reaching the maximum count value. It is also possible to set the
counter to rollover and indicate the overflow as a pulse, which lasts up to the first
count after rolling over to zero. In this case, periodic pulses will be generated at
multiple overflow of the function.

14.8.3 Setting guidelines GUID-5AECCDBC-7385-4D9F-940C-9D4A0E59B106 v1

GUID-DA5DA8D7-4821-4BFB-86CC-28658E376270 v1

The parameters for Limit counter L4UFCNT are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

14.9 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC

14.9.1 Identification GUID-3F9EF4FA-74FA-4D1D-88A0-E948B722B64F v1

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC - -

14.9.2 Application GUID-225D8341-2D31-49F1-9B49-571346C0FE26 v1

The function is used for user-defined logics and it can also be used for different
purposes internally in the IED. An application example is to accumulate the total
running/energized time of the generator, transformer, reactor, capacitor bank or even
line.

Settable time limits for warning and alarm are provided. The time limit for overflow
indication is fixed to 99999.9 hours. At overflow the accumulated time resets and the
accumulation starts from zero again.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 459

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Monitoring

14.9.3 Setting guidelines GUID-D3BED56A-BA80-486F-B2A8-E47F7AC63468 v1

The settings tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits defined in hours. The
achievable resolution of the settings is 0.1 hours (6 minutes).

tAlarm and tWarning are independent settings, that is, there is no check
if tAlarm > tWarning.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours.

The setting tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.

460 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 15
Metering

Section 15 Metering

15.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT IP14600-1 v3

15.1.1 Identification
M14879-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -

S00947 V1 EN-US

15.1.2 Application M13395-3 v6

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module (BIM), and
read by the PCFCNT function. The number of pulses in the counter is then reported via
the station bus to the substation automation system or read via the station monitoring
system as a service value. When using IEC 61850–8–1, a scaled service value is
available over the station bus.

The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses from external energy
meters. An optional number of inputs from an arbitrary input module in IED can be
used for this purpose with a frequency of up to 40 Hz. The pulse-counter logic
PCFCNT can also be used as a general purpose counter.

15.1.3 Setting guidelines M13396-4 v9

Parameters that can be set individually for each pulse counter from PCM600:

• Operation: Disabled/Enabled
• tReporting: 0-3600s
• EventMask: NoEvents/ReportEvents

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 461

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Metering

Configuration of inputs and outputs of PCFCNT is made via PCM600.

On the Binary input module (BIM), the debounce filter default time is set to 1 ms, that
is, the counter suppresses pulses with a pulse length less than 1 ms. The input
oscillation blocking frequency is preset to 40 Hz meaning that the counter detects the
input to oscillate if the input frequency is greater than 40 Hz. Oscillation suppression is
released at 30 Hz. Block/release values for oscillation can be changed on the local HMI
and PCM600 under Main menu/Configuration/I/O modules.

The setting is common for all input channels on BIM, that is, if limit
changes are made for inputs not connected to the pulse counter, the
setting also influences the inputs on the same board used for pulse
counting.

15.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR SEMOD153638-1 v2

15.2.1 Identification
SEMOD175537-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

15.2.2 Application SEMOD175546-4 v5

Energy calculation and demand handling function (ETPMMTR) is intended for

statistics of the forward and reverse active and reactive energy. It has a high accuracy
basically given by the measurements function (CVMMXN). This function has a site
calibration possibility to further increase the total accuracy.

The function is connected to the instantaneous outputs of (CVMMXN) as shown in

figure 196.

462 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 15
Metering

ETPMMTR
CVMMXN
P_ INST P

Q_ INST Q

STARTACC

STOPACC

RSTACC

RSTDMD

IEC130 00190-2-en.vsdx
IEC13000190 V2 EN-US

Figure 196: Connection of energy calculation and demand handling function

ETPMMTR to the measurements function (CVMMXN)

The energy values can be read through communication in MWh and MVArh in
monitoring tool of PCM600 and/or alternatively the values can be presented on the
local HMI. The local HMI graphical display is configured with PCM600 Graphical
Display Editor tool (GDE) with a measuring value which is selected to the active and
reactive component as preferred. Also all Accumulated Active Forward, Active
Reverse, Reactive Forward and Reactive Reverse energy values can be presented.

Maximum demand values are presented in MWh or MVArh in the same way.

Alternatively, the energy values can be presented with use of the pulse counters
function (PCGGIO). The output energy values are scaled with the pulse output setting
values EAFAccPlsQty, EARAccPlsQty, ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty of the
energy metering function and then the pulse counter can be set-up to present the correct
values by scaling in this function. Pulse counter values can then be presented on the
local HMI in the same way and/or sent to the SA (Substation Automation) system
through communication where the total energy then is calculated by summation of the
energy pulses. This principle is good for very high values of energy as the saturation of
numbers else will limit energy integration to about one year with 50 kV and 3000 A.
After that the accumulation will start on zero again.

15.2.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD175556-4 v6

The parameters are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the energy calculation and demand handling
function ETPMMTR:

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
IBase, VBase and SBase as applicable.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 463

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Metering

Operation: Disabled/Enabled

EnaAcc: Disabled/Enabled is used to switch the accumulation of energy on and off.

tEnergy: Time interval when energy is measured.

tEnergyOnPls: gives the pulse length ON time of the pulse. It should be at least 100 ms
when connected to the Pulse counter function block. Typical value can be 100 ms.

tEnergyOffPls: gives the OFF time between pulses. Typical value can be 100 ms.

EAFAccPlsQty and EARAccPlsQty: gives the MWh value in each pulse. It should be
selected together with the setting of the Pulse counter (PCGGIO) settings to give the
correct total pulse value.

ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty : gives the MVArh value in each pulse. It should be
selected together with the setting of the Pulse counter (PCGGIO) settings to give the
correct total pulse value.

For the advanced user there are a number of settings for direction, zero clamping, max
limit, and so on. Normally, the default values are suitable for these parameters.

464 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 16
Ethernet-based communication

Section 16 Ethernet-based communication

16.1 Access point

16.1.1 Application GUID-2942DF07-9BC1-4F49-9611-A5691D2C925C v1

The access points are used to connect the IED to the communication buses (like the
station bus) that use communication protocols. The access point can be used for single
and redundant data communication. The access points are also used for communication
with the merging units and for time synchronization using Precision Time Protocol
(PTP).

16.1.2 Setting guidelines GUID-CEDC23B1-09F6-4C85-98D8-9D8E2C2553FE v1

The physical ports allocated to access points 2–6 have to be added in

the hardware tool in PCM600 before the access points can be
configured. The factory setting only includes the physical ports
allocated to the front port and access point 1.

The settings for the access points are configured using the Ethernet configuration tool
(ECT) in PCM600.

The access point is activated if the Operation checkbox is checked for the respective
access point and a partial or common write to IED is performed.

To increase security, it is recommended to deactivate the access point

when it is not in use.

Redundancy and PTP cannot be set for the front port (Access point 0) as redundant
communication and PTP are only available for the rear optical Ethernet ports.

Subnetwork shows the SCL subnetwork to which the access point is connected. This
column shows the SCL subnetworks available in the PCM600 project. SCL
subnetworks can be created/deleted in the Subnetworks tab of IEC 61850
Configuration tool in PCM600.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 465

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Ethernet-based communication

When saving the ECT configuration after selecting a subnetwork, ECT

creates the access point in the SCL model. Unselecting the subnetwork
removes the access point from the SCL model. This column is editable
for IEC61850 Ed2 IEDs and not editable for IEC61850 Ed1 IEDs
because in IEC61850 Ed1 only one access point can be modelled in
SCL.

The IP address can be set in IP address. ECT validates the value, the access points
have to be on separate subnetworks.

The subnetwork mask can be set in Subnet mask. This field will be updated to the SCL
model based on the Subnetwork selection.

To select which communication protocols can be run on the respective access points,
check or uncheck the check box for the relevant protocol. The protocols are not
activated/deactivated in ECT, only filtered for the specific access point. For
information on how to activate the individual communication protocols, see the
communication protocol chapters.

To increase security it is recommended to uncheck protocols that are

not used on the access point.

The default gateway can be selected by entering the IP address in Default gateway. The
default gateway is the router that is used to communicate with the devices in the other
subnetwork. By default this is set to 0.0.0.0 which means that no default gateway is
selected. ECT validates the entered value, but the default gateway has to be in the same
subnetwork as the access point. The default gateway is the router that is being used as
default, that is when no route has been set up for the destination. If communication
with a device in another subnetwork is needed, a route has to be set up. For more
information on routes, see the Routes chapter in the Technical manual and the
Application manual.

DHCP can be activated for the front port from the LHMI in Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/Ethernet configuration/Front port/DHCP:1

466 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 16
Ethernet-based communication

16.2 Redundant communication

16.2.1 Identification
GUID-B7AE0374-0336-42B8-90AF-3AE1C79A4116 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy PRP - -
protocol
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless HSR - -
redundancy
Access point diagnostic for redundant RCHLCCH - -
Ethernet ports

16.2.2 Application GUID-172BA5D7-6532-4B0D-8C1D-2E02F70B4FCB v1

Dynamic access point diagnostic (RCHLCCH) is used to supervise and assure

redundant Ethernet communication over two channels. This will secure data transfer
even though one communication channel might not be available for some reason

Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) and High-availability Seamless Redundancy

(HSR) provides redundant communication over station bus running the available
communication protocols. The redundant communication uses two Ethernet ports.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 467

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Ethernet-based communication

Device 1 Device 2

AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

Switch A Switch B

PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

AP1 AP1

Device 3 Device 4

IEC09000758-4-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V4 EN-US

Figure 197: Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)

468 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 16
Ethernet-based communication

Device 1 Device 2

AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA

AP1 AP1

Device 3 Device 4

IEC16000038-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000038 V1 EN-US

Figure 198: High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

16.2.3 Setting guidelines GUID-887B0AE2-0F2E-414D-96FD-7EC935C5D2D8 v1

Redundant communication is configured with the Ethernet configuration tool in

PCM600.

Redundancy: redundant communication is activated when the parameter is set to

PRP-0, PRP-1 or HSR. The settings for the next access point will be hidden and
PhyPortB will show the second port information. Redundant communication is
activated after a common write to IED is done.

PRP-1 should be used primarily, PRP-0 is intended only for use in existing PRP-
networks. PRP-1 and HSR can be combined in a mixed network.

If the access point is not taken into operation, the write option in Ethernet
Configuration Tool can be used to activate the access point.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 469

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Ethernet-based communication

IEC16000039-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000039 V1 EN-US

Figure 199: ECT screen with Redundancy set to PRP-1 on Access point 1 and
HSR Access point 3

16.3 Merging unit

16.3.1 Application GUID-E630C16F-EDB8-40AE-A8A2-94189982D15F v1

The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to

communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly
known as Merging Units (MU). The rear access points are used for the communication.

The merging units (MU) are called so because they can gather analog values from one
or more measuring transformers, sample the data and send the data over process bus to
other clients (or subscribers) in the system. Some merging units are able to get data
from classical measuring transformers, others from non-conventional measuring
transducers and yet others can pick up data from both types.

470 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 16
Ethernet-based communication

IEC17000044-1-en.vsdx
IEC17000044 V1 EN-US

Figure 200: Merging unit

16.3.2 Setting guidelines GUID-3449AB24-8C9D-4D9A-BD46-5DDF59A0F8E3 v1

For information on the merging unit setting guidelines, see section IEC/UCA
61850-9-2LE communication protocol.

16.4 Routes

16.4.1 Application GUID-19616AC4-0FFD-4FF4-9198-5E33938E5ABD v1

Setting up a route enables communication to a device that is located in another

subnetwork. Routing is used when the destination device is not in the same subnetwork
as the default gateway.

The route specifies that when a package is sent to the destination device it should be
sent through the selected router. If no route is specified the source device will not find
the destination device.

16.4.2 Setting guidelines GUID-2C4A312A-00DC-44C8-B2D9-CD0822E1C806 v1

Routes are configured using the Ethernet configuration tool in PCM600.

Operation for the route can be set to On/Off by checking and unchecking the check-
box in the operation column.

Gateway specifies the address of the gateway.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 471

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Ethernet-based communication

Destination specifies the destination.

Destination subnet mask specifies the subnetwork mask of the destination.

472 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 17
Station communication

Section 17 Station communication

17.1 Communication protocols M14815-3 v13

Each IED is provided with several communication interfaces enabling it to connect to

one or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation
Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Available communication protocols are:

• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• LON communication protocol
• SPA communication protocol
• IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• DNP 3.0 communication protocol

Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

17.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IP14616-1 v2

17.2.1 Application IEC 61850-8-1 IP14865-1 v2

M13912-3 v4

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol allows vertical communication to HSI clients

and allows horizontal communication between two or more intelligent electronic
devices (IEDs) from one or several vendors to exchange information and to use it in
the performance of their functions and for correct co-operation.

GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event), which is a part of IEC 61850–8–
1 standard, allows the IEDs to communicate state and control information amongst
themselves, using a publish-subscribe mechanism. That is, upon detecting an event, the
IED(s) use a multi-cast transmission to notify those devices that have registered to
receive the data. An IED can, by publishing a GOOSE message, report its status. It can
also request a control action to be directed at any device in the network.
M13913-3 v6

Figure 201 shows the topology of an IEC 61850–8–1 configuration. IEC 61850–8–1
specifies only the interface to the substation LAN. The LAN itself is left to the system
integrator.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 473

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Station communication

Engineering
Station HSI
Workstation Gateway
Base System
SMS
CC

Printer

IED IED IED IED IED IED IED IED IED

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

KIOSK 1 KIOSK 2 KIOSK 3

IEC09000135_en.v
sd
IEC09000135 V1 EN-US

Figure 201: SA system with IEC 61850–8–1

M16925-3 v4

Figure202 shows the GOOSE peer-to-peer communication.

474 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 17
Station communication

Station HSI
MicroSCADA
Gateway

GOOSE

IED IED IED IED IED

A A A A A

Control Protection Control and protection Control Protection

en05000734.vsd
IEC05000734 V1 EN-US

Figure 202: Example of a broadcasted GOOSE message

17.2.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55317-5 v7

There are two settings related to the IEC 61850–8–1 protocol:

Operation: User can set IEC 61850 communication to Enabled or Disabled.

GOOSEPortEd1: Selection of the Ethernet link where GOOSE traffic shall be sent and
received. This is only valid for Edition 1 and can be ignored if Edition 2 is used. For
Edition 2, the Ethernet link selection is done with the Ethernet Configuration Tool
(ECT) in PCM600.

17.2.3 Horizontal communication via GOOSE

17.2.3.1 Sending data GUID-9888ECAD-8221-4B31-A443-EB1E3A9022C4 v1

In addition to the data object and data attributes of the logical nodes, it is possible to
send the outputs of the function blocks using the generic communication blocks. The
outputs of this function can be set in a dataset and be sent in a GOOSE Control Block
to other subscriber IEDs. There are different function blocks for different type of
sending data.

Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC,

SP16GAPC SEMOD55999-1 v4

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 475

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Station communication

Application SEMOD55350-5 v8

Generic communication function for Single Point Value (SPGAPC) function is used to
send one single logical output to other systems or equipment in the substation.
SP16GAPC can be used to send up to 16 single point values from the application
functions running in the same cycle time. SPGAPC has one visible input and
SPGAPC16 has 16 visible inputs that should be connected in the ACT tool.

Setting guidelines SEMOD55376-5 v5

There are no settings available for the user for SPGAPC.

Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC SEMOD55402-1 v3

Application SEMOD55872-5 v10

Generic communication function for measured values (MVGAPC) function is used to

send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

Setting guidelines SEMOD55424-5 v5

The settings available for Generic communication function for Measured Value
(MVGAPC) function allows the user to choose a deadband and a zero deadband for the
monitored signal. Values within the zero deadband are considered as zero.

The high and low limit settings provides limits for the high-high-, high, normal, low
and low-low ranges of the measured value. The actual range of the measured value is
shown on the range output of MVGAPC function block. When a Measured value
expander block (RANGE_XP) is connected to the range output, the logical outputs of
the RANGE_XP are changed accordingly.

17.2.3.2 Receiving data GUID-CAE4B020-7131-49BF-BA29-3EEE0EFEA2B8 v1

The GOOSE data must be received at function blocks. There are different GOOSE
receiving function blocks depending on the type of the received data. Refer to the
Engineering manual for more information about how to configure GOOSE.
Function block type Data Type
GOOSEBINRCV 16 single point
GOOSEINTLKRCV 2 single points
16 double points
GOOSEDPRCV Double point
GOOSEINTRCV Integer
GOOSEMVRCV Analog value
GOOSESPRCV Single point
GOOSEXLNRCV Switch status

476 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 17
Station communication

Application GUID-808177B7-02CA-40DF-B41B-8B580E38478B v1

The GOOSE receive function blocks are used to receive subscribed data from the
GOOSE protocol. The validity of the data value is exposed as outputs of the function
block as well as the validity of the communication. It is recommended to use these
outputs to ensure that only valid data is handled on the subscriber IED. An example
could be to control the external reservation before operating on a bay. In the figure
below, the GOOSESPRCV is used to receive the status of the bay reservation. The
validity of the received data is used in additional logic to guarantee that the value has
good quality before operation on that bay.

GOOSESPRCV AND AND

Block Spout Input1 out Input1 out

Ext_Res_OK_To_Operate
DataValid Input2 Noput Input2 Noput
CommValid Input3 Input3
Test Input4 Input4
IEC16000082=1=en.vsd
IEC16000082 V1 EN-US

Figure 203: GOOSESPRCV and AND function blocks - checking the validity of the
received data

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 477

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Station communication

17.3 LON communication protocol IP14420-1 v1

17.3.1 Application IP14863-1 v1

M14804-3 v5

Station HSI Control Center

MicroSCADA

Gateway

Star coupler
RER 111

IED IED IED

IEC05000663-1-en.vsd
IEC05000663 V2 EN-US

Figure 204: Example of LON communication structure for a substation automation

system

An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IEDs through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace,
from the control center and also from other IEDs via bay-to-bay horizontal
communication. For LON communication an SLM card should be ordered for the
IEDs.

The fibre optic LON bus is implemented using either glass core or plastic core fibre
optic cables.
Table 51: Specification of the fibre optic connectors
Glass fibre Plastic fibre
Cable connector ST-connector snap-in connector
Cable diameter 62.5/125 m 1 mm
Max. cable length 1000 m 10 m
Table continues on next page

478 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 17
Station communication

Glass fibre Plastic fibre

Wavelength 820-900 nm 660 nm
Transmitted power -13 dBm (HFBR-1414) -13 dBm (HFBR-1521)
Receiver sensitivity -24 dBm (HFBR-2412) -20 dBm (HFBR-2521)

The LON Protocol M14804-32 v2

The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from

Echelon Corporation. This protocol is designed for communication in control networks
and is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can
communicate with each other directly. For more information of the bay-to-bay
communication, refer to the section Multiple command function.

Hardware and software modules M14804-35 v4

The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application,
but one very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibres connecting
the star coupler to the IEDs. To interface the IEDs from the MicroSCADA with Classic
Monitor, application library LIB520 is required.

The HV Control 670 software module is included in the LIB520 high-voltage process
package, which is a part of the Application Software Library in MicroSCADA
applications.

The HV Control 670 software module is used for control functions in the IEDs. The
module contains a process picture, dialogues and a tool to generate a process database
for the control application in MicroSCADA.

When using MicroSCADA Monitor Pro instead of the Classic Monitor, SA LIB is used
together with 670 series Object Type files.

The HV Control 670 software module and 670 series Object Type files
are used with both 650 and 670 series IEDs.

Use the LON Network Tool (LNT) to set the LON communication. This is a software
tool applied as one node on the LON bus. To communicate via LON, the IEDs need to
know
• The node addresses of the other connected IEDs.
• The network variable selectors to be used.

This is organized by LNT.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 479

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Station communication

The node address is transferred to LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter
ServicePinMsg = Yes. The node address is sent to LNT via the LON bus, or LNT can
scan the network for new nodes.

The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s. This can
be changed by LNT.

17.3.2 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND SEMOD119881-1 v3

17.3.2.1 Identification
GUID-1A6E066C-6399-4D37-8CA5-3074537E48B2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -

17.3.2.2 Application M14790-3 v5

The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive
signals via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16
binary inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function
block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.

17.3.2.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD119915-1 v1

Settings M14789-4 v3

The parameters for the multiple command function are set via PCM600.

The Mode setting sets the outputs to either a Steady or Pulsed mode.

17.4 SPA communication protocol IP14614-1 v1

17.4.1 Application IP14785-1 v1

SEMOD115767-5 v6

SPA communication protocol is an alternative to IEC 60870-5-103, and they use the
same rear communication port.

480 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 17
Station communication

When communicating with a PC connected to the utility substation LAN via WAN and
the utility office LAN (see Figure 205), and when using the rear optical Ethernet port,
the only hardware required for a station monitoring system is:

• Optical fibres from the IED to the utility substation LAN

• PC connected to the utility office LAN

Utility LAN
Remote
monitoring
WAN

Substation LAN

IED IED IED

ANSI05000715-4-en.vsd

ANSI05000715 V4 EN-US

Figure 205: SPA communication structure for a remote monitoring system via a
substation LAN, WAN and utility LAN

SPA communication is mainly used for the Station Monitoring System. It can include
different IEDs with remote communication possibilities. Connection to a PC can be
made directly (if the PC is located in the substation), via a telephone modem through a
telephone network with ITU (former CCITT) characteristics or via a LAN/WAN
connection.

glass <1000 m according to optical budget

plastic <25 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget

Functionality SEMOD115767-25 v2

The SPA protocol V2.5 is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication. The
communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the IED is a slave and the
PC is the master. Only one master can be applied on each fibre optic loop. A program
is required in the master computer for interpretation of the SPA-bus codes and for
translation of the data that should be sent to the IED.

For the specification of the SPA protocol V2.5, refer to SPA-bus Communication
Protocol V2.5.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 481

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Station communication

17.4.2 Setting guidelines M11876-3 v6

SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 use the same rear communication port. This port can
be set for SPA use on the local HMI under Main menu /Configuration /
Communication /Station communication/Port configuration/SLM optical serial
port/PROTOCOL:1. When the communication protocol is selected, the IED is
automatically restarted, and the port then operates as a SPA port.

The SPA communication setting parameters are set on the local HMI under Main
menu/Configuration/Communication/Station communication/SPA/SPA:1.

The most important SPA communication setting parameters are SlaveAddress and
BaudRate. They are essential for all communication contact to the IED. SlaveAddress
and BaudRate can be set only on the local HMI for rear and front channel
communication.

SlaveAddress can be set to any value between 1–899 as long as the slave number is
unique within the used SPA loop. BaudRate (communication speed) can be set between
300–38400 baud. BaudRate should be the same for the whole station although different
communication speeds in a loop are possible. If different communication speeds are
used in the same fibre optical loop or RS485 network, take this into account when
making the communication setup in the communication master (the PC).

With local fibre optic communication, communication speed is usually set to 19200 or
38400 baud. With telephone communication, the speed setting depends on the quality
of the connection and the type of modem used. Refer to technical data to determine the
rated communication speed for the selected communication interfaces.

The IED does not adapt its speed to the actual communication
conditions because the communication speed is set on the local HMI.

482 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 17
Station communication

17.5 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol IP14615-1 v2

17.5.1 Application IP14864-1 v1

M17109-3 v6

TCP/IP

Control
Station Center
HSI

Gateway

Star coupler

IED IED IED

ANSI05000660-4-en.vsd
ANSI05000660 V4 EN-US

Figure 206: Example of IEC 60870-5-103 communication structure for a substation

automation system

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED

communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

When communicating locally in the station using a Personal Computer (PC) or a

Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) connected to the Communication and processing
module, the only hardware needed is optical fibres and an opto/electrical converter for
the PC/RTU, or a RS-485 connection depending on the used IED communication
interface.

17.5.1.1 Functionality M17109-38 v3

IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial

communication exchanging information with a control system. In IEC terminology a
primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is
based on a point-to-point principle. The master must have software that can interpret

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 483

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Station communication

the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages. For detailed information about IEC
60870-5-103, refer to IEC 60870 standard part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the
section 103, Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment.

17.5.1.2 Design M17109-41 v1

General M17109-43 v2

The protocol implementation consists of the following functions:

• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurands)
• Fault location
• Command handling
• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization

Hardware M17109-59 v1

When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote Terminal

Unit (RTU) in the station, using the SPA/IEC port, the only hardware needed is:·
Optical fibres, glass/plastic· Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU· PC/RTU

Commands M17109-62 v4

The commands defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are represented in dedicated
function blocks. These blocks have output signals for all available commands
according to the protocol. For more information, refer to the Communication protocol
manual, IEC 60870-5-103.

• IED commands in control direction

Function block with defined IED functions in control direction, I103IEDCMD. This
block use PARAMETR as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.

• Function commands in control direction

484 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 17
Station communication

Function block with pre-defined functions in control direction, I103CMD. This block
includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.

• Function commands in control direction

Function block with user defined functions in control direction, I103UserCMD. These
function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private
range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each output signal.

Status M17109-74 v6

Measurands M17109-99 v2

The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9 according to the
standard.

• Measurands in public range

Function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals,
I103Meas.

• Measurands in private range

Function blocks with user defined input measurands in monitor direction,

I103MeasUsr. These function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for
each block in the private range, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for
each block.

Fault location M17109-108 v1

The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the line length in
reactive ohms, it gives the distance to the fault in percent. The data is available and
reported when the fault locator function is included in the IED.

Disturbance recordings M17109-111 v9

• The transfer functionality is based on the Disturbance recorder function. The

analog and binary signals recorded will be reported to the master by polling. The
eight last disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A
file that has been transferred and acknowledged by the master cannot be
transferred again.
• The binary signals that are included in the disturbance recorder are those that are
connected to the disturbance function blocks B1RBDR to B22RBDR. These
function blocks include the function type and the information number for each
signal. For more information on the description of the Disturbance report in the
Technical reference manual. The analog channels, that are reported, are those

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 485

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Station communication

connected to the disturbance function blocks A1RADR to A4RADR. The eight

first ones belong to the public range and the remaining ones to the private range.

17.5.2 Settings M17109-116 v1

17.5.2.1 Settings for RS485 and optical serial communication M17109-118 v12

General settings
SPA, DNP and IEC 60870-5-103 can be configured to operate on the SLM optical
serial port while DNP and IEC 60870-5-103 additionally can utilize the RS485 port. A
single protocol can be active on a given physical port at any time.

Two different areas in the HMI are used to configure the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.

1. The port specific IEC 60870-5-103 protocol parameters are configured under:
Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station Communication/
IEC60870-5-103/
• <config-selector>
• SlaveAddress
• BaudRate
• RevPolarity (optical channel only)
• CycMeasRepTime
• MasterTimeDomain
• TimeSyncMode
• EvalTimeAccuracy
• EventRepMode
• CmdMode
• RepIntermediatePos
<config-selector> is:
• “OPTICAL103:1” for the optical serial channel on the SLM
• “RS485103:1” for the RS485 port
2. The protocol to activate on a physical port is selected under:
Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station Communication/Port
configuration/
• RS485 port
• RS485PROT:1 (off, DNP, IEC103)
• SLM optical serial port
• PROTOCOL:1 (off, DNP, IEC103, SPA)

486 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 17
Station communication

GUID-CD4EB23C-65E7-4ED5-AFB1-A9D5E9EE7CA8 V3 EN
GUID-CD4EB23C-65E7-4ED5-AFB1-A9D5E9EE7CA8 V3 EN-US

Figure 207: Settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication

The general settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication are the following:
• SlaveAddress and BaudRate: Settings for slave number and communication speed
(baud rate).
The slave number can be set to any value between 1 and 254. The communication
speed, can be set either to 9600 bits/s or 19200 bits/s.
• RevPolarity: Setting for inverting the light (or not). Standard IEC 60870-5-103
setting is Enabled.
• CycMeasRepTime: See I103MEAS function block for more information.
• EventRepMode: Defines the mode for how events are reported. The event buffer
size is 1000 events.

Event reporting mode

If EventRepMode = SeqOfEvent, all GI and spontaneous events will be delivered in the
order they were generated by BSW. The most recent value is the latest value delivered.
All GI data from a single block will come from the same cycle.

If EventRepMode = HiPriSpont, spontaneous events will be delivered prior to GI

event. To prevent old GI data from being delivered after a new spontaneous event, the
pending GI event is modified to contain the same value as the spontaneous event. As a
result, the GI dataset is not time-correlated.

17.5.2.2 Settings from PCM600 M17109-132 v2

I103USEDEF GUID-A41170D6-2846-4E5E-8B7F-85B53D4EF6B6 v1

For each input of the I103USEDEF function there is a setting for the information
number of the connected signal. The information number can be set to any value
between 0 and 255. To get proper operation of the sequence of events the event masks
in the event function is to be set to ON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the
event mask is to be set to ON_SET.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 487

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Station communication

In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Refer to description
of the Main Function type set on the local HMI.

Commands M17109-138 v2

As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated function block with
eight output signals. Use PCM600 to configure these signals. To realize the
BlockOfInformation command, which is operated from the local HMI, the output
BLKINFO on the IEC command function block ICOM has to be connected to an input
on an event function block. This input must have the information number 20 (monitor
direction blocked) according to the standard.

Disturbance Recordings M17109-141 v8

For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting for the
information number of the connected signal. The function type and the information
number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. To get INF and FUN for the
recorded binary signals, there are parameters on the disturbance recorder for each
input. The user must set these parameters to whatever he connects to the corresponding
input.

Refer to description of Main Function type set on the local HMI.

Recorded analog channels are sent with ASDU26 and ASDU31. One information
element in these ASDUs is called ACC, and it indicates the actual channel to be
processed. The channels on disturbance recorder are sent with an ACC as shown in
Table 52.
Table 52: Channels on disturbance recorder sent with a given ACC
DRA#-Input ACC IEC103 meaning
1 1 IA
2 2 IB
3 3 IC
4 4 IG
5 5 VA
6 6 VB
7 7 VC
8 8 VG
9 64 Private range
10 65 Private range
11 66 Private range
12 67 Private range
13 68 Private range
14 69 Private range
Table continues on next page

488 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 17
Station communication

DRA#-Input ACC IEC103 meaning

15 70 Private range
16 71 Private range
17 72 Private range
18 73 Private range
19 74 Private range
20 75 Private range
21 76 Private range
22 77 Private range
23 78 Private range
24 79 Private range
25 80 Private range
26 81 Private range
27 82 Private range
28 83 Private range
29 84 Private range
30 85 Private range
31 86 Private range
32 87 Private range
33 88 Private range
34 89 Private range
35 90 Private range
36 91 Private range
37 92 Private range
38 93 Private range
39 94 Private range
40 95 Private range

17.5.3 Function and information types M17109-145 v6

Product type IEC103mainFunType value Comment:

REL 128 Compatible range

REC 242 Private range, use default

RED 192 Compatible range

RET 176 Compatible range

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 489

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Station communication

REB 207 Private range

REG 150 Private range

REQ 245 Private range

RER 152 Private range

RES 118 Private range

Refer to the tables in the Technical reference manual /Station communication,

specifying the information types supported by the communication protocol IEC
60870-5-103.

To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection

IED.

There is no representation for the following parts:

• Generating events for test mode

• Cause of transmission: Info no 11, Local operation

Glass or plastic fibre should be used. BFOC/2.5 is the recommended interface to use
(BFOC/2.5 is the same as ST connectors). ST connectors are used with the optical
power as specified in standard.

For more information, refer to IEC standard IEC 60870-5-103.

17.6 DNP3 Communication protocol

17.6.1 Application GUID-EF1F0C38-9FF6-4683-8B10-AAA372D42185 v1

For more information on the application and setting guidelines for the DNP3
communication protocol refer to the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.

490 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 18
Remote communication

Section 18 Remote communication

18.1 Binary signal transfer IP12423-1 v2

18.1.1 Identification
M14849-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
BinSignRec1_1
Binary signal transfer,
BinSignRec1_2 - -
receive
BinSignReceive2
Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit BinSigRec1_12M
- -
receive BinSigRec1_22M
BinSignTrans1_1
Binary signal transfer,
BinSignTrans1_2 - -
transmit
BinSignTransm2
Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit BinSigTran1_12M
- -
transmit BinSigTran1_22M

18.1.2 Application IP16245-1 v1

M12844-3 v4

The IEDs can be equipped with communication devices for line differential
communication (not applicable for RER670) and/or communication of binary signals
between IEDs. The same communication hardware is used for both purposes.

Sending of binary signals between two IEDs is used in teleprotection schemes and for
direct transfer trips. In addition to this, there are application possibilities, for example,
blocking/enabling functionality in the remote substation, changing setting group in the
remote IED depending on the switching situation in the local substation and so on.

If equipped with a 64kbit/s LDCM module, the IED can be configured to send either
192 binary signals or 3 analog and 8 binary signals to a remote IED. If equipped with a
2Mbps LDCM module, the IED can send 9 analog channels and 192 binary channels to
a remote IED.

Link forwarding GUID-DD3CF47C-A202-4416-954A-EFC0F8BEBCB7 v1

If it is not possible to have a communication link between each station, the solution has
been to set the protection up in a slave-master-slave configuration. This means that in
Figure 208, only IED-B has access to all currents and, therefore, this is the only place

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 491

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Remote communication

where the differential current is evaluated. If the evaluation results in a trip, the trip
signal will be sent over the two communication links.

3-end differential protection with two communication links

Ldcm312 Ldcm312
IED-A Ldcm312
IED-B Ldcm313
IED-C

IEC16000077-1-en.vsd
IEC16000077 V1 EN-US

Figure 208: Three-end differential protection with two communication links

If the LDCM is in 2Mbit mode, you can send the three local currents as well as the
three remote currents from the other links by configuring the transmitters in IED-B:
1. Ldcm312 transmitter sends the local currents and the three currents received by
Ldcm313.
2. Ldcm313 transmitter sends the three local currents and the three currents received
from Ldcm312.

As a result, six currents are received in IED-A and IED-C. These currents can be
connected to the protection function together with the local three currents.

In order to forward the logic signals (for example, inter-trip or inter-

block) between IED-A and IED-C, the setting LinkForwarded should
be defined. In IED-B, it is set to LDCM313 for Ldcm312 and to
LDCM312 for ldcm313.

This setup results in a master-master-master configuration, but without the benefit of

reverting to a slave-master-slave configuration in case of a communication link
interruption. In case of a communication link interruption, all three IEDs would be
blocked.

18.1.2.1 Communication hardware solutions M12844-11 v5

The LDCM (Line Data Communication Module) has an optical connection such that
two IEDs can be connected over a direct fibre (multimode), as shown in figure 209.
The protocol used is IEEE/ANSI C37.94. The distance with this solution is typical 110
km/68 miles.

492 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 18
Remote communication

C M
CM LD
LD
CM CM
LD LD

en06000519-2.vsd
IEC06000519 V2 EN-US

Figure 209: Direct fibre optical connection between two IEDs with LDCM

The LDCM can also be used together with an external optical to galvanic G.703
converter as shown in figure 210. These solutions are aimed for connections to a
multiplexer, which in turn is connected to a telecommunications transmission network
(for example PDH).

Multiplexer Multiplexer

Telecom. Network

*) *)

*) Converting optical to galvanic G.703

en05000527-2.vsd
IEC05000527 V2 EN-US

Figure 210: LDCM with an external optical to galvanic converter and a multiplexer

When an external modem G.703 is used, the connection between LDCM and the
modem is made with a multimode fibre of max. 3 km/2 mile length. The IEEE/ANSI
C37.94 protocol is always used between LDCM and the modem.

18.1.2.2 Application possibility with one-phase REB670 M12844-20 v4

For busbar protection applications in substations where dynamic zone selection is

required, it is typically necessary to wire the normally open and normally closed
auxiliary contacts from every monitored disconnector and/or circuit breaker to the

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 493

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Remote communication

optocoupler inputs of the busbar protection. When one phase version of REB670 is
used, then six optocoupler inputs (that is, two in each phase/IED) are required for every
primary switchgear object. For big stations (for example, with 24 bays) this will
require quite a lot of binary inputs into every IED. To limit the number of required
optocoupler inputs into every IED it is possible to use LDCM communication modules
to effectively share the binary Ios between three units, as shown in figure 211211.

LDCM#1
<= 192 Binary Signals =>
Wire status of REB 670, B31
disconnectors Phase L1

LDCM#2
from Bays 01-08 <= 192 Binary Signals =>

LDCM#1
Wire status of REB 670, B31
disconnectors Phase L2
from Bays 09-16

LDCM#2
<= 192 Binary Signals =>

LDCM#1
Wire status of
REB 670, B31
disconnectors
Phase L3
from Bays 17-24
LDCM#2

en06000198.vsd
IEC06000198 V2 EN-US

Figure 211: Example how to share binary IO between one-phase REB670 IEDs by
using LDCM modules

As shown in figure 211, it is possible to wire only the status for bays 01-08 to A phase-
IED. After that the information about auxiliary contact status for switchgear objects
from these eight bays can be sent via LDCM modules to other two phases. In the
similar way information from other bays can be only wired to B, respectively C phase
IED and then shared to the other two phases via LDCM communication.

Typical LDCM communication delay between two IEDs is in order of 30-40 ms. Note
that for disconnector status this delay will not pose any practical problems. However,
time delay caused by LDCM communication can be crucial for circuit breakers status.
In such cases it is strongly recommended that at least the circuit breaker closing
command from every circuit breaker is directly wired to all three phases/IEDs to

494 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 18
Remote communication

minimize any risk for unwanted operation of the busbar differential protection zones
due to late inclusion of respective bay current into the differential measuring circuit.

18.1.3 Setting guidelines M12454-3 v6

64 kbit and 2 Mbit mode common settings

ChannelMode defines how an IED discards the LDCM information when one of the
IEDs in the system is out of service: it can either be done on the IED out of service by
setting all local LDCMs to channel mode OutOfService or at the remote end by setting
the corresponding LDCM to channel mode Blocked. If OutOfService is selected, the
IED should have active communication to the remote end during the whole
maintenance process, that is, no restart or removal of the fibre can be done.

This setting does not apply to two-end communication.

Blocked IED does not use data from the LDCM

OutOfService IED informs the remote end that it is out of service

TerminalNo is used to assign a unique address to each LDCM in all current differential
IEDs. Up to 256 LDCMs can be assigned a unique number. For example, in a local
IED with two LDCMs:
• LDCM for slot 305: set TerminalNo to 1 and RemoteTermNo to 2
• LDCM for slot 306: set TerminalNo to 3 and RemoteTermNo to 4

In multiterminal current differential applications,with 4 LDCMs in each IED, up to 20

unique addresses must be set.

A unique address is necessary to give high security against incorrect

addressing in the communication system. If the same number is used
for TerminalNo in some of the LDCMs, a loop-back test in the
communication system can give an incorrect trip.

RemoteTermNo is used to assign a number to each related LDCM in the remote IED.
For each LDCM, RemoteTermNo is set to a different value than TerminalNo, but equal
to the TerminalNo of the remote end LDCM. In the remote IED, TerminalNo and
RemoteTermNo are reversed as follows:
• LDCM for slot 305: set TerminalNo to 2 and RemoteTermNo to 1
• LDCM for slot 306: set TerminalNo to 4 and RemoteTermNo to 3

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 495

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Remote communication

The redundant channel is always configured to the lower position, for

example:
• Slot 305: main channel
• Slot 306: redundant channel

The same is applicable for slot 312-313 and slot 322-323.

DiffSync defines the method of time synchronization for the line differential function:
Echo or GPS.

Using Echo in this case is safe only if there is no risk of varying

transmission asymmetry.

GPSSyncErr: when GPS synchronization is lost, synchronization of the line differential

function continues for 16 s based on the stability in the local IED clocks. After that,
setting Block blocks the line differential function or setting Echo keeps it on by using
the Echo synchronization method.

Using Echo in this case is safe only if there is no risk of varying

transmission asymmetry.

CommSync defines the Master and Slave relation in the communication system, and
should not be mistaken for the synchronization of line differential current samples.
When direct fibre is used, one LDCM is set as Master and the other as Slave. When a
modem and multiplexer is used, the IED is always set as Slave because the
telecommunication system provides the clock master.

OptoPower has two settings: LowPower is used for fibres 0 – 1 km (0.6 mile) and
HighPower for fibres >1 km (>0.6 mile).

ComAlarmDel defines the time delay for communication failure alarm. In

communication systems, route switching can sometimes cause interruptions with a
duration of up to 50 ms. Too short a time delay can thus cause nuisance alarms.

ComAlrmResDel defines the time delay for communication failure alarm reset.

RedChSwTime defines the time delay before switching over to a redundant channel in
case of primary channel failure.

RedChRturnTime defines the time delay before switching back to the primary channel
after channel failure.

496 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 18
Remote communication

AsymDelay denotes asymmetry which is defined as transmission delay minus receive

delay. If fixed asymmetry is known, Echo synchronization method can be used,
provided that AsymDelay is properly set. From the definition follows that asymmetry is
always positive at one end and negative at the other end.

MaxTransmDelay indicates maximum transmission delay. Data for maximum 40 ms

transmission delay can be buffered up. Delay times in the range of some ms are
common. If data arrive in wrong order, the oldest data is disregarded.

MaxtDiffLevel indicates the maximum time difference allowed between internal clocks
in respective line ends.

64 kbit mode specific settings

TransmCurr is used to select among the following:

• one of the two possible local currents is transmitted
• sum of the two local currents is transmitted
• channel is used as a redundant backup channel

breaker-and-a-half arrangement has two local currents, and the Current Transformer
(CT) grounding for those can differ. CT-SUM transmits the sum of the two CT groups.
CT-DIFF1 transmits CT group 1 minus CT group 2 and CT-DIFF2 transmits CT group
2 minus CT group 1.

CT-GRP1 and CT-GRP2 transmit the respective CT groups, and setting

RedundantChannel determines that the channel is used as a redundant backup channel.
The redundant channel takes the CT group setting of the main channel.

RemAinLatency corresponds to LocAinLatency set in the remote IED.

AnalogLatency specifies the time delay (number of samples) between actual sampling
and the time the sample reaches LDCM. The value is set to 2 when transmitting analog
data. When a merging unit according to IEC 61850-9-2 is used instead of the TRM,
this parameter shall be set to 5.

CompRange value indicates the current peak value over which truncation is made. To
set this value, knowledge of fault current levels is required. It is recommended to set
the minimum range that will cover the expected fault current value. For example, if a
40kA fault level is expected on the network, the 0-50kA settings range should be
chosen.

2 Mbit mode specific settings

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 497

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Remote communication

RedundantCh is used to set the channel as a redundant backup channel. The redundant
channel takes the CT group setting of the main channel, and ignores the CT group
configured in its own transmit block.

LinkForwarded is used to configure the LDCM to merge the inter-trip and block
signals from another LDCM-receiver. This is used when the analog signals for the
LDCM-transmitter is connected to the receiver of another LDCM.

498 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 19
Security

Section 19 Security

19.1 Authority status ATHSTAT SEMOD158575-1 v2

19.1.1 Application SEMOD158527-5 v3

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block, which informs

about two events related to the IED and the user authorization:

• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

The two outputs of ATHSTAT function can be used in the configuration for different
indication and alarming reasons, or can be sent to the station control for the same
purpose.

19.2 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG IP1721-1 v2

19.2.1 Application M12625-3 v9

The protection and control IEDs have many functions included. The included self-
supervision with internal event list function block provides good supervision of the
IED. The fault signals make it easier to analyze and locate a fault.

Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possible to indicate
possible faults through a hardware contact on the power supply module and/or through
the communication.

Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory
functions supervise the status of the various modules in the IED and, in case of failure,
a corresponding event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a
corresponding event is generated.

Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated
when the status changes for the:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 499

Application manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Security

• built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order).

• external time synchronization (in operation/out of order).

Events are also generated:

• whenever any setting in the IED is changed.

The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The
list can store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it is
full, the oldest event is overwritten. The list contents cannot be modified, but the whole
list can be cleared using the Reset menu in the LHMI.

The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during
commissioning and fault tracing.

The information can, in addition to be viewed on the built in HMI, also be retrieved
with the aid of a PC with PCM600 installed and by using the Event Monitoring Tool.
The PC can either be connected to the front port, or to the port at the back of the IED.

19.3 Change lock CHNGLCK GUID-B48775D0-ACF0-49C6-A7F6-69AF37F1C68F v1

19.3.1 Application GUID-51EEC9C7-8ECF-4546-BC26-326861654340 v4

Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to make it
impossible to perform inadvertent IED configuration and setting changes.

However, when activated, CHNGLCK will still allow the following actions that does
not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group

500 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 19
Security

The binary input controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT. The CHNGLCK
function is configured using ACT.

LOCK Binary input signal that will activate/deactivate the function, defined in ACT or SMT.

GUID-8C333BC0-AA7A-4ED1-A772-18C22E8EEE62 v5

When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to
modify the IED configuration and setting will be denied and the
message "Error: Changes blocked" will be displayed on the local HMI;
in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied by active
ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be configured so that it
is controlled by a signal from a binary input card. This guarantees that
by setting that signal to a logical zero, CHNGLCK is deactivated. If
any logic is included in the signal path to the CHNGLCK input, that
logic must be designed so that it cannot permanently issue a logical one
to the CHNGLCK input. If such a situation would occur in spite of
these precautions, then please contact the local ABB representative for
remedial action.

19.4 Denial of service SCHLCCH/RCHLCCH

19.4.1 Application GUID-64F4D905-9F73-4073-B8F6-8D373155316A v5

The denial of service functionality is designed to limit the CPU load that can be
produced by Ethernet network traffic on the IED. The communication facilities must
not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound
network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads can be
controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of malfunctioning
equipment connected to the network.

The functions Access point diagnostics function block measure the IED load from
communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and
protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following denial of
service related outputs:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 501

Application manual
Section 19 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Security

• LINKSTS indicates the Ethernet link status for the rear ports (single
communication)
• CHALISTS and CHBLISTS indicates the Ethernet link status for the rear ports
channel A and B (redundant communication)
• LinkStatus indicates the Ethernet link status for the front port

19.4.2 Setting guidelines GUID-CE3344E8-539B-47E0-9C19-8239988BDBCF v2

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

502 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 20
Basic IED functions

Section 20 Basic IED functions

20.1 IED identifiers TERMINALID IP15060-1 v2

20.1.1 Application M15324-3 v6

IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED
in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

20.2 Product information PRODINF GUID-F67243CA-2429-4118-BBFF-3D62BF55E080 v2

20.2.1 Application GUID-D78786E6-C34A-4E63-9D1E-0582C8F1F7E1 v8

Product information contains unchangeable data that uniquely identifies the IED.

Product information data is visible on the local HMI under Main menu/
Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
Status/Identifiers:

• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
• IEDProdType

This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (for
example during repair and maintenance).

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 503

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Basic IED functions

20.2.2 Factory defined settings M11789-39 v10

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very
helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different
Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be
changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local
HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers

The following identifiers are available:

• IEDProdType
• Describes the type of the IED. Example: REL670
• ProductDef
• Describes the release number from the production. Example: 2.1.0
• FirmwareVer
• Describes the firmware version.
• The firmware version can be checked from Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers
• Firmware version numbers run independently from the release production
numbers. For every release number there can be one or more firmware
versions depending on the small issues corrected in between releases.
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 2.1.0

1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new
hardware added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is
either changed or enhanced in the product

• IEDMainFunType
• Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128
(meaning line protection).
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

20.3 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP SEMOD52451-1 v2

504 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.3.1 Identification
SEMOD113212-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -

20.3.2 Application SEMOD52434-4 v5

The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU

and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits, that is low-low limit, low limit, high limit and
high-high limit. The measure value expander block ( RANGE_XP) has been
introduced to be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring
functions to 5 binary signals, that is below low-low limit, below low limit, normal,
above high-high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions
in the configurable logic.

20.3.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD113223-4 v1

There are no settable parameters for the measured value expander block function.

20.4 Parameter setting groups IP1745-1 v1

20.4.1 Application M12007-6 v9

Six sets of settings are available to optimize IED operation for different power system
conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the
local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can
cope with a variety of power system scenarios.

Different conditions in networks with different voltage levels require highly adaptable
protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity
requirements. Protection units operate with a higher degree of availability, especially, if
the setting values of their parameters are continuously optimized according to the
conditions in the power system.

Operational departments can plan for different operating conditions in the primary
equipment. The protection engineer can prepare the necessary optimized and pre-tested
settings in advance for different protection functions. Six different groups of setting

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 505

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Basic IED functions

parameters are available in the IED. Any of them can be activated through the different
programmable binary inputs by means of external or internal control signals.

A function block, SETGRPS, defines how many setting groups are used. Setting is
done with parameter MAXSETGR and shall be set to the required value for each IED.
Only the number of setting groups set will be available in the Parameter Setting tool
for activation with the ActiveGroup function block.

20.4.2 Setting guidelines M15259-3 v4

The setting ActiveSetGrp, is used to select which parameter group to be active. The
active group can also be selected with configured input to the function block
SETGRPS.

The length of the pulse, sent out by the output signal GRP_CHGD when an active
group has changed, is set with the parameter t.

The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between. Only the selected number of setting groups will be available in the
Parameter Setting tool (PST) for activation with the ActiveGroup function block.

20.5 Rated system frequency PRIMVAL IP15064-1 v2

20.5.1 Identification
GUID-B8B3535D-227B-4151-9E98-BEB85F4D54DE v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

20.5.2 Application M15288-3 v6

The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600
parameter setting tree.

20.5.3 Setting guidelines M15292-3 v2

Set the system rated frequency. Refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs
SMAI" for description on frequency tracking.

506 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.6 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM SEMOD55968-1 v2

20.6.1 Application SEMOD56004-4 v3

The analog summation block 3PHSUM function block is used in order to get the sum
of two sets of 3 phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that
might need it.

20.6.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD56006-4 v6

The summation block receives the three-phase signals from SMAI blocks. The
summation block has several settings.

SummationType: Summation type (Group 1 + Group 2, Group 1 - Group 2, Group 2 -

Group 1 or –(Group 1 + Group 2)).

DFTReference: The reference DFT block (InternalDFT Ref,DFTRefGrp1 or External

DFT ref) .

FreqMeasMinVal: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of VBasebase voltage setting (for each instance x).

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

20.7 Global base values GBASVAL GUID-2FDB0A2C-10FE-4954-B6E4-9DA2EEEF1668 v1

20.7.1 Identification
GUID-0D5405BE-E669-44C8-A208-3A4C86D39115 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 507

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Basic IED functions

20.7.2 Application GUID-D58ECA9A-9771-443D-BF84-8EF582A346BF v4

Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common for
all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values for
current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single
point for updating values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out
of the twelve sets of GBASVAL functions.

20.7.3 Setting guidelines GUID-E3F5D754-BD17-4729-895B-957A09C2AC75 v4

VBase: Phase-to-phase voltage value to be used as a base value for applicable functions
throughout the IED.

IBase: Phase current value to be used as a base value for applicable functions
throughout the IED.

SBase: Standard apparent power value to be used as a base value for applicable
functions throughout the IED, typically SBase=√3·VBase·IBase.

20.8 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI SEMOD55793-1 v2

20.8.1 Application M15310-3 v2

The Signal matrix for binary inputs function SMBI is used within the Application
Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMBI represents the
way binary inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.

20.8.2 Setting guidelines M15312-3 v3

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI available
to the user in Parameter Setting tool. However, the user shall give a name to SMBI
instance and the SMBI inputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool. These
names will define SMBI function in the Signal Matrix tool. The user defined name for
the input or output signal will also appear on the respective output or input signal.

508 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.9 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO SEMOD55215-1 v2

20.9.1 Application SEMOD55213-5 v4

The Signal matrix for binary outputs function SMBO is used within the Application
Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMBO represents the
way binary outputs are sent from one IED configuration.

20.9.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55228-5 v2

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO
available to the user in Parameter Setting tool. However, the user must give a name to
SMBO instance and SMBO outputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool.
These names will define SMBO function in the Signal Matrix tool.

20.10 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI SEMOD55233-1 v2

20.10.1 Application SEMOD55237-5 v2

The Signal matrix for mA inputs function SMMI is used within the Application
Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMMI represents the
way milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.

20.10.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55247-5 v2

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI available to
the user in the Parameter Setting tool. However, the user must give a name to SMMI
instance and SMMI inputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool.

20.11 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI SEMOD55751-1 v2

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 509

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Basic IED functions

20.11.1 Application SEMOD55744-4 v10

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function
block, analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and
calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle,
frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This
information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in
ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).

20.11.2 Frequency values GUID-B494B93C-B5AA-4FD6-8080-8611C34C2AD8 v5

The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence
voltage, MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If
the positive sequence voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the
frequency output value for 500 ms and after that the frequency output is set to the
nominal value. A signal is available for the SMAI function to prevent operation due to
non-valid frequency values. MinValFreqMeas is set as % of VBase/√3

If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPx_A,

GRPx_B and GRPx_C, where 1≤x≤12, must be connected in order to calculate the
positive sequence voltage. Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as
follows: A-B to GRPxA, B-C to GRPxB, C-A to GRPxC. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and GRPx_C must be
connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.

If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-
Ph, the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and
GRPx_C to the same voltage input as shown in figure 212 to make SMAI calculate a
positive sequence voltage.

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT SAPTOF
DFTSPFC G1AI3P V3P* TRIP SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
VAB BLOCK PICK UP
REVROT G1AI1
PHASEA G1AI2 BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
^GRP1_A G1AI4 FREQ
TRM_40.CH7(U) PHASEB
G1N
^GRP1_B
PHASEC
^GRP1_C
NEUTRAL
^GRP1_N

ANSI10000060-1-en.vsdx

ANSI10000060 V1 EN-US

Figure 212: Connection example

510 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 20
Basic IED functions

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-ground voltage is available,
the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType
setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be accounted for when
setting MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N and
the same voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive
sequence voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not
work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used
for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF, 81), Underfrequency
protection (SAPTUF, 81) and Rate-of-change frequency protection
(SAPFRC, 81) due to that all other information except frequency and
positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.

20.11.3 Setting guidelines GUID-C8D6C88B-87C6-44C1-804B-CF1594365EE6 v8

The parameters for the signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI) functions are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one
neutral value), either voltage or current. SMAI outputs give information about every
aspect of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and
frequency derivates, and so on – 244 values in total). Besides the block “group name”,
the analog inputs type (voltage or current) and the analog input names that can be set
directly in ACT.

Application functions should be connected to a SMAI block with same task cycle as
the application function, except for e.g. measurement functions that run in slow cycle
tasks.

DFTRefExtOut: Parameter valid only for function block SMAI1 .

Reference block for external output (SPFCOUT function output).

DFTReference: Reference DFT for the SMAI block use.

These DFT reference block settings decide DFT reference for DFT calculations. The
setting InternalDFTRef will use fixed DFT reference based on set system frequency.
DFTRefGrp(n) will use DFT reference from the selected group block, when own group
is selected, an adaptive DFT reference will be used based on calculated signal
frequency from own group. The setting ExternalDFTRef will use reference based on
what is connected to input DFTSPFC.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 511

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Basic IED functions

The setting ConnectionType: Connection type for that specific instance (n) of the
SMAI (if it is Ph-N or Ph-Ph). Depending on connection type setting the not connected
Ph-N or Ph-Ph outputs will be calculated as long as they are possible to calculate. E.g.
at Ph-Ph connection A, B and C will be calculated for use in symmetrical situations. If
N component should be used respectively the phase component during faults IN/VN
must be connected to input 4.

Negation: If the user wants to negate the 3ph signal, it is possible to choose to negate
only the phase signals Negate3Ph, only the neutral signal NegateN or both Negate3Ph
+N. negation means rotation with 180° of the vectors.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).

MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of VBase (for each instance n).

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Even if the user sets the AnalogInputType of a SMAI block to

“Current”, the MinValFreqMeas is still visible. However, using the
current channel values as base for frequency measurement is not
recommendable for a number of reasons, not last among them being
the low level of currents that one can have in normal operating
conditions.

Examples of adaptive frequency tracking

Preprocessing block shall only be used to feed functions within the

same execution cycles (e.g. use preprocessing block with cycle 1 to
feed transformer differential protection). The only exceptions are
measurement functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU,VMMXU, etc.) which
shall be fed by preprocessing blocks with cycle 8.

When two or more preprocessing blocks are used to feed one protection
function (e.g. over-power function GOPPDOP), it is of outmost
importance that parameter setting DFTReference has the same set value
for all of the preprocessing blocks involved

512 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 20
Basic IED functions

Task time group 1

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:1 1
SMAI2:2 2
SMAI3:3 3
SMAI4:4 4 AdDFTRefCh7
SMAI5:5 5
SMAI6:6 6
SMAI7:7 7
SMAI8:8 8
SMAI9:9 9
SMAI10:10 10
SMAI11:11 11
SMAI12:12 12

Task time group 2

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:13 1 AdDFTRefCh4
SMAI2:14 2
SMAI3:15 3
SMAI4:16 4
SMAI5:17 5
SMAI6:18 6
SMAI7:19 7
SMAI8:20 8
SMAI9:21 9
SMAI10:22 10
SMAI11:23 11
SMAI12:24 12

Task time group 3

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:25 1
SMAI2:26 2
SMAI3:27 3
SMAI4:28 4
SMAI5:29 5
SMAI6:30 6
SMAI7:31 7
SMAI8:32 8
SMAI9:33 9
SMAI10:34 10
SMAI11:35 11
SMAI12:36 12

IEC07000197.vsd
IEC07000197 V2 EN-US

Figure 213: Twelve SMAI instances are grouped within one task time. SMAI blocks
are available in three different task times in the IED. Two pointed
instances are used in the following examples.

The examples shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference
selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the
actual application. The adaptive frequency tracking is needed in IEDs that belong to
the protection system of synchronous machines and that are active during run-up and

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 513

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Basic IED functions

shout-down of the machine. In other application the usual setting of the parameter
DFTReference of SMAI is InternalDFTRef.

Example 1
SMAI1:13
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
SMAI1:1 ^GRP1_N AI4
BLOCK SPFCOUT TYPE AIN
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

SMAI1:25
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

ANSI07000198.vsd
ANSI07000198 V1 EN-US

Figure 214: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT
reference

Assume instance SMAI7:7 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration
to control the frequency tracking . Observe that the selected reference instance (i.e.
frequency tracking master) must be a voltage type. Observe that positive sequence
voltage is used for the frequency tracking feature.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 213 for numbering):

SMAI1:1: DFTRefExtOut = DFTRefGrp7 to route SMAI7:7 reference to the

SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = DFTRefGrp7 for SMAI1:1 to use SMAI7:7 as
reference (see Figure 214) SMAI2:2 – SMAI12:12: DFTReference = DFTRefGrp7 for
SMAI2:2 – SMAI12:12 to use SMAI7:7 as reference.

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:13 – SMAI12:24: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input of

SMAI1:13 as reference (SMAI7:7)

For task time group 3 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:25 – SMAI12:36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as

reference (SMAI7:7)

514 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 20
Basic IED functions

Example 2
SMAI1:1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
SMAI1:13 ^GRP1_N AI4
BLOCK SPFCOUT TYPE AIN
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

SMAI1:25
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1_A AI1
^GRP1_B AI2
^GRP1_C AI3
^GRP1_N AI4
TYPE AIN

ANSI07000198.vsd
ANSI07000199 V1 EN-US

Figure 215: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 2 as DFT
reference.

Assume instance SMAI4:16 in task time group 2 has been selected in the configuration
to control the frequency tracking for all instances. Observe that the selected reference
instance (i.e. frequency tracking master) must be a voltage type. Observe that positive
sequence voltage is used for the frequency tracking feature.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 213 for numbering):

SMAI1:1 – SMAI12:12: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as

reference (SMAI4:16)

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:13: DFTRefExtOut = DFTRefGrp4 to route SMAI4:16 reference to the

SPFCOUT output, DFTReference = DFTRefGrp4 for SMAI1:13 to use SMAI4:16 as
reference (see Figure 215) SMAI2:14 – SMAI12:24: DFTReference = DFTRefGrp4 to
use SMAI4:16 as reference.

For task time group 3 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:25 – SMAI12:36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as

reference (SMAI4:16)

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 515

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Basic IED functions

20.12 Test mode functionality TESTMODE IP1647-1 v3

20.12.1 Application M11407-3 v8

The protection and control IEDs may have a complex configuration with many
included functions. To make the testing procedure easier, the IEDs include the feature
that allows individual blocking of a single-, several-, or all functions.

This means that it is possible to see when a function is activated or trips. It also enables
the user to follow the operation of several related functions to check correct
functionality and to check parts of the configuration, and so on.

20.12.1.1 IEC 61850 protocol test mode GUID-82998715-6F23-4CAF-92E4-05E1A863CF33 v3

The IEC 61850 Test Mode has improved testing capabilities for IEC 61850 systems.
Operator commands sent to the IEC 61850 Mod determine the behavior of the
functions. The command can be given from the LHMI under the Main menu/Test/
Function test modes menu or remotely from an IEC 61850 client. The possible values
of IEC 61850 Mod are described in Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850
Edition 1 and Edition 2.

To be able to set the IEC 61850 Mod the parameter remotely, the PST
setting RemoteModControl may not be set to Off. The possible values
are Off, Maintenance or All levels. The Off value denies all access to
data object Mod from remote, Maintenance requires that the category
of the originator (orCat) is Maintenance and All levels allow any orCat.

The mod of the Root LD.LNN0 can be configured under Main menu/Test/Function
test modes/Communication/Station communication/IEC61850 LD0 LLN0/
LD0LLN0:1

When the Mod is changed at this level, all components under the logical device update
their own behavior according to IEC 61850-7-4. The supported values of IEC 61850
Mod are described in Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2. The IEC
61850 test mode is indicated with the Start LED on the LHMI.

The mod of an specific component can be configured under Main menu/Test/

Function test modes/Communication/Station Communication

It is possible that the behavior is also influenced by other sources as well, independent
of the mode, such as the insertion of the test handle, loss of SV, and IED configuration

516 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 20
Basic IED functions

or LHMI. If a function of an IED is set to Off, the related Beh is set to Off as well. The
related mod keeps its current state.

When the setting Operation is set to Off, the behavior is set to Off and it is not possible
to override it. When a behavior of a function is Offthe function will not execute.

When IEC 61850 Mod of a function is set to Off or Blocked, the Start
LED on the LHMI will be set to flashing to indicate the abnormal
operation of the IED.

The IEC 61850-7-4 gives a detailed overview over all aspects of the test mode and
other states of mode and behavior.

• When the Beh of a component is set to Test, the component is not blocked and all
control commands with a test bit are accepted.
• When the Beh of a component is set to Test/blocked, all control commands with a
test bit are accepted. Outputs to the process via a non-IEC 61850 link data are
blocked by the LN. Only process-related outputs on LNs related to primary
equipment are blocked. If there is an XCBR, the outputs EXC_Open and
EXC_Close are blocked.
• When the Beh of a component is set to Blocked, all control commands with a test
bit are accepted. Outputs to the process via a non-IEC 61850 link data are blocked
by the LN. In addition, the components can be blocked when their Beh is blocked.
This can be done if the component has a block input. The block status of a
component is shown as the Blk output under the Test/Function status menu. If the
Blk output is not shown, the component cannot be blocked.

20.12.2 Setting guidelines M15260-3 v6

There are two possible ways to place the IED in the TestMode= Enabled” state. If, the
IED is set to normal operation (TestMode = Disabled), but the functions are still shown
being in the test mode, the input signal INPUT on the TESTMODE function block
might be activated in the configuration.

Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test
mode.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 517

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Basic IED functions

20.13 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN IP1750-1 v2

20.13.1 Application M11345-3 v10

Use time synchronization to achieve a common time base for the IEDs in a protection
and control system. This makes it possible to compare events and disturbance data
between all IEDs in the system. If a global common source (i.e. GPS) is used in
different substations for the time synchronization, also comparisons and analysis
between recordings made at different locations can be easily performed and a more
accurate view of the actual sequence of events can be obtained.

Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances are an excellent help when evaluating
faults. Without time synchronization, only the events within one IED can be compared
with each other. With time synchronization, events and disturbances within the whole
network, can be compared and evaluated.

In the IED, the internal time can be synchronized from the following sources:

• BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)

• DNP
• GPS
• IEC103
• SNTP
• IRIG-B
• SPA
• LON
• PPS
• IEEE 1588 (PTP)

For IEDs using IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE in "mixed mode" a time synchronization from
an external clock is recommended to the IED and all connected merging units. The
time synchronization from the clock to the IED can be PTP, optical PPS or IRIG-B. For
IEDs using IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE from one single MU as analog data source, the
MU and IED still need to be synchronized to each other. This could be done by letting
the MU supply a PPS signal to the IED or by supplying a PPS signal from the IED to
the MU, by using a GTM.

Out of these, LON and SPA contains two types of synchronization messages:

• Coarse time messages are sent every minute and contain complete date and time,
that is year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.
• Fine time messages are sent every second and comprise only seconds and
milliseconds.

518 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 20
Basic IED functions

The selection of the time source is done via the corresponding setting.

It is possible to select more than one time source, in which case one is backup for the
other. The time synchronization source with the best calculated time-quality is
automatically selected. For instance, if both GPS and IRIG-B are selected and both
sources have the required accuracy, optical IRIG-B with IEEE1344 will be
automatically selected as the time synchronization source. Or if GPS and SNTP are
selected, when the GPS signal quality is bad, the IED will automatically choose SNTP
as the time-source.

If PTP is activated, the device with the best accuracy within the synchronizing group
will be selected as the source. For more information about PTP, see the Technical
manual.

IEEE 1588 (PTP)

PTP according to IEEE 1588-2008 and specifically its profile IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 for
power utility automation is a synchronization method that can be used to maintain a
common time within a station. This time can be synchronized to the global time using,
for instance, a GPS receiver. If PTP is enabled on the IEDs and the switches that
connect the station are compatible with IEEE 1588, the station will become
synchronized to one common time with an accuracy of under 1us. Using an IED as a
boundary clock between several networks will keep 1us accuracy on three levels or
when using an HSR, 15 IEDs can be connected in a ring without losing a single
microsecond in accuracy.

20.13.2 Setting guidelines IP15089-1 v3

All the parameters related to time are divided into two categories: System time and
Synchronization.

20.13.2.1 System time M11348-119 v5

The time is set with years, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.

20.13.2.2 Synchronization M11348-143 v4

The setting parameters for the real-time clock with external time synchronization are
set via local HMI or PCM600. The path for Time Synchronization parameters on local
HMI is Main menu/Configuration/Time/Synchronization. The parameters are
categorized as Time Synchronization (TIMESYNCHGEN) and IRIG-B settings (IRIG-
B:1) in case that IRIG-B is used as the external time synchronization source.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 519

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Basic IED functions

TimeSynch M11348-167 v15

When the source of the time synchronization is selected on the local HMI, the
parameter is called TimeSynch. The time synchronization source can also be set from
PCM600. The setting alternatives are:

FineSyncSource which can have the following values:

• Disabled
• SPA
• LON
• BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)
• GPS
• GPS+SPA
• GPS+LON
• GPS+BIN
• SNTP
• GPS+SNTP
• IRIG-B
• GPS+IRIG-B
• PPS

CoarseSyncSrc which can have the following values:

• Disabled
• SPA
• LON
• DNP
• IEC 60870-5-103

The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronization is called BININPUT.

For a description of the BININPUT settings, see the Technical Manual.

The system time can be set manually, either via the local HMI or via any of the
communication ports. The time synchronization fine tunes the clock (seconds and
milliseconds).

The parameter SyncMaster defines if the IED is a master, or not a master for time
synchronization within a Substation Automation System, for IEDs connected in a
communication network (IEC 61850-8-1). The SyncMaster can have the following
values:
• Disabled
• SNTP -Server

520 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 20
Basic IED functions

Set the course time synchronizing source (CoarseSyncSrc) to Disabled

when GPS time synchronization of line differential function is used. Set
the fine time synchronization source (FineSyncSource) to GPS. The
GPS will thus provide the complete time synchronization. GPS alone
shall synchronize the analogue values in such systems.

IEEE 1588 (PTP) GUID-424227EC-74A1-4628-8948-C1876840ABFE v2

Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is enabled/disabled using the Ethernet configuration

tool /ECT) in PCM600.

PTP can be set to On,Off or Slave only. When set to Slave only the IED is connected to
the PTP-group and will synchronize to the grandmaster but cannot function as the
grandmaster.

A PTP-group is set up by connecting the IEDs to a network and enabling PTP. To set
one IED as the grandmaster change Priority2 to 127 instead of the default 128.

IEC16000089-1-en.vsdx

IEC16000089 V1 EN-US

Figure 216: Enabling PTP in ECT

The PTP VLAN tag must have the same value in station clock and in the IED. The
default value is set to 0.

The PTP VLAN tag does not need to be the same on all access points in one IED. It is
possible to mix as long as they are the same for all devices on each subnet.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 521

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Basic IED functions

Setting example

GPS

PTP

Station bus
PTP PTP

REC REL GTM

9-2 PTP PTP 9-2 9-2

PPS
Process bus
9-2 9-2

SAM600-TS MU

SAM600-CT

SAM600-VT

IEC16000167-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000167 V1 EN-US

Figure 217: Example system

Figure 217 describes an example system. The REC and REL are both using the 9-2
stream from the SAM600, and gets its synch from the GPS. Moreover, the REL and
REC both acts as a boundary clock to provide synch to the SAM600. The REL
contains a GTM card, which has a PPS output that is used to synchronize merging units
that are not PTP compliant. As a side effect, the GTM contains a GPS receiver and the
REL acts as a backup of the GPS on the station bus.

On all access points, the PTP parameter is “ON”.

On the REL, the parameter FineSyncSource (under Configuration/Time/

Synchronization/TIMESYNCHGEN:1/General) is set to “GPS” if there is a GPS
antenna attached.

If the GTM is used as a PPS output only, the FineSynchSource is not set.

522 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 21
Requirements

Section 21 Requirements

21.1 Current transformer requirements IP15171-1 v2

M11609-3 v2

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured
current signal. Saturation of the current transformers (CTs) will cause distortion of the
current signals and can result in a failure to operate or cause unwanted operations of
some functions. Consequently CT saturation can have an influence on both the
dependability and the security of the protection. This protection IED has been designed
to permit heavy CT saturation with maintained correct operation.

21.1.1 Current transformer basic classification and requirements M11611-3 v2

M11611-4 v5

To guarantee correct operation, the current transformers (CTs) must be able to correctly
reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin to saturate. To
fulfill the requirement on a specified time to saturation the CTs must fulfill the
requirements of a minimum secondary e.m.f. that is specified below.

CTs are specified according to many different classes and standards. In principle, there
are three different types of protection CTs. These types are related to the design of the
iron core and the presence of airgaps. Airgaps affects the properties of the remanent
flux.

The following three different types of protection CTs have been specified:
• The High Remanence type with closed iron core and no specified limit of the
remanent flux
• The Low Remanence type with small airgaps in the iron core and the remanent
flux limit is specified to be maximum 10% of the saturation flux
• The Non Remanence type with big airgaps in the iron core and the remanent flux
can be neglected

Even though no limit of the remanent flux is specified in the IEC standard for closed
core CTs, it is a common opinion that the remanent flux is normally limited to
maximum 75 - 80 % of the saturation flux.

Since approximately year 2000 some CT manufactures have introduced new core
materials that gradually have increased the possible maximum levels of remanent flux
even up to 95 % related to the hysteresis curve. Corresponding level of actual remanent

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 523

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Requirements

flux is 90 % of the saturation flux (Ψsat). As the present CT standards have no

limitation of the level of remanent flux, these CTs are also classified as for example,
class TPX, P and PX according to IEC. The IEC TR 61869-100, Edition 1.0 2017-01,
Instrument transformers – Guidance for application of current transformers in power
system protection, is the first official document that highlighted this development. So
far remanence factors of maximum 80% have been considered when CT requirements
have been decided for ABB IEDs. Even in the future this level of remanent flux
probably will be the maximum level that will be considered when decided the CT
requirements. If higher remanence levels should be considered, it should often lead to
unrealistic CT sizes.

Thus, now there is a need to limit the acceptable level of remanent flux. To be able to
guarantee the performance of protection IEDs, we need to introduce the following
classification of CTs.

There are many different standards and a lot of classes but fundamentally there are four
different types of CTs:

• Very High Remanence type CT

• High Remanence type CT
• Low Remanence type CT
• Non Remanence type CT

The Very High Remanence (VHR) type is a CT with closed iron core (for example.
protection classes TPX, P, PX according to IEC, class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE)
and with an iron core material (new material, typically new alloy based magnetic
materials) that gives a remanent flux higher than 80 % of the saturation flux.

The High Remanence (HR) type is a CT with closed iron core (for example,
protection classes TPX, P, PX according to IEC, class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE)
but with an iron core material (traditional material) that gives a remanent flux that is
limited to maximum 80 % of the saturation flux.

The Low Remanence (LR) type is a CT with small airgaps in the iron core (for
example, TPY, PR, PXR according to IEC) and the remanent flux limit is specified to
be maximum 10% of the saturation flux.

The Non Remanence (NR) type is a CT with big airgaps in the core (for example,
TPZ according to IEC) and the remanent flux can be neglected.

It is also possible that different CT classes of HR and LR type may be mixed.

CT type VHR (using new material) should not be used for protection CT cores. This
means that it is important to specify that the remanence factor must not exceed 80 %
when ordering for example, class P, PX or TPX CTs. If CT manufacturers are using
new core material and are not able to fulfill this requirement, the CTs shall be specified

524 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 21
Requirements

with small airgaps and therefore will be CTs of LR type (for example, class PR, TPY
or PXR). Very high remanence level in a protection core CT can cause the following
problems for protection IEDs:
1. Unwanted operation of differential (i.e. unit) protections for external faults
2. Unacceptably delayed or even missing operation of all types of protections (for
example, distance, differential, overcurrent, etc.) which can result in loosing
protection selectivity in the network

No information is available about how frequent the use of the new iron core material is
for protection CT cores, but it is known that some CT manufacturers are using the new
material while other manufacturers continue to use the old traditional core material for
protection CT cores. In a case where VHR type CTs have been already installed, the
calculated values of Eal for HR type CTs, for which the formulas are given in this
document, must be multiplied by factor two-and-a-half in order for VHR type CTs (i.e.
with new material) to be used together with ABB protection IEDs. However, this may
result in unacceptably big CT cores, which can be difficult to manufacture and fit in
available space.

Different standards and classes specify the saturation e.m.f. in different ways but it is
possible to approximately compare values from different classes. The rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869–2 standard is used to specify
the CT requirements for the IED. The requirements are also specified according to
other standards.

21.1.2 Conditions M11610-3 v1

M11610-4 v4

The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our network simulator.

The current transformer models are representative for current transformers of high
remanence and low remanence type. The results may not always be valid for non
remanence type CTs (TPZ).

The performances of the protection functions have been checked in the range from
symmetrical to fully asymmetrical fault currents. Primary time constants of at least 120
ms have been considered at the tests. The current requirements below are thus
applicable both for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

Depending on the protection function phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase and three-phase

faults have been tested for different relevant fault positions for example, close in
forward and reverse faults, zone 1 reach faults, internal and external faults. The
dependability and security of the protection was verified by checking for example, time
delays, unwanted operations, directionality, overreach and stability.

The remanence in the current transformer core can cause unwanted operations or minor
additional time delays for some protection functions. As unwanted operations are not

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 525

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Requirements

acceptable at all maximum remanence has been considered for fault cases critical for
the security, for example, faults in reverse direction and external faults. Because of the
almost negligible risk of additional time delays and the non-existent risk of failure to
operate the remanence have not been considered for the dependability cases. The
requirements below are therefore fully valid for all normal applications.

It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence to

avoid the minor risk of an additional time delay. They depend on the performance and
economy requirements. When current transformers of low remanence type (for
example, TPY, PR) are used, normally no additional margin is needed. For current
transformers of high remanence type (for example, P, PX, TPX) the small probability
of fully asymmetrical faults, together with high remanence in the same direction as the
flux generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind at the decision of an additional
margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when the fault occurs at
approximately zero voltage (0°). Investigations have shown that 95% of the faults in
the network will occur when the voltage is between 40° and 90°. In addition fully
asymmetrical fault current will not exist in all phases at the same time.

21.1.3 Fault current M11613-3 v1

M11613-4 v3

The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for
faults in different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three-phase faults or
single phase-to-ground faults. The current for a single phase-to-ground fault will
exceed the current for a three-phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the
total fault loop is less than the positive sequence impedance.

When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum fault current for the
relevant fault position should be used and therefore both fault types have to be
considered.

21.1.4 Secondary wire resistance and additional load M11614-3 v1

M11614-4 v4

The voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals directly affects the current
transformer saturation. This voltage is developed in a loop containing the secondary
wires and the burden of all relays in the circuit. For ground faults the loop includes the
phase and neutral wire, normally twice the resistance of the single secondary wire. For
three-phase faults the neutral current is zero and it is just necessary to consider the
resistance up to the point where the phase wires are connected to the common neutral
wire. The most common practice is to use four wires secondary cables so it normally is
sufficient to consider just a single secondary wire for the three-phase case.

The conclusion is that the loop resistance, twice the resistance of the single secondary
wire, must be used in the calculation for phase-to-ground faults and the phase

526 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 21
Requirements

resistance, the resistance of a single secondary wire, may normally be used in the
calculation for three-phase faults.

As the burden can be considerable different for three-phase faults and phase-to-ground
faults it is important to consider both cases. Even in a case where the phase-to-ground
fault current is smaller than the three-phase fault current the phase-to-ground fault can
be dimensioning for the CT depending on the higher burden.

In isolated or high impedance grounded systems the phase-to-ground fault is not the
dimensioning case. Therefore, the resistance of the single secondary wire can always
be used in the calculation for this kind of power systems.

21.1.5 General current transformer requirements M11615-3 v3

The current transformer ratio is mainly selected based on power system data for
example, maximum load and/or maximum fault current. It should be verified that the
current to the protection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that
are to be detected with the selected CT ratio. It should also be verified that the
maximum possible fault current is within the limits of the IED.

The current error of the current transformer can limit the possibility to use a very
sensitive setting of a sensitive residual overcurrent protection. If a very sensitive
setting of this function will be used it is recommended that the current transformer
should have an accuracy class which have an current error at rated primary current that
is less than ±1% (for example, 5P). If current transformers with less accuracy are used
it is advisable to check the actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning.

21.1.6 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements SEMOD53723-1 v1

M11616-3 v2

With regard to saturation of the current transformer all current transformers of high
remanence and low remanence type that fulfill the requirements on the rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal below can be used. The characteristic of the non
remanence type CT (TPZ) is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is
concerned. If no explicit recommendation is given for a specific function we therefore
recommend contacting ABB to confirm that the non remanence type can be used.

The CT requirements for the different functions below are specified as a rated
equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869-2 standard.
Requirements for CTs specified according to other classes and standards are given at
the end of this section.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 527

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Requirements

21.1.6.1 Busbar protection SEMOD129059-4 v6

The CT can be of high remanence or low remanence type and they can be used
together within the same zone of protection. Each of them must have a rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to the required rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

The high remanence type CT must fulfill

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 0.5 × If ma x × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1667 V1 EN-US (Equation 90)

The low remanence type CT must fulfill

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 0.2 × If ma x × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1668 V1 EN-US (Equation 91)

where

Ifmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency fault current on the busbar (A)

Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

In The nominal current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (W). The loop
resistance containing the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in
solidly grounded systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should be
used for faults in high impedance grounded systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1
A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A.

The non remanence type CT

CTs of non remanence type (for example, TPZ) can be used but in this case the CTs
within the differential zone must be of non remanence type. They must fulfill the same
requirements as for the low remanence type CTs and have a rated equivalent secondary
e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

528 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 21
Requirements

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 0.2 × If ma x × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1668 V1 EN-US (Equation 92)

21.1.6.2 Breaker failure protection M11621-3 v5

The CTs must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than
or equal to the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 5 × Iop × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1677 V1 EN-US (Equation 93)

where:
Iop The primary operate value (A)

Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

In The nominal current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing the
phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly grounded systems. The resistance of a
single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance grounded systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and SR=0.150
VA/channel for Ir=5 A

21.1.6.3 Non-directional instantaneous and definitive time, phase and residual

overcurrent protection M11622-3 v5

The CTs must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than
or equal to the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 529

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Requirements

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 1.5 × Iop × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1678 V1 EN-US (Equation 94)

where:
Iop The primary operate value (A)

Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

In The nominal current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing the
phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly grounded systems. The resistance of a
single secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance grounded systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and SR=0.150
VA/channel for Ir=5 A

21.1.6.4 Non-directional inverse time delayed phase and residual overcurrent

protection M11339-3 v5

The requirement according to Equation 95 and Equation 96 does not need to be

fulfilled if the high set instantaneous or definitive time stage is used. In this case
Equation is the only necessary requirement.

If the inverse time delayed function is the only used overcurrent protection function the
CTs must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or
equal to the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q = 20 × Iop × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1679 V1 EN-US (Equation 95)

where

Iop The primary current set value of the inverse time function (A)

Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

In The nominal current of the protection IED (A)

Table continues on next page

530 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 21
Requirements

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop
resistance containing the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in
solidly grounded systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should be
used for faults in high impedance grounded systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1
A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A

Independent of the value of Iop the maximum required Eal is specified according to the
following:

Is n æ S ö
E a l ³ E a lre q ma x = Ik ma x × × ç R CT + R L + 2R ÷
Ipn è In ø
EQUATION1680 V1 EN-US (Equation 96)

where

Ikmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for close-in faults (A)

21.1.7 Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other

standards SEMOD53771-1 v1

M11623-4 v3

All kinds of conventional magnetic core CTs are possible to use with the IEDs if they
fulfill the requirements corresponding to the above specified expressed as the rated
equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869-2 standard. From
different standards and available data for relaying applications it is possible to
approximately calculate a secondary e.m.f. of the CT comparable with Eal. By
comparing this with the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq it is
possible to judge if the CT fulfills the requirements. The requirements according to
some other standards are specified below.

21.1.7.1 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class P, PR M11623-6 v4

A CT according to IEC 61869-2 is specified by the secondary limiting e.m.f. EALF. The
value of the EALF is approximately equal to the corresponding Eal. Therefore, the CTs
according to class P and PR must have a secondary limiting e.m.f. EALF that fulfills the
following:

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 531

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Requirements

E ALF  max E alreq

EQUATION1383 V4 EN-US (Equation 97)

21.1.7.2 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class PX, PXR (and old
IEC 60044-6, class TPS and old British Standard, class X) M11623-14 v5

CTs according to these classes are specified approximately in the same way by a rated
knee point e.m.f. Eknee (Ek for class PX and PXR, EkneeBS for class X and the limiting
secondary voltage Val for TPS). The value of the Eknee is lower than the corresponding
Eal according to IEC 61869-2. It is not possible to give a general relation between the
Eknee and the Eal but normally the Eknee is approximately 80 % of the Eal. Therefore,
the CTs according to class PX, PXR, X and TPS must have a rated knee point e.m.f.
Eknee that fulfills the following:

S = TD × SOld + (1 - TD ) × S Calculated
EQUATION1893.ANSI V1 EN-US (Equation 98)

21.1.7.3 Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE M11623-22 v6

Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE are partly specified in different ways. A

rated secondary terminal voltage VANSI is specified for a CT of class C. VANSI is the
secondary terminal voltage the CT will deliver to a standard burden at 20 times rated
secondary current without exceeding 10 % ratio correction. There are a number of
standardized VANSI values for example, VANSI is 400 V for a C400 CT. A
corresponding rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. EalANSI can be estimated as
follows:

E a lANS I = 20 × IS N × R CT + VANS I = 20 × IS N × R CT + 20 × IS N × Z bANS I

EQUATION1682 V1 EN-US (Equation 99)

where:
ZbANSI The impedance (that is, with a complex quantity) of the standard ANSI burden for the specific C
class (W)
VANSI The secondary terminal voltage for the specific C class (V)

The CTs according to class C must have a calculated rated equivalent limiting
secondary e.m.f. EalANSI that fulfils the following:

532 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 21
Requirements

E alANSI > maximum of E alreq

EQUATION1384 V2 EN-US (Equation 100)

A CT according to ANSI/IEEE is also specified by the knee point voltage VkneeANSI

that is graphically defined from an excitation curve. The knee point voltage VkneeANSI
normally has a lower value than the knee-point e.m.f. according to IEC and BS.
VkneeANSI can approximately be estimated to 75 % of the corresponding Eal according
to IEC 61869-2. Therefore, the CTs according to ANSI/IEEE must have a knee point
voltage VkneeANSI that fulfills the following:

VkneeANSI > 0.75 × (max imum of Ealreq )

EQUATION2101 V2 EN-US (Equation 101)

The following guide may also be referred for some more application aspects of ANSI
class CTs: IEEE C37.110 (2007), IEEE Guide for the Application of Current
Transformers Used for Protective Relaying Purposes.

21.2 Voltage transformer requirements M11608-3 v5

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured
input signal. Transients caused by capacitive Coupled voltage transformers (CCVTs)
can affect some protection functions.

Magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers can be used.

The capacitive voltage transformers (CCVTs) should fulfill the requirements according
to the IEC 61869-5 standard regarding ferro-resonance and transients. The ferro-
resonance requirements of the CCVTs are specified in chapter 6.502 of the standard.

The transient responses for three different standard transient response classes, T1, T2
and T3 are specified in chapter 6.503 of the standard. CCVTs according to all classes
can be used.

The protection IED has effective filters for these transients, which gives secure and
correct operation with CCVTs.

21.3 SNTP server requirements GUID-588FCD12-C494-445E-8488-8287B34EFD9A v4

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 533

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Requirements

least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable
source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.

21.4 PTP requirements GUID-741CC863-D760-49D6-85B2-AFECA222A8C3 v1

For PTP to perform properly, the Ethernet equipment that is used needs to be compliant
with IEEE1588. The clocks used must follow the IEEE1588 standard BMC (Best
Master Algorithm) and shall, for instance, not claim class 7 for a longer time than it
can guarantee 1us absolute accuracy.

21.5 Sample specification of communication requirements

for the protection and control terminals in digital
telecommunication networks GUID-0A9F36AF-3802-42FE-8970-4662798C19D1 v2

The communication requirements are based on echo timing.

Bit Error Rate (BER) according to ITU-T G.821, G.826 and G.828
• <10-6 according to the standard for data and voice transfer

Bit Error Rate (BER) for high availability of the differential protection
• <10-8-10-9 during normal operation
• <10-6 during disturbed operation

During disturbed conditions, the trip security function can cope with high bit error
rates up to 10-5 or even up to 10-4. The trip security can be configured to be
independent of COMFAIL from the differential protection communication supervision,
or blocked when COMFAIL is issued after receive error >100ms. (Default).

Synchronization in SDH systems with G.703 E1 or IEEE C37.94

The G.703 E1, 2 Mbit shall be set according to ITU-T G.803, G.810-13
• One master clock for the actual network
• The actual port Synchronized to the SDH system clock at 2048 kbit
• Synchronization; bit synchronized, synchronized mapping

534 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 21
Requirements

• Maximum clock deviation <±50 ppm nominal, <±100 ppm operational

• Jitter and Wander according to ITU-T G.823 and G.825
• Buffer memory <250 μs, <100 μs asymmetric difference
• Format.G 704 frame, structured etc.Format.
• No CRC-check

Synchronization in PDH systems connected to SDH systems

• Independent synchronization, asynchronous mapping
• The actual SDH port must be set to allow transmission of the master clock from
the PDH-system via the SDH-system in transparent mode.
• Maximum clock deviation <±50 ppm nominal, <±100 ppm operational
• Jitter and Wander according to ITU-T G.823 and G.825
• Buffer memory <100 μs
• Format: Transparent
• Maximum channel delay
• Loop time <40 ms continuous (2 x 20 ms)

IED with echo synchronization of differential clock (without GPS clock)

• Both channels must have the same route with maximum asymmetry of 0,2-0,5 ms,
depending on set sensitivity of the differential protection.
• A fixed asymmetry can be compensated (setting of asymmetric delay in built in
HMI or the parameter setting tool PST).

IED with GPS clock

• Independent of asymmetry.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 535

Application manual
536
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 22
Glossary

Section 22 Glossary M14893-1 v16

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 537

Application manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Glossary

CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two
twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in
both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four
twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in
both directions and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line

538 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 22
Glossary

DBLL Dead bus live line

DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
ECT Ethernet configuration tool
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fibre connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,
data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up
to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FPN Flexible product naming

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 539

Application manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Glossary

FTP File Transfer Protocol

FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by
local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS
receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6:
Requirements for protective current transformers for transient
performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial
master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on
twisted-pair or optical fiber cable

540 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 22
Glossary

IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.
References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for
the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs)
Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
IET600 Integrated engineering tool
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available
in the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function.
One instance of a function is identical to another of the same
kind but has a different number in the IED user interfaces.
The word "instance" is sometimes defined as an item of
information that is representative of a type. In the same way
an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type
of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP
protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level
IP20- Protected against solid foreign objects of 12.5mm
diameter and greater.
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level IP40-
Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and
greater.
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level
IP54-Dust-protected, protected against splashing water.
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 541

Application manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Glossary

LIB 520 High-voltage software module

LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line data communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally
developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical Ethernet module
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/
pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching when
the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the
set reach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps it should not
have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard

542 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 22
Glossary

PMC PCI Mezzanine card

POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near
proximity to the measured and/or controlled components
PRP Parallel redundancy protocol
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PTP Precision time protocol
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data
in point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location
SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SFP Small form-factor pluggable (abbreviation)
Optical Ethernet port (explanation)

SLM Serial communication module.

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 543

Application manual
Section 22 1MRK 505 370-UUS A
Glossary

SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant

impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize
computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/slave
protocol for point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral/Wye point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport
layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de
facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for Internet working
and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed gound-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance
version of a BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC

544 Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI

Application manual
1MRK 505 370-UUS A Section 22
Glossary

TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and

voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for further
signal processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay does not “see” the fault but
perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination
of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal
Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing
the Earth's irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for
aeroplane and ship navigation, where it is also sometimes
known by the military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the
phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude
zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the
residual or the ground-fault current
3VO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as
the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

Busbar protection REB670 2.2 ANSI 545

Application manual
546
547
—
ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00

abb.com/protection-control

1MRK 505 370-UUS

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved.

Specifications subject to change without notice.